Home

TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information

1. Function Access Web UI Command and Access A U A S U Outgoing N A Manage Library gt xX O Server Mail Settings gt SMTP Configuration Mail Configuration Ethernet N A Manage Library gt xX O Speed Duplex Settings gt Ethernet Settings Speed Duplex Settings Display N A Manage Library gt xX xX License Key Settings gt Feature Status Licenses Service Enter Service Tools gt Service X N A Menu Service Drives Tools gt Service gt X N A Drives Service System Tools gt Service gt X N A System Security Tools gt Security X N A Settings Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access A U AJSJU Service User View Library Tools gt Library Tests X N A Logs Email Logs Tools gt Library Tests X N A Library Demo Tools gt Library Tests X N A Reset to Tools gt Factory X N A Factory Defaults Defaults Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 15 4 16 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx Service Action Tickets Diagnostic Resolutions on page 5 59 Before you begin servicing the library refer to General Service Guidelines on page 63 Service Action Tickets When the library detects a problem it generates an error code and displays it in the Operator Intervention report along with a full de
2. a66ug031 Figure 2 2 Rear panel of a 14U library Tape drives SCSI drives Power supplies 2 in control module 2 in shown expansion module A Library Control Blade g Power supply switches Library Control Blade LCB The Library Control Blade H in Figure 2 2 manages the entire library including the Operator Panel and Picker and is responsible for running system tests to ensure that the library is functioning properly The LCB houses the Compact Flash Card which stores vital product data VPD such as library settings serial number etc The LCB indicates status with three light emitting diodes LEDs These LEDs located near the top of the LCB are green amber and blue in color Chapter 2 Product Description 2 5 Seek a66ug080 Figure 2 3 The library control blade 2 6 1 LEDs e Green indicates a good status e Amber indicates a degraded status e Blue indicates a potential fault See 2 Gigabit Ethernet external network port 3 Service Ethernet port 10 100 Mb s 4 Service serial port Tape Drives The library supports Ultrium160 SCSI Serial Attached SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel tape drives Tape drives J in Figure 2 2 on page 2 5 are hot addable library power remains ON and operations of the installed tape drives are still active Drives can be removed and installed without tools Ultriu
3. Cartridges VOLSER Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge XXXXxxL5 Ultrium 5 WORM Cartridge XXXXXXLV Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge XXXXXXL4 Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge XxxxxxLU Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge XXxXXxxL3 Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge XxXxxxxLT Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge XXXXXXL2 Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge READ ONLY XxXxxxxL1 IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be compatible with the WORM cartridge Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels To order tape cartridges and bar code labels The bar code for usage in IBM tape libraries must meet predefined specifications They include but are not limited to e Eight uppercase alphanumeric characters where the last two characters must be L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LT or LU e Label and printing to be non glossy e Nominal narrow line or space width of 0 423 mm 0 017 in e Wide to narrow ratio of 2 75 1 e Minimum bar length of 11 1 mm 0 44 in e The effective tape cartridge barcode label length including any media ID may be limited to a maximum of 12 characters A barcode label with more than 12 D 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information characters may not be printable according to the Code 39 label specifications for the tape cartridge area to which the label is attached To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label visit t
4. Iteni Type Description Quantity Representative or authorized IBM Authorized Distributor IBM Business Partner WORM Ultrium 5 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 46X1963 color label Cartridges with Model 034 46X1965 black and white label labels Ultrium 4 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 95P4457 color label Specify the Model 032 95P4459 black and white label VOLSER Ultrium 3 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 characters that Model 028 you want WORM cartridges labeled with starting volume serial information and optionally packed in individual jewel cases WORM Ultrium 5 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 46X1972 Cartridges Model 035 without labels Tium4 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 95P4461 Order VOLSER Model 033 labels separately Ultrium 3 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 see Model 029 Feature Code 2920 Labels WORM cartridges packed in individual jewel cases with unattached blank labels Cleaning Universal 5 PACK Machine Type 3589 35L2086 Cartridge with Cleaning Model 004 label Cartridge Feature Code 4005 Repair Tools Leader Pin 1 not available in this sales 08L9129 Reattachment channel Kit Manual 1 not available in this sales 08L9130 Rewind Tool channel Ordering Bar Code Labels The Ultrium Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels However if you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape library product you may need cartridge bar code labels if your tape lib
5. o Figure 6 6 Location of M2 Picker Assembly LED Methods of Updating Firmware Important When updating firmware e Ensure all host applications are varied offline e Do not power off the library until the update is complete or the firmware may be lost Periodically check for updated levels of firmware by visiting the web at http www ibm com storage Ito Update firmware using Type of Firmware Operator Panel Web User Interface SCSI Fibre Interface Library Not Available Service Library gt View Update Library Firmware Level This operation can take as long as 30 minutes Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 25 6 26 Type of Firmware Operator Panel Web User Interface SCSI Fibre Interface Drive Tools gt Drive Service Mgmt gt Update Library gt View Drive Firmware Update Drive using an FMR Firmware Level This cartridge operation can take as Updating Drive Firmware through he SCSI or Fibre Channel on page 2 long as 25 minutes for a single drive and 35 minutes for two to eighteen drives Ko Updating Library Firmware From the Web User Interface Service Library gt View Update Library Firmware Level Note Ensure your browser pop up blocker is disabled when updating the library firmware Pop up blockers will prevent the Browse dialog box from opening Administrative users can use the Update Library Firmwar
6. If the drive diagnostic fails replace the drive If the drive diagnostic succeeds perform the operation that produced the initial media error The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape drive in maintenance mode Interface problem The tape drive determined that a failure occurred in the tape drive s hardware im or in the host bus Refer to the problem solving information in this manual If cl while running Function Code 6 Host Interface Test was displayed 1 Verify the correct interface wrap tool was attached during the test The test will fail if the correct interface wrap tool is not attached 2 If the correct interface wrap tool was attached during the test replace the drive The error code clears when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode Note The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive detected the error or when you place the drive in maintenance mode or refer to the Library procedures to isolate the problem to the drive The error code clears Tape drive or RS 422 error The tape drive determined that a failure occurred in the tape drive s hardware or in the RS 422 connection See Function Code 7 Run RS 422 Wrap Test on page when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 45 Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and
7. DR092 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error Scanner Problem The robotics firmware has reported a specific hardware error identifying the robot scanner as the failed component This problem may be caused by one or more of the following conditions 1 An obstruction in the viewing path of the robot scanner 2 Electrical hardware failure at the Picker assembly or at the Robot Controller Board Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the main access door s and check for any obvious obstruction blocking the view of the robot scanner 2 Close this ticket and reinitialize the Robot by opening and closing the Main Access Door s 3 If this ticket reoccurs after the Robot reinitializes replace the robot controller board or Picker Assembly DRO093 Resolve Robotics Communication Error Problem The library firmware has detected a communication failure with the robotics subsystem This problem may be caused by one or more of the following conditions 1 Power loss to the robot assembly 2 Y Axis Cable Spool or connection failure 3 Electrical hardware failure Troubleshooting Steps 1 Ensure that the main access door s are closed 2 Ensure that all module terminators and Box to Box cables are properly connected 3 Determine the robot location within the system then open the I O station closest to the robot position to determine whether the green LED on top of the picker is on 4 If the picker LED is not on open the m
8. 1 non FMR cartridge error code L appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media Ci I has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until I appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to ca select the function The SCD changes to a flashing 4 Ensure that the write protect switch on the suspect cartridge is off then insert the cartridge or the tape drive exits maintenance mode The SCD changes to E The tape drive runs the tests Fy Ll e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF D 36 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to th
9. Figure 7 33 Access holes for manually unlocking I O Station doors 3 To manually relock the I O Station door e From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Lock I O Station e From the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Lock Unlock I O Station Doors Manually Unlocking the New Style I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually To manually unlock the new style I O Station lock follow these steps 1 Insert any straight tool screwdriver Torx wrench etc into the hole J in Figure 7 33 in the front cover of the I O station Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 33 2 Push the tool in to unlock the I O station door There is a large flat pushbutton type mechanism behind the hole in the cover that when pushed toward the rear of the library will release the I O station lock mechanism 3 To manually relock the I O Station door e From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Lock I O Station e From the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Lock Unlock I O Station Doors Removing an I O Station 1 Open the I O Station door then the Access Door 2 Reaching through the Access Door opening push up on the roller J in Figure 7 34 located above the I O Station slide and pull the I O Station towards you until the slide is in front of the roller Note The I O Station in an expansion module has two slides and two silver rollers
10. Recovered Error 01 OAh 00h Error log overflow 47h 00h SCSI parity error Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 B 1 Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Not Ready 02 00h 17h Drive cleaning requested 04h 00h Cause not reportable 04h olh In progress becoming ready scanning magazines etc 04h 02h Initializing command required 04h 03h Manual intervention required 04h 07h Operation in progress 04h 12h Offline 04h 83h Door open 04h 85h Firmware upgrade in progress 04h 87h The drive is not enabled 04h 88h The drive is busy 04h 89h The drive is not empty 04h 9Ah Drive fibre down 04h 8Eh The media changer is in sequential mode 30h 03h Cleaning in progress 3Bh 12h Magazine removed Medium Error 03 30h 00h Incompatible media installed 30h 03h Cleaning tape installed 30h 07h Cleaning failure B 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Hardware Error 04 81h 80h Cannot initialize bar code reader 81h 81h No response from bar code reader 81h 82h No response from EEPROM 81h 83h Slave robotic generic problem 81h 84h Setting of gripper pic value failed 81h 85h Setting of slider pic value fai
11. 5 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select the function The drive automatically starts the test The SCD will display a flashing during the test e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode u temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D42 To clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 33 Function Code 7 Run RS 422 Wrap Test This test causes the drive to perform a check of the circuitry and connector for the RS 422 interface This connector supports the Library Drive Interface LDI and the Automation Drive Interface ADI Before selecting this function attach an LDI or RS 422 wrap plug to the drive s LDI or RS 422 connector in place of the LDI or RS 422 cable 1 Make sure that no cartridge is in the drive and the appropriate wrap plug is attached to the RS 422 connector 2 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 3 Press the Unload Butto
12. D 42 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and Action 3 Firmware problem The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred Perform the z following action 1 Collect a drive dump from one of the following Note Do not force a new dump the tape drive has already created one e Server s host interface by using a device driver utility or system tool for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape visit the Web at http www ibm com storage Ito e Ultrium Tape Drive to copy and read a drive dump use Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump on page D 32 2 Power the tape drive OFF and ON then retry the operation that produced the error 3 If the problem persists download new firmware and retry the operation 4 If the problem persists send the drive dump that you collected in step to your IBM Support Center The error code clears when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode T Firmware or hardware problem The tape drive determined that a firmware or tape drive hardware failure occurred Perform the following action 1 Collect a drive dump from one of the following Note Do not force a new dump one already exists e Server s host interface by using a device driver utility or system tool for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape visit the Web at http ww
13. The following list describes some important factors about Key Path Diagnostics e The Key Path Diagnostics take affected partitions offline e The Periodic Key Path Diagnostics do not take partitions offline but it can delay moves to tape drives while they are being tested e The Periodic Key Path Diagnostics tests every connected EKM server in turn and the library selects the tape drive to use for each test If the selected tape drive is not available it must be unloaded ready and online then the library tries another tape drive that is connected to the key server until it finds one that is available If no tape drives that are connected to a particular key server are available then that server is skipped and the tests are not performed If a server is skipped for X number of consecutive test intervals where X is configurable on the Web client the library generates a RAS ticket If a tape drive remains loaded for a long time it is possible that it will never be tested If you want to test a specific tape drive or if you replace a tape drive run the Key Path Diagnostics manually e To view the status of the Key Path Diagnostics from the web user interface select Monitor System gt Key Path Diagnostics Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 15 6 16 Using Key Path Diagnostics Note Tape drives must be unloaded ready and online in order for the test to run To use Key Path Diagnostics 1 From the web UI sele
14. re E 6 Figure 7 109 Slide cable forward e Close the cable protector as in Figure 7 110 on page 7 98 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 97 a66mi165 Figure 7 110 Close the cable protector 10 Carefully lift and tilt the Picker Assembly and pull it out the front door as shown in Figure 7 111 a66mi166 Figure 7 111 Remove the Picker Assembly 7 98 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Replacing the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly Inside of a Library 1 Carefully insert the Picker assembly through the front door as shown in You may need to tilt the Picker Assembly slightly to allow it to fit Set the Picker on the top of the M2 Robot assembly toward the rear of the library Be careful not to bend or crease the flex cable a66mi166 Figure 7 112 Insert Picker through the front door 2 Connect the flex cables to the M2 Robot Assembly Controller Board a Lift the cable protector See Figure 7 113 on page 7 100 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 99 a66mi154 Figure 7 113 Lift the cable protector b Slide the two flat cables to the front under the plastic guide See Figure 7 114 ire E 6 Figure 7 114 Slide the flat cables to the front 7 100 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information c Connect the cables Note that there is a black line on the blue portion of each flex cable See Figure 7
15. Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 17 Removing Replacing an Expansion Module 7 18 An expansion module increases the number of drives and data cartridge storage slots available within your library To make repairs to an expansion module perform one of the following procedures e Removing an Expansion Module from a Library e Replacing an Expansion Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger To install a replacement expansion module perform the following procedure e Installing a Replacement Expansion Module Enclosure on page 7 19 Removing an Expansion Module from a Library 1 Remove the following components from the expansion module for weight reduction a All power supplies see Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 b All drive sleds see Drive Sled on page 7 42 Note If not already done have the customer remove all tape cartridges from the module being removed 2 Loosen the thumb screws securing the expansion module to the rear flange on each Rack Kit rail or to the module below 3 Open the I O Station door then the Access door on the expansion module 4 From the front of the expansion module remove the rack ears see Removing he Rack Fars on page 7 19 5 Raise the gear racks Refer to Figure 7 12 on page 7 14 6 Raise the locating pin Refer to Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 7 Loosen the thumb screw in th
16. Explanation The library detects that the 42 V picker supply circuit on the LCB is not at an acceptable voltage Field data indicates that this is most likely an issue with the LCB rather than a picker assembly issue Detection Scenarios Monitoring of voltage divider indicates partial or complete voltage drop Root Causes 1 The 48 V to 42 V conversion power supply on the LCB has shut down due to excessive current draw 2 Board level hardware failures 3 Permanent or temporary short in cables connectors Picker 4 Various hardware failures in Picker that cause too much current to be drawn 5 Shorted module terminators or module to module cable pins Possible CRU Replacements Y Carriage Assembly Library Control Board Possible FRU Replacements Picker Resolution Perform DR035 Resolve Robot Power Interruption on page 5 74 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 29 T066 Drive Power Fuse F1 Blown Description GUI Description Drive power is interrupted due to a blown fuse Explanation The library detects that an F1 drive fuse located on a Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB has failed Each module has a DSIB card to provide an electrical connection point for the drive sleds Each DSIB has a replaceable fuse for the overall drive power bus This protects the core library hardware components from some type of short or over current prob
17. If the robot does not initialize and or a RAS ticket is displayed again contact Service for further assistance ap oN Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DRO36 Resolve Partially Open I O Station Problem An I O station cannot be accessed Possible Causes 1 The I O Station safety flap may be broken 2 The I O Station flap may be partially open If so please close it 3 The control cable to the I O Station is unplugged 4 There is a hardware failure that makes it appear that an I O Station door is partially open Troubleshooting Steps 1 If any of the I O Station safety flaps are broken replace them 2 If any of the I O Station flaps are partially open close them 3 If none of the flaps are partially open open the access door and look for the unplugged cable on the back of the lock assembly 4 If none of the flaps appear partially open and cables are connected use the I O Station test under the Tools gt Service gt Library menu to test the function of the I O Station 5 74 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR037 Resolve Media Eject Problem A drive has reported a problem that requires the currently loaded tape to be ejected from the drive in order for the drive to recover Using the drive coordinate from the pr
18. Important Before updating firmware e Resolve and close all open Operator Interventions e Save the current system Configuration See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 You can update drive firmware through the library s Web User Interface For more details see Updating Drive Firmware Using the Web User Interface Alternatively you can update drive firmware with any of the readily available tools For example ITDT is available for multiple platforms and requires no special device drivers You can download ITDT from the IBM web site refer to ITDT SCSI Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool on page 6 28 Other tools such as NTUTIL and TapeUTIL can also be used for drive firmware updates The library also supports drive firmware update by creating and using an FMR cartridge However to create an FMR cartridge with the latest drive firmware one of the methods described above must be used to first download the firmware to one of the drives An FMR cartridge can then be created and used to update the remaining drives for that drive type SCSI or fibre For more information on FMR cartridges refer to ing Drive Firmware Using a Firmware FMR Cartridge Updating Drive Firmware Using the Web User Interface From the Web User Interface Service Library gt View Update Drive Firmware Levels Note Ensure your browser pop up blocker is disabled when updating drive firmware Pop u
19. 3 The cartridge present sensor and sensing circuit is falsely representing the presence of a cartridge Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 5 1 Root Causes 1 Operator did not recover cartridge 2 Operator put a cartridge in the Picker 3 Power loss during a move with media and the library logic cannot legitimately return it to the proper cell 4 Physical contamination such as dust and debris on the sensor gives a false full state 5 Various electrical failures Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Picker Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DROO01 Resolve Picker Cartridge Presence on page 5 59 T002 PUT Operation Failed Final Cartridge Position Unknown Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot failed to place a tape cartridge and cartridge recovery is required Explanation The library cannot successfully put a tape into a drive storage slot or I O station and the final resting place of the tape is unknown There are no additional recovery logic paths to be exercised Fundamental servo control seems OK If the operation was initiated by a host move media the move media command has failed with a SK ASC ASCQ 4h 15h 01h hardware mechanical positioning error Detection Scenarios PUT is not successful PUT recovery is not successful and
20. An LCB serial communication link failure Possible CRUs Robot Assembly replace entire unit Possible FRU Replacement Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables Cable Spool Resolution 1 Perform DR093 Resolve Robotics Communication Error on page 5 89 2 Check to see if there is a main door open condition which may be caused by an open door or a defective or loose module terminator or module to module cable 3 Inspect the module terminators and module to module cables for loose connectors or damage bent or broken pins If damaged replace the part Reseat the terminators and cables Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 55 T141 Unknown Picker Calibration Offsets Description GUI Description Library firmware is unable to read robotics picker s calibration offsets Explanation The picker s EEPROM FLASH that contains calibration offset values required for proper picker calibration and fiducial size evaluation does not contain valid calibration offsets If such offsets are missing and cannot be read the robot will fail calibration and cannot operate Detection Scenarios Attempts to read the stored calibration offsets from EEPROM FLASH of the robotics controller board failed Root Cause 1 Defective EEPROM FLASH area to read offsets 2 Calibration offsets not stored during manufacturing process Possible FRU Replacemen
21. Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 7 r AS 400 Product Activity Log n Product Activity Log Page 1 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 TOCA TOM e Product Activity Log MAN Sam ww ease ee Og 1D Report System type 9406 System model 825 System release V5R3M0 System name ROMLPARL System serial number gt e 10 F321B Log ID is z 99020145 Include hexadecimal AREA or la a a DN YES N NO Product Activity Log Page 2 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 Detail Report for Resource Serial Resource Name Type Model Number Name TAPMLB19 3580 001 00 1004538 Log ts 2 56 a a 3 BOG2GIKS Sequence ss 2 3 211510 Date a nce E E rete O4 CU e E 10 40 11 Reference code 9350 Secondary code 00000000 Table ID 63A00001 IPL source state B 3 Class o ss eae o vee o Permanent System ref code 63A09350 Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium Physical location Frame ID Soe araona Card position a s s 3 Device position Logical address PCI bus Library System bus 36 1 0 adapter System board 0 I O bus System card s 32 Library 20 Controller ocre s aa 4 Borlea seer i 2 228 SENSE DATA FOLLOWS DATA OFFSET 0 123456789ABCDEF 00000000 71000300 0000001C 00000000 53000600 00000010 31190601 00020000 00000000 00000000 00000020 00000
22. Description GUI Description The robot assembly does not seem to be horizontally level and may be installed improperly Explanation The firmware has detected a condition that indicates the robot assembly Y carriage and picker is not installed level within the system The robot assembly has drive gears that mate with rack gears inside the library modules There are field assembly problems and hardware failure problems that can cause the robot assembly to be not level and therefore not function properly Detection Scenario 1 The robot cannot move to its Y axis parking position after homing in Y because the front of the Y Carriage hits the floor Parking position is below homing position 2 Front and back magazine fiducial positions on the left side are not at the same Y level This test algorithm can detect non level conditions in both directions front high or back high Note There are a few known false detection scenarios Certain specific size obstructions sitting on the floor of the library Magazines not seated correctly Damaged fiducials that can be detected as mis positioned because they are damaged Root Causes 1 Robot drive gears not installed in Y racks at the same time This can result in the two ends of the Y Carriage being 1 to 2 teeth out of synchronization 2 Y racks not seated properly evenly Both the front and rear Y rack are intended to be released from their shipping latches and lowered such th
23. Explanation The library controller is receiving too many I O station interrupts The problem may be caused by a stuck interrupt line for the CM or EM door open and close indication Door open and close state changes are detected properly but the excessive I O station state change interrupt notifications indicate a hardware problem most likely due to a cabling connection issue Detection Scenarios Library firmware receives multiple or continuous I O station open and close interrupts but does not detect the required door open and close state change Root Causes 1 Internal module sensor line and cable connections shorted 2 Module terminator pins bent or shorted 3 Module to module cable pins bent or shorted Resolution 1 Perform DR008 Resolve Stuck I O Station Interrupt on page 5 63 2 Inspect the module terminators and module to module cables for loose connectors or damage bent or broken pins If damaged replace the part Reseat the terminators and cables 3 Power on the library and wait for the library to initialize Open and close each I O station door If the problem is not fixed you may need to replace the module Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 17 Possible Replacement CRUs FRUs 1 Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables 2 Module EM or CM T031 I O Station Unlock Failure Description GUI Description A I O station
24. Safety Notices Observe the safety notices when using this product These safety notices contain danger and caution notices These notices are sometimes accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number Dxxx or Cxxx Use the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Notices G229 9054 manual The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples Danger Notice A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition A sample danger notice follows DANGER An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock D004 Caution Notice A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition or to a potentially dangerous situation that might develop because of some unsafe practice A caution notice can be accompanied by one of several symbols If the symbol is It means A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols This
25. The Unload Button H in Figure D 1 on page D 1 performs the following functions Table D 2 Functions that the Unload Button performs Unload Button Function Rewind the tape into the cartridge and eject the cartridge from the drive How to Initiate the Function Press the Unload Button once The Status Light flashes green while the drive is rewinding and unloading Note During a rewind and eject operation the drive does not accept SCSI commands from the server Place the drive in maintenance mode Ensure that the drive is unloaded Then within two seconds press the Unload Button three times The drive is in maintenance mode when the Status Light becomes solid amber and m ui appears in the SCD Note While in maintenance mode the drive does not accept SCSI interface commands Scroll through the maintenance functions press and hold the Unload Button for three seconds While in maintenance mode press the Unload Button once per second to increment the display characters by one When you reach the character of the diagnostic or maintenance function that you want see Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on Exit maintenance mode Press the Unload Button once per second until rm ui displays Then press and hold the Unload Button for three seconds Maintenance mode is exited when the Status Light becomes solid green and the SCD becomes blank Force a drive
26. e If the library is processing a From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Shutdown to end the current library task and shut down the library s operating system b When the library becomes idle press the power button on the front panel of the control module c Toggle each power supply switch to the OFF O position Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs Power ON the library a Toggle each power supply switch to the ON position b Press the power button on the front of the library If necessary have the customer replace all tape cartridges in library or library module If necessary vary drives and logical libraries online Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 3 Removing Replacing a Control Module The Control Module enclosure chassis is not available as a FRU If the Service Action Ticket T code or Diagnostic Resolution Procedure specifies replacement of the enclosure it will be necessary to replace the Internal Cables and Boards Kit instead To make repairs to a control module choose and perform one of these procedures e Removing a 5U Library Control Module from a Rack or larger on page 7 5 Replacing a Control Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger on page 7 11 Removing a 5U Library Control Module from a Rack 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs
27. e e Drive input power is supplied from the module power supply and current is limited on the DSIB e There are two versions of DSIB boards o DSIB1 supports 2 drive sleds and is utilized in the 5U CMand 5U EM o DSIB2 supports 4 drive sleds and is utilized in the 9U EM o For a 14U library with 6 drive sleds both DSIB1 and DSIB2 boards are required Appendix C Library Diagrams C 5 Control Module Electrical System Saal 5Pat Ethernet Switch 10710071000 Ethemet LID MEV VEE Blade Cage Fans VisioDocumentVisioDocume 10 8boos a66mi037 C 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Control Module and Expansion Module Electrical System I Dri L rive Sled a66mi038 Appendix C Library Diagrams C 7 Library Electrical Block erolugge cw e NTT Drive Sled C 8 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Library Control Blade Library Control Blade a RJ45 LEDs magnetics 10 100 1000 Ethemet RJ45 m E ice Serial DB9 agnetics LEDs uy 4 ENET Pairs 64 MB 256MB SDRAM 10 100 PHY Ethemet Switch 5 Port 10 100 1000 EMAC and PHY Compact Flash 64MB Connector Test Header IBM405EP eal 10 100 Eth Power Conv Backplane Connector 48V Barcode Scanner SMD Fan Tachometers 8 5 mei e E
28. enter information for the recipient about the library reports and logs This information appears in the body of the email Chapter 2 Product Description 2 23 Capacity Expansion Feature Code 1640 At any time the Capacity Expansion feature Feature Code 1640 allows you to enable the unused storage slots within a library via a firmware license key The TS3310 Tape Library Model L5B control module includes license key enablement for 82 total cartridges thus enabling all cartridge slots in the control module and approximately one half the capacity of an added expansion module To enable the remaining cartridge storage slots you must purchase Capacity Expansion feature 1640 for each expansion module you want to fully enable For example one Capacity Expansion feature 1640 would be required to totally access and enable all available cartridge slots in a 14U configured library one control module and one expansion module Two Capacity Expansion features 1640 would be required to totally access and enable all available cartridge slots in a 23U configured library one control module and two expansion modules To see your library s current configuration e From the Operator Panel view the Capacity View home icon From the Web User Interface Monitor System gt System Summary To enter a Capacity Expansion license key From the Operator Panel Setup gt License From the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Settings gt Feat
29. on page 4 7 User Privileges on page 4 10 The library has a local interface the Operator Panel and a remote Web User Interface UI The Operator Panel is located on the front door of the control module CM and allows users to work locally on the library via the user interface The Web UI allows users to view and perform some library functions from remote sites and is best viewed using Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher or Firefox 1 0 or higher Operator Panel The Operator Panel is physically attached to the front door of the control module CM The user interface appears on the touchscreen LCD display of the Operator Panel for executing basic library management functions Audible feedback such as key click sounds are generated when a user touches a button on the touchscreen Operator Panel Login Screen IBM TS3310 User name ________ passwort _________ Local Authentication O Remote Authentication O Figure 4 1 Operator Panel Login screen for firmware versions prior to 585G a66ug028 Note For firmware versions prior to 585G when LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is enabled the login screen gives the user a choice between Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 4 1 using local authentication the login and password are stored on the library or LDAP authentication the login and password are stored on a server and the user must specify the LDAP domain name If L
30. on page 7 3 2 Unplug the customer supplied Ethernet cable from the Library Control Blade H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 3 Remove these components from the control module to reduce the weight of the module a Power supplies see Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 b Drive sleds see Drive Sled on page 7 42 4 Loosen the thumb screws securing the library to the rear flange on each Rack Kit rail 5 Open the I O Station door then the Access door on the control module 6 From the front of the control module remove the rack ears see Removing the Rack Ears on page 7 19 7 With a person standing on each side of the library pull the control module out of the rack 8 Place the library on a sturdy work surface Replacing a 5U Library Control Module in a Rack 1 With a person on each side of the library pick it up from the work surface and slide it onto the Rack Kit rails in your rack 2 Tighten the thumb screws that secure the library to the rear flange of each Rack Kit rail 3 Install the rack ears on the front of the library to secure it to the rack see Replacing the Rack Ears on page 7 20 4 Reconnect the customer supplied Ethernet cable to the Library Control Blade H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 5 Reinstall the following components removed for weight reduction a Drive sleds see Drive Sled on page 7 42 b Power supplies see Power Supply
31. 3 Facing the library rotate the Picker until the front of the Picker Assembly is oriented approximately 45 degrees right of center as seen from the top of the library to access the flat cable connector Ef in Figure 7 60 Pinch the top of the connector H in Figure 7 60 Close the front door s Replace the I O Station Replace the top cover of the library Power ON the library Remove any media that is in the picker oO NO Or S Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 59 7 60 Removing the Picker from the Y axis Assembly in a Rack mounted Library Tool Required e Flashlight 1 2 If necessary remove the I O Station s from the library Open the Access Door s 3 Reach through the Access Door and loosen the screws J in Figure 7 61 on 9 page 7 59 on the front and rear of the Picker Assembly Rotate the Picker Assembly with the grippers pointing toward 11 o clock J in Figure 7 60 on page 7 59 to expose the flat cable connector Pinch the top of the connector H in Figure 7 60 on page 7 59 and lift up to disconnect it Unplug and move the connector to the side of the Picker Assembly Move the Picker Assembly back to its normal position Lift the Picker Assembly tilt it with the left side up and carefully remove through the Access Door opening Try to keep the Picker Assembly toward the top of the opening to prevent damaging the board underneath the assembly Remove any med
32. 5 minutes per loop Total Number of Loops 10 Function Code H performs tests to ensure that the drive can read from and write to tape Record the time it takes for the test to complete Compare the recorded time with the Approximate Run Time above If the test runs successfully but the execution time is significantly longer than the Approximate Run Time run Function Code F Write Performance Test on page D 37 If the Write Performance Test fails replace the media Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Attention For this test insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or 1 non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media Ci I has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive
33. Door Applying a RID Tag to a Library Module Applying an Agency Label to a Control Module Contacting IBM Technical Support XX 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information z 9 92 5 92 5 93 5 93 5 94 6 1 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 7 6 8 a 69 6 11 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 14 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 20 6 22 6 23 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 30 6 30 6 33 6 39 6 39 6 39 6 39 6 39 6 40 6 40 6 40 6 41 6 41 6 41 6 43 Manually Unlocking the Early Style I O Station 6 43 6 44 6 44 6 45 6 45 Pre Call Checklist Viewing Drive Information End of Call CAN Bus Tool Kit Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures CRUs and FRUs Required Library State Required Tools Electrostatic Discharge Preparing a Library or Library Modul for Repairs Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs Removing Replacing a Control Module Removing a 5U Library Control Module foma a 7 4 Rack Replacing a 5U Library Control Module i ina Rack Removing a Conirol Module io a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger Replacing a Control Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger Removing Replacing an Expansion Module Removing an Expansion Module from a Library Replacing an Expansion Module i
34. Fiber AL_PA conflict Two drives on fiber loop have the same AL_PA Modify the tape drive AL_PA to eliminate the conflict D 46 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and Action o Encryption Error Displayed when the drive detects an error associated with a encryption operation If the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to or reading data from tape 1 Check the host application to ensure the host application is providing the correct encryption key e Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Encryption Support documentation and the IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference documentation for the Sense Data returned for an encryption operation e Retry the encryption operation after the host application problems have been resolved 2 Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive and running POST e Refer to the error code displayed on the SCD if the drive reset and POST fails e Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without errors 3 Check the media e Ensure the correct media is being used Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges only e Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption enabled drive Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape cartridge in multiple drives If the problem oc
35. Figure 6 19 Access the M2 Picker Thumbwheel 6 42 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 2 Rotate the gear f in Figure 6 18 on page 6 42 or the arrow in Figure 6 19 on page 6 42 with your thumb or finger in the direction shown by the arrow 3 Continue rotating the gear or thumbwheel until the cartridge is ejected from the picker Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually There are 2 styles of I O Station Lock mechanisms The early style uses a T10 Torx wrench to rotate the lock mechanism The new style has a large push button type mechanism behind the hole in Figure 6 20 in the I O station door Manually Unlocking the Early Style I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually To manually unlock the early style I O Station lock follow these steps 1 Insert a T10 Torx wrench in the hole f in Figure 6 20 located on the front of the I O Station door of the library module you wish to open 2 Turn the wrench one quarter turn counterclockwise to unlock the door a66mi072 Figure 6 20 Access holes for manually unlocking I O Station doors 3 To manually relock the I O Station door e From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Lock I O Station e From the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Lock Unlock I O Station Doors Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 43 Manually Unlocking t
36. Hardware Error 04 80h COh Network init continued 80h C1h Telnet interface 80h C2h Webserver 80h C3h EEPROM parameter 80h C4h Cannot init LAN card 80h C5h Write to EEPROM failed 80h C h Ping command did not reach target 80h C7h Cannot upgrade from USB 80h DOh ROM error 80h Dih RAM error 80h D2h NVRAM error 80h D3h CTC error 80h D4h UART error 80h D5h Display error 80h D6h Memory error 80h D7h Fatal system error 80h D8h dBase error 80h D9h No SCSI IC detected 80h DAh Different bar code labels 80h DBh External cooling fan failure 80h DCh Internal I2C bus error 82h FOh Over temperature problem 82h Fih Drive communication error 82h F2h Drive sled not present 82h F3h Drive broken needs repair 82h F4h Drive load timeout 82h F5h Drive unload timeout B 4 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Illegal Request 05h 1Ah 00h Parameter length error 20h 00h Invalid command operation code 21h Olh Invalid element address 24h 00h Invalid field CDB 3Dh 00h SCSI invalid ID message 25h 00h Invalid LUN 2Ch 00h Command sequence error 26h 00h Invalid field in parameter list 26h Olh Parameter list error parameter not supported 26h 02h Parameter value invalid 26h 90h Wrong firmware image does not fit boot code 26h 91h Wrong person
37. Key Translate EF 13 Encryption Key Translate EKM Sense Key 3 Medium Error Sense Key 4 Hardware Error EE OE Encryption Key Service Timeout EE OF Encryption Key Service Failure 40 00 Encryption Failure Hardware POST or Module Failure 30 02 Encryption Encryption feature is not enabled so format processing is not supported EE 60 Encryption Proxy Command Error EE DO Encryption Data Read Decryption Failure EE D1 Encryption Data Read after Write Decryption Failure EE EO Encryption Key Translation Failure EE E1 Encryption Key Translation Ambiguous EE FO Encryption Decryption Fenced Read EE F1 Encryption Encryption Fenced Write EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EF 26 26 55 00 Encryption 01 Encryption 02 Encryption 10 Encryption 20 Encryption 21 Encryption 22 Encryption 23 Encryption 24 Encryption 25 Encryption 26 Encryption 27 Encryption 28 Encryption 29 Encryption 2A Encryption 2B Encryption 2C Encryption 2D Encryption 2E Encryption 2F Encryption 30 Encryption 31 Encryption 42 Encryption E2 Encryption FF Encryption 01 Encryption 11 Encryption 12 Encryption 08 Encryption Sense Key 5 Illegal Request Key Service Not Enabled Key Service Not Configured Key Service Not Available Key Required Key Count Exceeded
38. Picker on page 5 88 T126 Robotics Hardware Error Scanner Description GUI Description A hardware error has been isolated to the barcode scanner Explanation A hardware error has been isolated to the robot s scanner device Detection Scenario Robotics firmware reports a specific hardware error identifying the Imager component of the Picker assembly as the source Root Causes 1 Obstructions in the view path of the robot Imager 2 Electrical hardware failure Possible FRUs e Picker Assembly if Model 1 or Model 2 robot is installed e Robot Assembly if Model 2 robot is installed Resolution Perform DR092 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error Scanner on page 5 89 T127 Robotics Communication Error Description This ticket occurs with Model 2 robots only GUI Description The library controller firmware lost communication with the robotics subsystem Explanation The library is not able to communicate with the Model 2 robotics subsystem This ticket is generated if the library had previously established a communication link with the robotics subsystem but that link has now been lost and cannot be reestablished Detection Scenario The library firmware did establish communication with the robotics subsystem but encountered a communication failure during operation and communication could not be reestablished Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resol
39. Resolution a Perform DR079 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue on page 5 83 2 Perform EKM Path Diagnostics Tools gt Diagnostics gt EKM gt EKM Path Diagnostics in the Web User Interface 3 If the Ping test is unsuccessful look for physical connection problems and down server s 4 If Ping is successful then do the following a Verify that EKM is running b Verify that the media is not from a different EKM environment c Verify that the key server is present T028 Secondary Key Server Failover Description GUI Description The library performed a successful communication failover to the primary key server Explanation The key management feature of the library allows the user to connect two key servers for redundancy If communication to the secondary server is interrupted then the library will automatically switch or failover to the primary server This RAS ticket will be generated to notify the user that communication to the secondary key server failed and that the library performed a successful failover to the primary key server Detection Scenarios When the library detects that it can no longer communicate with the secondary key server and automatically switches to the primary key server where it established successful communication 5 16 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Root Causes 1 Secondary Key Server is not connected pr
40. The File Mark flag Byte 2 bit 7 is set if a Space Read or Verify command did not complete because a file mark was read The End of Media EOM flag Byte 2 bit 6 is set if a Write or Write File Marks command completed in the early warning area Spacing into BOM also causes this flag to be set It is also set on an attempt to read or space past EOD or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media The Illegal Length Indicator ILI flag Byte 2 bit 5 is set if a Read or Verify ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the block length requested in the command The Information Bytes Bytes 3 5 are only valid if the Valid flag is set This occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors The Field Replaceable Unit field Byte 14 is set to either zero or to a non zero vendor specific code indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing the failure The Clean CLN flag Byte 21 bit 3 is set if the drive needs cleaning and clear otherwise The Volume Label Fields Valid VolValid bit Byte 21 bit 0 is set if the Volume Label being reported is valid The Volume Label field Bytes 22 28 reports the volume label if a cartridge is loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set The Current Wrap field Byte 29 reports the physical wrap of the tape The least significant bit reflects the current physical direction A 0 means that the current direction is away from the physical b
41. X Manage Library gt xX O Settings gt Date amp Time Network Time N A Manage Library gt xX O Protocol NTP Settings gt Date amp Time Trap and N A Manage Library gt xX O SNMP Settings gt SNMP and Manage Library gt Settings gt SNMP Traps Control Path Setup gt Control Path X Manage Drives gt X Control Paths Operator Tools gt Operator X Service Library gt XIX Intervention Intervention Operator Interventions DNS N A Manage Library gt X O Configuration Settings gt Network Enter Contact N A Manage Library gt xX O Information Settings gt Contact Information Set Email N A Manage Library gt x O Notifications Settings gt Email Notifications Diagnose Test N A Service Library gt xX X LME Key Key Path Paths Diagnostics Internal Tools gt Internal X N A Network Network Configuration Touch Screen Tools gt System X X N A Audio Settings gt Touch Screen Audio Adjust Display Tools gt Display X X N A Settings Display N A Monitor System gt XIX X System System Summary Summary Display N A Monitor System gt XIX X Network Network Settings Settings 4 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access continued Control Panel Menu Command and
42. device driver A file that contains the code needed to use an attached device DIAG Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual differential See High Voltage Differential HVD direct access storage A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data H 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DNS Directory Name System This allows the library to recognize text based addresses instead of numeric IP addresses download To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device typically a personal computer To transfer data from a computer to a connected device such as a workstation or microcomputer DPF Data Path Failover DRAM Dynamic random access memory drive magnetic tape A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement DRV Drive DSE Data security erase DSP Digital signal processor E EBCDIC Extended binary coded decimal interchange code EC Edge connector Engineering change ECC Error correction code EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EIA Electronics Industries Association EIA unit A unit of measure established by the Electronic Industries Association equal to 44 45 millimeters 1 75 inches eject To remove or force out from within EKM Encryption Key Manager electronic mail Correspondence in the form of messages transmitted between user terminals over a computer network e mai
43. i 2 Lay the module on the left side from front Using your thumb push the metal slide JJ in Figure 7 135 toward the gear rack locking mechanism J in Figure 7 135 and hold it in place while inserting the black tab J in Figure 7 135 and locking mechanism into the keyhole slots in the library chassis TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi013 Figure 7 136 Rear gear rack location on chassis 3 4 5 6 While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism push up on the gear rack then release your hold on the locking mechanism Bend the small metal tab J in Figure 7 133 on page 7 118 in slightly to prevent the gear rack from moving down too far Replace the covers of the module if necessary Return the module to its correct upright position Removing Internal Cables and Boards Special tools required for this procedure e T6 Torx wrench for D Shell connectors on BCB cables e T8 Torx wrench for BCB board e 5 mm 3 16 inch wrench for the stand off behind cable spool assembly e 4 5 mm 3 16 inch wrench for DSIB board Important e Prior to replacing all of the internal cables and boards you should visually check and _reseat if necessary all of the internal connectors see Internal Cables on page 6 33 It may not be necessary to replace all of the cables and boards in this procedure Depending on your failure symptoms and discussions with Technical Support you may on
44. the connector on the back of the I O Station locking mechanism f in Figure 7 27 on page 7 29 and the connectors that are located between the storage column 4 magazine and the back of the Library Control Blade H and in Figure 7 28 on page 7 29 7 28 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi082 a66mi083 Figure 7 28 Connector between the storage column 4 magazine and Library Control Blade top cover removed Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 29 Removing the Operator Panel 1 2 3 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 Open the I O Station door Open the Access Door The Operator Panel is located on the backside of this door a Remove the black protective cover from the back of the Operator Panel b Use a flat blade screwdriver to pry up on the plastic retaining pin H in Figure 7 26 on page 7 28 c Squeeze the black plastic cover on both sides to remove it from the Access Door Disconnect the four cable connectors that are attached to the Operator Panel see H B H and H in Figure 7 29 Cecovececoiiedee innit a66mi088 Figure 7 29 Operator Panel cabling 7 30 T Cut the cable tie H in Figure 7 29 if necessary Unscrew the two captivated screws E in Figure 7 29 located on the left side of the Operator Panel Important When removing the final screw hold the Operator panel to ensure
45. 2 Rear Y rail 4 Squeeze here to release b From the front of the library find the Y rail release mechanism which is located on the left side of the control module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so it locks in place 7 8 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a77qs037 Figure 7 6 Releasing the Y rail Y rail in unlocked functional position c From the rear of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks in place 4 Unplug the customer supplied Ethernet cable from the Library Control Blade H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 5 Unplug the module to module communication cable from the control module E in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 6 Remove the following components from the control module to reduce the weight of the module a Power supplies see Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page z 5i b Drive sleds see Drive Sled on page 7 42 Note If not already done have the customer remove all tape cartridges from the module being removed Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 9 a66mi018 Figure 7 7 Control module rear thumb screws 7 Loosen the rear thumb screws J in Figure 7 7 securing the control module to the lower expansion module 8 If your library is insta
46. 3 If this problem is isolated to an individual drive replace the drive Refer to Drive Sled on page 7 42 DRO31 Resolve Robot Initialization Failure Problem During a power ON or after closing library main access doors the robot did not initialize properly A common cause for this problem is an unplugged cable that leads to the robot Other permanent hardware failures that result in loss of connection to the robot can also be a root cause 5 72 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the library main access doors This will allow access to the robot and remove power from the robot Check for any obvious disconnected cables leading to the robot 2 If any disconnected cables are discovered plug them in and close all main access doors The robot automatically attempt to initialize 3 If no problem is found or the robot still fails contact IBM Technical Support DR032 Resolve Drive Control Path Failure Problem A control path to a library has failed It is likely that a drive sled failure is being reported as a separate problem It may be possible to reestablish the control path by resetting the drive sled In libraries with more than one drive you have the option to use an alternate drive as the control path if your host connection architecture permits it Changing the control path can be a temporary work around until the original drive problem is corrected
47. 65 0 Ibs 2 36 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 2 8 Power specifications for a 5U Control Module and 9U Expansion Module Measurement Power Specification 5U control module 9U expansion module Voltage 100 to 127 200 240 Vac 100 to 127 200 240 Vac Vac Vac Frequency 50 to 60 Hz 50 to 60 Hz 50 to 60 Hz 50 to 60 Hz Current 2 0 A 1 0 A 2 0 A 1 0 A Inrush current 50 A 100 A 50 A 100 A Power 200 W 200 W 200 W 200 W kVA 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 kBtu hr 0 68 0 68 0 68 0 68 Note 5U control module measurements include two tape drives 9U expansion module measurements include four tape drives Measurements were taken while the picker robot assembly was randomly moving and all of the drives were reading and writing Table 2 9 Other specifications for the library Specification Measurement Maximum altitude 2500 m 8202 ft for operating and storage Table 2 10 Environmental specifications for the library Environmental Factor Operating see Note Storage Shipping Drive temperature 10 to 38 C 50 to 10 to 43 C 50 to 40 to 60 C 40 to 100 F 109 4 F 140 F Heat output 542 W 483 Cal Hr Not applicable Not applicable Relative humidity 20 to 80 10 to 90 10 to 90 Maximum wet bulb 26 C 79 F max 27 C 80 6 F max 29 C 84 2 F max temperature Note The operating env
48. 7 16 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a77qs037 Figure 7 16 Releasing the Y rail 14 15 16 17 18 19 Y rail in unlocked functional position e From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it CAUTION Ensure that there is no gap between the top and bottom Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize Gently push the Picker assembly up high enough to release the Picker locking mechanism see in Figure 7 1 on page 7 5 Release the Picker assembly and allow it to slowly drop to the bottom of the library Reinstall all control module components removed for weight reduction a Drive sleds see Drive Sled on page 7 42 b Power supplies see Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page z 51 Reconnect the customer supplied Ethernet cable to the Library Control Blade for cable location see H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 Reconnect the module to module communication cable from the control module to the expansion module JJ in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after
49. C 10 Accessor Control Block C 11 Door and Import Export Board DIEB C 12 Door and Display Block Be ia C 12 Power System Block Diagram C 13 Drive Sled Interconnect Board DSIB C 13 Library Cables C 14 Library System Grounding C 15 Library Power System C 16 Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 1 Single character i dacs REBI D 2 SCD Dot D 2 Status Light D 2 Unload Button D 4 Inserting a Tape Cartridge D 4 Removing a Tape Cartridge D 5 Using Ultrium Media D 5 Types of Cartridges D 6 Cartridge Compatibility D 9 Bar Code Labels D 9 Unlabeled Media Detection D 12 Importing Unassigned Media D 13 Handling Cartridges D 14 Ordering Media Supplies D 18 Repairing a Cartridge D 20 Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions D 26 Entering Maintenance Mode D 28 Exiting Maintenance Mode D 28 Function Code 0 Maintenance Mode D 29 Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics D 29 Function Code 2 Update Drive Firmware from FMR Tape n D 30 Function Code 3 Create FMR Tape D 31 Function Code 4 Force a Drive Dump D 31 Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump D 32 Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test D 33 Function Code 7 Run RS 422 Wrap Test D 34 Function Code 8 Unmake FMR Tape D 34 Function Code 9 Display Error Code Log D 35 Function Code A Clear Error Code Log D 35 Function Code C Insert Cartridge into Tape Drive D 36 Function Cod E Test
50. Do not use refrigerant lines or connectors to lift move or remove the MRU Use handholds as instructed by service procedures C016 Caution Do not connect an IBM control unit directly to a public optical network The customer must use an additional connectivity device between an IBM control unit optical adapter that is fibre ESCON FICON and an external public network Use a device such as a patch panel a router or a switch You do not need an additional connectivity device for optical fibre connectivity that does not pass through a public network Possible Safety Hazards Viii Possible safety hazards to the operation of this product are Electrical An electrically charged frame can cause serious electrical shock Mechanical Hazards for example a safety cover missing are potentially harmful to people Chemical Do not use solvents cleaners or other chemicals not approved for use on this product Before using the library repair any of the preceding problems TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Class Laser Product The library may contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance standards set by the U S Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation The library has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits
51. Encryption Key Management EKM is a Java software program that assists encryption enabled tape drives in generating protecting storing and maintaining encryption keys that are used to encrypt information being written to and decrypt information being read from tape media You must supply a server or servers on which to install EKM It is strongly recommended that you use both a primary and secondary EKM server For information on how to install configure and use the EKM see the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Introduction Planning and User s Guide GA76 0418 and the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java Chapter 2 Product Description 2 27 platform Quick Start Guide for LTO Ultrium 4 GA76 0420 which are both available for download at http www 1 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg154000504 For information on how to install configure and use the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager TKM see the IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide GI11 8738 and IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide SC23 9977 IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager V1 0 English publications may be downloaded from the following Web site http www ibm com software tivoli Library amp Drive Code Update Feature Code 0500 Order feature code 0500 Library and Drive Code Update if you would like an IBM Service Representative dispatched to your location to update your libra
52. External safety agencies have reviewed the library and have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply Protective Devices The library has the following protective devices e Monitored access to the library e Main power switch Monitored Access to the Library The library is completely surrounded by an enclosure The library can be accessed only from monitored access areas The enclosure around the library separates the danger area of the library from the working area The danger area is the area in which personnel can be injured by component movements CAUTION Ae Movements of mechanical components in the library can cause serious injury Access to the library should be restricted to authorized personnel only Main Power Switch To turn library power ON press on each power switch installed in the library To turn library power OFF press 0 on the switch In any case of danger immediately turn the main power switch of the library OFF CAUTION To completely remove all power disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet Attention Except in emergencies stop the library with the normal shutdown procedure before you switch OFF the main power switch IBM is not responsible for damage caused by improper use of the main power switch Such risk lies entirely with the user CAUTION Movements of mechanical components in the tape library can cause Ag serious injury Before turning the m
53. Function Code L Load Unload Test on unload a tape cartridge Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 27 Table D 10 Diagnostic and maintenance functions continued Function Code Enable Post Error Reporting When selected Diagnostic or Maintenance Function Instructions Location Function Code P Post Error Reporting DB i deferred check conditions are reported to the host Enabled on page D 41 TI Disable Post Error Reporting When selected Function Code U Post Error Reporting ui deferred check conditions are NOT reported to the host Disabled on page D 41 Entering Maintenance Mode The drive must be in maintenance mode to run drive diagnostics or maintenance functions To place the unit in maintenance mode 1 Make sure that no cartridge is in the drive m 2 Press the Unload Button three times within two seconds appears in the Single character Display SCD and the Status Light turns amber Note If a cartridge is in the tape drive it will eject the first time that you press the Unload Button and the drive will not be placed in maintenance mode To continue placing the drive in maintenance mode perform the preceding step Maintenance functions cannot be performed concurrently with read or write operations While in maintenance mode the drive does not receive SCSI commands from the server Exiting Maintenance M
54. I O Station Lock Assembly installed in the library Chapter 3 Library Components 3 3 2 3 5 Figure 3 5 I O Station Lock Assembly top view Switch A E TT I O Station cable actuator lever connector I O Station with Slide Assembly a66mi049 Figure 3 6 I O Station with Slide Assembly 3 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Access Door Inside With Operator Panel a66mi033 Figure 3 7 Access Door open showing back of Operator Panel Chapter 3 Library Components 3 5 Gear Rack a66mi050 Figure 3 8 Gear racks inside the library Front gear rack 2 Rear gear rack Y Axis Picker Assembly and M2 Robot Assembly This section depicts the Y Axis Picker Assembly and the M2 Robot Assembly Libraries contain either one or the other of these components 3 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi051 Figure 3 9 Original Y axis Picker Assembly Y axis Assembly Picker A Y Motor a66mi146 Figure 3 10 M2 Robot Assembly Robot 2 M2 Picker Assembly Chapter 3 Library Components 3 7 3 8 Figure 3 11 Home Sensor Flag Home Sensor Flag TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information o Q E e EE Cable Spool Assembly Figure 3 12 Cable spool assembly a66mi028 Table 3 1 Cable Spool Assembly components Plastic A Spooler flat Terminal g IBM Part Number guide peg cable Board handle The cable spool assembly in the left w
55. Italy Libya 9 e 2 8 m 250V Somalia e FC 9830 e PN 39M5165 Israel S11 32 1971 Israel 10 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9827 e PN 39M5172 Argentina TEC 83 A5 Argentina Brazil Colombia 11 2 8m 250V Paraguay Trinidad Tobago FC 9834 Unaguey PN 39M5068 China People s Republic of China 12 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9840 e PN 39M5206 Taiwan LV CNS 10917 3 Taiwan 13 e 2 8 m 125V e FC 9835 e PN 39M5247 9 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 9 1 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code FC and Part Number PN Plug Standard Reference Country or Region Index Number in on page 9 4 Taiwan HV e 2 8 m 250V FC 9841 e PN 39M5254 CNS 10917 3 Taiwan 14 Japan LV 2 8 m 125V e FC 9842 e PN 39M5199 Japan HV 2 8 m 250V e FC 9843 e PN 39M5186 JIS C8303 C8306 JIS C8303 C8306 Japan Japan 15 16 Korea HV e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9844 e PN 39M5219 KS C8305 K60884 1 Korea 17 India HV 2 8 m 250V FC 9845 e PN 39M5226 IS 6538 India 18 Brazil LV e 2 8 m 125V e FC 9846 PN 39M5233 InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19 Brazil HV 2 8 m 250V e FC 9847 e PN 39M5240 InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20 Low Voltage High Voltage Chapter 9 Parts List 9 7 9 8 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by t
56. code with the next highest priority displays and so on until no errors remain Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 lists the single character codes that represent diagnostic or maintenance functions To initiate a function the unit must be in maintenance mode The SCD is blank during normal operation SCD Dot If a drive dump is present while the drive is in maintenance mode a sing illuminates in the lower right corner of the SCD J in Figure D 1 on page D 1 To copy the dump see Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 The SCD Dot is ON solid if the dump is in ROM memory The SCD Dot flashes if the dump is in FLASH memory The SCD Dot turns OFF when you obtain a dump by using ITDT a library command or a SCSI command or update the drive firmware Note If the drive dump is stored in ROM memory SCD Dot ON solid the dump will be lost when you turn OFF the power or reset the drive Status Light The Status Light E in Figure D 1 on page D 1 is a light emitting diode LED that provides information about the state_of the drive The light can be green or amber and when lit solid or flashing Table D i lists the conditions of the Status Light and Single character Display SCD and provides an explanation of what each condition means Table D 1 Meaning of Status Light and Single character Display SCD IE the and the Status Light SCD is Meaning is
57. e For SCSI attached systems ensure that you are using the correct SCSI terminator and that you are not mistakenly using a SCSI wrap plug 6 If you still have a problem after completing the above steps see Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 6 45 Viewing Drive Information From the Operator Panel Tools gt Drive Info From the Web User Interface Monitor System gt Library Map Position cursor over drive Left click to see drive information This menu item provides the following information for each drive e Drive location e Control path Yes or No Vendor ID e Model number e Type e Serial number e Drive firmware level e Sled boot version e Sled app version e Status e Loaded yes or no e SCSI ID WWNN SAS address End of Call 1 If any cartridges were removed from the library give them to the customer 2 Record your activity in Chapter 8 History of Service Activity on page 8 1 3 Return control of the library to the customer Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 47 registration CAN Bus Tool Kit The CAN Bus Tool Kit includes a Floor Plate see Figure 1 The Floor Plate The Floor Plate is used to isolate CAN Bus problems without removing the library bottom plate or removing L5B E9U library modules The Floor Plate from the CAN Bus Tool Kit is installed as a temporary bottom plate in the library Since the Floor Plate has the y axis home flag mounted on it the library will be
58. from the J11 connector on the distribution board 7 112 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi009 Figure 7 128 Unplugging the Cable Spool Assembly library shown in upright position 6 ey the front of the control module hook the Cable Spool flat cable handle in Figure 7 129 on page 7 114 around the black plastic guide peg H in Figure 7 129 on_ 129 on page 7 page 7 114 This will rotate the small terminal board J in Figure 7 129 on page 7 114 so that it will not contact the frame when the assembly is removed from the enclosure Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 113 a66mi012 Figure 7 129 Securing Spooler flat cable 7 Loosen the T10 Torx retaining screw JJ in Figure 7 129 until the Cable Spool Assembly is loosened from the enclosure Note Do not remove the screw only loosen it 8 Remove the Cable Spool Assembly from the control module Carefully route the cable J in Figure 7 130 on page 7 115 disconnected from the distribution board through the holes in the enclosure to avoid damage to the cable 7 114 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 1 lo S S Figure 7 130 Cable Spool cable routing through enclosure wall Replacing the Cable Spool Assembly 1 Insert the Cable Spool Assembly into the control module Carefully route the cable disconnected from the distribution board through the holes in the enclosure H
59. gt Save Restore Configuration Note Ensure your browser pop up blocker is disabled when saving the System Configuration Pop up blockers prevent the File Download dialog box from Opening Administrative users can save a copy of the current configuration to an external file or restore a saved configuration file from the external file The system configuration should be saved before and after any procedures that might affect the configuration of the library such as updating library or drive firmware or installing any new hardware or firmware features The save and restore operation can be used to restore the library s configurable items to a previous state when the library is in a known working state Do not do the Save operation if the library is experiencing a problem Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 13 Note You cannot restore a saved configuration after removing or replacing a control module or expansion module After removing or replacing the module save the library configuration for future use Note The Saving and Restoring operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The file that is saved contains the entire system configuration plus a copy of the current version of library firmware Following is a partial list of the configuration items
60. library If a Progress Screen is open wait until it closes before attempting to restart the library Take the entire library including all drives and logical libraries offline e To take each logical library offline using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Logical Library Mode e To take each drive offline using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode From the Operations menu click Shutdown The System Shutdown window appears In the System Shutdown window select Restart and click Apply In the System Restart Confirmation window click Yes Bring the entire library including all drives and logical libraries online e Bring the desired logical libraries back online using the Operator Panel by selecting Operations gt Logical Library Mode e Rebooting the library brings any offline tape drives back online Manually Recover Cartridge from Picker The procedure to manually recover a cartridge from a Picker is similar for both the Robot Assembly and the M2 Robot Assembly 1 Manually rotate the Picker to gain access to the appropriate component to eject the cartridge e In the Robot Assembly access the three drive gears as shown in Figure 6 18 Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 41 R T Figure 6 18 Picker rotated for drive gears access a66mi081 e In the M2 Robot Assembly access the thumbwheel on the front of the Picker as shown in Figure 6 19 is E oO
61. new tape drive from the drives list and select Apply DR102 Resolve Robotics Z Axis Motion Failure Problem The library Y Axis Picker Assembly has failed to perform a motion in the z axis The detected failure is likely to be a genuine hardware failure Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the Main Access Door s and look for any obvious problems such as unplugged cables or damage to the picker 2 Remove any tape cartridges from the picker or the path of Y Axis Picker Assembly motion Close the doors and wait for the system to complete initialization 3 Use the Tools gt Service gt Library gt Robot test to determine if the failure is permanent 4 If the test fails replace the Y Axis Picker Assembly Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 91 DR103 Resolve Display Assembly Communication Failure Problem A problem has been detected and isolated to a communication link failure to the library s local display assembly The nature of the problem indicates that replacement of the display assembly may be required Your library should remain operational from the remote browser interface Troubleshooting Steps 1 If this ticket and T064 LCB Hardware Failure are generated within a few minutes of each other the problem lies with one of the power supplies in the CM Replace the Power Supply 2 Examine all cabling at the back of the display assembly and within the CM
62. program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product
63. unload but cannot perform the operation because the host issued a Prevent Allow Medium Removal SCSI command preventing media removal Detection Scenarios 1 Library tries to issue an unload command 2 Library tries to issue a command associated with drive unload Root Causes A host is either properly or improperly reserving the drive while a user or host is trying to properly or improperly perform some action on the drive Possible FRU Replacements No library FRU is involved Rather this is an indication that a host may have orphaned a reserve on the drive Resolution Perform DRO16 Resolve Prevent Allow Media Removal on page 5 67 5 8 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T013 Invalid Library SN Label Library Cannot Initialize Description Detection Scenarios GUI Description A library module serial number label cannot be read preventing the library from proper initialization and operation Explanation The library logic learns the serial number of the system by reading an internal serial number label This is done at first bootup from a cleared to ship condition in order to establish the serial number It is also done on subsequent bootups to confirm that the LCB Compact Flash memory card is in the proper library The library will report a problem when it cannot read a serial number or detects an invalid serial number or another barcode on the module label when in this cleared
64. 0 12 0 12 1 1 12 6 18 2 1 24 0 24 2 2 24 6 30 3 2 36 0 36 3 3 36 6 42 4 3 48 0 48 4 4 48 6 54 Chapter 2 Product Description 2 3 Note I O slots can be reassigned each time the I O Station is opened by rearranging the order of the cartridges in the I O Station Access Door Each control module and expansion module has a door on the front panel that allows access to the internal components of the library This door is locked by the I O Station To open the Access Door in Froni Panel Components on page 2 2 you must first open the I O Station If you want to restrict access to the library lock the I O Station door To do this From the Operator Panel Operations gt Lock I O Station gt Lock Unlock From the Web User Interface Manage Cartridges gt Lock Unlock I O Station Doors Attention When any Access Door is opened all in progress motion commands stop the Picker lowers to the bottom of the library and the library is taken offline When this happens the library must be put back online manually see Library Online on page 6 39 When the Access Door is closed the library returns any media in the Picker to its original storage slot Operator Panel The Operator Panel H in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 is the touchscreen display device located on the Access Door of the control module Library operations and service functions are performed from this screen The Web User Interface off
65. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Figure E 4 SCSI Problem Points to Library Control Path as Possible Cause Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 5 Summary Report a 12 345 6 FFE2F73A 1012150900 OBA49C99 1012150800 C60BB505 1012141500 C42F11D4 1012105200 C42F11D4 1012105000 FFFA352B 1012104900 FFFA352B 1012104900 5537AC5F 1012091700 5537AC5F 1012091700 5537AC5F 1012091700 5537AC5F 1012091600 5537AC5F 1012091600 5537AC5F 1012091600 C60BB505 1012082000 C42F11D4 1011183600 C42F11D4 1011183300 C42F11D4 1011181800 C42F11D4 1011174700 FFFA352B 1011172900 FFFA352B 1011172900 C42F11D4 1011155300 C42F11D4 1011153900 C42F11D4 1011153800 C42F11D4 1011150900 SS rmt5 UNDETERMINED ERROR scsi8 SCSI BUS ERROR 7 SOFTWARE PROGRAM ABNORM TERMINATED VSC DE SOFTWARE ERROR VSC DE SOFTWARE ERROR MS CS SOFTWARE ERROR MS CS SOFTWARE ERROR rmt9 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE rmt9 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE rmt9 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE rmt8 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE rmt8 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE rmt8 TAPE DRIVE FAILURE SOFTWARE PROGRAM ABNORM TERMINATED VSC DE SOFTWARE ERROR VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO MS CS SOFTWARE ERROR MS CS SOFTWARE ERROR VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO VSC DE SOFTWARE ERRO SS SS SS Se eine Minolta bine Mine Hip i om ome oma ho Jit ao d d 5D ANNNNNNNNNNTDTAADAMZNNANA
66. 115 When fully inserted the black line on the flex cable will be flush with the edge of the connector Press down on the back latch on the connector to lock the cable into place See Figure 7 116 on page 7 102 a66mi137 Figure 7 115 Black guideline on the cable Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 101 a66mi159 Figure 7 116 Locking the cable into place d Close the cable protector See Figure 7 117 a66mi165 Figure 7 117 Closing the cable protector 3 Connect the Picker to the M2 Robot Assembly a Position the Picker Assembly at the front of the M2 Robot Assembly 7 102 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information b Locate the slot feature on the Picker Assembly and side it over the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly See Figure 7 118 i oO Figure 7 118 Slot feature on the Picker Assembly 1 Align the slot on the picker to the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly as shown in Figure 7 119 on page 7 104 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 103 a66mi138 Figure 7 119 Align slot to the sheet metal edge 2 Slide the picker over the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly as shown in Figure 7 120 x j 7 r o 4 i hl i a66mi139 Figure 7 120 Slide slot over edge 4 Lower and latch the Picker Assembly to the M2 Robot Assembly 7 104 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Informatio
67. 138 132 module 3 9U each license key EO enables full modules 6 12 18 24 212 206 200 194 220 capacity of one 30 36 42 188 182 176 qU expansion module 2 license keys enable an 6 12 18 24 260 254 248 242 266 additional 46 slots 30 36 42 236 230 124 on each of two 9U expansion modules 3 license keys 6 12 18 24 304 298 292 286 310 required to enable 30 36 42 280 274 268 the full capacity of a 32U library Chapter 2 Product Description 2 25 2 26 Table 2 4 Licensable cartridge slots storage and I O per model continued Number of Number of Capacity Library Configuration Available I O Accessible Total Slots Expansion aiae i Station Slots Storage Slots License Keys 41U library 6 12 18 24 212 206 200 194 no license key control 30 36 188 182 176 220 module 4 9U 42 48 54 170 164 a ee each license key modules 6 12 18 24 260 254 248 242 enables full 30 36 236 230 224 266 capacity of one 42 48 54 218 212 9U expansion module 2 license keys 6 12 18 24 304 298 292 286 oe o ee 30 36 280 274 268 312 on each of two 9U 42 48 54 262 256 expansion modules 3 license keys 6 12 18 24 352 346 340 334 ad Pea oe 30 36 328 322 316 358 E 42 48 54 310 304 JU expansion modules 6 12 18 24 396 390 384 378 a eran ae 30 36 372 366 360 402 q i 42 48 54 354 348 the full capacity The I O station in the 9U expansion module contains 12 slot
68. 158 This releases the LBA leader pin 7 144 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the ETA and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is a the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive shown as H F a82ru010 Figure 7 159 Leader Block Assembly LBA 10 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 until the rotator stub J in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub J in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing 4 in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 11 Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray 12 Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 5 in Beginning Procedure on page 7 133 13 Refer to the appropriate procedure to install the new drive and return the failed drive Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 145 7 146 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 8 History of Service Activity Table 8 1 Service activity Service Date Representative Parts Exchanged Description of Service Activity Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Table 8 1 Service activity continued Service Date Representative Part
69. 32 MB 64MB Flash Clock Reset Servo Power Conv Y orug D A Converter 2x CAN Ctrir Graphics Controller CPLD Two 12C Controllers 12C Repeater 12C Repeater Library CAN Servo vv gt gt Power Ctl CAN Blade 12C DIEB and FAN GPIO 42V Servo 48V Servo GAddr Status Power Supplies Power Supplies Drive CAN DSIB Drive CAN DSIB Power Ctl CAN Blade Graphics DIEB CPLD PowerSwitch DIEB Watchdog Timer Enable Pwr Sup Touch Screen CPLD UART CPLD LVDS Serial DIEB VisioDocumentVisioDocum ent 2 06 04 Appendix C Library Diagrams 039 a66m C 9 Library Control Blade Functions Power Conv Graphics Pies LVDS TS Serial 12C PS Monitor Processor 32 MB Flash 128 MB DRAM DIMM Service Ethernet Ethernet PO Environmental Monitoring CPLD 5 Port Ethernet P1 Ethernet Switch Ethernet P2 Dual CAN Ctrir CAN Ctrir 10 100 1000 Ethernet Library CAN 2xDrive CAN Removable Non Volatile Storage a66mi040 C 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Accessor Control Block Servo and Motor Driver Board Sensor X Motor origin Power Conv U Sensor Y Motor origin Q X Moto
70. 4 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access continued Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access A U AJS U Setup Wizard N A Manage Library gt xX Setup Wizard Create Logical Setup gt Logical X Manage Library gt X Libraries Library Mgmt gt Logical Libraries Create Logical Library Delete Logical Setup gt Logical X Manage Library gt xX Libraries Library Mgmt gt Logical Libraries Delete Logical Library Delete ALL Setup gt Logical X Manage Library gt xX Logical Library Mgmt gt Logical Libraries Libraries Delete All Logical Libraries Change Operations gt Logical X X Manage Library gt X X X Logical Library Mode Logical Libraries Library Mode Configure N A Manage Library gt xX Encryption Logical Libraries Settings Perform N A Manage Library gt xX X X Inventory Perform Inventory Display Tools gt About X X Monitor System gt xX X X Library Library Library Map Information Capture N A Service Library gt XIX Library Log Capture Library Log Cleaning Slots Setup gt Logical X Manage Library gt XIX Library Mgmt gt Cleaning Slots Configure Cleaning Slots I O Station Setup gt Logical X Manage Library gt X ps Slots Library Mgmt gt T O Station Sl
71. 5 63 DR010 5 64 DR011 5 64 DR012 5 65 DR014 5 66 DR015 5 66 DR018 5 67 DR019 5 67 DR020 5 68 DR021 5 68 DR022 5 68 DR024 5 69 DR026 5 70 DR028 5 71 DR029 5 71 DR030 5 72 DR031 5 72 DR032 5 73 DR033 5 73 DR034 5 73 DR035 5 74 DR036 5 74 DR037 5 75 DR075 5 82 DR076 5 82 DR077 5 83 DR078 5 83 DR079 5 83 DR080 5 84 DR081 5 84 DR082 5 84 DR084 5 87 DR085 5 87 DRO86 5 87 DR088 5 88 DR089 5 88 DR090 5 88 DR091 5 88 DR092 5 89 DR093 5 89 DR094 5 89 DR095 5 87 5 90 DR096 5 90 DR098 5 90 DR099 5 90 DR100 5 91 DR101 5 91 DR102 5 91 DR103 5 92 DR105 5 92 DR106 5 92 DR110 5 93 DR111 5 93 DR118 5 94 Drive 2 6 7 129 7 131 channel calibration 2 16 control path failure 5 73 coordinates 2 30 Eject Failure 5 61 general diagnostic 5 62 LEDs 6 21 load failure 5 72 loss of communication 5 71 manual cartridge removal 7 132 manually clean 5 67 operating D 1 power management 2 16 remove 7 42 resolving problems D 48 sled not auto leveling 5 73 speed matching 2 15 Drive dump copying to tape D 32 forcing D 31 drive power overload fuse 7 129 7 131 drive sled description 2 14 remove replace 7 42 X 2 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Drive utilization reporting 2 17 drives resetting 6 40 viewing information 6 47 E electrostatic discharge 6 4 7 3 email notifications automatic 2 23 Encryption 2 27 end of service call 6 47 environment 2 37 operatin
72. 83 2 Use the Details option in the RAS ticket to identify which tape drive reported the RAS ticket Check for lock block condition If possible check the front of the tape drive for error indications Clear the RAS ticket 3 Open the main door and inspect the tape drive or path for obstruction 4 Isolate the media used during the load operation and verify it is not damaged 5 Finally pull the drive sled from the sled bay and reseat it in another sled bay and retry the load operation Additionally if using 400G library firmware or later run the IVT Drive test from the Library Tests option accessed through the Operator Panel Note IVT is optimized for library firmware versions 520G and above and libraries built after July 1 2008 serial numbers with last four digits 8609 and above e If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 520G or above you will not be able to run the IVT test even though the selection is available e If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 500G or below you can run the test but it is not recommended because it may produce erroneous results T062 Module Configuration Problem Description GUI Description The library cannot determine its module configuration due to module to module cable connection or a module termination failure Explanation At boot time or run time the library phys
73. AAA yT EEE HORE VL PILOBFEEHOT SLOT U RAl pHtkotMAeneys TOFA HARA amp ELES gt CHECMBSTSEWRBMHS EM SCSEOIMAONYT V ICRSNTHET In accordance with the European Directive 2006 66 EC batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery Pb for lead Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the collection framework available to customers for the return recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances For proper collection and treatment contact your local IBM representative Spain This notice is provided in accordance with Royal Decree 106 2008 of Spain The retail price of batteries accumulators and power cells includes the cost of the environmental management of their waste Este aviso se proporciona de conformidad con ademas de otros requisitos el Real Decreto espa ol 106 2008 El precio de venta al p blico de las bater as los acumuladores y las celdas de potencia incluye el coste de la gesti n de su desecho xiv T 3310 Tape Library Maintenance In
74. Area Network SAN ready Multi Path Architecture allows homogeneous or heterogeneous open systems applications to share the library s robotics without middleware or a dedicated server host acting as a library manager The Multi Path Architecture is compliant with the following attachment interfaces Chapter 2 Product Description 2 33 e Ultral60 SCSI e Fibre Channel e SAS Serial Attached SCSI The library is certified for SAN solutions such as LAN free backup LAN free drive sharing is not available on SAS drives Multi Path Architecture allows additional control paths and data paths to be configured for any one logical library Using Multiple Control Paths The lowest physical drive in a logical library is automatically set as the control path drive for that logical library Each drive in a logical library can be a control path drive Command failures and time outs are costly Customers want their libraries to run smoothly and efficiently To ensure continued processing the library offers an optional control path failover feature that enables the host device driver to send the same command to an alternate control path With control path failover installed the alternate control path can include another HBA SAN or library control path drive The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the operation on the alternate control path without interrupting the application AIX HP UX Linux Solaris and Windows hosts are curr
75. Assemblies LTO Ultrium Gen 3 LVD Ultra160 drive sled 8037 23R6182 LTO Ultrium Gen 3 2 Gb Fibre drive sled 23R2601 LTO Ultrium Gen 3 4 Gb Fibre drive sled 8042 23R6450 LTO Ultrium Gen 4 Fibre drive sled 8142 95P4824 LTO Ultrium Gen 4 SAS drive sled 8139 95P4825 LTO Ultrium Gen 5 Fibre drive sled 8242 46X4440 Power Supply 1900 23R2582 Library Control Blade LCB without Compact Flash CF Card 23R6165 Compact Flash Card 45E3170 Rack Mount Kit 7003 License Keys Capacity Expansion 1640 Advanced Reporting 1650 Path Failover 1682 Transparent LTO Encryption 5900 Terminators amp Terminator LVD multi mode 23R5841 Wrap Plugs Terminator Module Communication 45E8321 LVD SCSI Wrap Tool 23R5840 Fibre Wrap Tool 12R9314 Interposers Interposer LC SC fibre cable 5096 12R9321 Interposer VHDCI HD68 SCSI cable 12R9321 Interposer SAS MiniSAS 4x 2 0m max cable length 5400 95P4994 Interposer MiniSAS MiniSAS 4x 2 0m max cable length 5500 95P4996 9 2 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information CRU Part CRU Type Description Feature Code Number Miscellaneous Cable Module to Module Communication 23R2602 Cable RJ45 Ethernet Crossover 23R3663 Cover top for control module and expansion module 23R2594 Cover side for 5U control module 23R2595 Covers side for 9U expansion module 23R2596 Cover plate for empty s
76. Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR005 Resolve Motion Failure on page 5 62 T007 X Y Theta Motion Obstruction Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot is unable to properly move due to an obstruction in its motion path Explanation A complete physical obstruction exists in a motion path that precludes repeated attempts to move beyond a certain point in the range of motion Servo control appears normal but a move profile cannot be completed Cartridge may have been returned to a home slot Detection Scenarios 1 A specified move in the X axis cannot complete but motion control appears normal 2 A specified move in the Y axis cannot complete but motion control appears normal 3 A specified move in the Theta 8 axis cannot complete but motion control appears normal Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 5 Root Causes 1 Operator Intervention that results in foreign material or an obstructing object in a library motion path 2 Picker locking mechanism left engaged in the library motion path see Figure 7 1 on page 7 5 3 Certain damaged hardware conditions that obstruct motion at a particular point along an axis Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Possible FRU Replacements e Robot Assembly e Y carriage Assembly Resolution e Verify that no obstructions are present in the path of the Pi
77. Cartridge amp Media D 36 Function Code F Write Performance Test D 37 Function Code H Test Head D 38 Function Code J Fast Read Write Test D 39 Function Code L Load Unload Test D 40 Function Code P Post Error Reporting Enabled D 41 Function Code U Post Eitor Reporting Disabled ni D 41 Drive Error Codes D 42 Resolving Tape Drive Problems D 48 Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages D 49 Using Host Sense Data D 50 Viewing the Drive Error Log D 51 Fixing SCSI Bus Problems D 51 Fixing a Solid Error with One Drive ona SCSI Bus D 52 Fixing a Solid Error wih Multiple Dives on a SCSI Bus D 52 Fixing an Intermittent Eror with One Dive on a SCSI Bus D 53 Fixing an Intermittent Erot with Multiple Drives on a SCSI Bus D 54 Fixing Fibre Channel Errors D 54 Supported Topologies D 54 Starting Problem Determination D 55 Fixing a Consistent Error with a Single Drive on a Fibre Channel Loop D 55 Contents XX Fixing a Consistent Error with Multiple Drives Electronic emission notices G3 ona Fibre Channel Loop D 56 Federal Communications Commission statement G 3 Fixing a Consistent Error in a Point to Point Industry Canada compliance statement G 3 Topology D 56 European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Fixing Intermittent Fibre Channel ErrotS D 57 Directive G4 Fixing SAS Interface Problems D 57 People s Republic of Ching Cla
78. DR028 Resolve Motion Obstruction on page 5 71 5 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T009 Drive Load Unsuccessful Motion OK Description GUI Description An attempted drive load failed but robotic motion appeared normal Explanation The robot has successfully completed all motion profiles associated with putting to a drive but the drive reports that the tape cartridge did not load Detection Scenarios While checking the status of a drive after a PUT motion profile to the drive is completed the drive does not report back a loaded state Root Causes 1 Defective drive 2 Defective tape cartridge 3 Motion profile was successful as detected at motor encoders but cartridge did not get placed far enough 4 Picker dragged cartridge back out of drive but not far enough to trigger Picker cartridge present sensor Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge Drive Sled Possible FRU Replacements Picker Assembly Resolution Perform DR030 Resolve Drive Load Failure on page 5 72 T010 Drive Unload Failed Description GUI Description A drive did not eject a tape Explanation The library is expecting the drive to achieve an unloaded state but the drive does not Detection Scenarios 1 After being issued a move media from a host that requires a get from a tape drive the tape drive never achieves the unloaded state 2 When GUI commands are issued that
79. Disable Service User Remote Service Users Drives A Set Drive Setup gt Drive X Manage Drives gt Settings Settings Drive IDs Load Drive Operations gt Load X Manage Drives gt Drive Drive Summary gt Load Unload Drive Operations gt Unload X Manage Drives gt Drive Drive Summary gt Unload Change Drive Operations gt Change X Service Library gt Mode Drive Mode Service Drives gt Bring Online Bring Offline Reset Clean Drive Tools gt Drive Mgmt X Manage Drives gt gt Clean drive Drive Summary gt Clean Display Drive Tools gt Drive Info X Service Library gt Information View Update Drive Firmware Levels Capture Drive N A Service Library gt Log Capture Drive Log 4 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access continued Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access A U A U Fibre Channel Setup gt Drive X Manage Drives gt X _ Ports Settings Fibre Channel Ports Reset Drive N A Service Library gt X Service Drives gt Reset Drive Create FMR Tools gt Drive Mgmt X N A Tape gt Create an FMR tape Update Drive Tools gt Drive Mgmt X Service Library gt X Firmware gt Update drive View Update Drive firmware using FMR Fir
80. Final Cartridge Position Unknown Motion OK T004 PUT Operation Failed Tape Back Ta Source Location Motion OK Sok ON T005 X Y Theta Motion Profile Failure Tape i in Picker Motion NOT OK i T006 X Y Theta Motion Profile Failure No Tape In Picker Motion NOT OK f T007 X Y Theta Motion Obstruction Motion T008 Cannot Home Motion OK T009 Drive Load Unsuccessful Motion OK T010 Drive Unload Failed T011 Drive Over Eject Condition T012 Drive Unload Control Prevented T013 Invalid Library SN Label re Cannot Initialize T014 I O Station Magazine Missing T015 Drive Sled Fiducial Read Failure T016 Unexpected Drive Type T017 Invalid Storage or I O Position T018 Invalid Drive Position T019 Drive Calibration Failure Motion OK T020 Storage Calibration Failure Motion OK T021 Drive Sled Communication Failure T022 Tape Drive Communication Failure T023 Drive Sled Fan Failure T024 AC Power Loss s T025 Power Supply Hardware Failure T026 Primary Key Server Failover T027 Key Server Communication Failure T028 Secondary Key Server Failover T029 Key Server Communication Warning T030 Excessive I O Station Events T031 I O Station Unlock Failure T032 I O Station Lock Failure T033 Drive TapeAlert Flag 3 Hard read or write error T034 Drive TapeAlert 4 Media friar T035 Drive TapeAlert Flag 5 Read Failure T036 Drive TapeAlert Flag 6 Writ
81. Gear thumbwheel Calibration sensor Power button LEDs Library Control Blade LEDs Tape drive LEDs Power supply LEDs Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 XV 2 2 2 5 2 6 2 8 2 11 2 12 2 12 2 13 2 13 2 15 2 15 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 32 3 7 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 43 45 46 47 5 60 5 86 6 18 6 19 6 21 6 22 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 7 1 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 Location of Original Picker Assembly LED Location of M2 Picker Assembly LED Cabling of a 5U Library with SCSI Drives Cabling of a 14U Library with Fibre Drives Cabling of a Multi Module a with SCSI and Fibre Drives pg Operator panel connectors I O Station lock assembly connector op cover removed Backplane Connect Board connectors front top cover removed Backplane Connect Board connectors back drive sleds removed Drive Sled Interface Board connectors side cover removed Spooler cable connector and original Y motor assembly connectors Original picker assembly connector Spooler cable connector and M2 Robot controller board connectors Picker rotated for drive gears access Access the M2 Picker Thumbwheel Access
82. Generate a current log of the library and send it to technical support for analysis Library Configuration Form Make a copy of this form fill it out as you are installing and configuring your library Update the form each time changes are made to the library The information on this form is very important You can also save your libraries config uration data from the web user interface see g g Having the information on this form will be helpful if a call to IBM Service is necessary Store this form in a secure location Tape Drive LEDs Operator interventions typically report all problems related to tape drives including error codes and tape alerts By observing the blinking pattern of LEDs on tape drives however you can discern which operation the tape drive is currently performing TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 6 3 Tape drive LEDs a66ug040 Use the following table to interpret tape drive activity by observing tape drive LEDs E in Table 6 4 Tape Drive Activity LED Color Represents Drive Status Green Processor e Solid ON Drive s main processor is not operating aon e Solid ON for 3 seconds then blinks twice Drive firmware is downloading e 1 blink per second Normal Drive operational e Blinks 3 times in 3 seconds then pauses solid OFF and then repeats Drive is activating varying online e 10 blinks per second Identify mode e Solid OFF Drive s main processor i
83. H in Figure 7 142 on page 7 127 Remove the 2 screws H in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 and remove the protective cover over the DSIB Unplug the 1 power connector P1 J in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 from the DSIB Carefully remove the cable assembly from the enclosure Remove the flat cable from the DSIB to the BCB 1 Unplug connector P2 E in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 from the DSIB 2 Unplug connector P12 K in Figure 7 142 on page 7 127 from the BCB 3 Remove the flat cable from the enclosure 8 Remove the Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB a b Remove the 2 hex stand offs H in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 from the DSIB This requires a 4 5 mm 3 16 inch wrench The DSIB is held to the frame by slotted pins J and in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 in all 4 corners of the board 1 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully pry the 2 front corners of the board J in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 from the mounting pins 2 Put finger pressure on the drive connectors on the back of the DSIB one at a time while you move the board back and forth to pull it from the corner mounting pins J in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 3 Remove the Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB from the enclosure 9 Remove the Backplane Connector Board BCB a Cc Remove the 2 T8 Torx shoulder screws E in Figure 7 138 on page 7 123 holding the lower part of the BCB Remove the 7 T10 Torx screws J in Figure 7 13
84. I O Station door is closed select System on the I O Assignment screen The library moves the media from the I O station to the source drive and instructs the source drive to create an FMR cartridge from its current code version Using a Firmware FMR Cartridge to Update Drive Firmware 1 Load the FMR cartridge in the I O Station Important Do not open the I O Station until the update process finishes 2 Select Tools gt Drive Mgmt gt Update Drive Firmware Using FMR then select the drive type and drive s you wish to be updated e The library then successively moves this FMR cartridge into each of the specified drives to be updated e The library automatically logs off all users so that they cannot perform library options while the drive firmware update operation is in progress e The library updates the firmware on each targeted drive After the update finishes the FMR cartridge is returned to the I O station A message notifies you when the update operation is complete 3 Save the current system Configuration See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 Other Methods for Updating Drive Firmware through the SCSI or Fibre Channel Attention Each drive connection type and each generation of drive LTO3 or LTO4 requires a unique firmware image When updating drive firmware by using the SCSI or Fibre Channel interface the procedure varies depending on whether your server uses an IBM tape device driver or a n
85. If the drive is SAS e Check Cable connections are secure e Check for broken or pinched cables e Check cable connections are clean 4 Check all hardware components between host and drive are communicating correctly 5 Check host HBA and components are communicating correctly 6 If problem remains unresolved contact your next level of support DR014 Resolve Write Protected Tape Cartridge Problem A back up application attempted to write data to a write protected or WORM cartridge Troubleshooting Step Determine whether the cartridge should be write protected or not If not export the cartridge via your back up application and correct the problem by manually changing the write protect switch on the cartridge If the cartridge is correctly set as a read only tape investigate your host application to determine why a write was attempted DR015 Resolve Unsupported Tape Format Problem A cartridge that is not a correct format has been loaded into a drive There are several common scenarios 1 FMR update cartridge loaded as a data cartridge Cleaning cartridge loaded as a data cartridge Data cartridge loaded as a FMR cartridge Data cartridge loaded as a cleaning cartridge af oN Wrong generation of tape in a drive Troubleshooting Step If the cartridge was loaded to the drive via the Library GUI remove the cartridge via the library Operations gt Media gt Move function Insert the proper
86. LTO 5 Tape Drive Ports a66ug083 Figure 2 11 LTO 5 Tape Drive Ports Table 2 3 LTO 5 Tape Drive Ports Ethernet port do not use 2 Fibre Channel default data port port 1 Fibre Channel default failover port port 2 Speed Matching To improve system performance this tape drive uses a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native uncompressed data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server Chapter 2 Product Description 2 15 2 16 Channel Calibration The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium drives customizes each read write data channel for optimum performance The customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel transfer function media characteristics and read write head characteristics Power Management The power management function controls the drive s electronics so that part of the electronics completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive s operation Redundant Power Supply Feature Code 1900 The optional redundant configuration power supplies may be hot swapped without interrupting library operation Each supply in a control module and expansion module includes its own input AC line cord During redundant operation each supply carries one half the power load If a line cord or power supply fails the second supply sources the complete power load Optionally a single power supply and line cord may be installe
87. Load Balancing The dynamic load balancing support is designed to optimize resources for devices that have physical connections to multiple HBAs in the same machine The device driver is designed to dynamically track the usage on each HBA as applications open and close devices and balance the number of applications using each HBA in the machine This may help optimize HBA resources and improve overall performance Further 2 34 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Data Path Failover provides autonomic self healing capabilities similar to Control Path Failover with transparent failover to an alternate data path in the event of a failure in the primary host side path Data Path Failover is not available on HP UX at this time The Data Path Failover and Control Path Failover features are activated by the Path Failover license key Feature Code 1682 For additional information refer to your device driver documentation Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP Local authentication control is managed on the library An administrator sets up accounts and privileges on the library To use local authentication a user must enter a local user name and password Remote authentication is managed by an LDAP server Enabling LDAP allows existing user accounts residing on an LDAP server to be integrated into the library s current user account management subsystem User account information is centralized and shared by different applicati
88. Look at the Report Data section of the Advanced Reporting Configuration page to see how many records were loaded from the log files for this report A note states the number of records that were read Deleting Advanced Reporting Data You can delete the information that is contained in the log files that are used to build the advanced reports Attention After you delete the data in the log files you cannot restore it The Reload button does NOT retrieve deleted data Save all the data for both the Drive Utilization report and the Media Integrity report before you delete the data from the library For more information on saving your data see Saving and Emailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs From the remote UI go to Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting and select the Advanced Reporting Configuration page either Drive Utilization or Media Integrity To delete the Advanced Reporting data click Delete in the Report Data section of either Advanced Reporting Configuration page This deletes the data for both the Drive Utilization report and the Media Integrity report Saving and Emailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs You cannot save a report as it appears on the screen but you can save or email report data as a comma separated values csv file You can then import the csv data into a spreadsheet program and manipulate it to create your own reports for analysis The csv file contains all of the data that is in the
89. Missing Cleaning Cartridge on page 5 76 2 If auto cleaning is enabled ensure a cleaning tape is loaded in the correctly specified cleaning slot in the library T085 Unknown Cartridge in Cleaning Slot Description GUI Description A configured cleaning slot contains an unknown tape cartridge which will not be used for automatic library initiated drive cleaning operations Explanation When using the library to manage drive cleaning the cleaning cartridges that are inserted into the library are not visible to any host and are not part of any logical library Rather they are in the system logical library Under all circumstances the user should use the insert and remove cleaning cartridge functions to move cleaning cartridges into and out of the cleaning slots in this system logical library If the library becomes aware during inventory that an unexpected non inserted cartridge has been inserted into a cleaning slot manually through an open door and or with the power OFF this ticket will be used to notify the user that this slot contains a cartridge that cannot be used for cleaning Because the cartridge was not inserted as a cleaning cartridge the library cleaning functionality is no longer intact It is either degraded fewer valid cartridges available or totally absent no valid cleaning cartridge in the library Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 39 Detection Scen
90. Mode 5 available for reading and writing data 7 Run Drive Diagnostics Runs tests to determine whether Function Code 1 Run Drive J the drive can properly load and unload cartridges and Diagnostics on page D 29 read and write data Update Tape Drive Firmware from FMR Tape Loads Function Code 2 Update Drive updated firmware from a field microcode replacement Firmware from FMR Tape on page D 30 FMR tape 3 Create FMR Tape Copies its field microcode Function Code 3 Create FMR Tape on replacement FMR data to a customer supplied scratch blank data cartridge Ly Force a Drive Dump Performs a dump of data also Function Code 4 Force a Drive Dump known as saving a microcode trace E Copy Drive Dump Copies data from a drive dump Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump on captured by using Function Code 4 to the beginning of a customer supplied scratch blank data cartridge copies a drive dump to flash memory or erases a dump from flash memory c Run Host Interface Wrap Test Performs a check of the Function Code 6 Run Host Interface circuitry from and to the connector Wrap Test on page D 33 Run RS 422 Wrap Test This test causes the drive to Function Code 7 Run RS 422 Wrap Test f perform a check of the circuitry and connector for the RS 422 interface Oo Unmake FMR Tape Erases the FMR data on a Function Code 8 Unmake FMR Tape customer supplied scratch blank data cartridge a
91. Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to l select the function The SCD changes to a flashing H bE 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing and the tape drive runs the tests Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or l non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or a the media has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 37 D 38 EF Ll e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To c
92. Module Drive Sled 1 Align the drive sled with the guide rails and guide slots along the tracks j in Figure 7 48 on page 7 44 in the open drive sled slot H in page 7 44 Grasp the handle H Meee OTa and slowly slide the drive sled into the library while supporting the drive sled from underneath Note The thumb screws must be aligned with the screw holes in the module If they are not aligned the drive sled was not inserted correctly Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 43 oo ea a66ug049 Figure 7 48 Drive sled slot 2 Tighten the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 46 on page 7 42 that hold the drive sled in place by turning them clockwise 3 Reconnect the drive sled cable a For a SCSI drive sled plug the cable and terminator into the drive sled Tighten the thumb screws that hold the SCSI cable J in use astov the SCSI receptacle and terminator ne page 7 42 in place by turning them clockwise b For a Fibre Channel or SAS drive sled connect the host interface cable 4 Repeat this procedure for all drives to be reinstalled in the library 5 Ensure that all new drives being installed have the correct firmware level New drive CRUs from stock may have downlevel firmware All drives of a given interface and drive type should have the same firmware level a From the operator panel Tools gt Drive Info b From the Web user interface Service Library gt View Update Dri
93. OFF OFF The drive has no power or is powered OFF Green OFF The drive is powered ON and in an idle state Flashing OFF The drive is reading from the tape writing to the tape rewinding the tape locating data Green on the tape loading the tape or unloading the tape Flashing OFF The drive contains a cartridge during the power ON cycle In this case the drive Green completes POST and slowly rewinds the tape the process may take up to ten minutes The light stops blinking and becomes solid when the drive completes the recovery and is ready for a read or write operation To eject the cartridge press the unload button Flashing Displaying The drive is displaying error code s from the error code log on the SCD For more Amber Error Code information see Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 D 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 1 Meaning of Status Light and Single character Display SCD continued U the and the Status Light SCD is Meaning is Amber Red During the power on initialization and POST Power On Self Test the SCD briefly numbers displays letters or m segments then becomes blank not lit when POST is complete and there are no POST errors If a POST error has been detected an error code will be displayed in the SCD and the Status Light will flas
94. OR a permanent change in your setup Procedure 1 Reset the drive For more information refer tq Resetting a Drive on page 6 40 2 Close this ticket and attempt to reestablish the control path by pulling the drive sled out of the library waiting for the Robot to scan the drive location then reinserting the drive sled and securing the thumbscrews 3 Wait for the drive to initialize and become ready 4 If this ticket reoccurs continue to step 4 to switch the control path otherwise the problem is resolved and no further action is required 5 Use the functions under the Setup gt Control Path menu to switch the control path 6 Whether you change the control path or not you may Close this problem 7 Any associated drive problem must be resolved separately DR033 Resolve Drive Sled Auto Level Failure Problem The library has attempted to change the firmware level in a drive sled but the process failed Troubleshooting Steps 1 Using the drive coordinate from the problem Details identify the drive sled that failed 2 After you have located the drive on the rear of the library unscrew the thumbscrews and pull the drive out of the library completely for at least 30 seconds Re insert the drive and tighten the thumbscrews 3 Close the ticket reinsert the drive sled and tighten the thumbscrews 4 The library should now attempt to discover and initialize the drive again 5 If this second attempt to
95. Panel 2 4 power button 2 4 FRU Replacement Strategy Replacement Strategy 7 66 FRUs 7 1 G gear rack alignment 7 21 glossary H 1 H hazards possible viii 6 4 height of tape library 2 36 host sharing library 2 33 hp ux system error information E 8 I O Station 2 3 7 35 7 36 7 38 7 39 7 41 close door 5 69 lock assembly remove 7 35 lock diagnostic 5 64 manually unlock door 6 43 6 44 7 33 remove 7 34 remove replace 7 32 IBM Ultrium Tape Drive 2 14 Insert Cartridge D 36 install 7 131 installation rack safety x Installing Model 1 Robot Assembly Installing Robot Assembly 7 70 interfaces supported 2 14 interior components 2 7 picker assembly 2 8 interior components continued robotic system 2 8 Storage column 2 8 inventory library 5 68 K Kerberos 2 35 key path diagnostics 6 14 periodic 6 16 using 6 16 Keyboards 4 4 L labels bar code guidelines for using D 9 Labels bar code ordering D 18 laser compliance ix safety ix LDAP 2 35 leader pin reattaching D 22 LEDs drive 6 21 fibre port link 6 21 interpreting 6 17 library control blade 6 19 6 20 picker 6 23 power supply 6 22 library taking offline 6 39 taking online 6 39 library access monitored ix library and drive code update 2 28 library configuration form 6 20 Library Control Blade 2 5 remove replace 7 44 library log file 2 22 library state required 7 2 Library Verify Test 5 64 6 7 bar code scanner diagnostic 5 63 motion fa
96. Push up on one of the rollers while you pull out on that part of the I O Station then push up on the other roller to release the I O Station If necessary the silver rollers may be pushed up far enough to latch in the cutout hole in the side frame Ensure that they are unlatched when the I O station is reinstalled a66mi052 Figure 7 34 Silver roller locking the I O Station slide in place 3 Supporting the I O Station from underneath with your other hand pull it out of the library module 4 Place the I O Station in a safe location 7 34 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Reinstalling an I O Station 1 Supporting the I O Station from underneath with your other hand slide the I O Station into the glide slots in the library unit Reaching through the Access Door push up on the silver roller H in Figure 7 34 on page 7 34 while continuing to push the I O Station into the library module Note If you tilt the I O station slide s down as they contact the roller s they will go under the rollers without the rollers being pushed up 3 Release your hold on the silver roller to lock the I O Station slide in place 4 Close the Access Door then close the I O Station door Removing the I O Station Lock Assembly The I O Station lock assembly in Figure 7 35 contains the lock sensor and lock solenoid a66mi047 a66mi046 Figure 7 36 I O Station Lock Assembly top view Chapter 7 Check Adjust R
97. Scanner to enable it to read bar code labels on cartridges and fiducials on cartridge magazines and tape drives The Picker Assembly can be removed through the top of the library recommended method or through an Access Door opening in the library Removing the Picker Assembly from the Y axis Assembly in a Stand alone Library A 2 3 If necessary vary all drives offline then power OFF the library Remove the top cover of the library Open the I O Station door then the Access Door to access the Y axis Picker Assembly Optionally remove the I O Station from the expansion unit for easier access Facing the library rotate the Picker Assembly until the front of the Picker Assembly is oriented approximately 45 degrees right of center as seen from the Zz of the library to access the flat cable connector Ef in Figure 7 60 on page 7 59 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi002 Figure 7 60 Flat cable connector 6 Pinch the top of the connector H in Figure 7 60 and lift up to disconnect it 7 Loosen the front and rear thumb screws J in Figure 7 61 a66mi003 Figure 7 61 Thumb screws 8 Carefully lift the Picker Assembly and remove it through the top of the library Replacing the Picker Assembly on the Y axis Assembly in a Stand alone Library 1 Carefully insert the Picker Assembly and replace it through the top of the library 2 Tighten the front and rear thumb screws f in Figure 7 61
98. Sensor Stuck Description GUI Description An I E or I O station sensor switch is reporting incorrect sensor status and may be stuck Explanation The library controller detected that an I O station sensor is not reporting a valid status The problem may be caused by a stuck sensor in the I O station lock assembly with a control module or expansion module Door open and close state changes are not detected reliably and premature I O station teach operations may occur or no teach and inventory operation may be triggered at all Detection Scenarios When processing a state change on either of the two sensor switches if the sensor switch causing the interrupt is activated the opposite sensor switch is checked to see if it is activated too If they are both active one sensor switch is stuck Root Cause e A sensor switch is obstructed by foreign material e A sensor switch is binding or sticking e A sensor switch is broken Possible FRU Replacement I O Station Lock Assembly Resolution See DRO025 Resolve Stuck I O Station Sensor on page 5 69 T145 Media Removal Notification Description The library detected an expected cartridge removal from a configured I E or I O area element Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 57 Explanation The library is configured for Media Security Notification and detected an expected removal of media Media removal
99. Station Shutdown H Tools H Service Operator Interventions Drives Drive Mgmt System Drive Info About Library Service Internal Network System Settings Security Display Settings Service Login only Factory Defaults Library Tests Library Tests will include Installation and Verification Test IVT for libraries built after July 1 2008 with serial numbers with last four digits 8609 and above Web User Interface Ul The System Storage TS3310 web user interface supports only two browsers either Mozilla Firefox version 1 0 6 and above or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 and above Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 7 4 8 To manage the library using the Web UI you must set up the initial network configuration of the library from the Operator Panel touchscreen For more information see the Setup and Operator Guide Logging in to the Web User Interface Initial login information is as follows e User admin e Password secure For more information on user privileges see User Privileges on page 4 10 Note The login screen gives the user a choice between using local authentication the login and password are stored on the library or LDAP authentication the login and password are stored on a server and the user must specify the LDAP domain name The Local and LDAP authentication choices are always displayed on the login screen independent of the library Authentication Settings C
100. Station Interrupt DR009 Resolve AC Failure a 8 DRO10 Termination and Connectivity Diagnostic DR011 Resolve I O Station Lock J Unlock Failure DR012 Resolve Drive Tape Alert 32 Host Interface DR014 Resolve Write Protected Tape Cartridge DR015 Resolve Unsupported Tape Format DR016 Resolve Prevent Allow Media Removal DR018 Resolve Drive Cleaning Requirement DR019 Resolve Open Access Door DR020 Resolve Library Inventory Mismatch DR021 Contact IBM Service ee DR022 Resolve Missing Power Supply DR023 Resolve Missing I O Station eat DR024 Close I O Door g DR025 Resolve Stuck I O Station Serisot DR026 Resolve Unsupported Module Configuration DR027 Resolve Unknown Library SN Label DR028 Resolve Motion Obstruction DR029 Resolve Drive Sled Communication LOSS As a ex nk Ge a a a a F DR030 Resolve Drive Load Failure DR031 Resolve Robot Initialization Failure DR032 Resolve Drive Control Path Failure DR033 Resolve Drive Sled Auto Level Failure DR034 Resolve Open Storage I O Door DR035 Resolve Robot Power Interruption DR036 Resolve Partially Open I O Station DR037 Resolve Media Eject DR039 Resolve Logical Library Deletion DR040 Resolve Incompatible Module Branding 5 52 s9299 5 53 5 53 5 54 5 54 5 54 D DD 5 56 5 56 5 57 5 57 2097 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 59 5 59 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 61 5 62 5 62 5 63 5 63 5 63 5 6
101. System use The test will move this scratch cartridge to random vacant storage cells throughout the library The test will run continuously and can be stopped at any time by touching Stop on the display To exit the test after the scratch cartridge has been returned to the I O station touch Close View Last Summary Log This procedure displays the last test summary log on the operator panel display View Last Detailed Log This procedure displays the last test detailed log on the operator panel display E mail Last Detailed Log This procedure e mails the last test detailed log SMTP Mail Configuration must be set up on the web user interface Using the Service Port The Library Control Blade LCB provides an ethernet port that is reserved for use by service personnel When servicing a library connect your laptop to this port to access the Web User Interface To connect your laptop to the service port Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 9 6 10 oS D 5 oO oO 1 If necessary close down your laptop s firewall and wireless network connection 2 Install an Ethernet crossover cable between the laptop and the Ethernet service port H on the LCB 3 Open a command window on the laptop Select Start gt Run type cmd and click OK 4 Release the current DHCP lease by typing ipconfig release Note The Service Port defaults as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server 5 Renew the lease by
102. Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and Action 1 l 1 5 Media error The tape drive determined an error occurred because of a faulty tape cartridge or an invalid tape cartridge Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type e Ultrium 1 tape cartridges are not supported in Ultrium 4 tape drives e Drive will not accept an expired Cleaning Cartridge e Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in Maintenance Mode e Drive will not write over existing datasets on a WORM cartridge Ensure you are appending datasets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over existing datasets If the tape cartridge is the correct media type try another tape cartridge If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges use the following procedure 1 If possible run the tape cartridge in a different tape drive If the operation in the other unit Z E fails and or displays replace the media If the operation succeeds run Function P Attention When you run the Test Cartridge amp Media diagnostic data on the suspect tape is overwritten Use only a scratch data cartridge to run the test e If the diagnostic fails replace the drive e If the diagnostic succeeds clean the drive head refer to the drive cleaning operation in this manual and run Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics on
103. Thank you for your support Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form If you would like a response from IBM please fill in the following information Name Address Company or Organization Phone No Email address Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You GA32 0478 09 Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 40 ARMONK NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE International Business Machines Corporation Information Development Department GZW 9000 South Rita Road Tucson Arizona U S A 85775 4401 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES Fold and Tape GA32 0478 09 Please do not staple Fold and Tape i a a a a a a a ee eee Cut or Fold Along Line Cut or Fold Along Line Part Number 95P8435 Printed in USA GA32 0478 09 1P P N 95P8435 OLSE ad Aq IUe UOTJLULIOFUT vuege K Teaqrq 2 ie Pere dey OLEES L 98P 10 G u1aysh Wal Arerqry gt UOLZEWUOLUL auLds
104. The library set TapeAlert 17 indicating a mailbox station Problem mechanical problem Excessive Scan Retries 143 The library set TapeAlert 23 indicating that excessive scan retries occurred Barcode Label Unreadable 152 The library set TapeAlert 32 indicating that a tape cartridge barcode label could not be read The library issues a trap whenever the aggregate state of one of the Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS status groups changes Listening for these traps rather than querying for them is the preferred method of monitoring the health of the library Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps F 3 F 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Notices The information provided by this media supports the products and services described with consideration for the conditions described herein IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product
105. Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the library main door and inspect the picker for damaged fingers or any other obstruction If found remove the obstruction or contact Service for picker replacement 2 View the ticket details for the tape location Inspect the tape and slot for any damage that may cause the tape to get stuck in the slot If the tape is damaged replace the tape with a good one If the slot is somehow damaged contact Service for replacement 3 If the tape is in a drive inspect the drive for any damage that would prevent tape ejection If found replace the drive 5 82 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR077 Resolve Invalid Cleaning Tape Problem The system has detected that a non cleaning tape was used to clean a drive Troubleshooting Steps 1 Using the barcode listed in the ticket details locate the tape in the library 2 If the cartridge is configured for automatic library initiated cleaning operations consult your user guide to export a cleaning tape from the library and import a valid cleaning cartridge for future use 3 If the cleaning tape was configured for application use consult your user s guide to export the tape cartridge and import a valid cleaning tape for future use 4 If a manual drive cleaning was performed replace the tape cartridge with a valid cleaning tape and repeat the drive cleaning operation DRO78 Resolve Tape Load Unload Failure Problem A tape
106. Ultrium Data Cartridges Tape Drive 1600 GB Ultrium 800 GB Ultrium 400 GB Ultrium 200GB Ultrium 100GB Ultrium 1 5 4 3 2 Ultrium 5 Read Write Read Write Read Write Ultrium 4 Read Write Read Write Read only Ultrium 3 Read Write Read Write Read only Ultrium 2 Read Write Read Write Ultrium 1 Read Write Bar Code Labels A bar code label contains e A volume serial number VOLSER that is human readable Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 9 e A bar code that the library can read Note The tape drive does not require bar code labels but you may choose to use labels for tape cartridge identification purposes Table D 4 Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries Ultrium Tape Drive Library Bar Code Label Requirements 3573 Required 3576 Required 3580 Not required 3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader 3582 Required 3583 Required 3584 Required When read by a library s bar code reader the bar code identifies the cartridge s VOLSER to the library The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a data cartridge WORM cartridge or cleaning cartridge In addition the bar code includes the two character media type identifier Lx where x equals 1 2 3 4 T or U Figure D 5 on page D 11 shows a sample bar code label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Table D 5 Cartridges and VOLSERs
107. Verify the Library Name selection Select Apply When the SUCCESS message appears select CANCEL This will log OFF from the local operator panel 7 Log ON to the remote web browser as ADMIN The Upgrade Notification message should display on the web console 8 Click on the upgrade firmware link provided then browse to locate the firmware file See Updating Library Firmware on page 6 26 for detailed instructions D o SoN 9 Restore the system configuration data to the compact flash card See Appendix E of the TS3310 Setup and Operator Guide Power Supply Primary and Redundant a66ug046 Figure 7 53 Power supplies in a control module Primary power supply 2 Redundant power supply Library power is controlled at the individual power supplies and at the front panel of the library The switch on the rear of each power supply controls power for the module in which the power supply is installed The button on the front of the control module controls power for all library modules in the library A second redundant power supply helps ensure that your library does not lose power and become inaccessible if the primary power supply should happen to fail The library automatically switches to the redundant power supply if the primary power supply fails for any reason A redundant power supply should be connected to a different AC circuit from the primary power supply Even better the redundant power supply should be
108. When the library is set up for Auto Clean all the normal tickets for cleaning issues are disabled since the auto clean mechanism will resolve any of these RAS tickets automatically There is however one case where a ticket needs to be posted If the auto clean mechanism itself fails This is the only ticket that will be produced Detection Scenario Auto Clean mechanism fails Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 43 Root Cause 1 Auto Clean setup error such as a user manually removing a cleaning cartridge 2 Any tape motion or driver error for which there already exists a RAS ticket Resolution Perform DR081 Resolve Autoclean Failure on page 5 84 T094 Drive Bay Open Description GUI Description A library drive bay in the rear of the library is open Explanation At boot time or run time the library detects that at least one of the unoccupied drive bays does not have a cover on it For safety reasons if a drive bay is not occupied by a drive and does not have a cover plate installed the robot is slowed to half speed to minimize the risk of someone putting their hand inside the library and having the robot run into it at full speed Library operations will take twice as long in this state As users normally remove the drive bay covers to insert or move drives this library will wait between 30 seconds and 10 minutes after detecting this condi
109. about the Service Action Ticket number Txxx The resolution for an Operator Intervention suggests a CRU or FRU replacement Before replacing a CRU or FRU Refer to Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx on page 5 1 for additional information on resolving the problem e Observe the LEDs on all components For more information see ee A If the LEDs on a component indicate that there is a problem reseat the component e Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the cables that are connected to the failing FRU or CRU For more information see Checking Reseating Cables on page 6 30 e If possible power cycle the library e If the error occurs again replace the suspect component A TapeAlert message was received You are experiencing a problem with your library and no Operator Intervention was created Refer to Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by the If after trying all diagnostic procedures you are unable to resolve the problem contact your next level of support The Operator Panel displays Error cannot Determine Personality oa Power cycle the library 2 If the same message appears replace the Compact Flash Card see Library Control Blade or Compact Flash Card You get repeated errors multiple functions surface failure messages or Txxx codes Open and close an Ac
110. addresses e Feature Code licenses keys e Logical library configuration e Cartridge slot assignments e Cleaning slot configuration e I O Station configuration e Drive IDs SCSI ID Fibre Loop ID SAS ID e Encryption method selections e Administrator and user account information Removing the Library Control Blade Compact Flash Assembly Important Before removing the LCB CF Assembly from the library ensure that you have the current library configuration data available If the CF card is replaced you will need the following information to reconfigure the libary e IP address e Subnet mask address e Gateway address e Library firmware level e License keys if applicable See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 Also see Appendix E Library Configuration Form in the TS3310 Setup and Operator Guide Important When handling the LCB you must wear an ESD anti static wrist strap or touch the library frame to discharge any static electricity in your body Do not handle the LCB without taking appropriate ESD precautions 1 Perform Preparing 2 On the LCB Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 disconnect the Ethernet cable H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 by pinching the tab to disengage the cable and then pull the connector out of the LCB Note Six slots reside below the Ethernet cable The four topmost slots are reserved for future use The two bottommost slots are designated as Eth
111. as you face it 3 Close the door s and resume operations DR051 Resolve Library SN Label Detection Problem The library can not read one of the module serial number labels but has already validated that the bar code scanning system is working properly Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the main library doors and look for any obstructions in front of the module serial number bar code labels 2 If no obvious foreign material is found the module SN is damaged and the EM or CM will need to be replaced The library is still operational but this should be scheduled as soon as possible 3 Contact Service for possible CM or EM replacement Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 79 DR053 Resolve Network Configuration Issue Problem The library has attempted to send an email to the specified address but has encountered an error with the network configuration Troubleshooting Steps 1 Check the email and mail server settings on the library to ensure that all values are correct 2 Check to make sure the library is properly connected to the network 3 Make sure the network cable is not damaged 4 If there is no problem with these items there is a configuration problem with your network Contact your network administrator for assistance troubleshooting this issue DR054 Resolve Open Drive Bay Problem The library has detected that a drive bay
112. at an unexpected location 3D 00 Invalid bits in identify Message An illegal Identify Message has been received at the drive at the start of a command 3E 00 Logical Unit has not Self Configured The drive has just powered on and has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands 3F 01 Code Download The firmware in the drive has just been changed by a Write Buffer command 40 xx Diagnostic failure A diagnostic test has failed The xx ASCQ is a vendor specific code indicating the failing component 43 00 Message Error A message could not be sent or received due to excessive transmission errors 44 00 Internal target failure A hardware failure has been detected in the drive that has caused the command to fail 45 00 Select Reset Failure An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to complete the command has failed 4B 00 Data Phase Error A command could not be completed because too many parity errors occurred during the Data phase 4E 00 Overlapped Commands An initiator selected the drive even though it already had a command outstanding in the drive 50 00 Write Append Error A write type command failed because the point at which to append data was unreadable 51 00 Erase failure An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the media B 8 1S3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit
113. b Position the right rack ear flush with the rack rail c Install and tighten the right rack ear thumb screws 3 Replace the left rack ear J in Figure 7 17 a Open the left door of the library unit slightly a Grasp the hinged side of the door and while pulling on the door push right to expose the slot for the left rack ear b Insert the left rack ear into the slot J in Figure 7 17 c Position the left rack ear flush with the rack rail d Install and tighten the left rack ear thumb screws 7 20 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 4 Repeat this process for all units in the library if necessary Verifying Front and Rear Gear Racks Alignment In order for the picker to move from one unit_to the next in a multi module library the front E in Figure 7 18 and rear J in Figure 7 18 gear racks in the control module must be properly aligned with the gear racks in the expansion module AAAALOALALALA a66mi007 Figure 7 18 Gear rack 2 Magnification of rear gear rack locking mechanism Rear gear rack locking mechanism Front gear rack Verify that the front K in Figure 7 18 and rear F in Figure 7 18 gear racks are properly aligned and positioned Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 21 e In the bottom module of the library verify that the gear racks are in the down position Pinch the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 18 on page p21 1 and p
114. be downloaded and e mailed as a Comma Separated Values csv file through the remote Web UI Advanced Reporting Reports You use the Advanced Reporting function to create reports that can be configured for viewing and analysis Note To use Advanced Reporting you must have Advanced Reporting licensed on your library and your library firmware must be at version 520G or later The Advanced Reporting license applies to your entire library regardless of TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information library size Therefore you only need to purchase the license once If you increase the size of your library your existing license applies to your new library configuration Drive Utilization Drive Utilitzation provides tape drive usage information that shows which tape drives are working at optimum capacity and which are under utilized This information can help you allocate tape drive resources properly Media Integrity Media Integrity provides TapeAlert counts for various combinations of tape drives tape cartridges and TapeAlert flags This information can help you determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge Media Security Media Security enables you to be notified if media is removed from the library without the administrators knowledge or without direction from the backup application Details about using Advanced Reporting include e The data for these reports is collected in log files that are loca
115. carriage assembly 9 Remove the robot assembly from the library A Make sure the Y rails are secured properly and verify that the left side Y rail columns are fully settled to the lowest positions Verify the robot parking tab is in the unparked position and not interfering with the robot Y axis travel Install the robot assembly and assure that it is moving horizontally level along the Y rails Power up the library and monitor for reoccurrence of the ticket If the ticket is not displayed again the problem has been corrected o ONon If the ticket is displayed again the problem still exists requiring further inspection of the Y rail and Y carriage assembly motion 10 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR042 Resolve Missing Cleaning Cartridge Problem While performing inventory the library determined that a cleaning cartridge is missing This cleaning cartridge was originally inserted via the library operator interface specifically for the library to use for cleaning tape drives This cartridge is not managed by any host applications It is likely that this cartridge was manually removed while the library was powered OFF or when the main access door was opened Troubleshooting Steps 1 You can determine the bar code label of the missing cleani
116. contained on a storage medium expressed in bytes of data media type identifier Pertaining to the bar code on the bar code label of the IBM Ultrium Tape Cartridge a 2 character code L1 that represents information about the cartridge L identifies the cartridge as one that can be read by devices which incorporate LTO technology 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its type mega One million of meter In the Metric System the basic unit of length equal to approximately 39 37 inches micro One millionth of Glossary H 9 H 10 microcode 1 One or more micro instructions 2 A code representing the instructions of an instruction set implemented in a part of storage that is not program addressable 3 To design write and test one or more micro instructions 4 See also microprogram microdiagnostic routine A program that runs under the control of a supervisor usually to identify field replaceable units microdiagnostic utility A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine microinstruction A basic or elementary machine instruction microprogram A group of microinstructions that when executed performs a preplanned function The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions for execution to perform a particular function The term microcode represents microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to hard wired circu
117. control firmware received a drive sled event E_DDC_LME_ENABLED indicating that the tape drive did enable Library Managed Encryption but the library requested that the drive configure for Application Managed Encryption AME e Library control firmware received a drive sled event E_DDC_LME_DISABLED indicating that the tape drive did not enable for Library Managed Encryption but the library requested that the drive configure for LME Root Cause Library control firmware was informed by drive sled of a tape drive command failure Possible FRU Replacement Drive Sled Resolution Perform DR110 Resolve Drive Encryption Control Failure on T154 Drive Encryption Monitoring Warning Description GUI Description A tape drive request to initiate a library managed encryption key exchange did not provide the required request details to service the encryption key exchange request Explanation The drive sled controller firmware suspended Encryption Service Request ESR monitoring of the tape drive due to the tape drive having indicated an ESR but when the drive sled controller firmware requested details from the tape drive no data was provided If this issue is encountered twice in a row ESR monitoring will be suspended for the duration of the drive mount session and will be re enabled when a new tape cartridge is mounted Detection Scenarios Library control firmware received a drive sled event indicatin
118. control module if necessary 4 Open the I O Station door then the Access Door to access the Y axis Picker Assembly 5 Optionally remove the I O Station from the control module for easier access a66mi002 Figure 7 55 Flat cable connector 6 Raise the Y axis Picker Assembly to the top of the library and carefully lift it out Be careful not to damage the Cable Spool flat cable H in Figure 7 56 on page 7 55 Set the Y axis Picker Assembly on top of the control module and loosen the thumbscrew J in Figure 7 56 on page 7 55 to disconnect the cable spool 7 54 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi014 Figure 7 56 Thumb screw securing cable spool 7 Carefully lower the Cable Spool connector F in Figure 7 57 on page 7 56 and hook it around the black plastic guide peg in Figure 7 57 on page 7 56 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 55 anaes Viele ie t 4 a t 4 4 4 as a66mi012 Figure 7 57 Cable Spool with storage columns removed Replacing the Y axis Picker Assembly 1 2 Ensure all gear racks are properly positioned and that they contain NO GAPS between units in the library Set the Y axis Picker Assembly on top of the control module as shown in Figure 7 56 on page 7 55 peg H in Figure 7 57 Carefully lift the Cable Spool connector Tighten the thumb screw to connect the spooler cable to the Y axis Pic
119. coordinates 0 1 PS1 primary power H 0 2 PS2 redundant power supply in a supply in a control control module module Data Cartridges The different generations of IBM TotalStorage Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color The Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge is burgundy The Ultrium 5 WORM Data Cartridge is burgundy and silver gray The Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge is green The Ultrium 4 WORM Data Cartridge is green and silver gray The Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge is slate blue The Ultrium 3 WORM Data Cartridge is slate blue and silver gray The Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge is purple The Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge is black All generations contain 1 2 inch dual coat metal particle tape The native data capacity of Ultrium data cartridges is as follows The Ultrium 5 cartridge has a native data capacity of 1500 GB 3000 GB at 2 1 compression The Ultrium 4 cartridge has a native data capacity of 800 GB 1600 GB at 2 1 compression The Ultrium 3 cartridge has a native data capacity of 400 GB 800 GB at 2 1 compression The Ultrium 2 cartridge has a native data capacity of 200 GB 400 GB at 2 1 compression The Ultrium 1 cartridge has a native data capacity of 100 GB 200 GB at 2 1 compression When processing tape in the cartridges Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear serpentine recording format The Ultrium 5 cartridge stores data on 1280 tracks sixteen tracks at a time Chapter 2 Product Description 2 31 e The Ult
120. created on the LDAP server to enable remote login on the library e Library user group Assign users to this group who need user privilege access to the library Enter the name of this group in the User Group field on the Manage Access gt Authentication Settings screen on the library web client e Partition groups For LDAP users with user privileges access to library partitions is determined by group assignment on the LDAP server Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that match the library partition names names must match but are not case sensitive Users with user privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP server to have access to the corresponding partitions on the library Chapter 2 Product Description 2 35 Library admin group Assign users to this group who need administrator privilege access to the library LDAP users with administrator privileges have access to all partitions and administrator functions and do not need to be assigned to partition related groups on the LDAP server Enter the name of this group in the Administrator Group field on the Manage Access gt Authentication Settings screen on the library web client You need to have at least one user assigned to both the Library User Group and the Library Admin Group on the LDAP server in order to test the LDAP settings on the library Since most normal users are not members of both these groups you might need to create a special or temporar
121. detect and report which slots contain media with unreadable barcodes Since cartridges with unreadable barcodes will not work for some library functions knowing which labels are bad enables you to replace them with good ones as soon as possible When you enable Unlabeled Media Detection the calibration sensor re scans slots identified as empty in the inventory to see if a cartridge is physically in the slot If so the library reports the cartridge as having an unreadable barcode Note The library always re scans empty slots in the top and bottom rows of the library even if you don t enable the Unlabeled Media Detection feature This is because occasionally a small or poorly placed label cannot be read by the barcode scanner in those two rows The calibration sensor re scans the bottom row and the picker physically checks the top row because the calibration sensor cannot reach it Bottom row here means the bottommost available row as indicated in the library configuration report This feature is disabled by default When enabled the following occurs e The re scan may take up to several minutes to complete e The library configuration report indicates media with unreadable barcodes by displaying a red triangle in the corner of the slot e The library user interface lists No_Label as the barcode for all cartridges with unreadable labels e The library posts a RAS ticket T143 when an unreadable barcode label is detected A
122. detect that an I O Station magazine is not installed This is important on I O Station magazines because they are user removable While performing an inventory of the I O Station magazines the library ends up verifying the presence of the magazine by NOT detecting this special fixed label Detection Scenarios Any time the library attempts to inventory an I O Station magazine it will read the fixed label if a magazine is missing I O Station magazines are always expected to be present Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 9 Root Causes Resolution 1 Missing I O Station magazine 2 Acartridge in an I O Station just happens to have a label that decodes as XXX Note The inability to communicate between the Library Control Blade and the bar code scanner should result in a different ticket cause DR023 Resolve Missing I O Station Magazine on T015 Drive Sled Fiducial Read Failure Description GUI Description The robot is unable to scan the drive sled s identification fiducial label Explanation When the library is attempting to determine the type of a drive and verify its physical presence in the library it cannot do so because it cannot read a label where it expects to find one Detection Scenarios 1 Installation of a drive into a library drive slot triggers the library to discover it 2 Boot up causes the library to phys
123. does not occur reconnect one drive at a time back to the SCSI bus and repeat step 8 for each drive Note Ensure that the SCSI terminator is always on the last drive on the failing SCSI bus Fixing an Intermittent Error with One Drive on a SCSI Bus 1 Verify that the latest level firmware is installed on the drive Update the firmware if necessary Required library firmware and drive firmware can be downloaded by visiting http www ibm com storage Ito 2 Check host error logs to determine if a specific cartridge is causing the problem Replace the cartridge that is listed as being faulty 3 If the problem still exists replace the following e SCSI terminator e SCSI host cable e Drive sled Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 53 If the failure still exists it probably is caused by the host system hardware or software Refer to the service documentation for the host system Fixing an Intermittent Error with Multiple Drives on a SCSI Bus 1 Verify that the latest level firmware is installed on the drive Update the firmware if necessary Required library firmware and drive firmware can be downloaded by visiting 2 Check host error logs to determine if a specific cartridge is causing the problem Replace the cartridge that is listed as being faulty 3 If the problem still exists replace the following e SCSI terminator e SCSI host cable e SCSI drive to drive cables If the failure still exists it probably is caused by t
124. drive did not load a tape correctly Library automatic recovery was not successful and user intervention is required Troubleshooting Steps 1 Attempt to unload the tape from the drive using the host backup application that is currently using the drive or via the remote or local UI 2 Open the library main access doors and use the blue pushbutton on the front of the drive to trigger an unload Press and hold the button continuously for 10 seconds 3 If the tape is ejected retrieve it and inspect it for any damage If found discontinue use of the tape 4 If the tape is not ejected contact Service for further assistance in resolving this issue DR079 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue Problem The library is not able to communicate with a Key Server This does not indicate a problem with the library but rather a configuration or setup issue Troubleshooting Steps 1 Ensure that the library is properly connected to the network and that the network cable is not damaged 2 Ensure that the library s Library Managed Encryption settings are correct Ensure the settings contain the correct key server IP address and port number 3 Verify that the Key Server is powered ON operational and that it is also properly connected to the network 4 Ensure that the key server s IP configuration is set properly that the ports are configured correctly and that they are active Ensure the Key Manager is running o
125. drive location then close the ticket If the ticket details identified an I O station column of a module perform the following steps a b If the ticket details identified a storage location perform the following steps a If the ticket details identify a drive sled remove the identified drive and inspect the calibration bracket horizontal white stripe for any damage Ensure the I O station in the identified module was firmly closed to allow proper calibration If it was properly closed open the I O station and inspect the white I O station calibration target for any damage such as scratches in the white calibration target square If no damage is found inspect the slot above the I O station calibration target for a brightly colored tape cartridge yellow or orange If such brightly colored tape cartridge is present ignore this ticket and continue Open the access door identified in the ticket details and locate all white calibration targets of the identified storage column and inspect them for any damage If no damage is found open the bottom main access door of the module and gently move the picker assembly towards the door opening Then rotate it gently as far clockwise as possible Open and fully extend the bottom I O station door then reach through the main access door Locate the picker assembly recessed calibration sensor in the picker base slightly to the right of the center line Gently wipe the surface of the calibr
126. drive recommended cleaning However since the tape drive is now requesting to be cleaned a valid non expired cleaning tape may not have been available for library initiated or host controlled cleaning Verify that cleaning tapes are properly configured and not expired e Perform a manually initiated cleaning operation for the tape drive as specified in the user documentation 2 Library controlled automatic cleaning is disabled Since automatic library initiated tape drive cleaning operations are not enabled perform a manually initiated drive cleaning operation for the tape drive as specified in the user documentation Note that in the case of RAS ticket T045 Drive TapeAlert 20 Clean Now on page 5 22 the drive may require multiple drive cleaning operations 3 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR019 Resolve Open Access Door Problem A library main access door appears to be open Either an access door is opened or module termination is interrupted There are two basic scenarios to recover from 1 Door open DID NOT interrupt a library MOVE MEDIA 2 Door open DID interrupt a library MOVE MEDIA Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 67 Resolutions 1 Door open DID NOT interrupt a library MO
127. dump part of the maintenance mode Attention If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code it automatically forces a drive dump also known as a save of the firmware trace If you force a drive dump the existing dump will be overwritten and data will be lost After you force a drive dump do not turn OFF the power to the drive or you may lose the dump data Choose one of the following procedures If the drive i is in maintenance mode Status Light is solid amber refer to If ie drive is in operating mode Status Light i is soi or or flashing green press and hold the Unload Button for ten seconds If captured dump data exists the drive places it into a dump area Reset the drive Press and hold the Unload Button until the drive begins the reset procedure SCD will display random patterns and the Status Light will be amber Note If a tape cartridge is loaded in the drive the drive will unload the tape Repeat the Reset the drive procedure after the tape is unloaded The drive saves a dump of the current drive state then reboots to allow communication Do not cycle power as this will erase the contents of the dump Inserting a Tape Cartridge To insert a tape cartridge i Ensure that the drive is powered ON 2 Ensure that the write protect switch on the tape cartridge is properly set D 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 3 Grasp the cartridge so that the wri
128. dust Additionally do not store paper supplies next to the library e Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways open windows fans and air conditioners Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any contamination from airborne particles Maintenance Plan The library consists of two hardware subsystems the library and the tape drives The tape drive is packaged in a common drive sled and each drive sled is a CRU When a drive failure occurs the drive sled is removed and returned to IBM for repair The library maintenance package supports the library and the library interfaces with the tape drives Maintenance Start Start all maintenance activity for the library using the information in Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 An error to action table is provided to quickly determine which procedure to use for the reported problem You are also shown how to prepare the library for service Subsystem problem determination information is included to help determine the failing components Supported Servers Operating Systems and Software The library is supported by a wide variety of servers hosts operating systems and adapters These attachments can change throughout the life cycle of the product To determine the latest supported attachments visit the web at http www ibm com storage Ito and look at the Interoperability Matrix Supported Device Drivers 2 38 IBM m
129. e Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution 1 Perform DR082 Resolve Library Calibration Failure on page 5 84 2 Use the Details option in the RAS ticket to identify which tape drive is having trouble being calibrated Reseat the drive sled in another sled bay 3 Reseat the picker and Y climber to ensure they are level 4 Clear the RAS ticket and retry the original operation T020 Storage Calibration Failure Motion OK Description GUI Description The library is unable to calibrate the position of a tape cartridge magazine Explanation System cannot successfully calibrate the position of a storage magazine but the calibration search pattern completes successfully Detection Scenarios Calibration motion completes but edge finding of one or more edges does not occur Root Causes Dust on picker assembly calibration sensor Calibration sensor not functioning properly Calibration target not functioning properly Pe f Fiducial target or robot position is so far off nominal that search pattern cannot locate target i e unlevel picker This can also generate a T083 Picker Assembly not level Possible FRU Replacements e Column Assembly e I O Slide Assembly 5 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Resolution 1 Perform DR082 Resolve Library Calibration Failure on page 5 84 Note The picture shown in DR082 shows the location of the calibrat
130. failures may require a drive be reset for recovery from the failure Drives can be reset individually by enclosure module by logical library Web User Interface only or by entire library Shutting Down Restarting the Library 6 40 Shut down the library for servicing Restart the library after servicing and for preparing it for use Shutting Down the Library Servicing some components requires only that you take the library offline while servicing other components requires that you power OFF the entire library For details see Required Library State on page 7 2 When library power is switched OFF the Picker assembly slowly falls to rest at the bottom of the library Shutting down a library shuts down the library s operating system and firmware When performing a shutdown the library finishes all active commands received from the host application and does not process any new commands It takes all logical libraries offline and lowers the robot to the shipping position on the floor of the library Always perform a shutdown before removing power from the library Important To completely remove all power before servicing or in an emergency push the front power button toggle each power supply switch to the OFF O position and disconnect all power cords from their electrical source 1 Using the library s Operator Panel ensure that no applications are accessing the library If a Progress Screen is open wai
131. for proper connectivity Inspect for damage 3 If no cabling problems are found and no concurrent tickets have been posted against the LCB replace the display assembly DR105 HPF Connection Failure Problem A Fibre Channel I O blade has detected that its secondary host port failover HPF port connection has failed Troubleshooting Steps 1 Note the Fibre Channel I O blade location and identify the Fibre Channel cable connection 2 Ensure that the Fibre cables are properly connected to both the switch and the Fibre Channel I O blade and that the cable connections are undamaged and free of debris 3 Reset the port on the Fibre Channel I O blade via the local or remote user interface 4 If the problem persists contact Service for further assistance 5 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR106 Resolve Media Security Notification Problem The library has been configured to inform of unexpected cartridge removal expected tape cartridge removal or both e Media removal is expected whenever an exported cartridge has been physically removed by an operator from an I O area element e Media removal is not expected if a cartridge was previously detected in a storage drive or I O element without having been exported or moved by the robot to a resp
132. from FMR Tape Attention When updating drive firmware do not power off the drive until the update is complete or the firmware may be lost Function Code 5 loads drive firmware from a field microcode replacement FMR tape The FMR tape must have been created from a LTO Gen4 tape drive with the same host interface SCSI U160 SCSI U320 SAS or Fibre Channel 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 aa 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select the function The SCD changes to a flashing al L pn 4 Insert the FMR tape cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing The tape drive loads the updated firmware from the FMR tape into its erasable programmable read only memory EPROM area e During the reboot the SCD presents a series of random characters The SCD C oO briefly displays then becomes blank not lit when POST is complete The Status Lights will be amber during the reboot and change to green after a successful reboot e If the update completes successfully the tape drive rewinds and unloads the FMR tape resets itself and is ready to use the new firmw
133. hand The compact flash card should be firmly seated against the connector J in Figure 7 51 on page 7 48 Note The card is properly connected when no gold pins are visible Replacing the Library Control Blade LCB Important When handling the LCB you must wear an ESD anti static wrist 1 2 strap or touch the library frame to discharge any static electricity in your body Do not handle the LCB without taking appropriate ESD precautions DO NOT touch any components on the LCB firmware board see Figure 7 50 on page 7 47 Hold it by the metal cover and support it by the metal ground plane only Locate the empty LCB slot on the rear panel of the control module CM Then carefully line up the new LCB board along the guide slots and gently slide it into the control module until the connector seats Important As the LCB begins to slide into the control module be sure to support the circuit board from underneath being careful to touch only the metal cover and the ground plane along the bottom edge Grasp the pair of latches near the top and bottom of the LCB K in Figure 7 52 on page 7 50 by pushing them in until they click into place Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 49 oS D 5 oOo oO Figure 7 52 Library Control Blade LCB 7 50 l icati BA Module communication o Module to module communication cable terminator BI En cable customer E Ethernet port for IBM service
134. has expired 23 Invalid cleaning No Set when the drive expects a Use a valid cleaning cartridge tape cleaning cartridge and the loaded cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge 30 Hardware A No Set when a hardware failure See occurs that requires that you If resetting the drive does reset the tape drive to recover not recover the error note the error code on the single character display then see Drive Error Codes on page 31 Hardware B No Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the internal Power On Self Tests single character display then see Drive Error Codes on page 32 Interface No Set when the tape drive detects a See Error Code 8 or 9 i problem with the host interface Error Codes on page D 42 33 Eject media No Set when a failure occurs that Unload the tape cartridge then requires you to unload the reinsert it and restart the cartridge from the drive operation 34 Download fail No Set when an FMR image is Ensure that it is the correct FMR unsuccessfully downloaded to image Download the FMR the tape drive through the host image again interface 36 Drive temperature No Set when the drive s temperature See Error Code 1 in sensor indicates that the drive s temperature is exceeding the recommended temperature of the library Codes on page D 42 Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive A 3 Table A 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape
135. in Figure 7 138 on page 7 123 J16 see 5 in Figure 7 138 on page 7 123 and J15 see J in Figure 7 138 on page 7 123 from the BCB 7 122 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information if l 7 WHALE WEEE a AV i E Z n We SAN Clee s a66mi101 Figure 7 138 Backplane Connector Board BCB Front View d Remove the black protective cover from the back of the Operator Panel e Remove cable connectors J36 see J in Figure 7 139 on page 7 124 J35 see in Figure 7 139 on page 7 124 and J32 see RA in Figure 7 139 on Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 123 a66mi088 Figure 7 139 Operator Panel Cable Connectors f Remove the 3 screws see J in Figure 7 139 from the cable retainer bracket on the back of the door g Remove the 4 screws see J in Figure 7 140 on page 7 125 from the front of the door holding the long plastic cable guide to the door Note The mounting holes in the new plastic cable guide may not match correctly with the screw holes in the door If they do not match correctly it will be necessary to transfer the plastic guide from the old cable assembly to the new cable assembly Cut the cable ties to remove the plastic guides from both the old cable and the new cable Use the new cable ties in the FRU kit to attach the old guide to the new cable 7 124 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi074 Figure 7 140 Four screws on front of door and plas
136. in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select the function The SCD changes to a flashing H 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing H and the tape drive runs the tests Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 39 D 40 e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode rm Ll temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code L Load Unload Test Approximate Run Time 15 seconds per loop Total Number of Loops 10 Function Code tests the drive s ability to load and unload a tape cartridge Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and
137. in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it CAUTION Ensure that there is no gap between the top and bottom Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize To align the gear racks in a multi module library 1 Slightly push up and pinch the gear rack locking mechanism J in Figure 7 18 lon page 7 21 to unlock the gear rack in the control module 2 While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 18 on page 7 21 push the gear rack down until it aligns with the gear rack in the expansion module then release your hold on the locking mechanism 3 Manually inspect the track to ensure there are no gaps 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other gear rack 5 Manually raise the picker and disengage the picker locking mechanism J in Figure 7 23 on page 7 25 if necessary If the gear racks are properly aligned the picker will slowly move to the bottom of the library 7 24 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi053 Figure 7 23 Picker assembly locking mechanism Front Panel Components The library has the following front panel components Bezels Bezels Operator Panel I O Station I O Station Lock Assembly I O Statio
138. ina Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger Installing a Replacement Expansion Module Enclosure Removing Replacing Rack Fars Removing the Rack Ears Replacing the Rack Ears 3 Verifying Front and Rear Gear Racks Alignment Front Panel Components bo ee i Bezels Operator Panel Removing Replacing ihe Powe Switch LED Board Assembly bof E E I O Station Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door Removing an I O Station Se a Reinstalling an I O Station Removing the I O Station Lock Assembly Replacing the I O Station Lock Assembly Removing the I O Station Safety Flap from a Control Module 5U Removing the I O Station Safety Flap Homa an Expansion Module 9U bom g Rear Panel Components Drive Sled Library Control Blade or Compact Flash Card Power Supply Primary and Redundant Internal Components E ke Y axis Picker Assembly Original Picker Assembly Y Motor FRU Replacement Strategy For Model 1 ad Model 2 Robots ut Boa A 6 46 6 47 6 47 6 48 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 4 ae 7 11 7 18 7 18 7 18 lt 7 19 7 19 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 25 7 25 7 27 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 s 7 35 lt 7 35 7 36 736 7 39 7 42 7 42 7 44 7 51 7 53 7 54 7 58 7 60 7 66 Removing the Model 1 Robot Assembly from the Library E 7 66 Installing the Model 1 Robot Assembly i in ihe Library 7 70 R
139. into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape into or out of the cartridge CM Cartridge Memory cartridge storage slot Individual slot located within a magazine that is used to house tape cartridges caution notice A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people Contrast with attention and danger CE Customer engineer field engineer service representative centimeter cm One one hundredth of a meter 0 01 m Approximately 0 39 inch channel command An instruction that directs a data channel control unit or device to perform an operation or set of operations char Character CHK Check cleaning cartridge A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive Contrast with data cartridge command A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions compact disc CD A disc usually 4 75 inches in diameter from which data is read optically by means of a laser compression The process of eliminating gaps empty fields redundancies and unnecessary data to shorten the length of records or blocks concurrent Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the subsystem remains available for customer applications contingent connection A connection between a channel path and a drive caused when a unit check occurs during an I O operation controller A device that provides the interface between a system and one
140. latch on the cable connector J in Figure 7 69 b Carefully plug in the connector 5 Engage the cable retention clip D Replace the Robot Assembly 7 Replace the Control Module in the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information 8 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 FRU Replacement Strategy For Model 1 and Model 2 Robots Model 1 Robot You receive either a picker assembly FRU or a Y carriage assembly FRU or both You may replace one or the other or you may build them into a complete robot assembly and replace it as a single unit Model 2 Robot You receive either a complete robot assembly FRU or a picker assembly FRU You either replace the entire robot assembly as a single unit requires access through the top of the library or you replace just the picker assembly can be accessed through the front access door of the library Removing the Model 1 Robot Assembly from the Library Required tools e Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate e T10 TORX screwdriver for loosening and tightening the thumbscrew that attaches the cable spool clip to the robot assembly 1 Power off the library When the library is powered off the robot assembly slowly falls to rest in the bottom module of the library 2 Park the robot assembly in the control mo
141. less frames detected than actual Possible CRU Replacements e Module to Module communication cable e Module communication terminator e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements Internal Cables and Boards Kit e Expansion module enclosure Resolution T063 WWNN Label Change Description Detection Scenarios GUI Description The robot cannot read or detected a new library WWNN Explanation The library logic learns the library WWNN of the system by reading an abbreviated base WWNN base volume serial number label This is done at first boot up from a cleared to ship condition in order to establish the WWNN It is also done on subsequent boot ups to verify that the persisted information on the library compact flash file system matches the physical library module The library will report a problem when it cannot read the WWNN or it reads a WWNN value that does not match the persisted library configuration A different motion related problem will be reported if motion is preventing the proper reading of the WWNN 1 At first boot up from clear to ship the library must establish the WWNN for the first time There may be no WWNN in system memory at this point 2 Any power up System memory already has a WWNN established for the Library Control Blade 3 The Library Control Blade is improperly swapped into a different physical chassis and the system reads the physical chassis WWNN label
142. lock failed to unlock Explanation System logic or external command is requiring I O station lock to unlock but it will not Detection Scenarios When unlock action is attempted lock unlock position sensor does not detect the proper state Root Causes Possible CRU Replacements Lock mechanism not working properly Lock position sensor not working properly Mechanical binding or obstruction prevents proper motion and detection Pe SS Mechanical failure of sensor flag Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e I O Station Lock Assembly e Display Door and I O PCB Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform the following e DRO11 Resolve I O Station Lock Unlock Failure on page 5 64 Replacing the I O Station Lock Assembly on page 7 36 T032 I O Station Lock Failure Description GUI Description A I O station lock failed to lock when required Explanation System logic or external command is requiring I O station lock to lock but it will not Detection Scenarios When a lock action is attempted the lock unlock position sensor does not detect the proper state Root Causes Possible CRU Replacements Lock mechanism not working properly Lock position sensor not working properly Mechanical binding or obstruction prevents proper motion and detection ec ON Mechanical failure of sensor flag Library Control Blade Possible F
143. log file that falls within the date range you specify 2 22 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Note Administrators can configure the library email account and email notifications Users with user or superuser privileges can receive email notifications but they cannot configure the library email account or email notifications You can configure the library to automatically email Advanced Reporting logs and reports to specified recipients on a daily or weekly basis You can create up to 20 email recipients If you want to send the same recipient a different set of reports you can enter the same email address more than once with different reports selected for each Each entry counts as a unique recipient toward the 20 total Note Duplicate entries are not allowed A duplicate entry means the same recipient is set to receive the exact same reports in two different entries regardless of the day or time If you have duplicate recipients make sure that the reports selected in each entry are not an exact match If you have one entry in which Recipient A receives the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Monday you cannot create another entry to send Recipient A the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Thursday Instead you can create one entry for Recipient A and send the reports every day select Daily as the day to send the report or you can change the reports you are sending so that they are not the same as
144. media spent in motion while in the tape drive writing reading rewinding etc e Chart Indicates how the data is displayed in the chart Select Area Bar default Line or Pie e Type Indicates the chart type Select one of the following Rollup default Displays the grouping on the x axis and the attribute amount on the y axis Trend Shows how the attribute amount changes over time for the selected grouping e Grouping Specifies which one or more tape drives or partitions are included in the report Select one of the following All drives by coordinate default Presents the sum total of the selected attributes for all tape drives according to their location in the library If more than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected range then the attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart All drives by physical serial number All partitions Presents the sum total of the selected attribute for all drives according to the physical tape drive serial number Selected drive by coordinate The report chart is based on an individual tape drive location in the library If more than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected range then the attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart Selected drive by physical serial number The report chart is based on an indivi
145. of the library the gear racks should remain locked in the UP position Skip step 12 and step 13 if the Control Module is at the bottom of the library If the Control Module is not at the bottom of the library perform step 12 and step 13 12 Engage the rear J in Figure 7 12 and front E in Figure 7 12 gear racks in the control module While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 12 push the gear rack down until it locks in place and no gaps appear between the front and rear gear racks in the control module and expansion module 13 To release the gear rack and move it down follow these steps e Engage the Y rails of each module in your library configuration Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened 7 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information at va _ i lt e i f a77qs004 Figure 7 13 Front and back gear racks wo O pa ion F N oO Figure 7 14 Gear racks in the up and down positions l Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 15 Figure 7 15 Placing gear rack in the Down position Front Y rail Y rail this end up 2 Rear Y rail g Squeeze here to release e From the front of the library open the I O station and access door of the 9U expansion module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go
146. of the unit and is used for inserting removing data and cleaning cartridges into and out of the library N fe 2 E e Figure 7 31 14U library with control module I O Station open a66mi049 Figure 7 32 Control module I O Station Each module s I O Station must be locked in order for the library to function properly When the library is busy performing a task such as retrieving a cartridge the library locks all I O Station doors The doors cannot be opened until the library is no longer busy If the library detects that an I O Station door is either open or unlocked the library cannot operate normally 7 32 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually There are 2 styles of I O Station Lock mechanisms The early style uses a T10 Torx wrench to rotate the lock mechanism The new style has a large push button type mechanism behind the hole f in Figure 7 33 in the I O station door Manually Unlocking the Early Style I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually To manually unlock the early style I O Station lock follow these steps 1 Insert a T10 Torx wrench in the hole in Figure 7 33 located on the front of the I O Station door of the library module you wish to open 2 Turn the wrench one quarter turn counterclockwise to unlock the door a66mi072
147. off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Function Code P Post Error Reporting Enabled When Post Error Reporting is enabled deferred check conditions are reported to the host and temporary errors are reported in the sense data Function Code Ci I will be displayed in Maintenance Mode when the drive has Post Error Reporting enabled This selection is normally used as a request from support personnel The Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 pn H Press the Unload Button once per second until either or appears in the Ci I1 SCD H or will appear in the SCD to indicate the current setting for Post Error Reporting If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Exit Maintenance Mode if you do not want_to change the current setting for Post Error Reporting For instructions see Exiting Maintenance Mode on page D 28 To disable Post Error Reporting Press and hold the Unload Button for three Cc tt seconds while J appears in the SCD The SCD changes to after you release the Unload Button Press the Unload Button once per second to select another Maintenance Mode Function To exit Maintenance Mod
148. or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 115 Indicates that the status of the robotics subsystem has Robotics changed If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue Operator Intervention 116 An error has occurred resulting in an Operator Intervention Required message Use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue Drive Online State 117 Indicates that a tape drive has been taken online or offline Change Drive Communication 121 The library set TapeAlert 1 indicating a drive communication Failure failure Library Hardware Failure 122 The library set TapeAlert 2 indicating a library hardware failure Non mechanical 124 The library set TapeAlert 4 indicating a non mechanical Hardware Failure hardware failure Cartridge Pick Problem 133 The library set TapeAlert 13 indicating a problem when picking a tape cartridge F 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table F 2 Status Traps continued Event Trap ID Description Cartridge Placement 134 The library set TapeAlert 14 indicating a problem when Problem placing a tape cartridge Drive Load Problem 135 The library set TapeAlert 15 indicating a problem when loading a tape drive Library main Access Door 136 The library set TapeAlert 16 indicating an open library access Open door Mailbox Mechanical 137
149. path is Operations gt Drive gt Change Mode 4 Once the drive is offline the blue LED on the rear of the drive should be turned ON solid blue At this point remove the drive completely from the library for at least 1 minute 5 Re install the drive and wait for the normal drive LED states to be established e green blink once per second e amber OFF e blue ON solid drive is offline 6 Using the local library operator interface take the drive online with the Operations gt Change Drive Mode command on the web client the path is Operations gt Drive gt Change Mode 7 Attempt host operations again If the drive fails immediately or the problem becomes chronic contact Service DRO50 Resolve Invalid Tape Location Problem While performing inventory the library determined that a cartridge is located in an invalid location In early level libraries that are 23U or taller the top slot in each of storage columns 4 and 5 can not be accessed by the robot and therefore can not be used for cartridge storage It is likely that this cartridge was placed into the slot manually by a user The library will not place cartridges into these slots based on host or user commands Troubleshooting Steps 1 Select the Details button to determine the barcode label of the cartridge and the coordinate where it is located 2 Open the main access door s and remove this cartridge Columns 4 and 5 are on the right side of the library
150. pe Q1 gt ae Rar l A WT Wigs SAN RS cers mA Rejp 2 x lt RAS i 12 gt LA g d i Rr a a DEST Z Mra Se Wars 5 es A ine i Og ye 2 IREN HR i 5 N ga with A E NG y 5 i os a66mi211 Model 1 tab Figure 7 80 Parking tab to unparked position 10 Close the library s I O station and access doors 11 Power on the library Removing and Replacing the Model 1 Picker Assembly from the Y Carriage Assembly Inside the Library The picker is the robotic device with mechanical fingers that open and close to handle data cartridges inside the library The picker is housed in the control module though it can traverse up and down the entire length of the library When the library is powered off the picker rests in the bottom module of the library regardless of where the control module is located These instructions describe how to replace the picker with a new one You may need to replace the picker if there are problems with the current one CAUTION Follow proper ESD protocol any time you are handling the robot assembly or any of its components picker Y carriage asembly 7 74 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information CAUTION Handle the picker assembly and flex cable gently Do not crease or tear the flex cable Required tools e T10 Torx screwdriver to loosen the picker assembly thumbscrews 1 Power off the library When the library is powered off the robot assembly
151. personnel use supplied Latches g Serial port for IBM service personnel use 3 Reconnect the Ethernet cable H in Figure 7 52 by pinching the tab and pushing the connector into the LCB Note Six slots reside below the Ethernet cable The four topmost slots are reserved for future use The two bottommost slots are designated as Ethernet H in Figure 7 52 and serial J in Figure 7 52 ports and are reserved for use by IBM Service Personnel 4 Power ON the library and wait for it to initialize This may take from 2 to 10 minutes depending on the level of firmware on the Library If the Compact Flash Card is new and has never been initialized see Upgrading the Compact Flash Card Firmware Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Upgrading the Compact Flash Card Firmware If the Compact Flash Card is new and has never been initialized it contains a minimal level of library firmware which allows the library to boot up and display an Upgrade Notification message In order to use the library you must upgrade to the latest level of library firmware Use the following steps to upgrade firmware the first time you use a new Compact Flash Card TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 1 Log on to the local operator panel as ADMIN The Network Configuration screen will appear Turn OFF the DHCP selection Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway selections
152. placed in element by some manual operator intervention e An unlabeled tape is placed in a slot by a user not by the robot Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DRO020 Resolve Library Inventory Mismatch on page 5 68 T069 Source Element Empty Description GUI Description The robot determined that a source location for a tape cartridge move operation is empty Explanation The robot has attempted to get from a drive I O or storage element and has determined that the element is empty This is distinctly NOT a SCSI illegal request situation At the beginning of the move media the library inventory has indicated that the source element was not in an empty state and it was a valid source for a move media command During recovery operations the library has concluded that the cell is genuinely empty Empty is defined as NOT containing a cartridge with a readable volume serial number Detection Scenarios The library fails to successfully get a cartridge during a move media The cartridge present sensor in the Picker indicates no cartridge at the conclusion of a GET and a subsequent inventory scan of the cell indicates that no cartridge is present Root Causes Inventory has been manually changed since last robotic inventory Cartridge was removed from or moved within the system Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR020 Res
153. power supply is missing The library can no longer detect the presence of a power supply that was previously physically installed and logically added to the system Detection Scenarios Regular polling between LCB and power supply checks for presence of the power supply Root Causes 1 Power Supply has been physically removed after being added to a powered ON system Hardware failure inside supply Hardware failure in library side connector of other electronics Disconnected module terminator or module to module cable OP ON Damaged module terminator or module to module cable with bent or broken pins Possible CRU Replacements Resolution 1 Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables Power Supply DR022 Resolve Missing Power Supply on page 5 68 5 32 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T072 Unmanaged System Fault Description GUI Description The library encountered an unmanaged fault Explanation Library firmware has reported a problem that is not associated with a specific ticket and corresponding diagnostic resolution This problem cannot be resolved without escalation to tech support and engineering Resolution Perform DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 T073 I O Storage Door Open Description GUI Description An I O station door configured for storage is open Explanation Certain I O station doors ca
154. product contains a Class II laser Do not stare into the beam C029 Laser symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined by the U S Department of Health and Human Services for example Class II Class I Class II and so forth A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or around the product Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 vii If the symbol is It means This part or unit is heavy but has a weight smaller than 18 kg 39 7 Ib Use care when lifting removing or installing this part or unit C008 gt 18kg 40 Ib Sample caution notices follow Caution The battery is a lithium ion battery To avoid possible explosion do not burn Exchange only with the IBM approved part Recycle or discard the battery as instructed by local regulations In the United States IBM has a process for the collection of this battery For information call 1 800 426 4333 Have the IBM part number for the battery unit available when you call C007 Caution The system contains circuit cards assemblies or both that contain lead solder To avoid the release of lead Pb into the environment do not burn Discard the circuit card as instructed by local regulations C014 Caution When removing the Modular Refrigeration Unit MRU immediately remove any oil residue from the MRU support shelf floor and any other area to prevent injuries because of slips or falls
155. reciclar sus productos de TI Se puede encontrar informaci n sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de IBM htip www com ibm environment products index shtml Notice This mark applies only to countries within the European Union EU and Norway Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002 96 EC concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Remarque Cette marque s applique uniquement aux pays de l Union Europ enne et a la Norv ge L etiquette du syst me respecte la Directive europ enne 2002 96 EC en mati re de D chets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques DEEE qui d termine les dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux syst mes utilis s 4 travers l Union europ enne Conform ment la directive ladite tiquette pr cise que le produit sur lequel elle est appos e ne doit pas tre jet mais tre r cup r en fin de vie ER COV TIt EU MHKBLUS PO T ICKEWTOARBHRENET COMB Cit EU i Bic et 5 BE EF RE a 2002 9G EC WEEE OF HEB HT WEF COB EUBBCBAT SHERRAARBBORMEVTLINDOAFEED TV EF CMIAWit EMAAR
156. require a drive unload manual drive unload move media etc and the drive never achieves the unloaded state Note This ticket cause will interact with explicit unload behavior Since the library will always issue an unload command it is not possible to determine if a host unload command failed first followed by a subsequent failure of a library issued unload command Root Causes Possible CRU Replacements 1 Drive is still busy with host application command execution 2 Tape drive fails to unload after the library issues an unload command 3 Defective tape cartridge e Tape Cartridge Drive Sled Resolution Perform DR003 Resolve Drive Eject Failure on page 5 61 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 7 T011 Drive Over Eject Condition Description GUI Description A drive over ejected a tape cartridge into the robot s motion path Explanation The library is about to perform a get from a tape drive and checks the tape drive status to determine if the tape cartridge is ejected LTO tape drives have demonstrated a specific failure mode where they eject a tape in an abnormal manner Normally upon eject the tape is in a particular position where it is clear of the robot motion path and it cannot be reloaded due to mechanical interlock within the tape drive load mechanism The historical failure mode is that the tape slips an additional amount out of
157. requires two terminators to be plugged into two specific ports on the rear of the library in order to automatically detect its configuration In a multi module system these terminators are placed in the expansion modules at the very top and bottom of the vertical stack In addition cables must connect all modules together Troubleshooting Steps Are the terminators and all module to module cables plugged in properly e No You reported that the cables and terminators were not plugged in correctly Select Continue then power down the library plug the cables in and power the library back on When the library powers up it should detect the presence of the cables and terminators and properly configure itself The library has determined that the problem is fixed and it will close the ticket e Yes Place both terminators on the CM to begin isolating the problem You may back up or proceed with the Self Test Self Test Failed Inspect the module connectors and terminators for bent or broken pins Contact Service to order replacement terminators Refer to your product documentation to determine how to order parts Self Test Passed Self Test passed Continue to isolate the failure by plugging the terminator into the next upper expansion module and connecting the modules with the module to module cable Once the terminators and cables are installed perform the self test again If there is no additional upper expansion module select the N
158. resources that are not being fully utilized These reports provide the customer with information necessary to determine if and when additional drives are necessary Data collected and saved for these reports include the following e Drive location module row e Drive serial number e Logical library e Megabytes read Chapter 2 Product Description 2 17 2 18 e Megabytes written e Time and date of mount in GMT e Time and date of dismount in GMT e Media motion time in seconds e Media barcode You can only access this report from the web client The path to open the report is Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting gt Drive Utilization To configure the report select the radio button beside the appropriate settings e Range Specifies the range of time covered in the report Last seven days Last four weeks default Last three months All history as far back as there is data in the log file e Attribute Specifies which values are included in the report Select one of the following Data Written Read default the amount of data written to and read from each tape drive shown separately in the chart Total Read and Write the combined total amount of data written to and read from each tape drive Mount Count the number of tape cartridge mounts Media Mount Time the total amount of time media spent in the selected drive or drives Media Motion Time the total amount of time
159. slowly falls to rest in the bottom module of the library You can service the picker assembly from this bottom module 2 Open the bottom module s I E station and access doors 3 Reach inside the access door and rotate the picker so you can access the X axis flex cable which is located to the left of the picker To obtain easy access to the X axis flex cable rotate the picker so its fingers point to the left rear corner of the control module 4 Disconnect the X axis flex cable Using your hand squeeze the tab of the flex cable and then pull the cable out and up The other end of the flex cable remains attached Ws SS 4 a66mi212 Figure 7 81 Disconnecting the flex cable 5 Using the T10 Torx screwdriver loosen the thumbscrews located at the front and back of the picker assembly You may need to slide the picker to access the thumbscrews Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 75 RZ toe IE thumbscrews i PFE f A ae sD xy A S j tip of M 2 9 yo CO i r 7 i e i f eT Qo Cf mn A Mi b off 3 ee nE ria p 8 7 if ot Ee _ e Pes Soe q E ta et _ la Figure 7 82 Loosening the thumbscrews 7 76 6 o w 10 Lift the picker assembly up and out of the control module through the access door You will need to turn it on its side to remove it from the access door Replace the picker assembly with the new one W
160. successfully the tape drive rewinds and unloads the tape and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed e If the copy operation fails an error code appears in the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D be tape drive unloads the tape cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test Approximate Run Time 10 seconds per loop Number of Loops This test runs until stopped by pressing the Unload Button m Function Code performs a check of the host interface circuitry and host connector on the drive Note This test requires that SCSI drives be terminated by either the terminator on the connector or at the end of the bus Before you select this function disconnect the SCSI cable of the drive that is closest to the server Then attach the SCSI wrap plug to that SCSI connector 1 Make sure that the host interface wrap plug is connected to the host interface connector at the rear of the drive 2 If the drive is a SCSI drive make sure that the drive is terminated at its SCSI connector or at the SCSI bus 3 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 4 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Cc oO
161. tape for updating a LTO 4 drive must have been created on another LTO 4 drive with the same host interface type e g SAS or Fibre Channel and likewise a FMR for updating a LTO 3 drive must have been created on another LTO 3 drive with the same host interface type e g SCSI or Fibre Channel Each generation of LTO and each attachment type of drive have different firmware images Important Before you update drive firmware during this procedure make sure that tapes are not mounted in any of the drives If the cartridges are mounted in drives during the update process the library loses track of the cartridge home cell in storage resulting in library and host inventory issues Creating a Drive FMR Firmware Cartridge TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information You must create an FMR cartridge if you do not already have one to update drive firmware with this method FMR cartridges are created using a blank scratch data cartridge To create an FMR cartridge of a drive firmware version already in use in your library follow the steps below 1 From the Op Panel select Tools gt Drive Mgmt Create Firmware Cartridge 2 Select the drive type and drive from which you want to create the FMR cartridge 3 When the Operator Panel displays the request place a blank scratch cartridge into the top slot of the empty I O station If other cartridges reside in the I O Station remove them before inserting the FMR cartridge After the
162. that are saved e Current library firmware e Network settings IP address Subnet Mask amp Gateway addresses e Feature Code licenses keys e Logical library configuration e Cartridge slot assignments e Cleaning slot configuration e I O Station configuration e Drive IDs SCSI ID Fibre Loop ID SAS ID e Encryption method selections e Administrator and user account information Limits on Restoring a Saved Configuration If your library is running firmware version 600G or later you can restore a saved configuration that was created with firmware version 410G or later If you need to restore a configuration created with a firmware version earlier than 410G contact IBM Technical Support Key Path Diagnostics From the Web User Interface Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics An Encryption Key path diagnostic function is provided to assist the Administrative user in the setup configuration or troubleshooting of Library Managed Encryption LME enabled libraries This diagnostic consists of four tests 1 Drive Test This is a drive communication test to ensure that the Library Drive Interface LDI is functioning properly 2 Ethernet Test This is a key server ping test of all IP addresses associated with LME configured drives 6 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 3 Key Path Diagnostic This is a communication test used to establish a link to a key manager and ensure that the commun
163. the Fibre Channel cables are installed correctly 5 Go to one of the following procedures e Fixing Intermittent Fibre Channel Errors on page D 57 Fixing a Consistent Error with a Single Drive on a Fibre Channel Loop 1 Ensure that the tape drive is powered ON 2 Verify that the tape drive s serial number is the same as the drive serial number that the server program is using 3 Ensure that the drive s Fibre Channel AL_PA is set correctly that it is on the loop and that it is not being used by another device The tape drive must be able to detect light and communicate with the server 4 Run the Fibre Channel wrap test at the drive s Fibre Channel connector see Function Code 6 in Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page p3 e If the test fails replace the tape drive e If the test is successful go to step 5 5 Run the Fibre Channel wrap test at the end of the fiber cable see Function Code 6 in Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page D 33 If the test fails replace the fiber cable e If the test is successful go to step 6 6 Check the Fibre Channel cable connection at the server Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 55 D 56 Using a device driver utility such as ntutil or tapeutil verify that the drive is properly configured and available at the server If the problem persists the fault may be with the server s hardware or software Refer to your server s service man
164. the chassis frame J in Figure 7 132 that prevents the gear rack from falling down too far when the locking mechanism is released Bend the tab out slightly so the gear rack can be removed 4 Slightly push up and pinch the gear rack locking mechanism to unlock the front gear rack J in Figure 7 132 a66mi074 Figure 7 132 Front gear rack 5 While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism JJ in Figure 7 132 push the gear rack down then release your hold on the locking mechanism 6 Remove the gear rack by pulling the black tab and the locking mechanism through the keyhole slots in the chassis frame Note Don t lose the spring H in Figure 7 133 on page 7 118 that is recessed in the gear rack slot Replacing a Front Gear Rack T 2 Using your thumb push the metal slide J in 7 118 and locking mechanism into the keyhole slots in the library chassis Lay the library module on the left side from front Figure 7 133 on page 7 118 toward the gear rack locking mechanism J in Figure 7 133 on pag and hold it in place while inserting the black tab f in Figure 7 133 on page Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 117 a66mi059 Figure 7 133 Gear rack detail 7 118 3 While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism push up on the gear rack then release your hold on the locking mechanism 4 Bend the small metal tab Ef in Figure 7 133 in slightly to prevent the gear
165. the drive sled identified in the RAS ticket wait for 1 minute and then re insert and secure the same drive sled into its drive bay location 6 Wait for the drive to initialize and become ready 7 Make sure the logical library partition is configured for the correct encryption method and no RAS ticket is generated against the drive 8 From the remote user interface view the library configuration by selecting Reports gt Library Configuration 9 Click on the respective drive coordinate and verify the drive encryption method setting 10 Contact Service if an issue remains 11 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR111 Resolve Drive Encryption Service Request Monitoring Problem A tape drive reported that an encryption request needed to be serviced but the drive did not indicate required encryption key request details The drive sled controller suspended encryption key exchange request monitoring until the tape cartridge is unloaded Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 93 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Note the drive sled coordinate from the RAS ticket and close the ticket Unload the tape cartridge from the drive Reload the tape cartridge and restart the host application If the RAS ticket displays again clos
166. the first entry You could create three entries for Recipient A as follows 1 send both reports out on Monday 2 send Drive Utilization out on Thursday and 3 send Media Integrity out on Thursday in a different entry The recipient is the same but the reports sent in each entry are different Before the library can send email notifications you must configure the library email account From the remote UI select Manage Library gt Settings gt Email Notifications Click Select Action select an action and click Go You can modify the settings of an existing email notification at any time after it is created If an email notification is no longer needed you can delete it To save or email data 1 From the remote UI go to Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting and select either Drive Utilization or Media Integrity to generate a report For more information on generating a report see Advanced Reporting Reports on page 2 16 2 Click Display Report at the bottom of the page to display the report viewing screen 3 Scroll down to the bottom of the report viewing screen to the Retrieve the Report Data File box 4 Do one of the following actions a To save the report data as a csv file click Save b To email the report data as a csv file type the name of a recipient in the empty field next to the Email button then click Email Each email notification includes an optional comment text box that you can use to
167. the received flash image 2 Program its flash with the Robot flash image A necessary auto level file failed validation Root Causes 1 Flash Image CRC failure on the received file 2 Hardware failures that result in unsuccessful flash programming Possible FRUs Resolution Picker Assembly Robot Assembly Perform DR085 Resolve Robotics Auto Level Failure on page 5 87 T118 Degraded Robotics Flash Description This ticket occurs with Model 2 robots only GUI Description The robotics firmware auto leveling process completed but failed to update one of the redundant robot controller flash partitions Explanation The library was not able to update one of the robotics flash parts but the other was successfully updated The robotics subsystem can still become ready but the flash is in a degraded mode and the backup image is unavailable This is a warning ticket Detection Scenario The robotics firmware auto level process was unable to update one of the Robot Controller Board s flash parts Root Causes One of the Robot Controller Board s flash partitions is bad Possible FRUs Robot Assembly Resolution Perform DR086 Resolve Robotics Degraded Flash Warning T120 Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure Tape in Picker Description GUI Description A Y axis motion error occurred while the robot was moving a tape cartridge Explanation A y axis motion error that
168. the sides of the library Use of the sling is strongly recommended for a 9U module A 5U module is much lighter in weight and it may not be necessary to use the sling 2 Being very careful lay the library on its side 3 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver remove the foot pads attached to the bottom of the library Store these parts for future use 4 Carefully return the library to an upright position on top of the sling Installing Library Foot Pads For a desktop installation foot pads must be installed on the bottom module of your library To install the library foot pads 1 Being very careful lay the module on its side 2 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver install the foot pads on the bottom of the library chassis See Figure 7 147 on page 7 132 for foot pad locations Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 131 fse i oO Figure 7 147 Foot pad Locations 3 Carefully return the library to an upright position 4 Use the lifting sling to place the library module in the desktop location 5 When you finish these desktop installation steps store the installation sling in a secure location for possible future use Manual Cartridge Removal from a Drive The purpose of this section is to assist you in determining the condition of the cartridge or the magnetic tape and to direct you to the procedure you must follow to remove the cartridge Note These procedure must be performe
169. the y axis The detected failure is likely to be a genuine hardware failure Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the main access door s and look for any obvious problems such as damage to the robot assembly or tape cartridges and debris that may have collected on the floor of the library Reposition any tape cartridges found extending from storage locations Remove any tape cartridges found in the picker assembly Inspect any recovered tape cartridges for damage af on Close the doors and wait for the system to complete initialization Use the Tools gt Service gt Library gt Robot test to determine if the failure is permanent If the test fails replace the Y Axis Picker Assembly If the test passes continue to close this Ticket N 8 Make sure the logical libraries are online and continue normal library operations Monitor for recurrence of the problem DRO89 Resolve X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure Problem The library robot has failed to perform a motion in the x z or theta axis The detected failure is likely to be a genuine hardware failure Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the main access door s and look for any obvious problems such as damage to the robot assembly or tape cartridges and debris that may have collected on the floor of the library Reposition any tape cartridges found extending from storage locations Remove any tape cartridges found in the picker assembly Inspect any recovered tape cartr
170. to Verifying Front and Rear Gear Racks Alignment on page Ensure the Y axis Assembly is level from front to back If a gear rack gap was discovered or if the Y axis Assembly was previously removed and replaced one side may be off by one or two teeth With the top cover removed and power OFF slowly lift the Y axis Assembly and re insert see M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 77 Check for broken gear teeth on the Y motor If there are broken teeth replace the Y Axis Assembly The Picker Assembly does not move within five minutes after Power ON a Check cable connections from the Cable Spool to the Y axis Assembly and from the Y axis Assembly to the Picker With Access Doors closed note if the green LED on top of the Picker is ON e For a 5U library open the I O Station door to view e For a 14U library or larger look through the expansion module window If the green LED is OFF suspect the Picker Assembly the Y axis Assembly the module to module communication terminator or an open door If the Picker Assembly is still not working contact your next level of support Performance If the library is experiencing excessive retries and or the Y axis Assembly seems noisy Ensure both front and rear gear racks on all modules above the bottom most module on a multiple module unit such as a 14U library are in the lock down position Gear racks between modules must not have a gap between th
171. to them If you must manually set the write protect switch slide it left or right to the desired position Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 7 Capacity Scaling To control the capacity of the cartridge for example to obtain a faster seek time issue the SCSI command SET CAPACITY For information about this command refer to the IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference WORM Write Once Read Many Cartridge Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once Read Many WORM method for storing data on tape The LTO Ultrium generation 3 and 4 drives enable WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive Because standard read write media are incompatible with the WORM feature a specially formatted WORM tape cartridge see Figure D 4 is required Each WORM cartridge has a unique worldwide cartridge identifier WWCID which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number a67b0024 Figure D 4 Ultrium Data Cartridge on the left WORM Cartridge on the right Type of Cartridge Case Color Native Data Capacity Recording Format Ultrium 5 WORM Burgundy and silver 1500 GB 3000 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 1280 tracks gray compression sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 4 WORM Green and silver gray 800 GB 1600 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 896 tracks compression sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 3
172. type of cartridge for the desired operation and continue If the cartridge was loaded to the drive via a host application remove the cartridge via the host application Insert the proper type of cartridge for the desired operation and continue 5 66 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DRO016 Resolve Prevent Allow Media Removal Problem The library has been commanded to perform a cartridge move from a drive but the drive is currently preventing any media removal due to having received a SCSI Prevent Allow Media Removal command to prevent a tape cartridge removal The library cannot unload and eject the tape cartridge from the drive until the host application issues a SCSI Prevent Allow Media Removal command to allow a tape cartridge unload operation Troubleshooting Step Determine which host currently has a prevent media removal set Use the host application or OS functionality to clear the Prevent mode DR018 Resolve Drive Cleaning Requirement Problem A drive has reported that it requires cleaning The drive cannot be used for normal operations again until it is successfully cleaned This problem should be addressed differently based on your system setup Troubleshooting Steps There are two cases to consider 1 Library controlled or host controlled cleaning is enabled e Prior to the tape drive requesting cleaning the cleaning process should have been triggered already when the tape
173. typing ipconfig renew e Windows informs you when a new lease has been obtained e The IP address of the laptop should be in the 10 10 10 x range TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information C gt ipconfig release Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection 2 Connection specific DNS Suffix Ie Nels chic ey Re eo t o Subnet Masks w s e ms es sez Default Gateways lt soe e n 2 2 a 8 Ethernet adapter AGN Virtual Network Adapter Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address ae a ene e a Subnet Maske ma a e a sens Default Gateways 22 es ce C gt ipconfig renew Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection 2 Connection specific DNS Suffix DP Address lt n ues cies e co lt 10 10 10 100 SubnetaMask e oa a cute css ores esta ss 20209 2000 Default Gateway Ethernet adapter AGN Virtual Network Adapter Connection specific DNS Suffix IRRAddress ea tere ches en ese cance ts Subnet Mask so s s m e s oe y Default Gateways s s e o m s o r C gt ee p 6 Type ping 10 10 10 1 to verify your connection to the library If the ping is not successful repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Open Internet Explorer 8 Type in the IP Address 10 10 10 1 9 Type in your service username and password Methods of Capturing Logs these methods for retrieving library and drive logs using the Web User Interface or a SCSI or Fibre Channel Interface Table
174. 0 DR003 5 61 DRO04 5 61 DR005 5 62 DRO06 5 62 DR007 5 63 DR008 5 63 DR009 5 63 DR010 5 64 DR011 5 64 DR012 5 65 DR014 5 66 DR015 5 66 DR018 5 67 DR019 5 67 DR020 5 68 DR021 5 68 DR022 5 68 DR024 5 69 DR026 5 70 DR028 5 71 DR029 5 71 DRO30 5 72 DR031 5 72 DR032 5 73 DR033 5 73 DR034 5 73 DR035 5 74 DR036 5 74 DR037 5 75 DR075 5 82 DR076 5 82 DR077 5 83 DR078 5 83 DR079 5 83 DRO80 5 84 DRO81 5 84 DR082 5 84 DRO84 5 87 Diagnostic Resolution continued DRO85 5 87 DRO86 5 87 DRO88 5 88 DR089 5 88 DR090 5 88 DR091 5 88 DR092 5 89 DR093 5 89 DR094 5 89 DR095 5 87 5 90 DRO96 5 90 DR098 5 90 DR099 5 90 DR100 5 91 DR101 5 91 DR102 5 91 DR103 5 92 DR105 5 92 DR106 5 92 DR110 5 93 DR111 5 93 DR118 5 94 Diagnostic Resolutions 5 1 5 59 Diagnostics 6 1 clear error code log D 35 copying drive dump to tape D 32 disabling post error reporting D 41 display error code log D 35 enabling post error reporting D 41 Fast Read Write Test D 39 forcing a drive dump D 31 Load Unload Test D 40 RS 422 Wrap Test D 34 SCSI Host Interface Wrap Test D 33 selecting function D 26 tape drive D 29 test cartridge D 36 Test Head D 38 Write Performance Test D 37 diagnostics key path 6 14 diagrams C 1 dimensions of tape library 2 36 Display SCD dot D 2 single character D 2 Doors Access 2 4 DROO1 5 59 DR002 5 60 DR003 5 61 DRO04 5 61 DR005 5 62 DRO06 5 62 DR007 5 63 DR008 5 63 DR009
175. 0 0000 7000 0300 0000 001C 0000 0000 5200 0700 20B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 058A 0212 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Figure E 2 AIX ERRPT Drive Error Log Example Table E 2 AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data Hex Description 01 SCSI Command 0000 0200 0000 Command Parameters 70 Byte 0 of Tape Drive Sense Data 03 Sense key Hardware error in this example 5200 ASC ASCQ Additional Sense Code Additional Sense Code Qualifier 20B0 FSC Fault Symptom Code 058A Relative LPOS 02 SCSI ID Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 3 SCSI Bus Error Example 1 a LABEL SCSI_ERR10 IDENTIFIER 0BA49C99 Date Time Wed Oct 17 09 55 32 Sequence Number 16140 Machine Id 00003ABF4C00 Node Id ofgtsm Class H Type TEMP Resource Name scsi3 Resource Class adapter Resource Type sym896 Location 40 59 VPD Product Specific DUAL CHANNEL PCI TO ULTRA2 SCSI ADAPTER RaretaNumbetrercccrsscsrsrsesrerverecete 03N3606 EC Kevelaer aneen seis ete F71335 Manufacture IDe crocs ee A16592 SerialNumber nan eee oee 0749 Description SCSI BUS ERROR Probable Causes CABLE CABLE TERMINATOR DEVICE ADAPTER Failure Causes CABLE LOOSE OR DEFECTIVE DEVICE ADAPTER Rec
176. 0 degree angle to the control module Insert the front and rear lower guide rollers into the gear rack on the Y rail then lower the robot slightly until both the front and rear gears make contact with the gear rack Note It is very important to hold the robot at a 30 degree angle until both the front and rear gears contact the gear rack on the Y rail Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 71 Loziwigge g0ziuigge rotate the robot into the level position the gears will rotate and engage in the front or rear lower guide rollers to exit the gear rack on the Y rail As you gear rack 4 Rotate the robot so that it is level with the library Do not allow either the Zoey Ee Y Figure 7 77 Lift the Robot at a 30 degree angle 7 72 T 3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 7 78 Rotate the Robot 5 While supporting the center of the robot tray slowly lower the robot until the top of the Y climber front shelf mount is even with the front gear rack on the Y rail You may need to exert slight downward pressure on the robot to engage the gears in the gear rack and begin lowering the robot While continuing to hold the robot level verify that the Y climber rear shelf mount is level with the rear gear rack on the Y rail Check both places indicated in the figure below If it is level continue to the next step If it is off by more than
177. 00 0000 4400 8100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0200 4801 E300 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Gi 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Figure E 1 AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example Table E 1 AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data Hex Description A5 SCSI Command 0001 1009 0101 Command Parameters 70 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data 04 Sense Key 4400 ASC ASCQ Additional Sense Code Additional Sense Code Qualifier 81 Library SAT Service Action Ticket Code E 2 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Drive Error Log Example LABEL TAPE_ERR1 IDENTIFIER 4865FA9B Date Time Wed Oct 10 11 39 43 Sequence Number 25264 Machine ID 000D090D4C00 Node ID tsm Class H Type PERM Resource Name rmt2 Resource Class tape Resource Type LTO Location 40 60 00 2 0 VPD Manufacturer ene ereen Era ote IBM Machine Type and Model ULT3576 TD3 Serial NUMBER see ee eei 1300015078 Device Specific FW xxxx Firmware Level Description TAPE OPERATION ERROR Probable Causes TAPE User Causes MEDIA DEFECTIVE DIRTY READ WRITE HEAD Recommended Actions FOR REMOVABLE MEDIA CHANGE MEDIA AND RETRY PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES Detail Data SENSE DATA 0602 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000 000
178. 04 5 3 T005 5 4 T006 5 5 T007 5 5 T008 5 6 T009 5 7 T010 5 7 T013 5 9 T017 5 11 T018 5 11 T019 5 12 T020 5 12 T021 5 13 T022 5 14 T023 5 14 T024 5 14 T025 5 15 T026 5 15 T027 5 16 T028 5 16 T029 5 17 T030 5 17 T031 5 18 T032 5 18 T033 5 19 T034 5 19 T035 5 19 T036 5 20 T037 5 20 T038 5 20 T039 5 21 Updating firmware continued T040 5 21 using ITDT Tool 6 28 T041 5 21 using SCSI interface 6 29 T045 5 22 user interfaces 4 1 T046 5 22 Operator Panel 4 1 T047 5 22 user privileges 4 10 T048 5 23 web user interface 4 8 T049 5 23 user privileges 4 10 T050 5 24 T051 5 24 T052 5 25 V 1053 929 Variables F 1 1 ee voltage 2 36 T060 5 26 T061 5 27 T062 5 27 T063 5 28 W T064 5 29 Web User Interface 4 1 4 8 T065 5 29 logging in 4 8 T066 5 30 menus 4 8 T067 5 30 screen elements 4 8 T068 5 31 weight of library components 2 36 T069 5 31 width of tape library 2 36 T070 5 32 WORM T071 5 32 requirements D 8 T072 5 33 WORM Write Once Read Many D 8 T073 5 33 WORM media errors D 8 T074 5 33 Write Once Read Many see T075 5 34 WORM D 8 T076 5 34 Write Performance Test D 37 T077 5 35 Write Protect Switch T079 5 35 setting D 6 T081 5 36 T089 5 42 T090 5 42 Y T091 5 43 Y Motor T092 5 43 remove replace 7 60 T093 5 43 fps Y axis Picker Assembly TIo 27 remove replace 7 54 T146 5 58 T149 5 58 Tape drives channel calibration 2 16 power management 2 16 quantity in library 2 14 speed matching 2 15 TapeAlert Flags for
179. 11 rack installation safety x Read Write capability D 9 rear panel 2 5 drives 2 6 Library Control Blade 2 5 power supply 2 7 redundant power supply 2 16 reinstall 7 35 remote access 6 13 remove 7 1 7 36 7 39 7 129 remove from a rack 7 4 remove replace 7 58 Remove replace procedures 7 1 Removing Model 1 Robot Assembly Removing Robot Assembly 7 66 Removing Replacing Model 1 Picker Assembly Removing Picker Assembly 7 74 Removing Replacing Model 1 Y carriage Assembly Removing Y carriage Assembly 7 76 repair preparation 7 3 repairs 7 3 replace 7 1 7 36 7 38 7 41 replace in rack 7 4 Replacing Model 1 Picker Assembly 7 74 Replacing Y carriage Assembly 7 76 reporting 2 19 2 20 advanced 2 16 drive utilization 2 17 reports drive utilization 2 16 media integrity 2 16 resetting drives 6 40 Resolve Unload Timeout general drive diagnostic 5 62 restarting the library 6 41 returning library to normal operations 7 3 RID tag 6 44 robotic system 2 8 RS 422 Wrap Test RS 6000 error information E 1 D 34 S safety flap 7 36 7 38 7 39 7 41 safety information electrostatic discharge 6 4 7 3 laser compliance ix laser safety ix possible hazards viii 6 4 SCSI bus problems fixing D 51 SCSI Host Interface Wrap Test D 33 SCSI interface description 2 14 sending your comments iii Sense data using B 1 sense data library B 1 servers supported 2 38 Service contact information 5 68 X 4 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Inform
180. 128 Incompatible Robot Installation T129 Drive Sled Firmware Image Error 5 26 5 26 P27 5 27 5 28 5 29 sod 5 30 5 30 5 31 5 31 5 32 5 32 5 33 5 33 5 33 5 34 5 34 5 35 5 35 5 36 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 42 5 43 5 43 5 43 5 44 5 44 5 45 5 45 5 45 5 46 5 46 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 49 5 49 5 50 5 50 5 51 Dol 5 51 5 52 5 52 T130 Tape Drive Cleaning Failure T132 Hardware Clock Failure T133 Barcode Label Mapping Failure T134 Barcode Scanner Malfunction T135 Tape Drive Type Change T136 Robotics Z Axis Motion Failure T137 Display Assembly Communication Failure 7 T139 Robotics Cotaznunieation Loss T141 Unknown Picker Calibration Offsets T142 Robotics Y Axis Hardware Failure T143 Unlabeled Cartridge Detected T144 I O Station Door Sensor Stuck T145 Media Removal Notification T146 Media Removal Warning T149 Key Path Diagnostic Delay T153 Drive Control Failure T154 Drive Encryption Monitoring Warning Diagnostic Resolutions DR001 Resolve Picker Cartridge Presence DR002 Resolve Tape Cartridge Recovery DR003 Resolve Drive Eject Failure DR004 Resolve Full Destination Element DR005 Resolve Motion Failure DR006 Resolve Unload Timeout DR007 Resolve Barcode Scanner Issue DRO008 Resolve Stuck I O
181. 2 Robot Assembly in the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel Removing the Picker Assembly from the M2 Robot Assembly Inside of a Library The Picker Assembly is designed so that it can be removed from the M2 Robot Assembly by a service technician while installed in a library The M2 Robot Assembly remains in the library and the Picker Assembly is removed through the front door In the photos below the top of the library is removed for clarity 1 If the M2 Robot Assembly is at the bottom of the library open the front door and manually raise it into the Control Module 2 Engage the picker locking mechanism See i Figure 7 102 on page 7 92 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 91 a66mi053 Figure 7 102 Picker locking mechanism 3 If necessary remove the I O Station s from the library 4 Rotate the M2 Picker Assembly so that it is facing the right side of the library and slide it all the way forward toward the front as shown in Figure 7 103 on 7 92 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Ea Tw amp wiseut E k a66mi140 Figure 7 103 Rotate M2 Picker Assembly 5 Lift the M2 Robot Assembly as shown in Figure 7 104 to gain access to the underside of the Picker Assembly A T E eerseeeeeoeo0ese a66mi141 Figure 7 104 Lift M2 Picker Assembly 6 Remove any media that is in the picker Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove an
182. 26 Push the column towards the rear of the library H in Figure 7 126 to engage the locking tabs on the back of the column Repeat this procedure for each column For a 5U library perform Replacing the M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 79 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 109 7 110 Cable Spool Assembly The movement of the Y axis Assembly is controlled by the Cable Spool The cable spool and Y carriage assembly enable the picker to move up and down the span of the library from one module to another The cable spool is housed in the control module In order to remove the cable spool you must also remove the Y carriage assembly There are two versions of the cable spool assembly see Cable Spool Assembly on page 3 9 Although the versions look different they are completely interchangeable and the remove replace procedures are the same Either spool may be in the library and you may receive either as a Field Support Unit FRU The part number for both is the same Preparing the Library 1 Power off the library When the library is powered off the robot assembly slowly falls to rest in the lowest module of the library 2 Park the robot assembly in the control module Before unstacking the library the robot assembly must be placed in the control module a Open the I O station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into the control modul
183. 2mm the robot is NOT LEVEL Disengage the robot from the gear rack and repeat the previous step a66mi210 Figure 7 79 Lowering the robot 6 Once you have verified that the front and rear shelf mounts are level with the Y racks then lower the robot so that it rests on the parking tab If your library consists of a single control module release the robot so that it rests on the bottom of the unit 7 Replace the top cover 8 Re stack the library modules as necessary Note If your library is rackmounted you will need to perform additional steps to add the modules to the rack Unpark the robot assembly If your library consists of a single control module skip this step a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no loner rests on the parking tab CAUTION Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis base plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot b With your free hand move the parking tab to the unparked position so that it is removed completely from the interior of the module swivel the parking tab away from you When replaced correctly the parking tab will not accidentally swivel into the path of the robot Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 73 c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library a A we y oth L EENE ND tes ch
184. 301 00000000 0000 C5D3FOF5 00000188 00E00180 8983EBC2 4B9D8001 00033A36 20E00902 01450000 ELO5 h ic B 00000000 0040 F3F8F2F8 F4F4F6F3 C1F00002 00240000 00200000 00050001 00140004 00000002 38284463A0 00000000 0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40400000 00000009 00000000 00000000 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000009 Q0OQE3ZCI 00000000 O0AO D7D4D3C2 F1F94040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 PMLB19 00000000 OOCO 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00000000 OOE F6F3C1FO FOFOFOF1 0000E2D3 C9C3C9D6 4040E5F5 D9F3D4FO 40400000 00000000 63A00001 SLICIO V5R3M0 00000000 0100 01030000 00000000 00000141 00000000 00000000 01950000 00000000 00000197 00000000 0120 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000090000 00000009 00000000 0140 E3C1D7F2 F7404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00070001 00000000 0160 00000000 10200003 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00099001E 00000188 00000000 0180 F8807800 28440001 00002600 21410400 63A00001 93500100 45381202 05080009 00000000 01A0 00000000 00004624 00000000 00000000 00040000 00003580 0001A170 02903435 Product Activity Log Page 3 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 00000000 01CO 36310049 09007100 03000000 001C0000 00005300 06003119 96010002 00000000 00000000 01E0 00000000 00000000 03010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 90000000 00000000 0200 00000000 0000D9C
185. 37 Figure 6 16 on page 6 38 For 6 36 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 6 15 Spooler cable connector and original Y motor assembly connectors Table 6 7 Robot Assembly connectors is E oO Spooler cable connector Y motor assembly connector Y motor assembly connector Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 37 a66mi106 Figure 6 16 Original picker assembly connector e For the M2 Robot Assembly see W Ef and H in Figure 6 17 3 oO o Figure 6 17 Spooler cable connector and M2 Robot controller board connectors 6 38 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 6 8 M2 Robot Assembly connectors Spooler cable connector Robot controller board connector Robot controller board connector 5 S Robot controller board connector Taking the Drives Library Online Offline Taking the drives or a library logical library online makes it accessible to host applications via the SAN Taking the drives or a library logical library offline makes it inaccessible to host applications via the SAN Servicing some components requires only that you take the library offline while servicing other components requires that you power OFF the entire library For details see Required Library State on page 7 2 Taking a 1 2 3 Taking a 1 2 3 Drive Online Using the library s Opera
186. 4 5 64 5 65 5 66 5 66 5 67 5 67 5 67 5 68 5 68 5 68 5 69 5 69 5 69 5 70 5 70 2 O71 p71 s 5 72 5 72 3 73 5 73 273 5 74 5 74 975 s5795 5 75 DR041 Resolve Robot Installation DR042 Resolve Missing Cleaning Cartridge DR043 Resolve Invalid Cleaning Cartridge DR044 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 4 Media Error DRO45 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 5 6 Read Write Failure DR046 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 8 Suspect Data Grade Tape DR047 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 15 Cartridge Memory Failure i DR048 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 16 Forced Eject DR049 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 30 31 Drive Hardware Error DR050 Resolve Invalid Tape Location DR051 Resolve Library SN Label Detection DR053 Resolve Network Configuration Issue DR054 Resolve Open Drive Bay DR055 Resolve Installation amp Verification Test ETO s oa a amp oe BOR ee a DR056 Resolve Module Communication DR068 Resolve Incompatible Tape Drive DR069 Resolve Drive Firmware Update Failure DRO70 Resolve Tape Drive Firmware Mismatch DR072 Resolve Tape Drive Auto level Failure DR074 Resolve Unassigned Inaccessible Tape Cartridge F DR075 Resolve installation amp Verification Test Warning DR076 Resolve Get Failure DR077 Resolve Invalid Cleaning Tape DRO78 Resolve Tape Load Unload Failure DRO79 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue wee DR080
187. 4 The compact flash from a system already in use is placed into a new replacement module 5 28 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Root Causes The Library Control Blade has been swapped between libraries WWNN label is damaged Bar code scanner is not working properly Entire communication path to bar code scanner is not working properly ao Pon Library module is replaced Possible CRU Replacements Possible FRU Replacements Library Control Blade e Picker Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR007 Resolve Barcode Scanner Issue on page 5 63 T064 LCB Hardware Failure Description GUI Description The library controller board experienced a hardware failure Detection Scenarios Explanation The library encounters an error which appears to be isolated to hardware on the Library Control Blade itself Code detects a board level voltage problem Root Causes Board level voltage problems Possible CRU Replacements 1 Library Control Blade 2 Display Door and I E PCB DIEB Resolution e Observe library component LEDs refer to Interpreting LEDs on page e Refer to instructions to remove and replace the Library Control Blade see Library Control Blade or Compact Flash Card on page 7 44 T065 Robot Over Current Condition Description GUI Description Robot power is interrupted due to an over current condition
188. 4 6 4 7 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 SnapHat battery holder Front panel of a 14U library Rear panel of a 14U library The library control blade Storage columns Model 1 Robot Assembly with Original Cable Spool Model 2 Robot Assembly Picker Assembly and Y carriage Assembly Robot Assembly M2 Robot Assembly M2 Label on the M2 Robot Assembly Ultra160 SCSI Tape Drives in the rie control module A i LTO 5 Tape Drive Ports Library Location Coordinates Drive location coordinates Power supply location coordinates Ultrium Cartridge Front view of a 14U ne with the L O Station door open s 2 e Rear view of a 5U library Rear view of a 14U library I O Station Lock Assembly installed 3 in ithe library I O Station Lock Assembly top view I O Station with Slide Assembly Access Door open showing back of Operator Panel E Gear racks inside the library Original Y axis Picker Assembly M2 Robot Assembly Home Sensor Flag Cable spool assembly Library Control Blade external library view i Library Control Blade aad Compact Flash Card x a ae ae a A Power Supply LTO 3 drive sleds Operator Panel Login screen for firmware versions prior to 585G Operator Panel Login screen for firmwar versions 585G and later g Operator Panel common header elements and subsystem status buttons Home Screen Capacity View Setup menu screen Operations menu screen Tools menu screen
189. 44 clockwise drawing the LBA into the cartridge Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 143 a82ru009 Figure 7 158 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Heo N D Loader motor worm gear Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide bearing A B Lever Rotator stub Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear Threader worm gear Threader intermediate gear As the tape leader block assembly LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 158 stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure 7 157 on page 7 143 Notice the a Loader mechanism gear J in Figure 7 158 nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism b Position of the rotate stub J in Figure 7 158 c Front loader motor worm gear F in Figure 7 158 Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear EJ in Figure 7 158 to turn Rotate the loader motor worm gear in Figure 7 158 to turn the threader mechanism gear J in Fig counterclockwise Continue turning until the rotator stub J in Figure 7 158 loses contact with the lever J in Figure 7
190. 5 D8400009 DIEZOOOC 02000000 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180000 00000000 0220 00000000 0000C5D9 D940C3C8 C3D20444 8502D9E2 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180309 00000000 0240 00008000 0000E2D5 E2C47100 03000000 001C0000 0000C5D9 D7C11202 O5D80000 ERPA Q 00000000 0260 00171202 O5D8D9C5 E2D70000 00171202 05D8D9E2 00000000 D4C5C4C9 C10000C3 QRESP QRS MEDIA C 00000000 0280 D7D7F1F2 F5C500D4 E3C1D7C3 D3D500C3 D7D7F6F4 FOFOOOE4 C6C9FOFO F8F7F1C3 PP125E MTAPCLN CPP6400 UF100871C y 00000000 02A0 D7D7F1F8 F5C600D5 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000000 PP185F N sssssssssssssss 00000000 O2CO 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 C3D7D7F6 F3FOC3D5 s sssssssssssesess CPP630CN 00000000 02E0 F6F3C1FO FOF3F5FO FOFOFOFO FOFOFOFO FOFOFOFO FOFIF9F7 F8FOFOF7 0000E8D5 63A0935000000000000001978007 YN 00000000 0300 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 CENE OMRU TAER PERET ANET O Tie erent V Retrieving from an HP UX System The HP UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library in syslog var adm syslog 10g When you have located the error information refer to the troubleshooting information in this manual Retrieving from a Sun System The Sun System provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library in system errolog var adm messages When you have located the error information refer to the t
191. 50 watts Table C 2 Typical expansion module EU power requirements Item Volts Amps DC Watts AC Watts Drive sleds 200 235 29 4x50 Drive Sled 1x1 40 23 5 10w Total 320 352 91 Power Supply 350 watts Interpreting Library Diagrams Each component has a specific role that is critical in the library s overall performance Components serve either a logic i e processes data or interconnect i e carries signals between components function within the library The following table lists the library components their module location s and their overall function i e logic or interconnect Component Module Function Library Control Blade LCB Control module Logic Backplane Connect boards Control module BCB1 amp Interconnect BCB1 BCB2 BCB3 expansion modules BCB2 amp BCB3 Power supply Control module amp expansion Power module with drives Servo amp Motor Driver Boards Control module Logic SMD1 amp interconnect SMD1 amp SMD2 SMD2 Door amp Import Export Board Control module Logic DIEB Drive Sled Interconnect Control module DSIB1 amp Interconnect Boards DSIB1 amp DSIB2 expansion module DSIB1 or DSIB2 Library Control Blade LCB The LCB1 is a critical logic component of the library It is only located in the control module The LCB1 serves as the brain or primary control board for library operati
192. 6 1 Methods of Capturing Drive Logs Type of Error Log Operator Panel Web User Interface SCSI Fibre Interface Library Not available Service NTUTIL or TapeUTIL Library gt Capture For more Library Log information on these tools refer to the device driver documentation shipped with your library Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 11 Table 6 1 Methods of Capturing Drive Logs continued Type of Error Log Operator Panel Web User Interface SCSI Fibre Interface Drive Not available Service Library gt Capture Drive Log Using the ITDT SCSI Firmware Update Dump NTUTIL or TapeUTIL For more information on these tools refer to the device driver documentation shipped with your library a lt oO p Dn ee F O Capturing a Library Log using the Service Port pa x Q D S oO oO oO Note Ensure your browser pop up blocker is disabled when downloading the Log file Pop up blockers will prevent the File Download dialog box from 4 6 12 153310 Tape Library opening the library log Maintenance Information Click the Capture Log button Perform the steps in Using the Service Port on page 6 9 From the Web User Interface select Service Library gt Capture Library Logs Click the Download the file using the browser button to begin downloading Emailing Logs Logs provide a summary of the current
193. 7 45 7 46 7 47 7 48 7 49 7 50 7 51 7 52 7 53 7 54 7 55 7 56 7 57 7 58 7 99 7 60 7 61 7 62 7 63 7 64 7 65 7 66 7 67 7 68 7 69 7 70 7 71 7 72 Expansion module Access Door screw locations Operator Panel assembly Connector on the back of the I O Station locking mechanism Connector between the storage column 4 magazine and Library Control Blade top cover removed a ae Operator Panel cabling Power Switch LED Board Assembly 14U library with control module I O Station open f no Control module I O Station Access holes for manually unlocking 1 O Station doors Silver roller locking the I O Station slide in place I O Station tock Assembly installed i in library 3 I O Station Lock Assembly top view I O Safety Flap Front Spring Wire I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin Removed I O Station Safety Flap Bottom Spring position I O Safety Flap Front Spring Wire I O Safety Flap Link n 4 I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin Removed I O Station Safety Flap Bottom eae position Drive sled detail Control Module Drive Sled Drive sled slot Library Control Blade LCB Library Control Blade LCB Removing the Compact Flash Card horn the Library Control Blade Library Control Blade LCB Power supplies in a control module Power Supply Flat cable connector Thumb screw securing cable spool Cable Spool with stor
194. 8 on page 7 123 holding the remainder of the BCB Remove the terminator s from the 2 D shell connectors H in Figure 7 144 on page 7 129 on the back of the control module if necessary TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi099 Figure 7 144 D shell connectors and flat cables side cover removed d Remove the 4 T6 Torx screws in Figure 7 144 holding the 2 D shell connectors H in Figure 7 144 on the back of the control module Carefully remove the 2 flat cables K in Figure 7 144 and D shell connectors from under the cable retainers on the side of the enclosure e Carefully remove the BCB and cable assembly from the enclosure Replacing Internal Cables and Boards To install the new cables and boards perform the remove procedure s in the reverse order Tip When installing the new BCB it is easier to start the board mounting screws H and H in Figure 7 138 on page 7 123 if you first stand the control module enclosure on end Remove and Replace Drive Power Fuse Each library module has an external drive power overload fuse that serves as a protective device for all drive sleds installed in that module The control module has a 4 amp fuse and a 9U expansion module has a 7 amp fuse The external drive power overload fuse will blow if excessive current is being drawn by the drive sleds Removing a Drive Power Fuse 1 Perform Preparing 2 Remove all power supplies in the library module with t
195. 800 IBM_SERV 1 800 426 7378 All other Countries Regions http www ibm com planetwide To open a Service Request online Under Get Support click Open a Service Request Pre Call Checklist If you have questions or problems concerning the library perform the following steps before placing a call to IBM Technical Support Note Where instructions refer you to the web visit http www ibm com storage 6 46 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 1 Verify that you have exhausted all troubleshooting options refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 2 Verify that the drive s firmware is at the most recent level see Viewing Drive formation nformation To determine the latest release of firmware visit the web 3 Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level see your server host manual for instructions e For the latest release of IBM device drivers visit the web e For the latest release of device drivers by Independent Software Vendors ISVs visit the appropriate third party web site 4 Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported To determine the latest supported attachments visit the web 5 Perform a general checkup of the hardware and connections e Ensure that the host interface cable connector does not contain bent or recessed pins e Ensure that all retention screws for the host interface cable and terminator are securely tightened
196. A power switch J in Figure 2 2 on page 2 5 is located on every power supply This switch is used to remove all power from the library for emergency and service situations Except in emergency situations use the shutdown procedure before switching OFF the power switch For more information sce Shutting Dowal The power system of the library contains the following components e Power supply e AC power cord The power supply has three light emitting diodes LEDs that provide status information These LEDs located to the right of the power switch are green amber and blue in color e Green indicates a good AC or DC status e Amber indicates a degraded status e Blue indicates a potential fault See Interpreting LEDs on page 6 17 Interior Components The following components are located inside the library e Storage Columns on page 2 8 e Robot Assembly Designs on page 2 8 Chapter 2 Product Description 2 7 Storage Columns p3 a66ug032 Figure 2 4 Storage columns 2 8 Storage columns within the library store cartridges while they are not being utilized by a drive The library contains six storage columns One of those six columns is the I O Station Robot Assembly Designs The Picker robotic arm has fingers that enable it to grab tape cartridges and move them to and from the I O Station storage slots and drives A Bar Code Scanner located inside the Picker reads each cartridge bar co
197. Action Co ri Degraded operation The tape drive determined that a problem occurred which degraded the operation of the tape drive but it did not restrict continued use If the problem persists determine whether the problem is with the drive or the media Note The drive is usable though the Single character Display continues to indicate an error and the Status Light flashes amber The error code may clear when you cycle power to the tape drive or place it in maintenance mode To determine if the problem is with the drive hardware or the tape media perform the following procedures 1 If possible run the tape cartridge in a different drive If the operation in the other drive fails a and or U displays replace the media If the operation succeeds run the Test Cartridge amp Media diagnostic see Function Code E Test Cartridge amp Media on page D 36 2 If the Test Cartridge amp Media diagnostic fails replace the media If it runs successfully clean the failing drive and run the drive diagnostics refer to the drive cleaning information in this manual and Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics on page D 29 Record the time it takes for the test to complete Compare the recorded time with the Approximate Run Time above If the test runs successfully but the execution time is significantly longer than the Approximate Run Time run Function Code F Write Perfor
198. Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ 52 00 Cartridge fault A command could not be completed due to a fault in the tape cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 03 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 04 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive 53 02 Media Removal Prevented An Unload command has failed to eject the cartridge because media removal has been prevented 5D 00 Failure Prediction Threshold Failure Prediction thresholds have been exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon 5D FF Failure Prediction False A Mode Select command has been used to test for Failure Prediction system 82 82 Drive requires cleaning The drive has detected that a cleaning operation is required to maintain good operation 82 83 Bad Code Detected The data transferred to the drive during a firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware Appendix B Sense Data B 9 Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ Sense Key 0 No Sense EE 13 Encryption
199. Align the slot on the Picker to the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly see Figure 7 99 on page 7 90 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 89 a66mi138 Figure 7 99 Align slot to sheet metal edge 3 Slide the Picker over the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly see Figure 7 100 x j 7 r o 4 i hl i a66mi139 Figure 7 100 Slide over sheet metal edge 5 Lower and latch the Picker Assembly to the M2 Robot Assembly 7 90 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a Locate the release lever on the under side of the Picker Assembly While holding the release lever in the forward position lower the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly Ensure the Picker is all the way to the front of the Robot Assembly b There are two rollers on the Picker Assembly that align with the two slots in the M2 Robot Assembly see Figure 7 101 Once the rollers are resting on the M2 Robot Assembly release the lever heey i vel i componen bs D URS N 6 Figure 7 101 Picker Assembly rollers c Verify that the Picker Assembly is fully resting on the M2 Robot Assembly by slowly moving the Picker Assembly toward the rear If it moves smoothly installation is complete 6 Replace the M2 Robot Assembly See Installation Instructions for Removing Replacing an M2 Robot Assembly IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library or Replacing the M
200. C R A AA A V N NN N P P PS S G ER S Ot O D ER L 2 2 2 2 ER Safety A Loop Cluster o i Safety Switch o Pull Up Finsb Cisb Required 4 D he ADR FC 000 U L Stub V mm 0 gt Jumpers o D R lt lt ADR FC 001 U L Stub V 1 ae D i pit ADR FC 010 U L i v i 2 Jumpers e ADR FC 011 U L 1 V 3 Jumpers _ 9U EM Only iy J _0 48 VDC tf Drive Pwr Good HW N PR AN A A a66mi036 Library Cables C 14 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information TOEMS W3 4 5 86 BLIND MATE CON w13_ 5010 W14 50 10 W12 26 10 50 10 BCB2 BCB3 J9X PANEL MOUNT RJ4S5S Blade 2 W13 50 10 W14 5U 50 10 W24 9U 50 10 Sut HI W72 1810 s7 J72 L fi se W27 8 10 a66mi041 Library System Grounding Appendix C Library Diagrams C 15 LCB1 48 VDC SMD1 DIEB fea Display Blade 45 ypc P_Gnd L_Gnd BCB2 SMD2 a66mi044 Library Power System C 16 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 48VDC Power Supply Satus 48V 48
201. CARTRIDGES OR POWER SUPPLIES EXCEEDS 65 LBS TO AVOID SEROUS INJURY AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO SAFELY LIFT THE MODULES Removing the Cable Spool Assembly Note Unstacking the control module is not required but may be helpful if the library is tall or if there is not enough room above the control module to remove the top cover and the robot Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 111 Note Before removing the control module you must first remove all expansion modules if any that are located above the control module 1 To remove the Control Module perform one of the following procedures e Removing a 5U Library Control Module from a Rack on page 7 4 Removing a Control Module from a Standalone or Rack mounted Librar 14U or larger on page 7 5 2 If the control module s top cover plate is still in place remove it now with a Phillips screwdriver Optional Using the T10 TORX screwdriver remove the side cover panel on the left side of the control module Removing the side cover panel is not required but doing so makes it easier to remove the cable spool 3 Remove the Y axis Picker assembly See Removing the M2 Robot Assembl from the Library on page 7 77 4 Remove the Storage Columns on the left side of the control module see Removing a Storage Column on page 7 106 5 Disconnect the Cable Spool Assembly connector J in Figure 7 128 on page 7 113
202. CQ 30 00 Incompatible Media Installed A write type operation could not be executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded 30 01 Unknown Format An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is of a format not supported by the drive 30 02 Incompatible Format An operation could not be completed because the Logical Format is not correct 30 03 Cleaning Cartridge Installed An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge 30 07 Cleaning Failure A cleaning operation was attempted but could not be completed for some reason 30 OC Data Protect WORM overwrite attempted The drive rejected a write operation because it would have resulted in an overwrite Overwrite is not allowed on WORM media 30 OD Medium Error WORM integrity check The drive rejected a Read or Write operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge 31 00 Media format corrupted Data could not be read because the format on tape is not valid but is a known format A failure occurred attempting to write the FID 37 00 Rounded parameter A Mode Select command parameter has been rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command 3A 00 Media Not Present A media access command has been received when there is no cartridge loaded 3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error A command has failed and left the logical position
203. Capture IVT Log View Update Library Firmware Level View Update Drive Firmware Level Service Drives Shutdown Restart Library Key Path Diagnostics Chapter 4 User Interfaces Table 4 2 Menus available from the Web User Interface continued Available only to Service login Available only on libraries built after July 1 2008 with serial numbers with last four digits 8609 and above User Privileges User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the library Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves the integrity of the library and the data that is stored within the library There are three types of user privileges in the library e Service users are allowed access to the entire physical library and all of its logical libraries as well as access to a hidden Service menu that includes service tools and diagnostics e Administrative users are allowed access to the entire physical library and all of its logical libraries One and only one administrative user must be assigned the login name admin e Superusers have all the privileges of Users with additional privileges associated with monitoring operating and servicing the library Superusers have access to all library partitions but cannot perform the following tasks Library setup and settings Changes to library configuration Changes to library or drive firmware Library security setup and changes e Users a
204. DAP access is disabled the Local and Remote authentication options will not appear on the login screen Kerberos requires LDAP information but LDAP users are not required to use Kerberos IBM TS3310 userneme OOO E pesewors OOOO Remote Authentication Figure 4 2 Operator Panel Login screen for firmware versions 585G and later a66ug078 For initial login the administrator should use the following e User name admin e Password secure To fill in the User name lightly touch the blank field to display the alphabetic and numeric touch pads then use the touch keys to spell out the user ID and touch OK Similarly enter the password and touch OK After initial login change the Administrator password To change the password perform the following steps e For firmware versions prior to 585G the LDAP authentication choice is presented on the Operator Panel as Remote authentication From the Operator Panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User e For firmware versions 585G and later change the Administrator password From the Operator Panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User 4 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Common Operator Panel Elements IBM TS3310 DOO 9 Oj To EE j VO Station Slots 6 a Total Full Empty 6 4 2 Loot 66 Drives 3 Act Avail Library1 3 oo 00 Storage Slots 9 Full Empty libraryt 5 4 55 Unassigned 4 Cleaning Slots 4 Ful
205. Diagnostic to an EKM server Explanation The library attempted to perform a Key Path Diagnostics to an EKM server but a tape drive has not been available with the proper prerequisites such as being ready and unloaded This ticket conveys the fact that the test could not be performed within the selected test time period which is determined by the configured test time interval multiplied by the configured test warning threshold Detection Scenarios The library attempted to perform a Key Path Diagnostics but did not succeed in initiating the test within the configured test warning threshold due to a tape drive not being available to allow the test to run Root Causes e IBM LTO tape drive or drives are still loaded preventing the library from initiating a Key Path Diagnostics via a tape drive IBM LTO tape drive or drives are not ready preventing the library from initiating a Key Path Diagnostics via a tape drive Resolution Perform DR118 Resolve EKM Path Diagnostic Delay on page 5 94 T153 Drive Control Failure Description GUI Description A tape drive failed to enable or disable Library Managed Encryption LME Explanation The drive sled controller firmware commanded the drive to enable or disable library managed encryption for the drive yet the drive failed to perform the requested operation 5 58 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Detection Scenarios e Library
206. Drive continued Flag Number Flag SNMP Trap Description Action Required 37 Drive voltage No Set when the drive detects that See Error Code 2 in the externally supplied voltages Codes on page D 42 are either approaching the specified voltage limits or are outside the voltage limits 38 Predictive failure of No Set when a hardware failure of drive hardware the tape drive is predicted 39 Diagnostics No Set when the drive detects a required failure that requires diagnostics for isolation 51 Tape directory No Set when the tape directory on Use your backup software to invalid at unload the tape cartridge that was rebuild the tape directory by previously unloaded is reading all the data corrupted The file search performance is degraded 52 Tape system area No Set when the tape cartridge that Copy the data to another tape write failure was previously unloaded could cartridge then discard the old not write its system area cartridge successfully 53 Tape system area No Set when the tape system area Copy the data to another tape read failure could not be read successfully at cartridge then discard the old load time cartridge 55 Loading Failure No When loading a tape into a Possible Causes drive a hardware malfunction can prevent the tape from being loaded into the drive or the tape may actually get stuck in the drive 1 A drive hardware error that prevents the tape from being loa
207. FC 9800 PN 39M5081 e See Note Canada Cayman Islands Colombia Costa Rica Curacao Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Guatemala Guyana Haiti Honduras Jamaica Japan Liberia Mexico Netherlands Antilles Nicaragua Panama Peru Philippines Saudi Arabia South Korea Suriname Taiwan Trinidad Tobago Venezuela US 9 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 9 1 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in on page 9 4 FC and Part Number Reference PN Chicago NEMA 5 15P Chicago U S A 1 1 8m 125 V e FC 9986 e PN 39M5080 US Canada NEMA 6 15P Aruba Bahamas Barbados 2 e 2 8 m 250 V Bermuda Bolivia Brazil Canada Cayman Islands FC 9833 Costa Rica Curacao e PN 39M5095 Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Guatemala Guyana Haiti Honduras Jamaica Japan Liberia Netherlands Antilles Nicaragua Panama Peru Philippines Suriname Taiwan Thailand Trinidad Tobago Venezuela US Australia AS 3112 Argentina Australia China 3 2 8 m 250V Colombia New Zealand NZS 198 Papua New Guinea e FC 9831 P araguay Uruguay Western e PN 39M5102 Samoa France Germany CEE 7 VII Afghanistan Algeria 4 2 8 m 250V e FC 9820 e PN 39M5123 Andorra Angola Aruba Austria Belgium Benin Brazil Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cameroon Central African Republic Chad Cong
208. IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel Machine Type 3576 GA32 0478 09 IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel Machine Type 3576 GA32 0478 09 Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices in the Appendix To ensure that you have the latest publications visit the web at http www ibm com storage lto Released July 2011 This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information GA32 0478 09 and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Copyright IBM Corporation 2005 2011 US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Read This First This product is not intended to be connected directly or indirectly by any means l whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications Networks Accessing Online Technical Support It is the customer s responsibility to set up this tape drive or library and to ensure that the drive and library have the latest firmware unless you have purchased a service contract For online Technical Support visit http www ibm com support For latest firmware and diagnostics please visit http www ibm com support Sending Us Your C
209. If any are found contact Service for replacement 3 Remove all module to module connectors and carefully inspect them for bent pins If any are found contact Service for replacement 4 If no bent pins are found on any of these parts contact Service for further assistance DR0O68 Resolve Incompatible Tape Drive Problem The drive that is installed is not compatible with the library Troubleshooting Steps 1 View the ticket details to see which drive is not compatible and remove that drive from the library 2 Replace the drive cover plate 3 Contact Service for assistance with resolving this issue DRO69 Resolve Drive Firmware Update Failure Problem An attempt to update the firmware of a drive was not successful Troubleshooting Steps 1 Verify that the version being used for the upgrade is different from what the drive is currently using If not close this ticket and retry the upgrade with the correct firmware version 2 If the upgrade is being performed via a firmware upgrade cartridge ensure that the cartridge contains the correct firmware for the type and generation of the drive being updated Also check that the firmware upgrade cartridge is not corrupted If so close the ticket and upgrade again with the correct firmware upgrade cartridge 3 If the update was not performed with a firmware upgrade cartridge ensure that the file containing the firmware image is not corrupt or incomplet
210. In Picker Motion NOT OK Description Detection Scenarios GUI Description The robot failed to move due to an axis motion problem Explanation An unrecoverable motion failure occurs at an operational point where a cartridge is not in the Picker Because the cartridge is not in the Picker cartridge recovery is not necessary as part of the resolution to this issue This cause specifically excludes any Z axis motion failures Specifically included are motion failures that occur while pivoting moving on the X axis or moving on the Y axis If the ticket details indicate that the Y axis has problems then both the picker and the Y carriage assembly should be replaced Otherwise only the picker should be replaced A specified move in the X axis cannot complete A specified move in the Y axis cannot complete on A specified movement in the Theta 8 axis cannot complete Root Causes 1 A large number of electrical hardware failures Code or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuit issues motor winding issues cable connection issues etc 2 A relatively small number of hardware errors that do not result in complete obstruction but where servo control does not appear to be normal Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Robot Assembly e Cable Spool e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly Internal
211. Key Alias Exceeded Key Reserved Key Conflict Key Method Change Key Format Not Supported Unauthorized Request dAK Unauthorized Request dSK Unauthorized Request eAK Authentication Failure Invalid RDKi Key Incorrect Key Wrapping Failure Sequencing Failure Unsupported Type New Key Encrypted Write Pending Prohibited Request Key Unknown EKM Challenge Pending Key Translation Disallowed Security Prohibited Function Key Service Not Configured Incomplete Key Associate Data Set T10 Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found T10 Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded B 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Sense Key 6 Unit Attention EE 12 Encryption Key Change Detected EE 18 Encryption Changed Read EE 19 Encryption Changed Write EE 40 Encryption EKM Identifier Changed EE 41 Encryption EKM Challenge Changed EE 50 Encryption Initiator Identifier Changed EE 51 Encryption Initiator Response Changed 2A 11 Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus 2A 12 Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event Sense Key 7 Data Protect EF 10 Encryption Key Required EF 11 Encryption Key Generation EF 13 Encryp
212. LI 1 Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 31 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to m select the function The drive performs the dump The SCD shows then goes blank To access the contents of the dump see Function Code 5 Copy Note You can also force a drive dump when the tape drive is in normal operating mode Simply press and hold the Unload Button for ten seconds This causes the drive to reboot Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump E Function Code copies data from a drive dump captured in Function Code 4 to the beginning of a scratch blank data cartridge Attention For this function insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or non FMR cartridge error code LY appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media Cc I has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second unti
213. Licenses Capacity Expansion 1640 Advanced Reporting 1650 Path Failover 1682 Transparent LTO encryption 5900 Library and Drive Code Library and drive code 0500 Update update by an IBM Service Representative Rack Mount Kit Hardware required to mount 7003 your library in a rack Rack PDU Line Cord Rack PDU line cord 9848 For information_on ordering additional features or replacement parts for your library see Chapter 9 Parts List on page 9 1 Ultrium Tape Drives This library supports the Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 and Ultrium 5 Tape Drives Each tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is designed for quick removal and replacement in the library The IBM Ultrium 5 Tape Drive supports the Fibre Channel interface The IBM Ultrium 4 Tape Drive supports SAS or Fibre Channel interfaces The IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160 or Fibre Channel interfaces Depending on which drive is installed it features two HD68 SCSI connectors two SAS SFF 8088 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector 2 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66ug011 Figure 2 10 Ultra160 SCSI Tape Drives in the library control module Note Ultra160 SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel drives are allowed in the same physical and logical libraries However you should ensure that the host application will support a mix of interface drive types
214. Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Li j 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to f select the function The SCD changes to a flashing H 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge that is not write protected or the tape I drive exits maintenance mode The SCD changes to a flashing The tape drive copies the FMR data to the scratch data cartridge e If the tape drive creates the FMR tape successfully it rewinds and unloads the new tape exits Maintenance Mode and the tape is ready to use e If the tape drive fails to create the FMR tape it displays an error code To determine the error seal Drive Error Codes on pape D0 the tape drive then unloads the FMR tape and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed Function Code 4 Force a Drive Dump 4 Function Code performs a dump of data collected by the drive this process is also known as saving a microcode trace 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears
215. NVEZET d Dd DD Figure E 5 AIX ERRPT Commands Error Log Example NOOA WD m NUMBER DESCRIPTION Error ID Timestamp Error Type Error Class Resource Name Error Description How SCSI Bus Error will Display in Log m ERROR CLASS DESCRIPTION H Hardware S Software O Informational PEND PERF PERM TEMP UNKN m ERROR TYPE DESCRIPTION The availability loss of a device or component is imminent The performance of a device or component has degraded to an unacceptable level A hardware or software condition that could not be recovered from A hardware condition that was recovered from after several unsuccessful attempts The severity of the condition could not be determined E 6 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information A69M0170 Retrieving from an AS 400 System with RISC Processor IBM device drivers for the AS 400 system logs error information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library The error information includes the following 1 Device VPD 2 SCSI command parameters 3 SCSI sense data if available To gain access to the AS 400 problem logs and error logs sign on at any available workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password QSRV After signing on the proper access authorizations will be granted and the AS 400 MAIN MENU displays 1 Type STRSST Start System Service Tools command on the command en
216. Node Name WWPN World Wide Port Name X XR External register XRA External register address register Glossary H 15 H 16 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Index Numerics 14U library remove expansion module 7 18 replace control module 7 11 replace expansion module 7 18 5U library 7 4 remove from rack mounted 14U library 7 5 A Access Door 2 4 add 7 1 Admin Password reset 6 13 Advanced Report Configuration page 2 22 advanced reporting 2 16 data 2 22 feature license 2 16 saving and emailing data 2 23 templates 2 21 Agency Label 6 45 ASC B 1 ASCQ B 1 automatic email notifications 2 23 bar code labels guidelines for using D 9 unreadable D 12 Bar code labels ordering D 18 Bar Code Scanner diagnostic 5 63 bezels 7 25 C Cable spool remove replace 7 110 Cables host cabling diagnostic 5 65 reseating 6 30 capacity expansion feature license 2 16 2 24 capacity view 4 4 capturing using the service port 6 11 Cartridge D 5 capacity scaling 2 31 D 6 cleaning D 9 compatibility D 9 data 2 31 D 6 export 2 3 import 2 3 inserting D 4 manual removal from drive 7 132 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Cartridge continued manually inspect destination element 5 61 manually recover from Picker 5 59 manually recovering from source or destination slot 5 60 ordering D 18 proper handling D 14 removing D 5 specifications 2 33 D 14 Write Protect Switch D 6 Cartridge environment D 14
217. O Station door then the Access Door and look for any obvious problems such as unplugged cables or damage to the picker assembly 2 Remove any tapes from the Picker or from the path of the Picker 3 Close the doors and wait for the system to complete initialization 4 Select Tools gt Service gt Library gt Robot to determine if the failure is permanent e If the test fails refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 e If the test passes monitor for reoccurrence DROO6 Resolve Unload Timeout This tape drive diagnostic requires a blank scratch cartridge Problem A drive is suspected of having a problem Troubleshooting Steps il 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ONOa rR wD From the Operator Panel select Tools gt Service gt System Touch Yes to take all logical libraries OFFLINE Select Drives Select Drive Tests Select Wrap Test Select the interface to be tested Select the module and drive to be tested Place a scratch cartridge in the top slot of the top I O Station then close the I O door When the Assign I O screen is displayed touch System then Apply to continue Attach the wrap tool to the Fibre Channel port on the back of the drive Select the drive test to be performed The cartridge will be loaded and the test will begin The scratch cartridge will be returned to the top slot of the top I O Station and the results of the test will be displayed Touch Exit to return to the L
218. Operator Guide Drive Sled on page 7 42 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 7 1 Required Library State Adding removing and replacing library components usually requires you to power OFF the entire library There are a few components however that you can service without powering OFF the library Instead you may need only to take a certain logical library OFFLINE or you may not need to impact the status of the library at all Use the following table to determine the state that the library must be in before you service each part Table 7 2 Servicing library components Library state required Part Required Library Status Cable spool Power OFF Control module Power OFF Drive power fuse Power OFF Expansion module Power OFF Gear rack Power OFF Front bezels Take library offline I O Station lock assembly Power OFF I O Station slide magazine assembly Take library offline I O Station safety flap Power OFF LCB CF Power OFF Operator panel Power OFF Picker assembly Power OFF Power switch LED board Power OFF Power supply primary Power OFF Power supply redundant Power ON Normal Storage column Power OFF Tape drive sled Power ON Y axis assembly Power OFF Y motor Power OFF Required Tools Servicing the library requires the following tools e T10 TORX screwdriver with a static safe handle e 1 and 2 Philips screwdrivers e s
219. Perform DR101 Resolve Tape Drive Type Change on T136 Robotics Z Axis Motion Failure Description GUI Description An unrecoverable robot motion failure has occurred in the Z axis Explanation An unrecoverable motion failure occurred in the z axis Because a tape cartridge may or may not be present in the picker tape recovery must be part of the resolution strategy Detection Scenarios Root Cause A specified motion in the z axis cannot complete 1 Any of a large number of electrical hardware failures Code or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuit issues motor winding issues cable connections issues etc 2 A relatively small number of hardware errors that do not result in complete obstruction but where servo control does not appear to be normal Possible FRU Replacement e Picker Assembly Resolution Perform DR102 Resolve Robotics Z Axis Motion Failure on page 5 91 T137 Display Assembly Communication Failure Description GUI Description A local display assembly communication failure has been detected Explanation The library encountered an error which appears to be caused by a communication link failure to the display assembly DIEB board 5 54 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Detection Scenarios Failed I2C communication with the DIEB board Failed GPIO communicatio
220. Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after 7 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Removing a Control Module from a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 a66mi053 Figure 7 1 Picker locking mechanism 2 Move the Picker into the control module a Gently push the Picker up until it is in the control module b Engage the Picker locking mechanism J in Figure 7 1 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 5 Ss 6 Figure 7 2 Gear racks and gear rack locking mechanism 3 Disengage the rear J in Figure 7 2 and front E in Figure 7 2 gear racks in the control module While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 2 push the gear rack up until it locks in place To release the gear rack and move it up perform the following steps 7 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information at va _ i lt e z f a77qs004 l Figure 7 3 Front and back gear racks wo O pa ion F N oO Figure 7 4 Gear racks in the up and down positions a Disengage the Y rails so the module can be unstacked safely Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures Figure 7 5 Placing gear rack in Up position Front Y rail Y rail this end up
221. RAM Random access memory Random access memory A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential manner RAS Reliability availability and serviceability record A collection of related data or words treated as a unit recording density The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium recoverable error An error condition that allows continued execution of a program ref Reference reg Register reinventory To inventory again retension The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge if it is sensed that the tape has a loose wrap on the cartridge RID tag Repair identification tag robot Picker robotics Picker assembly RPQ Request for price quotation R W _ Read write S s Seconds of time SAC Service Action Code Code developed to indicate possible FRU or FRU s to replace to repair the hardware SAN Storage Area Network SAS Serial Attached SCSI A computer bus technology and serial communication protocol for direct attached storage devices SAS is a replacement for parallel SCSI with higher speeds but still using SCSI commands scratch cartridge A data cartridge that contains no useful data but can be written to with new data H 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information SCD Single Character Display SCSI Small computer system interface segment A part sel Select ser
222. RU Replacements e I O Station Lock Assembly e Display Door and I O PCB Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform the following e DRO11 Resolve I O Station Lock Unlock Failure on page 5 64 e Replacing the I O Station Lock Assembly on page 7 36 5 18 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T033 Drive TapeAlert Flag 3 Hard read or write error Description System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 3 indicating an unrecoverable read write or positioning error Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a Tape Alert 3 which is recognized by the library during the continuous 4 second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements e Cartridge Drive Sled Resolution If the cartridge is managed by a host application remove the cartridge via the host application If the cartridge is managed by the library perform the following e Remove the suspect cartridge To remove a data cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Remove Media To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Remove Cleaning Media To remove a data cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Data Cartridges To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt C
223. Resolve Unreadable Branding DR081 Resolve Autoclean Failure ae DR082 Resolve Library Calibration Failure DR083 Resolve Drive Voltage Problem DR084 Resolve Robotics Firmware Image Error DR085 Resolve Robotics Auto Level Failure DRO086 Resolve Robotics Degraded Flash Warning DR088 Resolve Robotics y Axis Moton Failure DR089 Resolve X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure DR090 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error RCB DR091 Resolve Robotics Hardware Frror Picker DR092 Resolve Robotics Hardwar Errok Scanner Z oip Sm aoe a ES DR093 Resolve Robotics Communication Error DR094 Resolve Incompatible Robot Installed DR095 Resolve Drive Sled Auto level Failure DR096 Resolve Drive Cleaning Failure DR098 Resolve Hardware Clock Failure DR099 Resolve Barcode Label Mapping DR100 Resolve Barcode Scanner Malfunction DR101 Resolve Tape Drive Type Change DR102 Resolve Robotics Z Axis Motion Failure DR103 Resolve Display ani Communication Failure Contents 5 76 5 76 5 77 5 77 Dl 5 78 5 78 5 78 5 79 5 79 5 79 5 80 5 80 5 80 5 80 5 81 5 81 5 81 5 82 5 82 5 82 5 87 5 88 5 88 5 88 5 88 5 89 5 89 5 89 5 90 5 90 5 90 5 90 5 91 5 91 5 91 s 5 92 xix DR105 HPF Connection Failure DR106 Resolve Media Security Notification DR110 Resolve Drive Encryption Control Failure DR111 Resolve Drive Encryption S
224. SCD B 6 C 1 C2 D 2 Functions that the Unload Button performs D 4 Ultrium cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drives Bar code label requirements for Ulian tape drives and libraries Cartridges and VOLSERs Manual Cartridge Assignment Status Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge D 18 Media supplies Authorized suppliers of custom bar dode labels Diagnostic and maintenance ficios Error codes on the Single character Display Troubleshooting Tips for the lium Tape Drive A Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages for the Ultrium Tape Drive Host Method of Recording Tape Drive Errors x cd s SCSI Bus Problems Choosing the port for your topology and Fibre Channel connection n AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data Status MIB variables Status Traps 1 D9 D 10 D 10 D 14 D 17 D 20 D 27 D 42 D 48 D 49 D 50 D 51 D 55 E 2 E3 F l xxvii xxviii 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Preface Trained service personnel should use this maintenance information to test diagnose and repair the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library To ensure that you have the latest publications visit the web at http www ibm com storage Ito Related Publications Refer to the following publications for additional information To obtain the latest version of these p
225. Ultrium Tape Drive to record tape drive errors and sense data in the host error log View the host error log by using one or more of the following utilities tapeutil diag smit or errpt HP HP UX Uses the IBM device driver for HP Error and trace logging are proprietary to Hewlett Packard Sun Microsystems Solaris Uses the IBM device driver for Solaris to post sense information to the Solaris host wide messages file var adm messages Intel based PCs Windows based operating Uses the NTUTIL device driver to log some sense data systems in the Event Viewer host log D 50 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Viewing the Drive Error Log The Ultrium Tape Drive keeps an error log that you can use to identify and correct errors The log contains the 10 most recent error codes which appear one at a time on the single character display To view the drive error log i 2 Make sure that no cartridge is in the drive Within a 1 second interval press the unload button 3 times The status light becomes solid amber indicating that the drive is in maintenance mode Note If a cartridge is in the drive it will eject the first time that you press the unload button and the drive will not be placed in maintenance mode To continue placing the drive in maintenance mode perform the preceding step Press the unload button once per second until 9 appears in the single character display Note If you cycle p
226. VDC Power Supply Status 48V a66mi043 Appendix C Library Diagrams C 17 C 18 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives The 3576 Tape Library supports Ultrium SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel tape drives Single character Display SCD on page D 2 Status Light on page D 2 Unload Button on page D Inserting a Tape Cartridge on page D 4 Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 Drive Error Codes on page D 42 Resolving Tape Drive Problems on page D 48 Fixing SCSI Bus Problems on page D 5 p Fixing Fibre Channel Errors on page D 5 Fixing SAS Interface Problems on page D 5 l O l il i a tl Figure D 1 Front panel of the drive Status Light A Unload Button Single character Display SCD SCD Dot 5 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 D 1 Single character Display SCD The Single character Display SCD K in Figure D 1 on page D 1 presents a single character code for e Error conditions and informational messages e Diagnostic or maintenance functions while in maintenance mode only Drive Error Codes on page D 42 lists the codes for error conditions and informational messages If multiple errors occur the code with the highest priority represented by the lowest number displays first When the error is corrected the
227. VE MEDIA If the door opening was planned and performed when the Picker was idle recovery consists of simply closing the door The library will re inventory and trigger back up applications to resynchronize inventory 2 Door open DID interrupt a library MOVE MEDIA If the door opening was not planned MOVE MEDIA operations may have been interrupted Check back up applications to make sure that no jobs have been interrupted Follow the Resolve instructions for any other problems DR020 Resolve Library Inventory Mismatch Problem The library has encountered a problem that indicates a mismatch between the library s physical and logical inventory Troubleshooting Step 1 View the ticket details to determine any source and destination element locations 2 Open a main access door and inspect the destination element for tape cartridge presence 3 Ifa labeled tape cartridge is present the robot is not reading that label reliably Inspect the label replace if needed and close the main access door to trigger an inventory of the library If the source element is empty close the main access door to trigger an inventory of the library Wait for the library to initialize and then restart the host applications to continue operation If the robot does not inventory the library after the door is closed contact Service for further assistance SN OV Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Se
228. WORM Slate blue and silver 400 GB 800 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 704 tracks gray compression sixteen tracks at a time The first set of tracks sixteen for Ultrium 5 4 and 3 eight for Ultrium 2 and 1 is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full or until all data is written Data Security on WORM Media Certain built in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become compromised for example e The format of a WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read write media This unique format prevents a drive that lacks WORM capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge e When the drive senses a WORM cartridge the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape D 8 1S3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information WORM Media Errors The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur e Information in the servo manufacturer s word SMW on the tape must match information from the cartridge memory CM module in the cartridge If it does not match a full high tape drive will post a media Error Code 7 on the single character display SCD a library will post an error on the o
229. a cartridge is not known to be properly seated in the Picker or a storage slot Root Causes 1 Magazine is damaged 2 Magazine is the wrong type for the cartridge 3 A storage cell is blocked by foreign material or not clipped in and seated correctly Calibration problem resulted in improper Picker position Picker offset problem Cartridge is damaged EQ OM e Unlabeled cartridge or intermittently readable cartridge label in destination slot Drive load mechanism is not working 9 A variety of Picker problems such as slipping gears encoder issues etc Possible CRU Replacements Possible FRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade e Picker Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR002 Resolve Tape Cartridge Recovery on page 5 60 5 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T003 GET Operation Failed Final Cartridge Position Unknown Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot failed to pick a tape cartridge and cartridge recovery is required Explanation The library cannot successfully get a tape from a drive storage or I O location The final resting place of the tape is unknown There are no additional recovery logic paths Fundamental servo control appears to be OK If the operation was initiated by a host move media the move media command has failed with an ASC ASCQ of 4h 15h 01h hardw
230. able to boot up properly When the Floor Plate is installed and the CAN Bus terminators reconfigured the library modules below the Floor Plate are not included in the library configuration The library modules above the control module can be eliminated by moving the CAN Bus terminator appropriately The CAN Bus Tool Kit can be used to troubleshoot the following types of errors e No green LED on top of the picker and no picker motion e Service Action Tickets T013 T021 T024 T025 T030 T060 T062 T076 T096 The CAN Bus Tool is intended for use only by trained technical personnel familiar with 3576 library operation It is critical to configure the library CAN Bus correctly when using the CAN Bus Tool Instructions for using the CAN Bus Tool are included in the CAN Bus Debug Tool Kit The part number for the CAN Bus Debug Tool Kit is listed in Chapter 9 Parts List on page 9 1 Y axis home flag J registration hole Retention lever a66mi193 Figure 6 23 The Floor Plate 6 48 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures Before you begin servicing the library refer to General Service Guidelines on page 63 CRUs and FRUs All electrical and non static mechanical components of the 3576 Tape Library are either customer replaceable units CRU or field replaceable units FRU A CRU is a component that customers can remove or replace themselves where
231. acing a 5U Library Control Module in a Rack on page 7 4 4 If the control module s top cover plate is still in place remove it Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen all screws to remove the cover Note On newer versions of the top cover the screws are retained in the cover Partially loosen all screws before completely loosening any one screw Loosening one screw completely while the others are tight can cause the retaining clip of the screw being loosened to come off In older versions of the top cover remove the screws and set aside Screws Screws a66mi201 Figure 7 71 Screw placement 5 If the I O station and access doors on the control module are not open open them now This makes it easier to access the robot 7 68 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 6 Carefully grip the picker and pull it toward the front of the library is iP it 4 I 4 a e ots ii gt o jii a66mi202 Figure 7 72 Pull Picker to the front of the library 7 Grip the robot in the center of the tray 8 Carefully lift the robot out of the control module and place it at an angle on top of the control module Be careful not to pinch the cable spool flex circuit a66mi203 Figure 7 73 Lift Robot out of Control Module Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 69 9 Unscrew the captive thumb
232. ad only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to m I select function H Wait for the SCD to change to a flashing Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 29 D 30 I 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing HH and the test begins If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode I m temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code 2 Update Drive Firmware
233. age columns removed Guide rollers on y axis Picker Assembly Y axis Picker Assembly rollers inserted in gear rack track Flat cable connector Thumb screws Y motor connector Y motor thumb screw Correct Y motor position Y motor connector Y motor connector Y motor thumb screw Correct Y motor position Y motor connector Robot Assembly Parking tab Screw placement Pull Picker to the front af the brary XX V TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 35 7 37 sAd 7 38 7 38 7 39 7 40 7 40 7 41 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 44 7 46 7 47 7 48 7 50 7 51 7 52 7 54 7 55 7 56 7 57 7 58 lt 7 59 7 59 7 61 7 61 7 62 7 63 7 64 7 64 7 65 7 66 7 67 7 68 7 69 7 73 7 74 7 75 7 76 7 77 7 78 7 79 7 80 7 81 7 82 7 83 7 84 7 85 7 86 7 87 7 88 7 89 7 90 7 91 7 92 7 93 7 94 7 95 7 96 7 97 7 98 7 99 7 100 7 101 7 102 7 103 7 104 7 105 7 106 7 107 7 108 7 109 7 110 7 111 7 112 7 113 7 114 7 115 7 116 7 117 7 118 7 119 7 120 7 121 7 122 7 123 7 124 7 125 7 126 Lift Robot out of Control Module Cable Spool Flex Circuit Robot Assembly Parking tab Robot Assembly on top of Control Module Lift the Robot
234. ain access door s and verify that the Y Axis Cable Spool is properly attached and not damaged 5 Close this ticket and reinitialize the Robot by opening and closing the Main Access Door s DRO94 Resolve Incompatible Robot Installed Problem The library firmware has detected that an incompatible robot has been installed This problem occurs when a robot assembly has been replaced with an incorrect type Troubleshooting Steps 1 Replace the installed robot assembly with the required originally installed robot assembly model type 2 Call Service for complete robot assembly replacement including e Robot Controller Board e Y carriage Assembly e Picker Assembly Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 89 DR095 Resolve Drive Sled Auto level Failure Problem The library is not able to auto level any of the drive sleds This problem may be caused by a missing or corrupt firmware update image file Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket and perform a library firmware upgrade to the current production firmware revision DRO96 Resolve Drive Cleaning Failure Problem After the drive was cleaned and the cleaning tape was removed from the drive the drive continues to request drive cleaning This could indicate a problem with the drive Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket and perform a manual drive cleaning with a different cleaning ta
235. ain power switch ON and restarting the tape library confirm that no danger exists to personnel or property Safety and Environmental Notices ix Rack Safety The following general safety information should be used for all rack mounted devices DANGER e Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet e Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet e To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet Always install servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet e Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work space Do not place any object on top of rack mounted devices e Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord Be sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before servicing any device in the rack cabinet e Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the same rack cabinet Do not plug a power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a power device installed in a different rack cabinet e An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock CAUTION e Do not install a unit in a
236. aintains the latest levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the library on the Internet You can use one of the following procedures to access this material Note If you do not have Internet access and you need information about device drivers contact your Marketing Representative e Using a browser type one of the following http www ibm com storage Ito ftp ftp software ibm com storage devdrvr e Using File Transfer Protocol FTP enter the following specifications FIP site ftp software ibm com IP Addr 207 25 253 26 Userid anonymous Password use your current email address Directory storage devdrvr TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information IBM provides Portable Document Format pdf and Postscript ps versions of its device driver documentation in the storage devdrvr Doc directory e IBM_tape_IUG pdf contains the current version of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide e IBM_tape_PROGREF pdf contains the current version of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Programming Reference A list of device drivers for each supported server appears at storage devdrvr in the following directories e AIX e HP UX e LINUX e Solaris e Windows Note The device driver for the AS 400 server and iSeries server is included in the OS 400 operating system For more information about device drivers refer to any of the preceding directories Chapter 2 Produc
237. ality firmware image 26h 93h Wrong firmware image checksum error 39h 00h Saving parameters not supported 3Bh 0Dh Medium destination element full 3Bh OEh Medium source element empty 3Bh 11h Medium magazine not accessible 3Bh AOh Medium transfer element full 53h 02h Library media removal prevented state set 53h 03h Drive media removal prevented state set 44h 80h Bad status library controller 44h 81h Source not ready 44h 82h Destination not ready 44h 83h Cannot make reservation 44h 84h Wrong drive type 44h 85h Invalid slave robotic controller request 44h 86h Accessor not initialized Unit Attention 06h 28h 00h Not ready to ready transition 28h 01h Import export element accessed 29h Olh Power on occurred 29h 02h SCSI Bus reset occurred 29h 05h Bus type changed to Single Ended SE 29h 06h Bus type changed to Low Voltage Differential LVD 2Ah Olh Mode parameters changed 2Ah 10h Time stamp changed 3Bh 13h Medium magazine inserted 3Fh Olh Microcode has changed 53h 02h Media removal prevented Appendix B Sense Data Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Command Aborted OBh 3Fh OFh ECHO buffer overwritten 43h 00h SCSI message error 47h 00h SCSI parity error 49h 00h SCSI invalid message 4Eh 00h Overlapped command attempt Drive Sense Data LTO Ultrium 4 drives contain hardware which performs user data write encryption and read decryption
238. all to IBM Technical Support e Prior to calling IBM Technical Support the customer is responsible for following IBM s published LTO diagnostic procedures including any needed update to the iid level of firmware For details Sh ee ee en eee Ito e The IBM Support Center will assist with problem determination and initiate shipment of a replacement part if needed to the customer s location Transportation costs both ways are paid by IBM The replacement part becomes the property of the customer in exchange for the failed part which becomes the property of IBM The customer is responsible for packing the failed part into the shipping carton that contained the replacement part Failure to return the failed part to IBM within 30 days will result in the customer being billed for the new Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 45 list price The customer is responsible for installing and setting up the CRU replacement part All FRU replacement parts will be installed by an authorized IBM Service Representative e Failure to use the carton in which the replacement part was received or failure to otherwise properly pack the returned part could result in charges being incurred by the customer for damage to the failed part during shipment e Before calling support follow these steps which will help you take full advantage of your call 1 2 Be prepared to provide library and drive firmware levels currently installed Review all documenta
239. ame application that wrote them e System Managed Encryption SME SME encryption key generation and management is performed by the IBM Encryption Key Manager EKM a Java application running on a system attached host SME policies are established by enabling the SME capability on one or more instances of the IBM device driver which will also be used as a proxy between a key server and the drive for providing encryption keys to the drive This encryption configuration is transparent to the host application SME requires the Transparent LTO Encryption license key Feature Code 5900 e Library Managed Encryption LME LME encryption key generation and management is performed by the IBM Encryption Key Manager EKM a Java application running on a library attached host LME policies are established by the library which may also be used as a proxy between a key server and the drive for providing encryption keys to the drive This encryption configuration is transparent to the host application LME requires the Transparent LTO Encryption license key Feature Code 5900 For details on testing the configuration path for LME enabled libraries see LME Key Path Diagnostics in the Setup and Operator Guide System managed tape encryption and library managed tape encryption interoperate with one another Therefore a tape encrypted using SME may be decrypted using LME and vice versa provided they both have access to the same keys and certificates
240. and or other countries G 2 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Java and all Java based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Intel Intel logo Intel Inside Intel Inside logo Intel Centrino Intel Centrino logo Celeron Intel Xeon Intel SpeedStep Itanium and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Electronic emission notices This section contains the electronic emission notices or statements for the United States and other countries Federal Communications Commission statement This explains the Federal Communications Commission s FCC statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can rad
241. and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurement may have been Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 G 1 estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products All statements regarding IBM s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice and represent goals and objectives only This information is for planning purposes only The information herein is subject to change before the products described become available This informatio
242. ank during normal operation of the tape drive Temperature problem The tape drive detected that the recommended operating temperature was exceeded Perform one or more of the following actions e Ensure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet If not refer to your enclosure documentation e Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the tape drive Ensure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified range refer to the tape drive specifications in this manual Clear the error code by power cycling the tape drive or placing the drive in Maintenance Mode If the operating temperature and airflow are within the specified range and the problem persists replace the drive MJ Power problem The tape drive detected that the externally supplied power is outside the specified voltage limits the tape drive is not operating Perform the following action 1 Ensure that the power connector is properly seated 2 Ensure that the proper dc voltages are being applied within the tolerances allowed refer to the tape drive specifications in this manual 3 If the proper voltages are not being applied service the power supply 4 If the proper voltages are being applied power OFF ON the tape drive to see if the problem repeats 5 Replace the tape drive if the problem persists The error code clears when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode
243. apacity View a66mi060 If users have access to more than one logical library they can navigate to other logical libraries using arrows next to the logical library name at the top of the screen If an administrative user is logged in a view of the physical library appears If a user is logged in the first logical library that they have access to in alphabetical order appears 4 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Menus Available from the Operator Panel The following three menus organize commands into logical groups Note The menus available to users with theAdmin role are Setup Operations and Tools The menus available to users with theUser role are Operations and Tools The menus available to the Service login are Setup Operations Tools and Service e The Setup menu consists of commands that you can use to set up and configure various aspects of the library including logical libraries user management drive settings licenses date and time network management and control path Control Path a66mi064 x Library Figure 4 5 Setup menu screen e The Operations menu consists of commands that enable you to change the library s mode of operations insert and remove cartridges load and unload drives move media and shutdown restart the library Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 5 IBM System Storage TS3310 O Insert Remove Media Media Insert Remove Claaeing Charing
244. arcode scanner is unable to detect target information The barcode scanner cannot detect any barcodes within the library Detection Scenario The library was unable to detect any barcodes when scanning target columns at start up Root Causes 1 Barcode scanner illumination is insufficient 2 Barcode scanner view is obscured blocked 3 Barcode scanner has failed Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 53 Possible FRU Replacements 1 Picker Assembly 2 Cable Spool Resolution Perform DR100 Resolve Barcode Scanner Malfunction on page 5 91 T135 Tape Drive Type Change Description GUI Description An assigned tape drive has been replaced with a tape drive of a different type Explanation A tape drive that is assigned to a partition has been replaced with a tape drive of a different type where type is defined by the tape drive s vendor generation and interface This RAS ticket is generated to notify the user of the tape drive type change Detection Scenarios 1 Installation of a tape drive into a library drive slot triggers the library to discover it 2 Boot up causes the library to physically discover any tape drive that is electrically connected in the system Root Cause End user replaced an assigned tape drive with a tape drive of a different generation interface or vendor Possible CRU Drive Sled Resolution
245. are The drive automatically reboots e If the update fails the tape drive posts_an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 The drive then unloads the FMR tape and exits maintenance mode after the cartridge is removed Contact Technical Support for problem determination or machine replacement TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Function Code 3 Create FMR Tape al Function Code copies the drive s field microcode replacement FMR data to a scratch data cartridge The resulting FMR tape can only be used to update the firmware on other LTO Gen4 tape drives with the same host interface SCSI U160 SCSI U320 SAS or Fibre Channel Attention For this function insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or 1 I non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media pam l has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering
246. are functioning correctly a66mi048 Figure 6 4 Power supply LEDs Power supply LEDs indicate status by the rate at which they blink The color of the LED identifies the area of the component being reported 6 22 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 6 6 Power Supply LEDs LED Color Represents Power Supply Status Green AC OK e Solid ON The power supply s AC input is above the minimum top requirements to operate e Solid OFF The power supply s AC input is below the minimum requirements to operate Green DC OK e Solid ON The power supply s output voltage is within middle regulation e Solid OFF The power supply s output voltage is not within regulation Blue Fault e Solid ON Indicates that one of the following faults has been bottom detected Power supply is outside of specifications Current limit has been exceeded Temperature limit has been exceeded Fan failed while AC input is present and above the minimum operating voltage AC input is below the minimum operating voltage The power supply is ON the Power button ON but the library s indicator panel is OFF Solid OFF Normal No faults detected In the operator intervention associated with the defective power supply record both the number of the module and the number of the power supply connected to that module Each module can have up to two power supplies When viewed from the
247. are mechanical positioning error Detection Scenarios GET is not successful GET recovery is not successful and the cartridge is not known to be properly seated in the Picker or a storage slot Root Causes 1 Magazine is damaged 2 Magazine is the wrong type for the cartridge 3 A storage cell is blocked by foreign material or not clipped in and seated correctly Calibration problem resulted in improper Picker position Picker offset problem Cartridge is damaged NO os Unlabeled cartridge or intermittently readable cartridge label in destination slot Drive load mechanism is not working A variety of Picker problems such as slipping gears encoder issues etc Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Picker Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool e Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution T004 PUT Operation Failed Tape Back In Source Location Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot failed to place a tape cartridge to a destination slot but recovered the cartridge to an alternate location Explanation The library cannot successfully put a cartridge into the intended target drive storage or I O location The library has successfully returned the cartridge to the source location Fundamental servo control appears to be OK Detection Scenarios PUT is not successful and PUT recovery is n
248. ario 1 When library inventory occurs during robot initialization from a power ON 2 When library inventory occurs during robot initialization from a door close Root Causes 1 User adds a cartridge manually instead of via the insert cleaning media GUI functionality 2 Any time a cleaning slot is defined via the GUI functionality and there is a rogue labeled cartridge in the slot This can occur under door open conditions or covers off 3 Any scenario where a bar code labeled cartridge ends up in a cleaning slot by means other than via the proper insert GUI functionality Possible CRU Replacements Cleaning cartridge Resolution T086 Inaccessible Tape Cartridge Description GUI Description A tape cartridge is located in a storage location that is not accessible by the library robot Explanation In library configurations of 23U or more the top storage slot in each of the two columns on the top row of the right side of the library columns 4 and 5 become inaccessible to the library robot When the vertical stack of library modules becomes 23U or higher the robot is no longer adequately supported by the y racks to get and put tape cartridges from these two specific storage slots All other storage slots in the library remain accessible This ticket is produced when a user manually inserts a cartridge into one of these slots and the library detects the cartridge during inventory The library itself
249. artridge in the drive manually load a scratch cartridge into the failing drive If the cartridge loads the drive does not have a hang condition Press the unload button to unload the scratch cartridge and go to step 6 Press and hold the unload button for 20 seconds The drive will save a dump and go into a reboot which allows communication to the drive Do not cycle power power OFF then power ON or you will lose the dump contents Copy the Drive Dump with one of the following procedures e If the drive is no longer hung cartridge can be unloaded refer to Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 and collect the dump on a scratch blank cartridge If the drive is still hung refer to Using the ITDT SCSI Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool on page 6 28 to secure the dump using ITDT Contact your next level of support to determine if they can use this dump If the problem continues to be in the drive replace the failing drive sled Refer to Drive Sled on page 7 42 When complete go to End of Call on page Ensure that the SAS cables or interposers are plugged in and tightened at both ends Ensure that the drive element address is the same as the element address being used by the host system From the Operator Panel select Reports gt Library Configuration If another SAS drive is available do the following a Quiece the library from all activity and s
250. ary and wait at least one minute before not complete the boot up powering ON to recover the problem process and appears hung 2 Ifa library firmware update was just performed try to repeat the update procedure Failure of the Working screen to appear on the Operator If the library firmware still fails to boot up correctly contact Panel in 15 minutes indicates your next level of support that the boot up process is not completing Library firmware is being Additional time is required by the library including a blank updated screen then a backlit screen before the Working screen appears All firmware library and Refer to Methods of Updating Firmware on page 6 25 for drive is not at the latest instructions on updating all of the components which are not level at the latest level The procedure will direct you to the IBM web site to check for latest firmware levels Logs You are required to capture a For information on capturing a library or drive log refer to library log or a drive log Methods of Capturing Logs on page 6 11 You need to acquire library or Refer to Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host on page drive information at the host E 1 Diagnostics You need to run library Refer to Tools gt Service Menu System on page 6 7 diagnostic tests Configuration Configuring the library Verify that the Capacity Expansion license keys have been resulted in fewer storage slots applied as needed t
251. ary that enables you to be notified if media is removed from the library without the administrators knowledge or without direction from the backup application Note Unexpected removal refers to tape cartridges that were removed from the library without being properly removed via the I O station Expected removal refers to tape cartridges that were removed properly via the I O station The library detects media removal when it performs an inventory at boot up after an open door is closed etc For example if someone opens the front door of the library and takes a piece of media the library can notify the administrator which tape was taken when it was taken and in what fashion You can enable the library to collect information about media removal and then do any or all of the following view save or email the log Note This feature is only available if the Advanced Reporting license is installed on the library To configure what information gets tracked in the log select Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Security from the remote user interface You can configure the library to collect any or all of the following information By default the library collects nothing and the log is empty You must select each item you want the library to collect e Unexpected removal detection after power up and reboot only e Unexpected removal detection during library operation e Expected removal detection from I E slots during
252. ary will function normally 3 Remove the screws located on the backside of the Access Door e For the control module 11 screws see in Figure 7 24 m Y wit a66mi085 Figure 7 24 Control module Access Door screw locations e For an expansion module 12 screws see in Figure 7 25 on page 7 27 7 26 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 1 a66mi087 Figure 7 25 Expansion module Access Door screw locations Replacing the Access Door Bezel 1 To install the new Access Door bezel perform the steps in Removing the Access Door Bezel on page 7 26 in reverse order 2 Copy the serial number on the label in the lower left corner of the old Access Door bezel onto the blank label supplied with the new Access Door bezel then apply the new serial number label in the recess located in the lower left corner on the new Access Door bezel Perform Returning a Libra Operator Panel The Operator Panel enables you to control the library using the LCD screen located on the Control Module CM Access Door or Library Module to Normal Operations after Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 27 it a66mi086 Figure 7 26 Operator Panel assembly Before Removing Replacing the Operator Panel Operator panel problems may be caused by loose connectors Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the connectors on the back of the operator panel Figure 7 29 on page 7 30
253. as a FRU is a component that only service personnel should remove or replace When servicing a FRU you may also need to service a CRU Therefore all CRUs and FRUs for the library are itemized in the following table Table 7 1 Library FRUs and CRUs Part Name CRU FRU Reference Information Cable Spool FRU Cable Spool Assembly on page 7 110 Control Module enclosure FRU Removing Replacing a Control Module on Expansion Module enclosure FRU Enclosure on page 7 19 Front Bezels FRU Bezels on page 7 25 I O Station Lock Assembly FRU I O Station Safety Flap FRU Operator Panel FRU Operator Panel on page 7 27 Picker Assembly FRU Original Picker Assembly on page 7 58 M2 Picker Assembly on page 7 8 Power Switch LED Board FRU Removing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly on page 7 31 Storage Column FRU Removing Replacing a Storage Column page 7 106 Y axis Assembly FRU Y axis Picker Assembly on page 7 54 e 5 M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 77 Y Motor FRU Y Motor on page 7 60 Compact Flash CF Card CRU Library Control Blade or Compact Flash ard on page 7 44 Library Control Blade LCB CRU Library Control Blade or Compact Flash ard on page 7 44 Q Q Power Supply CRU Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 Rack Mount Kit CRU Tape Drive Sled CRU Refer to the Setup and
254. as an error which requires the tape cartridge to be ejected for error recovery Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 33 indicating that the drive requires a cartridge to be ejected in order to resolve a problem Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 33 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacement Drive Sled Resolution 1 Perform DR037 Resolve Media Eject on page 5 75 2 From the Operator Panel select Tools gt Service gt Drives to run the drive diagnostic A blank scratch cartridge is required for this test T053 Unload Timeout Description A tape drive did not successfully unload a tape cartridge within the allotted time frame preventing the robot from picking and moving the cartridge The library is expecting the drive to achieve an unloaded state within 3 to 5 minutes of initiating the unload request but the drive is still rewinding and unthreading the tape This operator intervention is ONLY displayed if the tape drive was actually instructed to perform an unload operation and the drive did not respond with a successful or failed unload response within the allotted time frame In the case where the library controller code is determining that the drive is still busy for a define
255. as from initial release 2005 the one on the right is a version from 2007 Although they look different they are completely interchangeable and the remove replace procedures are the same Either spool may be in the library and you may receive either as a Field Support Unit FRU The part number for both is the same See Cable Spool Assembly on page 7 110 Chapter 3 Library Components 3 9 Library Control Blade LCB paoa Q D 5 oO oO oO Figure 3 13 Library Control Blade external library view Module to module g Module to module cable terminator A Ethernet cable Ethernet port for Service use Latches Serial port for Service use 3 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Compact Flash Card on LCB a66mi026 Figure 3 14 Library Control Blade and Compact Flash Card Chapter 3 Library Components 3 11 Power Supply Figure 3 15 Power Supply Handle Power cable H Thumb screws 4 Power switch 3 12 1S3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Drive Sleds Rear Panel a66mi023 Figure 3 16 LTO 3 drive sleds Tape drive sled 2 Thumb screws SCSI terminator SCSI cable receptacle Handle ele Note This library supports any combination of LTO 3 LTO 4 and LTO 5 drives Chapter 3 Library Components 3 13 3 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 4 User Interfaces Operator Panel Web User Interface UI
256. as statistical information about the cartridge s use The LTO CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge For example the LTO CM stores the end of data location which when the next time this cartridge is inserted and the WRITE command is issued enables the drive to quickly locate the recording area and begin recording The LTO CM also aids in determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age how many times it has been loaded and how many errors it has accumulated Whenever a tape cartridge is unloaded the tape drive writes any pertinent information to the cartridge memory The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 4 LTO CM is 8160 bytes LTO Generations 1 2 and 3 have an LTO CM capacity of 4096 bytes Write Protect Switch The position of the write protect switch on the tape cartridge see J in determines whether you can write to the tape If the switch is set to e The locked position solid red data cannot be written to the tape e The unlocked position black void data can be written to the tape If possible use your server s application software to write protect your cartridges rather than manually setting the write protect switch This allows the server s software to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is eligible to become a scratch blank data cartridge Do not write protect scratch blank cartridges the tape drive will not be able to write new data
257. ast the desired code press the unload button once per second until the code redisplays Press the unload button to view the most recent error code Refer to Drive Error Codes on page D 42 to determine the meaning of the code and the action to take Press the unload button to view the next error code The codes are ordered the most recent is presented first and the oldest tenth is presented last Each time you press the unload button to view an error the single character display turns ON the error displays then the single character display turns OFF Continue to press the unload button until the 10 error codes have been displayed After you display the tenth error code the Ultrium Tape Drive automatically exits maintenance mode To re display the error codes repeat steps 1 7 This function is also available from the Operator Panel by selecting Tools gt All Operator Interventions Fixing SCSI Bus Problems If this is a new installation or the customer has updated their host hardware or software verify that the SCSI device driver is installed properly Refer to device driver documentation Attention In the following procedures you need to know the module control module or expansion unit and location number s of the failing drive s Table D 15 SCSI Bus Problems For Error Type See Solid Error One Drive Fixing a Solid Error with One Drive on a SCSI Bus on page D 52 Soli
258. at the racks in the very bottom module rest on the floor of the unit 3 There are hardware failure and assembly failure modes that can result in the front and rear drive gears on the Y Carriage being excessively out of phase with each other 4 Robot Lock mechanism is out of position and interfering with the robot Y axis travel Possible FRU Replacements Resolution 2 This RAS ticket appears almost exclusively for a picker and Y carriage 4 Ensure the entire library is level in the rack 5 Only dispatch the above FRU after all efforts have been exhausted to get e Y axis Assembly e Internal Cables and Boards Kit Perform DR041 Resolve Robot Installation on page 5 76 See also Removing the M2 Robot Assembly from the Library on page 7 77 and Replacing the M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 79 Assembly climber not being level Clear the RAS ticket Remove these components from the unit and then re seat them to ensure they are level 3 Inspect the picker rails inside the unit and make sure they are level flush with the unit and properly locked into place the unit and picker Y carriage assembly level 5 38 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T084 Missing Cleaning Tape Description GUI Description A cleaning tape cartridge configured for automatic library initiated cleaning is missing Explanation When using the library to manage drive cleaning the cleaning cartrid
259. at a 30 Aao angie Rotate the Robot Lowering the robot Parking tab to unparked poon Disconnecting the flex cable Loosening the thumbscrews Model 1 Robot Y carriage Assembly Thumb screw securing Cable Spool Cable Spool with storage columns removed ae Thumbscrew securing Cable Spool Guide rollers on M2 Robot Assembly M2 Robot Assembly rollers inserted in gear rack track pog Picker Assembly on Forward side of Y carriage Press the rejeas lever Close up of the release lever Lift the cable protector Lift the lever als on the back of fhe connectors Slide cable to the rear Slide the cables under the plastic guide Guideline oa Connect and lock the flex cable Slot on the Picker Assembly Align slot to sheet metal edge Slide over sheet metal edge Picker Assembly rollers Picker locking mechanism Rotate M2 Picker Assembly Lift M2 Picker Assembly Close up of the release lever Lift Picker Lift the cable protector Lift the lever clamp on the back of the connectors Slide cable forward Close the cable protector Remove the Picker Assembly Insert Picker through the front door Lift the cable protector Slide the flat cables to the front Black guideline on the cable Locking the cable into place Closing the cable protector Slot feature on the Picker Assembly Align slot to the sheet metal edge Slide slot over edge Lower the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly A
260. ate between the LCB and the scanner should result in a different ticket cause Possible CRU Replacements Drive sled 5 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Resolution Perform the following 1 Removing a Drive Sled on page 7 42 2 Replacing a Drive Sled on page 7 43 T017 Invalid Storage or I O Position Description Calibration completes and the coordinates of each storage and I O element are calculated The calculated values are determined to be outside travel limits that have been established for the robot Detection Scenarios Root Causes Calculated element positions fail validity check against travel limits 1 Calibration targets not in position 2 Calibration sensor detects edges but is not correctly finding calibration target edges Possible FRU Replacements e Fiducial targets e Storage Column e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool e Picker Assembly Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution If the problem can not be resolved using the information in this document perform DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 T018 Invalid Drive Position Description Calibration completes and the coordinates of each drive are calculated The calculated values are determined to be outside travel limits that have been established for the robot Detection Scenarios Calculated element positions fail validity check a
261. ates of 320 MBps SMI S See Storage Management Initiative Specification SMI S SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is a standard for e mail transmissions across the internet SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is used by network management systems to monitor network attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention SMW Servo Manufacturer s Word SNS Sense Glossary H 13 special feature A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability storage capacity or performance of a product but is not essential for its basic work SR Service representative see also CE SRAM Static random access memory SS Status store SSP Serial SCSI Protocol ST Store standard feature The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental product START Start maintenance StartTLS Secure LDAP communication using TLS Storage Management Initiative Specification SMI S A storage standard developed and maintained by the Storage Networking Industry Association SNIA It has also been ratified as an ISO standard The main objective of SMI S is to enable broad interoperable management of heterogeneous storage vendor systems subsystem A secondary or subordinate system usually capable of operating independently of or asynchronously with a controlling system SUPP Support syne Synchronous synchronize Occurring with a regular or predictable time relat
262. ation Service Action Ticket T001 T002 T003 T004 T005 T006 T007 T008 T009 T010 T013 T017 T018 T019 T020 T021 T022 T023 T024 T025 T026 T027 T028 T029 T030 T031 T032 T033 T034 T035 T036 T037 T038 T039 T040 T041 T045 T046 T047 T048 T049 T050 T051 T052 T053 T055 T060 T061 T062 T063 T064 T065 T066 T067 T068 T069 T070 T071 T072 T073 T074 T075 T076 T077 T079 T081 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 7 5 9 5 11 5 11 5 12 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 15 5 15 5 16 5 16 5 17 5 17 5 18 5 18 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 20 5 20 5 20 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 23 5 23 5 24 5 24 5 25 5 25 5 26 5 26 5 27 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 29 5 30 5 30 5 31 5 31 5 32 5 32 5 33 5 33 5 33 5 34 5 34 5 35 5 35 5 36 Service Action Ticket continued T089 5 42 T090 5 42 TO91 5 43 T092 5 43 T093 5 43 T145 5 57 T146 5 58 T149 5 58 Service Action Tickets 5 1 service history 8 1 service menu 6 8 Service menu 6 5 logging in 6 5 service port 6 9 6 11 service procedures 6 1 shutting down the library 6 40 sled description of tape drive 2 14 slot coordinates 2 30 software supported 2 38 Specifications cartridges 2 33 D 14 library 2 36 speed matching 2 15 Status Light D 2 Storage column 2 8 remove replace 7 106 subsystem status 4 3 Support Notification iii switched fabric loop D 54 system summary 4 3 T T001 5 1 T002 5 2 T003 5 3 T0
263. ation sensor with a soft lint free cloth Note This graphic shows the location of the calibration sensor If you are guiding a customer by phone you might want to copy the graphic and email it to them Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 85 Figure 5 2 Calibration sensor 5 86 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi168 DR083 Resolve Drive Voltage Problem Problem A tape drive detected a voltage problem This problem may occur when a separate drive is being activated Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket then remove and reinsert the drive sled to clear the fault 2 If this ticket reoccurs ensure that the facility AC power cable is secured to the power supplies Ensure that no fault condition is indicated on the power supply LEDs DR084 Resolve Robotics Firmware Image Error Problem The normal robotics firmware auto level process was not attempted This problem is caused by a missing or corrupt robotics firmware update file Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket then perform a library firmware upgrade to the current firmware revision DR085 Resolve Robotics Auto Level Failure Problem The normal robotics firmware auto level process did not complete successfully This problem may be caused by one of the following conditions 1 A robotics flash image failed validation by the Y Axis Picker Assembly Co
264. ator Interventions 14 Verify that your host applications can communicate with all drives and the library 15 After verifying that the library is fixed and running smoothly generate another log of the status of the library 16 Complete the steps in End of Call on page 6 47 Possible Safety Hazards Possible safety hazards to the operation of this product are Electrical An electrically charged frame can cause serious electrical shock Mechanical Hazards for example a safety cover missing are potentially harmful to people Chemical Do not use solvents cleaners or other chemicals not approved for use on this product Before using the library repair any of the preceding problems Electrostatic Discharge Important A discharge of static electricity can damage static sensitive devices or microcircuitry Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage To prevent electrostatic damage observe the following precautions e Transport products in static safe containers such as conductive tubes bags or boxes e Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static free stations e Cover the unit with approved static dissipating material If available provide a ground strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment If a ground strap is not available touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity in
265. be sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future This appendix lists TapeAlert flags that are supported by the Ultrium Tape Drives Table A 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive Flag Number Flag SNMP Trap _ Description Action Required 3 Hard error No Set for any unrecoverable read See the Action Required column write or positioning error This for Flag Number 4 5 or 6 in flag is set in conjunction with this table flags 4 5 or 6 4 Media No Set for any unrecoverable read Replace the tape cartridge write or positioning error that is due to a faulty tape cartridge 5 Read failure No Set for any unrecoverable read If Flag 4 is also set the cartridge error where isolation is uncertain is defective Replace the tape and failure could be due to a cartridge If Flag Number 4 is faulty tape cartridge or to faulty not set see Error Code 6 in drive hardware Drive Error Codes on page Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Table A 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number Flag SNMP Trap Description Action Required 6 Write failure No Set for any unrecoverable write If Flag Number 9 is also set or positioning error where make sure that the write protect isolation is uncertain and failure switch is set so that data can be could be due to a faulty tape written to th
266. blems If you encounter problems when running the Ultrium Tape Drive refer to the table below If the problem is not identified refer to Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages on page D 49 Table D 12 Troubleshooting Tips for the Ultrium Tape Drive If the problem is this Do this A code displays on the The Ultrium Tape Drive detected an error or is directing you to an single character display informational message See Drive Error Codes on page D 42 The status light or single character The Ultrium Tape Drive has not been properly terminated or has no power display never turns ON If the SCSI bus is terminated externally try a different terminator or use the drive s internal termination If the SCSI bus is terminated properly check the power at the power source Ensure the tape drive sled is connected properly see Drive Sled on page 7 42 If the problem persists replace the tape drive sled D 48 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 12 Troubleshooting Tips for the Ultrium Tape Drive continued If the problem is this Do this The Ultrium Tape Drive won t load a tape cartridge One of the following has occurred e A tape cartridge is already inserted To remove the cartridge press the unload button If the cartridge does not eject turn OFF the power to Ultrium Tape Drive then turn it back ON and press the unload button e The tape cart
267. brary and drives online to ALL ATTACHED HOSTS See Taking the Drives Library Online Offline on page 6 39 Drive Tests Wrap Tests SAS Wrap Test This section provides information about the SAS Wrap Test Tools Materials that are required SAS Wrap Tool These instructions pertain to the SAS Interface 1 Ensure that the library and drives are offline to ALL ATTACHED HOSTS See Taking the Drives Library Online Offline on page 6 39 2 Remove the SAS interface cables from the drive being tested Port 1 is the right hand port as viewed from the rear Insert the wrap tool in Port 1 3 Start the SAS Wrap Test by selecting Tools gt Service gt Drives gt Drive Tests gt Wrap Test gt SAS Interface gt Module gt Drive to be tested gt Port to be tested Move the wrap tool to the other port and repeat the wrap test If you have problems consider the following options to resolve the issue a If the wrap test fails replace the Drive Sled See Removing a Drive Sled b If the wrap test is successful and you are still having problems suspect the SAS interface cables or host adapter c If the cables adapter do not fix the problem call your next level of support 4 When any problem is resolved reconnect all cables 5 Ask the customer to vary the library and drives online to ALL ATTACHED HOSTS See Taking the Drives Library Online Offline on page 6 39 Tools gt Service Menu Drives Media Tests This test
268. brary storage slots Differences in what you can see and do depending on manual cartridge assignment status Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 13 Table D 6 Manual Cartridge Assignment Status OFF assign cartridges to a partition immediately upon placing them in the O station You may cancel out of this window without assigning them to a partition You are not asked to assign cartridges to a partition and the cartridges remain unassigned NO From Web client NO From Operator Panel YES From Web client YES Manual Cartridge Cartridge Importing Library Assignment Assignment in O Unassigned Media Configuration Station Report ON default You are asked to From Operator Panel Unassigned cartridges are not visible Unassigned cartridges are visible Handling Cartridges Attention Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive A damaged cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge Before inserting a tape cartridge inspect the cartridge case cartridge door and write protect switch for breaks Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their magnetic tape To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives use the following guidelines Provide Training e Post procedures that describe p
269. cannot be considered a complete obstruction has been reported by robotics Because a tape is in the picker tape recovery must be a part of the resolution strategy This ticket only occurs during a robotics move not during a robotics get or put Detection Scenario 1 A specified move in the y axis cannot complete 2 Robotics firmware reports a y axis error condition 5 48 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Root Causes 1 A physical obstruction in the path of the robot s motion Examples include tape cartridges that are extending from the picker assembly or from a storage location as well as tape cartridges or debris that may have collected on the floor of the library 2 A large number of electrical hardware failures Firmware or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuits motor winding issues etc 3 A relatively small number of mechanical hardware failures that do not result in the detection of a complete obstruction but where motion control generates robotics firmware error codes contamination or damage to encoder wheel high friction etc Possible FRUs e Y carriage Assembly if Model 1 robot is installed or Robot Assembly if Model 2 robot is installed e Cable Spool Resolution Perform DR088 Resolve Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure on page 5 88 T121 Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure No Tape in Picker Descr
270. capable of uploading drive dump files e The tool s primary function is thoroughly testing a drive However if the library is online to the server host where the tool resides ITDT will communicate with the drive through the library to load and unload a test cartridge thereby exercising some library functions e The tool scans the SCSI bus and will find and display for selection all IBM LTO devices The tool will not display and allow for selection any non IBM device e Each function has a Help selection which explains the required syntax as well as a brief explanation of the particular function e A Readme text file will be posted with the exe for a thorough explanation of initial tool download information from the web as well as explanation of tool capabilities e The tool is currently a command line tool with a simple entry by keying in the executable name itdt from the directory where the tool is located To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool visit http www ibm com storage support Updating Drive Firmware Using a Firmware FMR Cartridge A firmware FMR cartridge is a blank tape cartridge that is used to transfer updated drive firmware code to the library The drive code image is copied onto the FMR cartridge which can then be used to update the drive firmware on all of the specified drives within the lbrery See Creating a Drive EMR firmware Cartridge for more information Note A FMR
271. cartridge was never mounted and unloaded it will not appear in the log When the log file reaches its maximum size old information is deleted as new information is added This can affect the amount of available historical data The log provides the following information e Volser Media cartridge barcode label e SN Media cartridge serial number e Mfr Media cartridge manufacturer e Date Media cartridge manufacturing date format YYYYMMDD e Type Media type e Mounts Cartridge mount count e RRE Recovered read errors e URE Unrecovered read errors e RWE Recovered write errors e UWE Unrecovered write errors e LW Cartridge lifetime MB written e LR Cartridge lifetime MB read e Enc Cartridge encryption status U Unknown E Encrypted N Not Encrypted Using Advanced Reporting Templates If you want to use the same configuration to create reports repeatedly you can save the configuration as a template You can save up to 20 templates for each type of advanced report To create a template 1 From the remote UI go to Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting and select the Advanced Reporting Configuration page either Drive Utilization or Media Integrity 2 On the Advanced Reporting Configuration page make the selections you want 3 Type a name for the template in the empty field next to the Save button The name can have a maximum of 15 characters You can use only lowercase lett
272. cartridges types D 6 Cartridges testing D 36 channel calibration 2 16 code update library and code feature 2 28 column coordinates 2 30 Compact Flash Card remove replace 7 44 components 3 1 7 1 Access Door inside with Operator Panel 3 5 cable spool 3 9 compact flash card 3 11 drive sled rear panel 3 13 front panel 2 2 access door 2 4 control module 2 3 expansion module 2 3 I O Station 2 3 Operator Panel 2 4 power button 2 4 remove replace 7 25 I O Station lock assembly 3 3 I O Station with slide assembly 3 4 interior 2 7 picker assembly 2 8 robotic system 2 8 Storage column 2 8 internal remove replace 7 53 library control blade 3 10 library rear view 3 2 library front view I O Station door open 3 2 power supply 3 12 rear panel 2 5 drives 2 6 Library Control Blade 2 5 power supply 2 7 remove replace 7 42 Robotics 3 6 control module 2 3 remove from rack mounted 14U library 7 5 remove replace 7 4 replace in 14U library 7 11 control path using for control path failover 2 34 control path failover 2 26 control path failover feature use with multiple control paths 2 34 control path failover feature license 2 16 control paths additional role in reducing library failure 2 33 CRUs 7 1 D data path failover 2 26 data path failover feature license 2 16 Data paths multiple 2 34 depth of tape library 2 36 description of library 2 1 Device drivers supported 2 38 Diagnostic Resolution DR001 5 59 DR002 5 6
273. cess Door to ensure that all previous error handling is completed and to enable normal library robotic function Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Problem Area If Then HTML error 404 appears on the computer screen when trying to launch the Web User Interface 1 Verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected at both ends 2 Ping the library address to verify communication 3 Verify network settings at host and library 4 If the cable is properly connected refer to Library Control Blade or Compact Flash Card on page 7 44 Operator Panel The Operator Panel display is blank hung frozen or a visual problem occurs incorrect characters missing characters and so forth dim display or non responsive touchscreen 1 Verify that power is being applied to the library 2 Gather failure information by logging in to the Web User Interface and selecting Service Library gt Capture Library Log 3 Power cycle the library 4 Verify that you are running the latest levels of library and drive firmware then upgrade if necessary see of Updating Firmware on page 6 25 5 If the Operator Panel display is still failing go to Operator Panel on page 7 27 for instructions on replacing the display Media A cartridge leader pin has detached from the cartridge Reposition the leader pin see Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin in the Setup and Operator G
274. cess hole and into the reel motor axle Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise 5 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 6 Locate the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 on the rear of the drive You can either a Use your finger to rotate the treader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear MJ in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 clockwise OR b Use a 1 flathead screwdriver to turn the worm gear E in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 clockwise This rotates the threader motor worm gear JJ in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 clockwise drawing the LBA into the cartridge 7 140 1S3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a82ru009 Figure 7 155 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Heo N N Loader motor worm gear Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide bearing B Lever Rotator stub Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear Threader worm gear Threader intermediate gear As the tape leader block assembly LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 155 stops The LBA is i
275. ch through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle a82ru008 Figure 7 149 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 6 Turn the supply reel clockwise allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds around the supply reel inside the cartridge 7 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 8 Reassemble the drive reversing the steps in Beginning Procedure on page Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 135 9 10 Allow the drive to perform mid tape recovery This takes several minutes When this activity completes the cartridge ejects automatically Test the drive to determine if it should be replaced Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin a82ru009 Figure 7 150 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train 7 136 Heo N Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide oe bearing Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear g Threader worm gear Threader intermediate gear From the left side of the drive pull out tape from the take up reel Note If there is more than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the
276. chanism b Position of the rotator stub E in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 c Front loader motor worm gear H in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear E in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 to turn 6 Rotate the loader motor worm gear ff in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 to turn the loader mechanism gear MJ in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 counterclockwise Continue turning until the rotator stub KJ in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 loses contact with the lever J in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 This releases the LBA leader pin 7 Rotate the threader motor worm gear g in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 turn the threader mechanism gear J in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller to Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 137 nearest the rear of the drive E in Figure 7 152 a82ru010 Figure 7 152 Leader Block Assembly LBA 7 138 8 9 10 11 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear iJ in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 until the rotate stub J in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub kj in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 Remove the cartri
277. cker e Perform DR028 Resolve Motion Obstruction on page 5 71 T008 Cannot Home Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot can move but cannot establish its home position correctly Explanation Robot motion and servo control appear normal but home sensors do not transition when the robot is moved through prescribed search distances and times Detection Scenarios 1 X home sensor does not transition while homing 2 Y home sensor does not transition while homing 3 0 home sensor does not transition while homing 4 Z home sensor does not transition while homing Root Causes 1 Malfunctioning home sensors 2 Missing or damaged mechanical flags that trigger home sensors see Figure 3 11 on page 3 8 3 Hardware failures that result in apparent normal motion according to encoders but no actual motion ex slipping gears 4 Robot parking tab is interfering with Y axis travel of the robot 5 Robot assembly is not placed properly into Y climber rails resulting in an unleveled robot when moving along the Y rails 6 Y rails are not secured correctly causing the robot Y carriage to become unleveled when moving between modules Possible CRU Replacements e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Picker Assembly e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution e Verify that no obstructions are present in the path of the Picker e Perform
278. ckward read and write compatibility stopped when LTO 3 was introduced LTO 3 cannot write in LTO 1 format Therefore an LTO 1 tape is an unsupported format when trying to write to it with an LTO 3 drive Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 12 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR015 Resolve Unsupported Tape Format on T040 Drive TapeAlert 15 MIC Chip Failure Description GUI Description The memory in the tape cartridge has failed Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 15 indicating that MIC memory in cassette of the media loaded is not working properly The MIC is the memory that is part of the cartridge also called LTO CM Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 15 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform T041 Drive TapeAlert 16 Forced Eject Description GUI Description The tape has been ejected from a drive while it was being read or written Explanation System determines that the drive ha
279. code and having an adhesive backing The bar code label must be affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the cartridge and its volume serial number bar code reader A laser device specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and converting them into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code bezel Decorative and safety cover bicolored Having two colors bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system BM or bill of materials A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials expected to be used to produce a given job or quantity of output BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services browser A client program that initiates requests to a Web server and displays the information that the server returns buffer A routine or storage used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of events when transferring data from one device to another bus A facility for transferring data between several devices located between two end points only one device being able to transmit at a given moment byte A string consisting of a certain number of bits usually 8 that are treated as a unit and represent a character A fundamental data unit H 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information C capacity The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed in bytes of data cartridge manual rewind tool A device that can be fitted
280. connected to a separate power distribution source In the event that the primary power supply fails or becomes unstable the redundant power supply will automatically power the library as long as it is turned ON Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 51 If your library has a redundant power supply you can replace the primary power supply without powering OFF the library If your library does not have a redundant power supply installed the empty slot will be covered by a metal plate Figure 7 54 Power Supply 2 a66mi022 Handle Power cord receptacle Thumb screws g Power switch Removing a Primary Power Supply i Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 Note It is not necessary to power off the library if there is a redundant power supply installed Unplug each end of the power cord in the proper sequence Attention First disconnect the power cord from the power source Then disconnect the power cord from the power supply receptacle J in Figure 7 54 Loosen the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 54 by turning them counterclockwise Grasp the handle in Figure 7 54 and slowly pull the power supply toward you while supporting it from underneath Install a metal cover plate over the vacant power supply slot if you are not immediately installing a replacement 7 52 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Reinstalling Replacing a Power Sup
281. ct Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics to enter Key Path Diagnostics Note that entering Key Path Diagnostics will log off all other users of the same or lower privileges and take your partitions offline When you exit Key Path Diagnostics the partitions automatically come back online A list of all the tape drives enabled for library managed encryption is displayed along with the tape drive status and the partition in which each tape drive resides 2 Select the tape drive on which you want to perform diagnostics and click Apply A dialog box appears telling you that the selected partition will be taken offline 3 Click OK to start the diagnostics 4 The library performs the diagnostics and displays pass or fail results on each of the tests in the Progress Window Note The diagnostics tests may take several minutes to complete 5 Do one of the following e If Completed appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were performed this does not mean that the diagnostics passed just that the diagnostics were performed Click Close to close the Progress Window e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were not able to be performed Follow the instructions listed in the Progress Window to resolve any issues that occurred during the operation Using Periodic Key Path Diagnostics You can enable the library to automatically perform Key Path Diagnostics at selected intervals During each interval the librar
282. curred while the tape drive was running POST or diagnostics replace the drive The error code clears with the first attempted write read after the encryption key is changed or when the drive is placed in maintenance mode E Fiber Port offline Displayed when the drive fiber port has received a port bypass command from another port on the fiber channel network 1 Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly Verify all equipment and devices are powered ON 2 Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the topology of the network 3 Verify the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network 4 Verify the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network 5 Verify the drive fiber cable and connector are plugged into port 0 of the tape drive 6 Verify tape drive fiber port 0 is working properly by running Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page D 33 The error code clears when communication is restored or when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 47 Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and Action F Fiber Channel Error No Light Displayed if the dr
283. d Error Multiple Drives Fixing a Solid Error with Multiple Drives on a SCSI Bus on page D 52 Intermittent Error One Drive Fixing an Intermittent Error with One Drive on a SCSI Bus on page D 53 Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 51 Table D 15 SCSI Bus Problems continued For Error Type See Fixing an Intermittent Error with Multiple Drives on a SCSI Bus on page D 54 Intermittent Error Multiple Drives Fixing a Solid Error with One Drive on a SCSI Bus 1 Verify that the power is ON to the drive a Verify that the library is powered ON b Verify that the power supplies in the module containing the failing drive are ON c Verify that the drive is fully seated in the library chassis 2 Determine if the drive is experiencing a hang condition a Ifa tape cartridge is in the drive press the unload button If the cartridge ejects the drive does not have a hang condition go to step 5 e If the cartridge does not eject go to step 3 b If there is no cartridge in the drive manually load a scratch cartridge into the failing drive If the cartridge loads the drive does not have a hang condition Press the unload button to unload the scratch cartridge and go to step 5 3 Press and hold the unload button for 20 seconds The drive will save a dump and go into a reboot which allows communication to the drive Do not cycle power power OFF then power ON or you
284. d Replace Procedures 7 93 7 Locate the release lever J in Figure 7 105 on the under side of the Picker Assembly and pull it forward While holding the release lever forward lift up on the right side of the Picker Assembly and lift it off of the M2 Robot Assembly see Figure 7 106 on page 7 95 Note The flex cables are still attached to the Robot Controller Board D vt E Figure 7 105 Close up of the release lever 7 94 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi142 Figure 7 106 Lift Picker 8 Carefully set the Picker Assembly toward the rear of the M2 Robot Assembly so you can access the robot controller board connectors 9 Disconnect the two rear flex cables from the Robot Controller Board a Lift the cable protector from the back side and pull forward Figure 7 107 on page 7 96 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 95 a66mi154 Figure 7 107 Lift the cable protector b Lift up the small lever clamp on the back of the connector to release the flex cable See Figure 7 108 seeeerereettettt tt AAAAAAAAAAAAA AMi Figure 7 108 Lift the lever clamp on the back of the connectors a66mi155 7 96 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information CAUTION This lever clamp is very fragile Lift it with a fingernail or similar small object c Repeat the above steps for the second cable connector d Slide the flex cables to the rear as in Figure 7 109
285. d accordingly Failure in this process to set the correct firmware level in the sled results in this ticket Root Causes 1 Physical interruption of the firmware down load process 2 Firmware problems 3 Hardware failures that result in intermittent or failed communication between library and drive sled Possible CRU Replacements e Firmware e Drive sled Possible FRU Replacements Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR033 Resolve Drive Sled Auto Level Failure on page 5 73 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 33 T075 Unsupported Module Configuration Description GUI Description The installed library firmware does not support the detected module configuration Explanation The current level of library firmware does not support the module configuration as detected by scanned module serial number labels The firmware will allow 5U 14U 23U 32U and 41U configurations It will specifically not run with anything greater than 41U or with a 10U configuration Detection Scenario During initialization the robot reads serial numbers on the modules that are present Root Causes 1 The system really is an invalid configuration and all modules are labeled correctly 2 Achassis module is not labeled correctly 3 The firmware level loaded on the library does not support a valid configuration 4 Bar c
286. d if redundant power is not required The second power supply slot is physically covered in this configuration The library may be upgraded to redundant power at a later time Feature Licenses A feature license controls the setting of feature enabled flags that are based on a user input key and the library serial number that is stored in the library vital product data VPD A unique key exists for each library based on an encryption of the chassis serial number and a feature code After a feature is enabled it cannot be disabled The library s serial number can only be assigned at the factory The library uses feature licenses to enable the Capacity Expansion Advanced Reporting Path Failover and Transparent LTO Encryption features Advanced Reporting Feature Code 1650 The Advanced Reporting feature license key enables the Media Analysis and Drive Resource functions of the TS3310 Tape library These user configurable reporting features provide graphical displays for both diagnostic and trend analysis data which enable customers to evaluate tape drive media performance and drive utilization parameters Advanced Reporting is only available to Superuser Administrative and Service users through the Web User Interface UI Data for Advanced Reporting should persist for 12 months but it is also limited to 1 MB The persisted data is checksum protected and will persist through a library power loss The raw data for these reports can also
287. d only by a trained IBM service provider SSRs should claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when performing this procedure Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup and both eject commands issued at the host and power cycling the drive fail to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery e Before using this procedure you must have exhausted all other means of removing the tape cartridge from the drive Use this procedure only if you cannot remove the tape cartridge by using any other means 7 132 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Determine from the customer if the cartridge contains critical customer data If the cartridge contains sensitive data that cannot leave the site inform the customer that certain failure conditions diagnostics will be performed to test the drive for continued use The following removal procedures can destroy customer data Use extreme care when handling or removing the customer s tape cartridges to minimize tape damage and lost data DO NOT TOUCH the magnetic tape or tape path Both are extremely sensitive to the oil and salt from your skin Use clean lint free gloves when working around magnetic tape or the tape path components Electrostatic s
288. d wait time period and the unload request is not sent to the tape drive this operator intervention will not be generated but rather the request to unload will be denied as an illegal request Note The library will not wait for the maximum unload time defined by the drive as drives may take up to 18 minutes before succeeding or failing the unload or eject operation The library will only wait for 3 minutes before failing the unload request Detection Scenarios e A SCSI Move Medium was issued but the drive does not achieve an unload or eject state within the allotted time frame after being instructed to unload and eject e A UI command was issued to unload or move from a drive but the drive does not achieve an unload or eject state within the allotted time frame after being instructed to unload and eject Root Causes The tape drive was instructed to unload the tape cartridge but did not complete the request within the allotted time frame Resolution 1 Perform DR006 Resolve Unload Timeout DR006 Resolve Unload Timeout on page 5 62 2 If possible check the front of the tape drive for error indications Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 25 T055 Drive TapeAlert 37 Drive Detects Voltage Problem Description GUI Description The drive has exceeded one of its voltage limits Explanation System determin
289. de label and the fiducial labels that identify the types of cartridge magazines and tape drives installed in the library As of November 2008 the robot assembly was changed The two robots are identified as follows e Pre November 2008 The robot will be referred to as the Model 1 robot and the components as the Model 1 picker and the Model 1 Y carriage assembly e November 2008 and forward The robot will be referred to as the Model 2 robot and the components as the Model 2 picker the Model 2 Y carriage assembly and the Model 2 robot controller board TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 520G is the minimum version of library firmware that supports the Model 2 robot The Model 2 robot allows access to five additional slots in the library the second from bottom row of slots are now available the Model 1 robot could not reach them However although Model 2 robot assemblies will fit onto libraries that were built with the Model 1 robot IBM does not support switching them out Robot versions must not be changed in the field If a customer has an Model 1 robot you must replace it with a Model 1 robot or components Similarly if a customer has a Model 2 robot you must replace it with a Model 2 robot or components Chapter 2 Product Description 2 9 2 10 How to Determine Which Robot Your Library Contains Physical Indicators e Model 2 robot label Model 2 robots have an M2 label located on the front
290. de reappears Cl cl 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to m 5 select function H The SCD changes to a flashing 4 Insert the FMR data cartridge or the tape drive exits maintenance mode The Ci SCD changes to a flashing The tape drive erases the firmware on the tape and rewrites the header in the cartridge memory to change the cartridge to a valid scratch blank data cartridge D 34 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or l non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or Ci the media has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode u temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in F Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the erro
291. de scanner cannot read it reliably Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the CM main library door Look for any obstructions in front of the module branding bar code labels 2 If no obvious foreign material is found the module branding label is damaged and the CM will need to be replaced DR081 Resolve Autoclean Failure Problem The library s AutoClean feature encountered an error and did not clean a drive Troubleshooting Steps 1 View the Monitor System gt Library Map report to locate the configured cleaning slots 2 Open the main library door and inspect these cleaning slots Verify that all the tapes occupying the cleaning slots are valid cleaning tapes particularly the tape with the volser mentioned in the ticket details 3 This issue may have been caused by an error elsewhere in the library Check for and resolve other unopened RAS tickets DR082 Resolve Library Calibration Failure Problem The library encountered a problem during calibration This ticket can be caused by a blocked or obscured line of sight of the calibration sensor or a damaged white calibration target This ticket can also be caused by a brightly colored tape cartridge located in a slot immediately above a white I O station calibration target 5 84 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps i Note the ticket details to determine the library module as well as any I O or storage column or
292. ded 2 A damaged tape that cannot be loaded in the drive Take this action if the tape cartridge will not load in the drive 1 Remove the tape cartridge and inspect it for damage If damaged discard it 2 Try another cartridge in that tape drive If it still fails or if the cartridge is stuck in the drive replace the drive sled See Sled on page 7 43 Take this action if the tape is stuck in the drive 1 Attempt to unload the tape from the drive using the host backup application that is currently using the drive or using the remote or local UI 2 If the cartridge will not unload contact IBM Technical Support for assistance A 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table A 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number 56 Flag Unload Failure SNMP Trap No Description When attempting to unload a tape cartridge a drive hardware malfunction can prevent the tape from being ejected The tape may actually be stuck in the drive Action Required Possible Causes 1 A drive hardware error that prevents the tape from being unloaded 2 A damaged tape that cannot be unloaded from the drive Take this action if the tape will not unload from the drive 1 Reset the drive See 6 40 2 If resetting the drive does not recover the error try to manually remove the tape cartridge from the drive and inspect it for damage If damag
293. device through an N_port or L_port by using direct attachment to a server The table below lists the topologies in which the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives can operate the Fibre Channel server connections that are available and the port NL N FL or F through which communication must occur D 54 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 16 Choosing the port for your topology and Fibre Channel connection Type of Fibre Channel Connection to Server Type of Topology Direct Connection Private Switched Fabric Public Fibre Channel Arbitrated L_Port FL_Port Loop can be Two Node Arbitrated Loop or Two Node Switched Fabric Loop is limited to two nodes Point to Point two nodes N_Port F_Port Starting Problem Determination Before starting the problem determination perform the following steps 1 Determine the type of Fibre Channel topology that you are using Ensure that the drive and the port to which it is attached are configured in compatible topologies 2 Using this guide or the service guides of associated switch hub or fiber products try to determine where the problem exists whether in the drive cable or the device to which the drive and cable attach 3 Ensure that the configuration and software levels are supported To determine the latest supported_attachments or to get a comprehensive list of compatible software visit http www ibm com storage Ito 4 Ensure that
294. dge from the cartridge loader tray Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 5 in Procedure on page 7 133 Refer to the appropriate procedure to install the new drive and return the failed drive Tape Broken in Mid tape 1 With the front of the drive facing you pull an arm s length of tape out of the take up reel from the left side of the drive Note If there is less than approximately 5 cm 2 in of tape on the take up reel go to Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin on page AEA From the supply reel inside the cartridge pull approximately 0 3 m 1 ft of tape From the take up reel thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end Overlap the tape ends loosely mending them together Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 6 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole J in Figure 7 153 on page 7 139 in the bottom cover Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle begin spooling tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a82ru008 Figure 7 153 Using hex wrench t
295. dge of the connector Important Be very careful not to damage the connector 7 Disengage the cable retention strap 8 Using the screwdriver lift the latch on the black connector then unplug the cable 9 Loosen the thumb screw J in Figure 7 67 a66mi005 Figure 7 67 Y motor thumb screw 10 Tilt the Y Motor to the left and remove from the Y axis Picker Assembly H in Figure 7 67 7 64 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Replacing the Y Motor on the Y axis Picker Assembly in a Rack mounted Library Tools Required e Flashlight e Small flat blade screwdriver 1 Ensure that the black plastic piece on the wiring end of the motor J in Figure 7 68 fits into the slot in the base a H in Figure 7 68 When the thumb screw J in Figure 7 68 is tightened the top of the motor 6 Figure 7 68 Correct Y motor position ue in Figure 7 68 must be parallel with the Picker guide rod H in Install the Y Motor in the Y axis Picker Assembly and tighten the thumb screw The small gear on the Y Motor must connect with the larger gear on the Y axis Picker Assembly 3 Connect the small white connector H in Figure 7 69 on page 7 66 Important Be very careful not to damage the connector Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 65 4 Connect the large black connector See Figure 7 69 a66mi004 Figure 7 69 Y motor connector a Pinch the
296. dix D Using Ultrium Drives D 41 Drive Error Codes Table D 11 gives descriptions of the errors and messages that pertain to the drive and tells what to do when you receive them Attention If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code other m than it automatically performs a drive dump If you force a drive dump the existing dump will be overwritten and data will be lost After you force a drive dump do not turn OFF the power to the drive or you may lose the dump data e Make note of the SCD error code prior to removing a cartridge or clearing the SCD error code e If an error occurred with a cartridge in the drive push the Unload Button to eject the cartridge e To clear the SCD error code and power cycle the drive press the Unload Button for ten seconds A drive dump will be created Attention If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code other m than it automatically performs a drive dump If you force a drive dump the existing dump will be overwritten and data will be lost After you force a drive dump do not turn off the power to the drive or you may lose the dump data Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display Error Code Cause and Action my ul No error occurred and no action is required This code displays when diagnostics have finished running and no error occurred Note The Single character Display is bl
297. djust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 11 a66mi017 Figure 7 10 Alignment pin and front thumb screw receptacles 4 Open the I O Station door then open the Access Door of the control module to expose the control module alignment pin behind the Access Door Push the control module onto the lower expansion module Twist the control module alignment pin F in Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 to unlock it from the up position Adjust the control module s position on top of the expansion module until the control module alignment pin drops into the alignment pin receptacle J in Figure 7 10 in the lower expansion module Tighten the front thumb screw H in Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 to secure the front of the control module to the lower expansion module 4 in Figure 7 10 Open the I O Station door and tighten the other front thumb screw 7 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi018 Figure 7 11 Control module rear thumb screws 10 Tighten the rear thumb screws f in Figure 7 11 that secure the control module to the lower expansion module 11 If your library is installed in a rack reinstall the rack ears on the front of the control module to secure it to the rack see Replacing the Rack Ears on page 7 20 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 13 a66mi007 Figure 7 12 Gear racks and gear rack locking mechanism Important If the Control Module is at the bottom
298. drive diagnostic A blank scratch cartridge is required for this test T051 Drive TapeAlert 32 Interface Description GUI Description The tape drive reported an external data interface problem Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 32 indicating a tape drive has detected a problem with the application client interface Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 32 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled only if all cables are OK and host communication to other drives works Resolution 1 Perform DRO12 Resolve Drive Tape Alert 32 Host Interface on page 2 Use the Details option in the RAS ticket to identify which tape drive reported the RAS ticket 3 Clear the RAS ticket 4 Check the cabling from the back of the tape drive to the host and reseat all the cables 5 If RAS ticket persists swap cables between drives to isolate a bad cable If this works and you can detect the drive replace the bad cable 6 If swapping cables did not fix the problem then upgrade the tape drive to the latest drive firmware 5 24 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T052 Drive TapeAlert 33 Media Eject Required Description GUI Description The tape drive h
299. drive to network cables communication terminator terminator A Module to module 5 Power cord upper communication cable module Ethernet cable g Power cord lower customer supplied module Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 31 Module communication terminator Module to module communication cable Ethernet cable customer supplied Module communication terminator 6 32 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 7 7o o Cj Pst ii 3 E 9938 QI SSS o Pe ol lacs age g 3 2090 SS ae o E 5N SS ay a O ny gq om o 9 Sa A care i 7 a Ww Figure 6 9 Cabling of a Multi Module Library with SCSI and Fibre Drives SCSI terminators Power cord Control Module Power cord Expansion Module a66ug056 SCSI drive cables Power cord Expansion Module Fibre drive to network cable 2 Check and reseat if necessary all of the cables and terminators connected to your library 3 Verify that there is no damage to any connector pins Internal Cables 1 Visually check and re
300. drives A 1 technical support 6 45 Technical Support iii accessing online iii templates advanced reporting 2 21 Test Drive Head D 38 tools required 7 2 topologies supported Fibre Channel D 54 Trademarks G 2 Traps F 1 two node configuration D 54 U Ultrium Tape Drives 2 14 Unload Button D 4 unsupported configuration 5 70 Updating firmware 6 25 using Fibre Channel interface 6 29 Index X 5 X 6 193310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel Machine Type 3576 Publication No GA32 0478 09 We appreciate your comments about this publication Please comment on specific errors or omissions accuracy organization subject matter or completeness of this book The comments you send should pertain to only the information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented For technical questions and information about products and prices please contact your IBM branch office your IBM business partner or your authorized remarketer When you send comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you IBM or any other organizations will only use the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form Comments
301. dual tape drive identified by its physical drive serial number TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Selected partition The report chart is based on an individual partition in the physical library Media Integrity Reporting The Media Integrity function records TapeAlert events to measure and evaluate media and drive performance in the library The administrator can request or configure various reports to assist in managing the overall reliability and performance of the media and drives or both Data collected and saved for these reports include the following Media barcode Drive serial number TapeAlert value Occurrence count of TapeAlert Time and date of last TapeAlert occurrence in GMT You can only access this report from the web client The path to open the report is Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Integrity To configure the report select the radio button beside the appropriate settings Range Specifies the range of time covered in the report Last seven days Last four weeks default Last three months All history as far back as there is data in the log file Attributes Specifies which values are included in the report and how they are combined Select in any combination including all default and none If you select no attributes the chart displays the TapeAlert count for the selected Grouping Cartridge Barcode All relevant tape cartridges Driv
302. dule If the library is a single control module skip this step 7 66 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a Open the I O station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into the control module The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance CAUTION Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis base plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab to the parked position Model 1 parking tab swivel toward you The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently release the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab a66mi200 Model 1 tab Figure 7 70 Robot Assembly Parking tab 3 Unstack the control module from the library Note You can skip this step if e There are no expansion modules stacked on the control module and e There are 12 inches of clearance above the control module Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 67 a Before removing the control module you must first remove all expansion modules if any above the control module See Removing Replacing an Expansion Module on page 7 18 b Remove the control module See Repl
303. dware circuitry An example of firmware is the Basic Input Output System BIOS in read only memory ROM on a PC motherboard FLASH EEPROM An electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM that can be updated FMR Field microcode replacement format The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium formatter Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion speed matching encoding first level error recovery and interfaces to one or more tape drives FP File protect frayed Damaged as if by an abrasive substance FRU Field replaceable unit FSC Fault symptom code FSI Fault symptom index functional microcode Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information G g Gram GB gigabyte GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Gbi gigabit gigabit Gbit 1 000 000 000 bits gigabyte GB 1 000 000 000 bytes Gigabit Interface Converter GBIC Converts copper interface to optic interface gnd Ground H HBA Host Bus Adapter hertz Hz Unit of frequency One hertz equals one cycle per second hex Hexadecimal High Voltage Differential HVD A logic signaling system that enables data communication between a supported host and the library HVD signaling uses a paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on the SCSI bus Any noise injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus s
304. e The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance CAUTION Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis base plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab to the parked position Model 1 parking tab swivel toward you Model 2 parking tab counter clockwise direciton The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently release the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information ASSAY 4 AAA Model 2 tab a66mi198 Model 1 tab Figure 7 127 Releasing the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab 3 Optional Unstack the control module from the library following the steps below Note Unstacking the control module is not required but may be helpful if the library is tall or if there is not enough room above the control module to remove the top cover and the robot Note Before removing the control module you must first remove all expansion modules if any that are located above the control module DANGER WITHOUT TAPE DRIVES TAPE CARTRIDGES OR POWER SUPPLIES A 5U CONTROL MODULE WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 60 LBS A9U EXPANSION MODULE WITHOUT TAPE DRIVES TAPE
305. e If so close the ticket and upgrade again with the correct firmware upgrade file 4 If none of these conditions apply close this ticket and attempt the upgrade a second time 5 If this ticket reappears after retrying the upgrade contact Service for assistance with resolving this issue DRO70 Resolve Tape Drive Firmware Mismatch Problem The library has detected that all drives do not have the same firmware version Troubleshooting Steps 1 Go to the Tools gt Drive Info screen on the local control panel or Service Library gt Update Drive Firmware on the Web User Interface to view the firmware version installed on each drive 2 Note the drive s that do not have the latest version of firmware and upgrade those drives See Updating Drive Firmware on page 6 27 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 81 DR072 Resolve Tape Drive Auto level Failure Problem The automatic update of drive brick firmware failed The code image stored on the library appears to be invalid Troubleshooting Steps 1 Download a new drive brick firmware image through the Web UI 2 Close this ticket and reboot the library so that the drive brick upgrade is performed again upon initialization 3 If this ticket reappears contact Service for further assistance DR074 Resolve Unassigned Inaccessible Tape Cartridge Problem At least one cartridge has been de
306. e SCSI sense data e For drive errors Resource Name rmtn for example rmt0 and Resource Type LTO refer to Drive Error Log Example on page E 3 and locate the SCSI sense data e For SCSI bus errors not SCSI adapter errors refer to SCSI Bus Error Example and SCSI Bus Error Example 2 on page E 5 to determine which host adapter SCSI bus and device or devices are affected e For Fibre Channel errors not Fibre Channel adapter errors determine which host adapter and device are affected e For SCSI adapter errors not SCSI bus errors use the maintenance package for the host Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 E 1 Note See Drive Sense Data on page B 6 for further details on sense data Library Error Log Example a LABEL TAPE_ERR2 IDENTIFIER 476B351D Date Time Wed Oct 11 11 42 17 Sequence Number 25265 Machine ID 000D090D4C00 Node ID tsm Error Class H Error Type PERM Resource Name smc Resource Class tape Resource Type 3576 Location 40 60 00 6 0 VPD Manufacturer ese stern ear eeoa IBM Machine Type and Model ULT3576 TL Serial NUMDEr oe eee IBM7810698 Device Specific FW x xx Firmware Level Description TAPE DRIVE FAILURE Probable Causes TAPE DRIVE Failure Causes TAPE TAPE DRIVE Recommended Actions PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES Detail Data SENSE DATA OCOO 0000 A500 0001 1009 0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 7000 0400 0000 0046 00
307. e refer to Exiting Maintenance Mode on Function Code U Post Error Reporting Disabled When Post Error Reporting is disabled deferred check conditions are not reported to the host and temporary errors are not reported in the sense data This is the normal default setting for the drive When the drive has Post Error Reporting disabled Function Code will be displayed in Maintenance Mode The drive will default to Post Error Reporting disabled after a reboot or power off on cycle 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 Ci It Press the Unload Button once per second until either L or appears in the ri 11 SCD H or will appear in the SCD to indicate the current setting for Post Error Reporting If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Exit Maintenance Mode if you do not want_to change the current setting for Post Error Reporting For instructions see Exiting Maintenance Mode on To disable Post Error Reporting Press and hold the Unload Button for three E 11 seconds while appears in the SCD The SCD changes to after you release the Unload Button Press the Unload Button once per second to select another Maintenance Mode Function To exit Maintenance Mode refer to Exiting Maintenance Mode on Appen
308. e system reads the physical module label 2 ACM chassis FRU is replaced in an already configured system 3 A previously detected and configured EM is removed completely from a vertical stack of modules 4 A previously detected and configured EM is removed completely from a vertical stack of modules and replaced with another EM of similar OR different size and location 5 Bar code reader is not scanning the labels correctly 6 Scratched or damaged label Possible FRU Replacement e Picker Assembly Resolution Perform DR039 Resolve Logical Library Deletion on page 5 75 T081 Incorrect Module Brand Description GUI Description The library detected an incompatible module brand that does not match the library configuration Explanation The branding of a system is accomplished in two different ways The firmware uses information saved on the compact flash to determine what brand the firmware and GUI s will present to the user There is also physical branding of the system in the form of different cosmetic skins badging paint external labels etc on each module In addition each module has a machine readable bar code label that carries a module serial number SN and branding information that should match the physical branding of the module The library manufacturing process should install a machine readable bar code label that matches the external user visible branding of the module Beca
309. e the tape s surface or edges which may interfere with read or write reliability Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge e If cartridges must be stacked horizontally for moving and handling do not stack cartridges more than five high e Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse Degaussing makes the tape unusable e For external long term vaulted storage store cartridges in a vertical orientation Ensure Proper Packaging e When shipping a cartridge use the original or better packaging e Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case e Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its jewel case during transportation Ultrium Turtlecases by Perm A Store have been tested_and found to be satisfactory They are available at http www turtlecase com a69i0077 Figure D 7 Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase e Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope Always place it in a box or package e If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material ensure the following Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust moisture and other contaminants Pack the cartridge snugly do not allow it to move around Double box the cartridge place it inside a box then place that box inside the shipping box and add padding between the two box
310. e Drive Sled Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 59 D 60 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host Retrieving messages from different hosts is discussed in this appendix Obtaining Error Information From an RS 6000 IBM device drivers for the RS 6000 system logs error information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library The error information includes the following 1 Device VPD 2 SCSI command parameters 3 SCSI sense data if available The AIX Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for the RS 6000 provides logging to the system error log for a variety of errors You can view the error log by following this procedure 1 At the AIX command line type errpt pg to display a summary report or type errpt a pg to display a detailed report Press Enter Note In most cases you will use the summary report to find the date and time of any errors related to library devices then use the detail report to obtain the sense data needed to identify the cause of the error 2 Press Enter to scroll through the error log 3 Type q and press Enter to quit the error log at any time To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report determine the type of error by using the examples that follow e For library errors Resource Name smen for example smc0 and Resource Type 3576 refer to Library Error Log Example on page E 2 and locate th
311. e Failure T037 Drive TapeAlert Flag 8 Not Data Grade T038 Drive TapeAlert Flag 9 Write Protected T039 Drive TapeAlert 12 Unsupported Format ar wh ae T040 Drive TapeAlert 15 MIC Chip Failure T041 Drive TapeAlert 16 Forced Eject T045 Drive TapeAlert 20 Clean Now T046 Drive TapeAlert 21 Clean Periodic T047 Drive TapeAlert 22 Expired ae Media T048 Drive TapeAlert 23 invalid Cleaning Tape x T049 Drive TapeAlert 30 Hardware A T050 Drive TapeAlert 31 Hardware B T051 Drive TapeAlert 32 Interface T052 Drive TapeAlert 33 Media Eject Required Ro tee Rg T053 Unload Timeout TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 5 2 5 3 5 4 055 5 7 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 20 5 20 5 20 5 21 5 21 lt 5 21 lt 5 22 2 9 22 5 22 5 23 5 23 5 24 5 24 5 25 9 29 T055 Drive TapeAlert 37 Drive Detects Voltage Problem T060 Main Access Door Open T061 Tape Alert 55 Loading Fail T062 Module Configuration Problem T063 WWNN Label Change T064 LCB Hardware Failure P T065 Robot Over Current Condition T066 Drive Power Fuse F1 Blown T067 Display Assembly Hardware Failure T068 Destination Element Full T069 Source Element Empty T070 Library Control Path Failure T071 Missing Power Supply T072 Unmanaged System Fault T073 I O Storage Door Open T074 Drive Sled Auto Leveling Failure T075 Unsupported Modu
312. e H AHIS BI amp A HI SE ASME Ol 8S FF Uber EDE ASOA ASSE ASS A Sep EEF G 6 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Russia Electromagnetic Interference EMI Class A Statement BHUMAHME Hactosnwee nsgenne oTHocutca K Knaccy A B gt KUNbIX MOMCLLUEHUAX OHO MOXET CO3MaBaTb paguonomexu DNA CHNXEHNA KOTOPbIX HEOOXOAMMbI AONONHUTeNbHbIe Mepbi rusemi Notices G 7 G 8 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Glossary This glossary defines the special terms abbreviations and acronyms that are used in this publication If you do not find the term you are looking for refer to the index or to the Dictionary of Computing 1994 Numbers 2 1 compression The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared to the quantity of data that can be stored without compression In 2 1 compression twice as much data can be stored with compression as can be stored without compression A A Ampere ac Alternating current access method A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices adapter card A circuit board that adds function to a computer ADI Automation Drive Interface adj Adjustment AIX Advanced Interactive Executive IBM s implementation of the UNIX operating system The RS 6000 system among others uses AIX as it s operating system alphanumeric Pertaining to a character set that contains letters numerals and usually other charac
313. e Information Attention Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the tape Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape the drive or both Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches from the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge s data onto another cartridge Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data This procedure may affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and unloading operations Touch only the end of the tape Touching the tape in an area other than the end can damage the tape s surface or edges which may interfere with read or write reliability To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit refer to Figure D 13 and perform the steps below 1 Attach the leader pin attach tool E to the cartridge H so that the tool s hook K latches into the cartridge s door H Pull the tool back to hold the door open then slide the tool onto the cartridge Open the tool s pivot arm H A67E0033 Figure D 13 Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge To hold the cartridge door open hook the tool into the door and pull the tool back To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge refer to Figure D 14 on page D 24 and perform the steps below iL Attach the cartridge manual rewind tool ff to the cartridge s hub H by fittin
314. e Level command to download firmware to the library Updating library firmware can be performed only from the Web User Interface Important Before updating firmware e Resolve and close all open Operator Interventions e Save the current system Configuration See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 To update library firmware 1 Download the latest level of library firmware to your host computer by visiting http www ibm com storage support 2 From the Web User Interface select Service Library gt View Update Library Firmware Level 3 Browse to the file on your computer select the tgz file that was downloaded from the IBM web site then click the Update Firmware button The Web User Interface will indicate that the operation has completed This means that the firmware file has been successfully moved from the host computer to the library 4 Wait for the library to reboot before resuming normal library operations It will be several minutes before the library reboots 5 Save the current system Configuration See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 Important After the update process starts you must wait until the library reboots Do not attempt to interrupt the process in any way or the upgrade will not be successful TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Updating Drive Firmware Drive firmware is best updated using the drive s application interface SCSI or fibre
315. e Physical Serial Number SN All relevant tape drives TapeAlert The TapeAlert flags that were issued For a description of all TapeAlert flags see Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx on page 5 1 Chart Indicates how the data is displayed in the chart Select Area Bar default Line or Pie Type Indicates the chart type Select one of the following Rollup default Displays the number of TapeAlerts for the combination of Grouping and Attributes you selected default Trend Shows the occurrence of TapeAlerts over time Grouping Specifies which one or more drives or tape cartridges on which to base the report Choose one of the following All default All tape drives and tape cartridges for which a TapeAlert was issued during the specified range Selected Drive by Physical Serial Number An individual tape drive Only tape drives which issued a TapeAlert during the specified range appear in the report Selected Cartridge by Barcode An individual tape cartridge Only tape cartridges that were associated with a TapeAlert during the specified range appear in the report Chapter 2 Product Description 2 19 2 20 e Sorting Specifies how the data will be sorted Choose from the following Alphabetical Count ascending Last Occurrence default Media Security Media Security is a feature of the libr
316. e SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D221 7 clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code F Write Performance Test Approximate Run Time 5 minutes Total Number of Loops 10 C Function Code to tape performs tests to ensure that the drive can read from and write Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Attention For this test insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or 1 I non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media pam I has read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance mMode For instructions see Entering Maintenance
317. e also provides a configurable I O Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 6 1 Station for importing and exporting data cartridges and several columns of fixed storage space You can control the library using its LCD Operator Panel or by using the remote Web User Interface An expansion module provides a configurable I O Station and additional space for tape drives and fixed tape storage How the Library Reports Problems This library uses advanced problem detection reporting and notification technology to alert customers of problems as soon as they occur It performs numerous self tests to monitor the library s temperature voltage and currents and standard library operations These self tests are performed each time the library is powered ON and during normal operation when the library is idle If the self test detects a problem the library generates a service report or Operator Intervention that identifies which component is likely causing the problem The library s LEDs may also turn ON OFF or blink to indicate an abnormal state If the problem is not severe the library continues to provide full functionality to all unaffected logical libraries When possible the library provides instructions for resolving problems These instructions appear on the library s Operator Panel Note If resolution of the problems includes instructions to open an Access Door an Access Door must be opened and closed to clear the error and to
318. e cartridge and the tape as well as statistical information about the cartridge s use For more information see Cartridge Memory Chip LTO CM on page D 7 Cartridge door protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive Leader Pin The tape is attached to a leader pin behind the cartridge door When the cartridge is inserted into the drive a threading mechanism pulls the pin and tape out of the cartridge across the drive head and onto a non removable take up reel The head can then read or write data from or to the tape Write protect Switch prevents data from being written to the tape cartridge For more Label area information see Write Protect Switch on page D 7 idges and bar Insertion guide a large notched area that prevents the cartridge from being inserted incorrectly D 6 Types of Cartridges Ultrium media is available in the following types e Data Cartridge e WORM Write Once Read Many Cartridge on page D 8 e Cleaning Cartridge on page D 9 Data Cartridge All generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges contain 1 2 inch dual coat metal particle tape When processing tape in the cartridges Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear serpentine recording format Each generation of data cartridge is identified by case color native data capacity recording format and nominal cartridge life TS3310 Tape Libra
319. e drive sleds the library detected a missing or corrupt UDS lif drive sled firmware file Detection Scenario Main Library Firmware that controls and performs drive sled firmware updates detects that the drive sled firmware update file is missing or corrupted Root Causes The drive sled firmware update file is missing or corrupted Possible FRUs Library firmware Resolution Perform DR095 Resolve Drive Sled Auto level Failure on page 5 90 T130 Tape Drive Cleaning Failure Description GUI Description A tape drive was cleaned but continues to request cleaning Explanation After a drive was cleaned and the cleaning tape was removed from the drive the drive continues to request cleaning Detection Scenario A drive continues to request cleaning after successful cleaning cycles have been applied 5 52 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Root Causes Tape drive malfunction Possible CRUs Drive Sled Resolution Perform DRO096 Resolve Drive Cleaning Failure on 1 T132 Hardware Clock Failure Description GUI Description The hardware real time clock RTC has failed The library system time may appear to be set correctly but accurate time will be lost following a power cycle or reboot Explanation While setting the library time the library detected an error in the hardware real time clock RTC This type of error will allo
320. e front 8 Disconnect the module to module cables 9 With a person on each side of the expansion module and a person in front of the expansion module pull the module out of the rack 10 Place the module on a sturdy work surface Replacing an Expansion Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger 1 If your library is to be reinstalled into a rack perform the following a With a person on each side of the expansion module and one person in front of the expansion module pick the module up from the work surface and slide it onto the Rack Kit rails installed in your rack b Lower the locating pin Refer to Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 c Tighten the front thumb screws d Lower the gear racks Refer to Figure 7 12 on page 7 14 Important If the Expansion Module is at the bottom of the library the gear racks should remain locked in the UP position Skip step d if the Expansion Module is at the bottom of the library If the Expansion Module is not at the bottom of the library perform step d TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e Install the module to module cables and terminators f Tighten the rear thumb screws g Tighten the thumb screw that secures the expansion module to the rear flange of each Rack Kit rail h Open the I O Station door then the Access door on the expansion module i Reinstall the rack ears on the front of the expansion module to secure it to the rack see Replaci
321. e library robot attempts to scan the barcode label on the drive If the label is read and communication is not present the ticket gets posted based on the fact that the drive is physically present but no communication is occurring If the label is not read the drive is assumed to be physically removed and therefore communication should not be expected Detection Scenarios 1 Routine polling of the sled can no longer occur 2 Specific library to drive sled commands are not responded to Root Causes 1 Drive is physically remove unplugged intentional or never installed correctly 2 Various hardware failures on the drive sled 3 Various hardware failures in the library Possible CRU Replacements Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables Drive Sled Possible FRU Replacements Internal Cables and Boards Kit e Expansion Module Chassis Resolution Perform DR029 Resolve Drive Sled Communication Loss on page 5 71 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 13 T022 Tape Drive Communication Failure Description GUI Description Communication to the tape drive has failed inside the drive sled assembly Explanation Internal to the drive the sled control board can no longer communicate with the drive brick Detection Scenarios 1 Routine Polling between sled control board and drive brick can no longer occur 2 Specific commands such as
322. e tangled and damaged but in tact Return the drive after the procedure is completed OR No damage to tape or no apparent failure There appears to be no damage or slack to the tape Return the drive after the procedure is completed Removing a Drive from a Sled 1 Place the sled so the base is up the orange notice is visible 2 Remove the four screws read the notice for screw replacement 3 Turn the sled over and remove the six T 10 cover screws 7 134 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a Remove the cover o Remove the two screws from the barcode bracket make note of the barcode orientation for replacement Slide the drive forward approximately two inches Remove the power and interface connectors from the drive Remove the RS422 connector from the sled board keyed Lift or slide the drive out of the sled housing ON Tape Spooled off Supply Reel 1 With the front of the drive facing you pull an arm s length of tape out of the take up reel from the left side of the drive 2 From the take up reel thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive 3 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 4 Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel inside the cartridge 5 From the bottom of the drive insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wren
323. e tape see cartridge or to faulty drive hardware D 7 If Flag Number 4 is also set the cartridge is defective Replace the tape cartridge If Flag Number 4 is not set see Error Code 6 in 7 Media life No Set when the tape cartridge 1 Copy the data to another reaches its end of life EOL tape cartridge 2 Discard the old EOL cartridge 8 Not data grade No Set when the cartridge is not Replace the tape with a data grade Any data that you data grade tape write to the tape is at risk 9 Write protect No Set when the tape drive detects Ensure that the cartridge s that the tape cartridge is write protect switch is set so write protected that the tape drive can write data to the tape see D 7 10 No removal No Set when the tape drive receives Refer to the documentation for an UNLOAD command after the your server s operating system server prevented the tape cartridge from being removed 11 Cleaning media No Set when you load a cleaning No action required cartridge into the drive 12 Unsupported No Set when you load an Use a supported tape cartridge format unsupported cartridge type into the drive or when the cartridge format has been corrupted 14 Unrecoverable No Set when the operation failed See snapped tape because the tape in the drive snapped 15 Cartridge memory No Set when a cartridge memory Replace the tape cartridge If chip failure CM failure is detected on the this message occurs on multiple loaded
324. e tape is in the picker tape recovery must be a part of the resolution strategy This ticket cause specifically excludes any Z axis motion failures that are typically associated with get or put actions Specifically included are motion failures that occur while pivoting moving on the X axis or moving on the Y axis Detection Scenarios A specified move in the X axis cannot complete A specified move in the Y axis cannot complete Ooi A specified movement in the Theta 8 axis cannot complete Root Causes 1 A large number of electrical hardware failures Code or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuit issues motor winding issues cable connection issues etc 2 A relatively small number of mechanical hardware errors that do not result in the detection of a complete obstruction but where motion control does not appear to be normal contamination or damage to encoder wheel high friction etc Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Robot Assembly e Cable Spool e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Internal Cables and Boards Kit 5 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Resolution e Perform DRO001 Resolve Picker Cartridge Presence on page 5 59 e Perform DRO005 Resolve Motion Failure on page 5 62 T006 X Y Theta Motion Profile Failure No Tape
325. e the problem was reported close this operator intervention message and retry operations e If the problem is reported again contact Service e If there was no user interaction with the I O station at the time the problem was reported defective hardware is likely Contact service to resolve the problem e Choose one of the following options Select Close to close the ticket now Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution It may take several minutes to achieve offline state for all partitions depending on host commands in progress Do you want to set all logical libraries to offline at this time e No You have elected to troubleshoot at a later time Ticket will remain open e Yes Open all I O Station doors Select Self Test to trigger the library to verify all doors are open Self Test Failed Test failed Door X is not detected open Replace I O Station lock assembly Self Test Passed Door open test passed Close all I O Station doors Select Self Test to trigger the library to verify all I O Station doors are closed Self Test Failed Test failed Door X is not detected closed Replace I O Station lock assembly Self Test Passed Door closed test passed Select Self Test to trigger the library to verify that all I O station locks can be locked and opened Self Test Failed Test failed Lock X is not opening and closing properly Re
326. e the ticket and unload the drive Consult your user documentation to reset the drive Once the drive is operational again reload the tape cartridge and restart the host application If the problem persists contact Service for further assistance ON gr Poo py Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR118 Resolve EKM Path Diagnostic Delay This diagnostic resolution provides customer resolution steps for T149 Key Path Diagnostic Delay on page 5 58 Problem The library attempted to perform a Key Path Diagnostic via an available encryption capable tape drive per the test interval setting However all configured tape drives are either loaded unavailable or otherwise busy and cannot initiate the Key Path Diagnostic to determine proper EKM server connectivity and operability Troubleshooting Steps 1 View the operator intervention details to determine which EKM server cannot be tested because the drives are not available to initiate a Key Path Diagnostic 2 Determine whether all tape drives that are configured for such EKM server access are currently mounted or otherwise unavailable and can therefore not initiate a Key Path Diagnostic 3 If none of the configured tape drives are available to initiate a Key Path Diagnostic ignore and close this opera
327. eaning tape to continue Use a known good cleaning tape to clean the tape drive Resolution Perform DR018 Resolve Drive Cleaning Requirement on T046 Drive TapeAlert 21 Clean Periodic Description GUI Description The drive is requesting cleaning at the next convenient opportunity Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 21 indicating that the drive requires cleaning This should be coincident with a C on the drive seven segment display Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 21 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that a normal cleaning cycle has occurred Possible CRU Replacements No library CRU or FRU is involved Rather this is an indication that the tape drive requires a cleaning tape to continue Use a known good cleaning tape to clean the tape drive Resolution Perform DR018 Resolve Drive Cleaning Requirement on page 5 67 T047 Drive TapeAlert 22 Expired Cleaning Media Description GUI Description The cleaning tape has been used too many times Explanation System determines that a cleaning media is expired Detection Scenarios e Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 22 e Code that manages library based cleaning determines that a cartridge is consumed based on actively managing the use count Root Causes Cleaning ta
328. ective I E area element for operator access and removal 5 92 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps e If the media removal was expected I O area elements might be available for operator initiated cartridge insert operations import operations or both e If the media removal was unexpected cartridge removal authorization might need to be validated 1 To view which cartridges have been removed go to Service Library gt Media Security Log and select Media Security Log 2 You have three options e Select Close to close the operator intervention e Select Exit to leave the operator intervention open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR110 Resolve Drive Encryption Control Failure Problem A tape drive reported that the requested drive encryption method could not be enabled Troubleshooting Steps 1 Note the drive sled coordinate from the RAS ticket and close the ticket 2 Make sure the referenced tape drive is not loaded with a tape cartridge Unload the drive if a tape cartridge is present 3 Verify that the tape drive firmware version is at least at the firmware version referenced in the release notes for the currently installed library firmware version Update the tape drive firmware if a newer version is required 4 Consult your user documentation regarding removal and replacement of a drive sled 5 Remove
329. ed Monitor for reoccurrence DR029 Resolve Drive Sled Communication Loss Problem The system can no longer communicate with a drive sled There are a few scenarios that can create this problem 1 A user removed a drive sled 2 A hardware failure that results in the drive appearing to be disconnected Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 71 Troubleshooting Steps 1 If the drive was intentionally removed close this ticket 2 Check for T021 tickets posted against other drives in the same module if present If other tickets exist skip to step 7 3 Close this ticket and remove and reseat the drive Check the thumb screws on the drive to make sure they are tight and the drive is mounted flush to the library chassis 4 If this ticket reappears close it again and move the drive to an empty slot in the same module If no ticket appears after this contact Service to replace the chassis 5 Otherwise close the ticket and move the drive to an empty slot in an adjacent module if applicable Check for ticket recurrence 6 If the ticket is posted yet again contact Service for drive replacement If the ticket is posted yet again contact Service for drive replacement 7 Check the power supply in the back of the module to verify that it is turned on and plugged in properly If not correct the problem close all the T021 tickets for the module and verify that they do not
330. ed discard it 3 If the cartridge will not unload contact your next level of support Take this action if the tape is stuck in the drive 1 Attempt to unload the tape from the drive using the host backup application that is currently using the drive or via the remote or local UI 2 If the cartridge will not unload contact IBM Technical Support for assistance 59 WORM Medium integrity check failed Set when the drive determines that the data on tape is suspect from a WORM point of view 1 Copy the data to another WORM tape cartridge 2 Discard the old WORM cartridge 60 WORM Medium Overwrite attempted Set when the drive rejects a write operations because the rules for allowing WORM writes have not been met Data can only be appended to WORM media Overwrites to WORM media are not allowed Append the information on a WORM tape cartridge or write the data to a non WORM cartridge Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive A 5 A 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix B Sense Data When a drive encounters an error it makes sense data available You can use IBM device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors Instructions for downloading installing and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide The IBM device drivers may conflict wit
331. ed to the 5U Control Module Like the control module the expansion modules provide fixed storage slots tape drive slots and power supply slots The I O station in an expansion module can be configured as storage If an expansion module contains only cartridges no drives all power is derived from the control module O Station I O Stations 7 in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 are located on the front panel of the library and enable the importing and exporting of cartridges without interrupting normal library operations A control module I O Station has a capacity of six cartridges A 9U expansion module I O Station has a capacity of 12 cartridges Note This library reads bar code labels to identify the specific cartridges in each slot Ensure that all cartridges placed in the library have appropriate bar code labels When an I O Station slot is assigned to a logical library only that logical library can access that slot The I O Station is shared among all logical libraries but the I O Station slots are owned by one logical library at a time In a 5U library the six I O Station slots cannot be configured as storage In a library that has expansion modules the I O Stations can be configured as follows Table 2 1 Library I O Station configurations Number of T O slots in Total number Expansion Number of expansion T O slots in of I O Station Modules License Keys modules control module Slots 0 0 0 6 6 1
332. eginning of the tape A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical beginning of the tape Relative LPOS fields Bytes 30 33 reports the current physical position on the tape SCSI Address field Byte 34 reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive Values returned range from 00h to OFh This field Byte 35 contains the frame and drive number passed across the RS 422 serial interface B 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix C Library Diagrams Power Requirements Control Module Electrical System on page C 6 Control Module and Expansion Module Electrical System on page C 7 Library Diagrams on The library power system includes redundant 48 VDC power supplies with current sharing outputs The same power system is used in both control modules CM and expansion module EM The redundant configuration power supplies may be hot swapped without interrupting library operation Each supply in a CM and EM includes its own input AC line cord During redundant operation each supply carries one half the power load If a line cord or power supply fails the second supply sources the complete power load Optionally a single power supply and line cord may be installed if redundant power is not required The second power supply slot is physically covered in this configuration The library may be upgraded to redundant power at a later time The power supply output voltage t
333. ehind the Cable Spool Assembly a amp Backplane Connector Board BCB Rear View Drive Sled Injerface Board DSIB Side Cover Removed 8 D shell connectors and flat cables side cover removed ar Drive power overload fuse cover plate Drive power overload fuse Foot pad Locations Removing the cover from the intetnal drive Using hex wrench to ewind tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to repel gear train Using hex weneh to rnd tape into cartridge Leader Block Assembly LBA Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 7 111 x 7 113 7 114 7 115 7 116 7 117 7 118 7 119 7 120 7 121 7 122 7 123 7 124 7 125 7 126 7 127 7 127 7 129 7 130 7 130 7 132 7 134 7 135 7 136 7 137 7 138 7 139 7 154 7 155 7 156 7 157 7 158 7 159 9 1 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 D 12 D 13 D 14 D 15 D 16 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to veal gear train Leader Block Assembly LBA Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to reveals gear train Leader Block Assembly LBA Types of Power Cord Receptacles Front panel of the drive Inserting a cartridge into the drive The IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge Ultrium Data Cartridge
334. eiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted overtightening To tighten too much P parameter A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that may denote the application PF Path Failover p bit Parity bit PC Parity check PCC Power control compartment PDF Portable Document Format PE Parity error Product engineer pick Pertaining to the library to remove by means of a robotic device a tape cartridge from a storage slot or drive picker A robotic mechanism located inside the library that moves cartridges between the cartridge storage slots and the drive PM Preventive maintenance POR Power on reset port A physical connection for communication between the 3590 and the host processor The 3590 has two SCSI ports Portable Document Format PDF A standard specified by Adobe Systems Incorporated for the electronic distribution of documents PDF files are compact can be distributed globally via e mail the Web intranets or CD ROM and can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader which is software from Adobe Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home page PROM Programmable read only memory PS Power supply PWR Power Glossary H 11 R rack A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem such as the library rackmount kit A packaged collection of articles used to install the rack mounted version of the library
335. em otherwise the Y axis Assembly will no longer be level Ensure the Y axis Assembly is level from front to back If a gear rack gap was discovered or if the Y axis Assembly was previously removed and replaced one side may be off by one or two teeth With the top cover removed and power OFF slowly lift the Y axis Assembly and re insert see M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 77 Ensure that the Y axis motor is properly inserted in the opening in the base plate 1 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Problem Area If Then Web User Interface Library Not Booting A Web User Interface Help page is not opening Verify that other help pages are not currently open If other pages are currently open close them and try again You are unable to log in to the library from the Web User Interface Web Browser cannot display the web page One of the library security settings may be disabled e From the Operator Panel Tools gt Security Ensure that the Network Interface and Remote UI options are enabled You are unable to configure or use one of the internet traffic control parameters such as ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol or pinging the library SSH Secure Shell iLink Services SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SMI S Storage Management Initiative Specification There is a blank Operator Panel display e Picker doe
336. embly Ensure all gear racks are properly positioned and that they contain NO GAPS between units in the library 2 Set the M2 Robot Assembly on top of the control module as shown in Figure 7 84 on page 7 78 3 Remove the Cable Spool connector KH in Figure 7 85 from the black plastic Figure 7 85 7 85 peg H in 4 Carefully lift the Cable Spool connector Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 79 a66mi124 Figure 7 86 Thumbscrew securing Cable Spool 5 Tighten the thumb screw to connect the spooler cable to the M2 Robot Assembly J in Figure 7 86 6 Lower the M2 Robot Assembly by tilting its gears at a 45 angle onto the top of the front and rear gear racks see Figure 7 87 on page 7 81 and Figure 7 88 lon page 7 81 Important BE VERY CAREFUL TO START BOTH M2 ROBOT ASSEMBLY GEARS TOGETHER TO ENSURE THE M2 ROBOT ASSEMBLY IS LEVEL 7 80 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi126 Figure 7 87 Guide rollers on M2 Robot Assembly a66mi125 Figure 7 88 M2 Robot Assembly rollers inserted in gear rack track 7 After lowering the M2 Robot Assembly a few teeth verify that the M2 Robot Assembly is level with the library chassis If it is not level remove the M2 Robot Assembly and reinsert 8 Replace the I O Station 9 Close the Access Door then the I O Station door 10 Replace the top cover of the control module if necessary Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and R
337. emove and Replace Procedures 7 35 7 36 2 Open the I O Station and Access doors of the control module Note If the I O Station door is locked see Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door on page 6 43 3 Perform Removing an I O Station on page 7 34 4 Remove the mounting screw H in Figure 7 36 on page 7 35 and set it aside 5 Disconnect the I O Station cable J in Figure 7 36 on page 7 35 from the lock assembly 6 Remove the lock assembly from the module enclosure Replacing the I O Station Lock Assembly 1 Perform Removing the 1 0 Station Lock Assembly on page 7 35 in the reverse order Important a When installing the lock assembly be careful not to damage any of the cables or connector pins b Ensure that the back end of the lock assembly fits into the appropriate slot at the bottom of the enclosure c Ensure the I O Station switch actuator lever J in Figure 7 36 lon page 7 35 is not stuck under the enclosure sheet metal and operates without binding on the enclosure Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Removing the I O Station Safety Flap from a Control Module SU 1 Perform Removing an I O Station on page 7 34 2 Unhook the front spring wire F in Figure 7 37 on page 7 37 from the tab on the I O flap TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 7 37 I O Safety Flap Front Spring Wire a66mi117 3 Push
338. emoving a Drive Sled Important If removing more than one drive sled at a time record the locations of each drive before they are removed Ensure that the drives are reinstalled in the correct location 1 Vary all drives offline from the host e From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode e From the Web User Interface select Manage Drives gt State Online Offline a66mi023 Figure 7 46 Drive sled detail 2 Disconnect the drive cable and place it on a flat surface in a secure location to avoid damaging the cable 7 42 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 4 a For a SCSI drive loosen the two thumb screws that hold the SCSI cable and terminator in place by turning them counterclockwise Disconnect the cable and terminator from the drive being removed b For a Fibre Channel or SAS drive unplug the host interface cable Loosen the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 46 on page 7 42 that hold the drive in place by turning them counterclockwise Slide the drive out of the library module Grasp the handle H in Figure 7 46 lon page 7 42 and slowly pull the drive toward you while supporting the drive sled from underneath Note Removing a drive sled with power ON will generate a Service Action Ticket T012 Replacing a Drive Sled Attention NEVER install a drive sled when a cartridge is in the drive in the eject position Remove the cartridge first a66ug011 Figure 7 47 Control
339. emoving and Replacing the Model 1 Picker Assembly from the Y Carriage ana Inside the Library 7 74 Removing and Replacing the Model 1 Y Carriage Assembly 7 76 M2 Robot Assembly 7 77 M2 Picker Assembly 7 82 Removing Replacing a Storage Calin 7 106 Cable Spool Assembly 7 110 Gear Rack gt 7 116 Removing Internal Cables and Boards 7 121 Replacing Internal Cables and Boards 7 129 Remove and Replace Drive Power Fuse 7 129 Removing Installing Library Foot Pads 7 131 Removing Library Foot Pads 7 131 Installing Library Foot Pads 7 131 Manual Cartridge Removal from a Drive 7 132 Before You Begin 7 133 Recommended Tools 7 133 Beginning Procedure 7 133 Removing a Drive from a Sled 7 134 Tape Spooled off Supply Reel 7 135 Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin 7 136 Tape Broken in Mid tape 7 138 Tape Tangled along Tape Path 7 139 No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape 7 142 Chapter 8 History of Service Activity 8 1 Chapter 9 Parts List 9 1 Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive A 1 Appendix B Sense Data B 1 Library Sense Data B 1 Drive Sense Data B 6 Appendix C Library EE C 1 Power Requirements C 1 Interpreting Library Diagrams C2 Control Module Electrical System C6 Control Module and ie Module Electrical System C7 Library Electrical Black C8 Library Control Blade C 9 Library Control Blade Functions
340. enable the robotics to function properly Customers can frequently resolve a simple problem themselves by using the information found filChapter 1 tat Sewies oripaset 1 the problem involves a field replaceable unit FRU the customer must contact IBM Technical Support Only qualified service technicians can service FRUs Working with Operator Intervention Messages From the Tools menu on the Operator Panel you can view all of the library operator interventions This view lists all of the library operator interventions in the order in which they were created starting with the most recent Each message contains a Service Action Ticket SAT code bec eenvies Action Tickets on pagel and an explanation of what error the library encountered You can navigate resolution details from this screen as well gcc Diagenastie Resolutiona on para 5 59 Before replacing a library component closing a ticket or contacting IBM Technical Support refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 I for additional help on resolving the problem Important It is recommended that Service Action Tickets not be allowed to accumulate in the Operator Intervention reports After an incident has been resolved or repaired the Service Action Ticket should be closed Before ordering a CRU replacement part observe the LEDs on all libra components to determine exactly which part is failing See Interpreting LEDs on for more information Viewin
341. enance Mode automatically after it completes a maintenance function or after 10 minutes if no action has occurred Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics Approximate Run Time 20 minutes per loop Total Number of Loops 10 I I Function Code runs tests that determine whether the drive can properly load and unload cartridges and read and write data Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Record the time it takes for the test to complete Compare the recorded time with the Approximate Run Time above If the test runs successfully but the execution time is significantly longer than the Approximate Run Time run Function Code F Write Performance Test on page D 37 If the Write Performance Test fails replace the media Attention For this test insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or 1 I non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media I has re
342. ensitive components Consider using an ESD Kit After you remove the tape cartridge advise the customer to copy the data to another cartridge and to remove this tape cartridge from service Do not use power tools or magnetic tools to perform this procedure To avoid contamination and electrostatic discharge damage to the drive never touch the head or electronic components inside the drive If you cannot remove the cartridge from the drive using the following procedures contact your next level of support Before You Begin 1 If you have not already done so attempt to remove the cartridge with the device power ON and using library manager a host application or the Unload Button If you have not already done so attempt to remove the cartridge by power cycling the drive Look for the drive to attempt a mid tape recovery Note It can take as long as five minutes for the cartridge to rewind and unload If the cartridge unloads inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded If the cartridge does not unload continue with this procedure Recommended Tools 2 5 mm offset hex wrench do not use magnetized wrench 1 Phillips screwdriver ESD Kit Flashlight optional 1 Flathead screwdriver optional Beginning Procedure 1 Remove the drive from the enclosure see Removing a Drive Sled on page Place the drive on a nonslip sturdy work surface 3 Remove the drive from the sled see Removing a Drive fro
343. ent for the Java platform IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide GI11 8738 and IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide SC23 9977 Note IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager V1 0 English publications may be downloaded from the following Web site http www ibm com software tivoli library Getting Assistance If this document does not help you solve the problem contact your next level of support Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Xxix XXX 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 1 Start Service Problem Area If Then Error Message Your library issues an Operator Intervention You will know when an Operator Intervention has been issued when the Library Drives or Media button at the bottom of the Operator Panel screen turns yellow or red Operator Interventions are also indicated by the amber Operator Intervention Alert LED on the front panel of the library to the right of the power button or by e mail notifications if this feature is enabled Touch the Library Drives or Media button at the bottom of the Operator Panel screen then touch Operator Interventions to view the error message s e After reading an error message touch the Resolve button to display the suggested resolution for the problem Refer to Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx on page 5 1 for more information
344. ental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed The best storage container for the cartridges until they are opened is the original shipping container The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes When you ship a cartridge place it in its jewel case or in a sealed moisture proof bag to protect it from moisture contaminants and physical damage Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container The following table gives the environment for operating storing and shipping LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridges Table 2 5 Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Environmental Specifications Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage Archival Storage Shipping 10 to 45 C 50 to 4 i 5 S 23 to 49 C 9 to Temperature 113 F 16 to 32 C 61 to 90 F 16 to 25 C 61 to 77 F 120 F PNE 10 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 50 5 to 80 non condensing Maximum wet bulb R 6 o o o ferent ise 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F Note 1 The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months 2 The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years Multi Path Architecture Storage
345. ently supported for this feature The control path failover feature is activated by entering a license key into the library To order the feature call an IBM Sales Representative For more information on control paths refer to the Setup and Operator Guide for this library Using Multiple Data Paths for Data Path Failover The Path Failover feature Feature Code 1682 includes the Control Path Failover function and the Data Path Failover function Data Path Failover and Load Balancing functions exclusively support native Fibre Channel Tape Drives in the library using the IBM device driver Data Path Failover is designed to provide a failover mechanism in the IBM device driver for AIX Linux Solaris and Windows which enable multiple redundant paths to be configured in a SAN environment In the event of a path or component failure the failover mechanism is designed to automatically provide error recovery to retry the current operation using an alternate pre configured path without aborting the current job in progress This allows flexibility in SAN configuration availability and management When accessing a tape drive device that has been configured with alternate paths across multiple host ports the IBM device driver for AIX Linux and Solaris automatically selects a path through the host bus adapter HBA that has the fewest open tape devices and assigns that path to the application This autonomic self optimizing capability is called
346. eplace Procedures 7 81 11 If necessary replace the Control Module into the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after M2 Picker Assembly The Picker moves media to and from storage slots and tape drives and positions the Bar Code Scanner to enable it to read bar code labels on cartridges and fiducials on cartridge magazines and tape drives The Picker Assembly is attached to the Y Axis Picker Assembly If the Picker Assembly requires service you can either remove it from the Y Axis Picker Assembly while the Y Axis Picker Assembly is still in the library or you can remove the Y Axis Picker Assembly from the library and then disconnect the Picker Assembly from it 12 Removing the Picker Assembly from the M2 Robot Assembly Outside of a Library 1 Remove the M2 Robot Assembly from the library See Installation Instructions for Removing Replacing an M2 Robot Assembly IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library or Removing the M2 Robot Assembly from the Library in the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel 2 Slide Picker Assembly to the forward side of the Y carriage as shown in a66mi167 Figure 7 89 Picker Assembly on Forward side of Y carriage 3 Hold robot as shown in and locate the release lever H in Fig
347. er account information See Appendix E of the TS3310 Setup and Operator Guide Rl a oe wt e i lt S a66ug013 Figure 7 51 Removing the Compact Flash Card from the Library Control Blade 1 Locate the compact flash card component on the LCB board E in Figure 7 51 2 Without touching any other components on the LCB firmware board carefully grasp the compact flash card and wiggle it using a gentle side to side motion H in Figure 7 51 until the pins on the compact flash card become 7 48 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information disconnected from the pins on the LCB board f in Figure 7 51 on page 7 48 Then slowly slide the compact flash card out of the guide slots Carefully lift the compact flash card out of the LCB board If you are installing a new LCB continue by transferring the old CF to the new LCB If you are installing a new CF card continue by installing the new CF card in the old LCB In either case install the appropriate compact flash card to the LCB board you are installing with the label up and pins aligned Without touching any other components on the LCB board carefully grasp the compact flash card and slowly slide it into the guide slots Continue to push the compact flash card into the guide slots until the pins start to connect Then hold the LCB board metal connector shield JJ in Figure 7 51 on page 7 48 with one hand and push the compact flash card into the connector with your other
348. ernet H in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 and serial J in Figure 7 49 ATAT page 7 46 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 45 on page 7 46 ports and are reserved for use by IBM Service Personnel ee oS D 5 oO oO oO Figure 7 49 Library Control Blade LCB 7 46 2 Module en 4 Module to module communication cable terminator Ethernet cable customer E Ethernet port for IBM service personnel use supplied Latches Gg Serial port for IBM service personnel use 3 Grasp the pair of latches J in Figure 7 49 near the top and bottom of the LCB Simultaneously push the latches to the left and then pull them out and away from the LCB Simultaneously grasp the same pair of latches again and slowly pull them toward you As the LCB begins to slide out of the control module be sure to support the LCB from underneath being careful to touch only the metal cover and the ground plane Important DO NOT touch any components on the LCB firmware board Hold it by the metal cover and support it by the metal ground plane along the bottom edge Once the LCB has been removed from the control module carefully lay it Figure 7 50 on page 7 47 on a clean flat surface TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66ug012 Figure 7 50 Library Control Blade LCB 6 Use one of the following procedures to complete the repair e If you are replacing the LCB only it will be necessary to transfer t
349. ers numbers and the underscore character _ in template names 4 Click Save The report appears in the drop down list in the Report Templates box Chapter 2 Product Description 2 21 To use a saved template select the template from the drop down list in the Report Templates box and click Load To delete a template select the template from the drop down list in the Report Templates box and click Delete Advanced Report Configuration To perform Advanced Report Configuration from the remote UI go to Monitor System gt Advanced Reporting and select the Advanced Reporting Configuration page either Drive Utilization or Media Integrity When you first open the Advanced Reporting Configuration page the system loads all the data from the library log file for that report to the Internet browser in preparation for creating your reports If there is a lot of information in the log files this can take several minutes The data that is loaded in the Internet browser remains unchanged until you log out of your library session or reload the data If new data is added to the library log file during your session for instance a TapeAlert occurs it does not appear in the onscreen report until you either log out of the library and log on again or reload the data To reload the data without logging out click Reload at the bottom of the Advanced Reporting Configuration page The entire data set reloads which can take several minutes
350. ers some of the same functionality as the Operator Panel via a web browser which enables remote access to the library For more information on the Operator Panel and the Web User Interface see Chapter 4 User Interfaces on page 4 1 Power Button Pressing the Power Button H in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 on the front panel of a control module turns the Picker and Operator Panel ON or OFF however power is still applied to the power supplies The Power Button is used during library shutdown and to manually reboot the library Front Panel LEDs Two LEDs are located on the front of the library to the right of the Power Button e Green power ON LED ff in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 When lit this LED indicates that the library power is ON e Amber Operator Intervention Alert LED H in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 When lit this LED indicates that there is a Library Drives or Media Operator Intervention available To access the Operator Intervention select Tools gt Operator Intervention from the Operator Panel 2 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Rear Panel Components The following components are located on the rear panel of the library IN
351. ervice Request Monitoring DR118 Resolve EKM Path Diagnostic Delay Chapter 6 Service Procedures How the Library Reports Problems Working with Operator Intervention Messages General Service Guidelines Possible Safety Hazards Electrostatic Discharge Service Menus Logging in with Service Privileges Tools gt Service Menu Drive Tests Service Menu Drives Reset Tools gt Service Menu System Tools Menu Factory Defaults Tools Menu Library Tests Using the Service Port Methods of Capturing Logs Emailing Logs Resetting the Admin Password Saving Restoring System Configuration Key Path Diagnostics Using Key Path Diagnostics Using Periodic Key Path Diagnostics Enabling Drive Logical Serial Number Addressing Interpreting LEDs Power Button LEDs Library Control Blade LEDs Tape Drive LEDs Power Supply LEDs Picker LED a Methods of Updating Firmware Updating Library Firmware Updating Drive Firmware Checking Reseating Cables External Cables Internal Cables Taking the Drives Library Online Offline Taking a Drive Online ye Taking a Drive Offline Taking the Library Online Taking the Library Offline Resetting a Drive Shutting Down Restarting the Library Shutting Down the Library Powering the Library ON Restarting the Library Manually Recover Cartridge Fom Picker Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door Door Manually Unlocking the New Style 1 O Station
352. es D 16 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a69i0076 Figure D 8 Double boxing tape cartridges for shipping Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed The best storage container for the cartridges until they are opened is the original shipping container The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes When you ship a cartridge place it in its jewel case or in a sealed moisture proof bag to protect it from moisture contaminants and physical damage Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container Table D 7 Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Environmental Specifications Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage Archival Storage Shipping Temperature i reo tO 16 to 32 C 61 to 90 F 16 to 25 C 61 to 77 F ay to baa ANE 10 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 50 5 to 80 non condensing Maximum wet bulb 5 f F 3 3 temperature 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F Note 1 The short term or operational storage en
353. es that the drive has issued a Tape Alert 37 indicating that the drive brick detected a voltage problem Detection Scenario The library determines there is a Tape Alert 37 through its Event Message exchange with the drive sled The drive sled detects the Tape Alert 37 by its periodic polling of the drive brick Root Causes 1 Drive has determined that there is a voltage problem per its internal algorithms 2 Drive detected a momentary voltage drop when a separate drive was being activated 3 System power supply failure or fault Possible CRU Replacements e Drive Sled e Power module Resolution 1 Perform DR083 Resolve Drive Voltage Problem on page 5 87 T060 Main Access Door Open Description GUI Description A library access door has been opened Explanation At boot time or run time the library detects that at least one main door is open The main access door switches are physically wired in series and the system firmware can not distinguish which switch door is open In addition the health of the module to module connection and termination affects the series wiring of the switches Firmware logic will not report this ticket if the module to module termination is totally missing or not proper Detection Scenario Constant monitoring of the switch electrical circuit hardware interrupt detects a door open This is true at run time or boot up Root Causes 1 Any main access door is ac
354. es whether the drive is online or offline If the drive is Status offline use the Operator Panel or Web User Interface to confirm that the drive is varied ON Also check library power Physical Library 141 Indicates whether the library is online or offline Use the Online Offline Status Operator Panel or Web User Interface to confirm that the library is online and not being configured Robotic Readiness 14 30 2 Indicates the library robotics ready status Verify that the module door s are closed and that the robotics are online Library Main Door 14 2 Indicates the library main door status I O Station Door Status 143 Indicates the library I O station door status Logical Library 13 218 Indicates whether a specific logical library is online or offline Because the front portion of the MIB variable object ID OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3764 1 10 10 is the same for all variables defined in the MIBs it is omitted in the OID column of this table For example the actual OID of the Drive Online Offline Status variable is 1 3 6 1 4 1 3764 1 10 10 11 3 1 10 You can use the Operator Panel or Web UI to confirm the logical library is online and not being configured Table F 2 Status Traps Event Trap ID Description Starting 1 Indicates that the tape library has started running Shutting down 2 Indicates that the library is in the process of being shut down Restarting 3 Indicates that the library has been r
355. establish the drive firmware level fails contact IBM Technical Support DR034 Resolve Open Storage I O Door Problem This library has an I O station door that is configured to function as tape storage This door was detected to be open at a time when the library needed it to be closed The library cannot access these tape storage locations until this I O door is closed and locked by the library Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 73 Troubleshooting Steps There are two scenarios 1 An I O station door is genuinely open If any I O station doors are open close them Once the I O station doors are closed the library will automatically lock doors that are designated as storage Close this operator intervention and monitor for reoccurrence 2 There is a hardware failure that makes it appear that an I O station door is open If all doors already appear to be closed use the I O station test under Tools gt Service gt System gt Library to test the function of the I O station DR035 Resolve Robot Power Interruption Problem The robot has momentarily pulled too much current Circuit protection has occurred and a fuse may have blown or an internal power supply may have temporarily shut off Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this RAS ticket Open a library main access door wait 10 seconds and then close the main access door Observe library initialization
356. estarted This does not imply anything about whether the configuration has changed or not unlike the standard coldStart or warmStart traps Startup Sequence 101 Indicates that the library startup sequence has completed Completed Shutdown Sequence 102 Indicates that the library shutdown sequence has completed Completed Change in Online State 103 Indicates that the online state of the physical library has changed Physical Library Door 104 Indicates whether the physical library door has been opened Status Change closed locked or unlocked I O Door Status Change 105 Indicates that an I O station door has been opened closed locked or unlocked Robotics Ready 106 Indicates the library robotics system has transitioned from not a library door may be open Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 ready to ready Traps 106 and 107 may occur as part of a startup or shutdown procedure If they occur at another time Table F 2 Status Traps continued Event Trap ID Description Robotics Not Ready 107 Indicates the library robotics system has transitioned from ready to not ready Traps 106 and 107 may occur as part of a startup or shutdown procedure If they occur at another time a library door may be open Logical Library State 108 Indicates whether a logical library has been taken online or Change offline RAS Status Change 109 Indicates that the status of the connectivity subsystem which Connectivity i
357. ew Jersey Department of Environmental Protection web site at http www state nj us dep dshw recycle Electronic_Waste index html Oregon For information regarding recycling covered electronic devices in the state of Oregon go to the Oregon Department of Environmental Quality site at http www deq state or us 1 a electronics htm Safety and Environmental Notices XV Washington State For information about recycling covered electronic devices in the State of Washington go to the Department of Ecology Web site at erams swfa eproductrecycle or telephone the Washington Department of Ecology at 1 800Recycle XVi 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Contents Read This First woe ee T Accessing Online Technical ippa ae 28 fe og a giii Sending Us Your Comments iii Registering for My Notification iii Contacting IBM Technical Support iv Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features S E E Limits on Downgrading Library Firmware E E h Limits on Restoring a Saved Configuration iv Summary of Changes for GA32 0478 09 v Safety and Environmental Notices vii Safety Notices ee ee a a Vil Possible Safety Hazatds eR ow ew ee a a Vi Class I Laser Product s s o e s aos a ix Protective Devices aaa aa AX Rack Safety 2 ao o omo so oso p H 4 mas aX Power cords Eo 6 a a ee OM Product recycling and disposal feo set Ba en Seah
358. exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Attention Even though no data is written during this test it is recommended that you use a blank scratch cartridge for this test 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until L appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select the function The SCD changes to a flashing 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing the tape drive runs the tests e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode mq and m ul temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the error either turn the power
359. ext button Self Test Failed Inspect the module connectors and module to module cables for bent or broken pins Contact service to order replacement cable or expansion module Refer to your product documentation to determine how to order parts Self Test Passed Upper expansion module Self Test passed or there was no upper expansion module Continue to isolate the failure by plugging the terminator into the first lower module and installing the module to module communication cable Once the terminator and cables are installed perform the Self Test again If there is no lower module select the Next button Self Test Failed Self Test failed Contact IBM Service to order replacement cable or lower expansion module See product documentation to determine how to order parts e Self Test Passed Proceed to next step e The library must be power cycled for the module configuration to be fully invoked as the intended operating configuration DR011 Resolve I O Station Lock Unlock Failure Problem An I O station lock failed to operate properly It is possible for a user to interfere with lock and unlock operations by trying to open close an I O station door while the lock is attempting to engage or disengage 5 64 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps To proceed with troubleshooting the library should be taken out of service e If the user opened or closed the I O station at the tim
360. f you are not immediately installing a replacement Replacing a Redundant Power Supply 1 Locate the slot for the redundant power supply on the back of the library module Remove the cover plate over the vacant redundant power supply slot if necessary 3 Insert the redundant power supply by gripping the handle J in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 sliding it into the guide slots and pushing it into the empty slot Tighten the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 that hold the redundant power supply in place Connect the power cord to the power supply J in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 and to its source Turn ON power to the redundant power supply using the switch J in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 on the power supply Internal Components The library has the following internal components Y axis Picker Assembly Picker Assembly Y Motor Assembly M2 Robot Assembly M2 Picker Assembly Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 53 e Storage Column e Cable Spool e Gear Rack e Internal Cables Boards e Drive Power Fuse Y axis Picker Assembly The Y axis Picker Assembly houses the Y Motor and moves the Picker and Bar Code Scanner within the library Removing the Y axis Picker Assembly 2 Remove the Control Module from the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information 3 Remove the top cover of the
361. fer the next occurrence of a Table Alert 5 or 6 Drive logs are captured by using the Service Library gt Capture Drive log menu selection from the Web User Interface Contact Service and provide the drive log DR046 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 8 Suspect Data Grade Tape Problem A drive has determined that a tape is not data grade and therefore data should not be written to it There can be several possible causes of this problem Not all of the causes are genuine bad tapes but in some cases a cartridge should be retired Troubleshooting Steps 1 Attempting invalid operations with a cleaning cartridge may cause this problem If the cartridge is a cleaning cartridge remove it from the host application inventory of valid data cartridges 2 If the cartridge is new the tape may not have been formatted by the cartridge manufacturer The drive will automatically attempt to format the tape If successful all other operations to the tape will continue without incident and this problem can be closed 3 On LTO cartridges the cartridge memory chip may be corrupted Using host application utilities force a read of the entire tape When the tape is unloaded the drive should repair the memory chip corruption Monitor this cartridge for reoccurrence of a Tape Alert 8 Retire this cartridge if the problem occurs again DR047 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 15 Cartridge Memory Failure Problem A drive has determined that a mem
362. for media Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 3 Each button has three states indicated by color The three states are e Good green e Degraded yellow An operator intervention has been created e Investigate red An operator intervention has been created however the library may still be operational Keyboards When a user touches a text box requiring data entry a keyboard screen appears Either the alphabetic or numeric keyboard appears depending on the type of input field All alphabetic character entries are lower case The text box appears at the top of the screen and the number characters appear as they are entered The 123 button opens the numeric keyboard from alphabetic keyboard The abc button opens the alphabetic keyboard from the numeric keyboard The back arrow erases one character at a time Attention To use the touchscreen effectively tap lightly to make your selections Home Page The Home Page screen provides tabular data on the capacity of the various areas of the library Use this screen to see a quick summary of the capacity of the selected logical library based on a user login IBM System Storage TS3310 O Oj VO Station Slots 6 Total Full Empty 6 4 2 Coot 166 Drives 3 Act Avail Library1 3 oo aa100 Storaae Slots 9 Full Empty libraryi 5 4 B J55 Unassigned 4 i Cleaning Slots 4 i Full Empty 2 a s0 j 2 x x Library Drives Media Figure 4 4 Home Screen C
363. formation Perchlorate Material California Special handling may apply See http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchiorat erchlorate for more information The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22 Division 4 5 Chapter 33 Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials This product part or both may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlorate substance Removing a Battery from a SnapHat Battery Holder The battery for this product is located on the Library Control Card The yellow component that holds the battery on the Library Control Card is referred to as a SnapHat because it snaps on the Library Control Card and is identified by its yellow color a66mi199 Figure 1 SnapHat battery holder To remove the SnapHat battery holder from the Library Control Card 1 Take the SnapHat holder by the short edges and pull it or snap it off the card 2 When the SnapHat battery holder is free dispose of the battery that is in the holder according to the proper battery disposal practices for your location Monitor recycling or disposal Flat panel display The fluorescent lamp or lamps in the liquid crystal display contain mercury Dispose of it as required by local ordinances and regulations Monitors and Workstations New Jersey For information about recycling covered electronic devices in the State of New Jersey go to the N
364. g 2 37 particulates 2 37 Error code log clear D 35 display D 35 Error codes D 42 Service Action Tickets 5 1 Error messages operator intervention 6 2 errors fixing fibre channel D 54 fixing SAS interface problems D 57 obtaining from library and drives E 1 RS 6000 E 1 WORM media D 8 errpt command using E 1 expansion module 2 3 connectivity diagnostic 5 64 remove from 14U library 7 18 remove replace 7 18 replace enclosure 7 19 replace in 14U library 7 18 F fabric switched D 54 Factory defaults 6 8 Fast Read Write Test D 39 FC AL topology D 54 feature licenses advanced reporting 2 16 capacity expansion 2 16 2 24 control path failover 2 16 2 26 data path failover 2 16 2 26 encryption 2 27 path failover 2 16 2 26 features optional 2 14 capacity expansion 2 24 drives 2 14 firmware update by IBM service personnel 2 28 license keys 2 16 path failover 2 26 redundant power supply 2 16 Feedback Comments sending iii sending iii Fibre Channel drive compatibility with Multi Path Architecture 2 33 supported topologies D 54 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop topology D 54 Firmware drive 6 27 FMR cartridge 6 28 creating 6 28 library 6 26 updating 6 25 using Fibre Channel interface 6 29 using ITDT Tool 6 28 using SCSI interface 6 29 FMR tape create D 31 unmake D 34 update firmware D 30 foot pads remove 7 131 replace 7 131 front panel access door 2 4 control module 2 3 expansion module 2 3 I O Station 2 3 Operator
365. g Operator Intervention Messages You can view operator intervention messages by choosing Operator Interventions from the Tools menu You can also click the Subsystem Status 6 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information buttons at the bottom of the graphical user interface home page to view all operator interventions for the subsystem you choose Library Drives or Media Operator Intervention messages are displayed in the order in which they were created starting with the most recent Click a column heading to sort the rows by that heading Resolving Operator Intervention Messages You can resolve and close operator intervention messages from the Tools Operator Interventions screen Identify the Operator intervention message that you want to resolve click Resolve and complete the steps listed in the Library Resolution window It is possible to close the operator intervention message without ever resolving the reported issue Closing RAS Tickets Automatically The library will close all currently open operator intervention messages when you reboot the library If any errors occur during the reboot the library issues new operator intervention messages In order for automatic ticket closure to occur a user must intentionally initiate a reboot by either restarting the library shutting down the library or upgrading library firmware Automatic ticket closure will NOT occur if the library shuts down unexpectedly or if the power cord is u
366. g a Drive on page 6 4 Shutting Down Restarting the Library on page 6 40 Manually Recover Cartridge from Picker on page 6 41 Manually Unlocking the I O Station Door on page 6 43 Applying a RID Tag to a Library Module on page 6 44 Applying an Agency Label to a Control Module on page 6 45 End of Call on page 6 47 This library can automatically detect host servers in the Storage Area Network SAN and perform periodic self tests to ensure that the library is fully operational If the library detects a problem it isolates where the problem exists and provides helpful instructions for resolving the problem It also supports geographic addressing which means that you can install tape drives in any open drive slot and the library will automatically update its configuration model without requiring you to assign the address of the drive yourself The control module houses the central intelligence of the library without it the library cannot function The control module contains several essential components including the library control blade and the robotic picker assembly The library control blade controls the library s functions while the robotic picker assembly is responsible for physically retrieving data cartridges from the library s storage slots inserting the cartridges into the appropriate tape drive and returning them to their appropriate storage slot The control modul
367. g that the tape drive reported an ESR but details are not reported by the tape drive Root Cause Tape drive firmware may incorrectly report an ESR when none is outstanding or have a valid ESR but not have the proper encryption key request details available upon drive sled controller request Possible FRU Replacement Drive Sled Resolution Perform DR111 Resolve Drive Encryption Service Request Monitoring Diagnostic Resolutions Diagnostic Resolutions are accessed via wizard screens on the Operator Panel When an Operator Intervention occurs a diagnostic resolution wizard is available to help you resolve the problem Important It is recommended that Service Action Tickets not be allowed to accumulate in the Operator Intervention reports After an incident has been resolved or repaired the Service Action Ticket should be closed DRO001 Resolve Picker Cartridge Presence Problem The library has a tape in the Picker Assembly but cannot recover without user intervention to remove the tape Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 59 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Take all library partitions offline Open the library main access doors Rotate the picker assembly by hand so that the opening faces the drives PON Use the gear thumbwheel on the right side of the picker assembly base closest to you to manually drive the tape cartridge out of
368. g the tool s teeth between the teeth of the hub Turn the tool clockwise Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 23 until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge Then slowly turn the rewind tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door E 2 Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm 5 in of tape hangs from the cartridge door If necessary grasp the tape and pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge 3 Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge Set the tool and the cartridge aside A67E0035 Figure D 14 Winding the tape out of the cartridge Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of the tape then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door To remove the C clip from the leader pin refer to Figure D 15 and perform the steps below 1 On the leader pin H locate the open side of the C clip H The C clip is a small black part that secures the tape KJ to the pin 2 Remove the C clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip away from the pin Set the pin aside and discard the clip oS Figure D 15 Removing the C clip from the leader pin Use your fingers to push the C clip from the leader pin To attach the leader pin to the tape refer to Figure D 16 on page D 26 and perform the steps below A67E0036 1 Position the tape in the alignment groove of the
369. g to a logical library Root Causes e Tape was manually placed into the slot e A partition was deleted that contained media and the library was power cycled or the main door was opened Resolution Perform DR074 Resolve Unassigned Inaccessible Tape Cartrid T115 Installation amp Verification Test Warning Description GUI Description A marginal but still operable assembly condition was found during the Installation amp Verification Test Explanation The library contains a verification test that can be run to validate that the system has been installed properly and is up and running Errors can occur during this test The library will post this ticket whenever an error occurs during this Installation amp Verification Test that does not affect the overall functionality of the library It is more of a warning that a problem may be developing Detection Scenario During the Installation amp Verification Test run when any error occurs that is not serious enough to limit library functionality Root Causes Any function that is executed by the Installation amp Verification Test that does not complete successfully Resolution Perform DR075 Resolve Installation amp Verification Test Warning T116 Robotics Firmware Image Error Description This ticket occurs with Model 2 robots only Detection Scenario GUI Description The robotics firmware auto level process can
370. gainst travel limits Root Causes 1 Drive calibration target is not in position 2 Calibration sensor detects edges but is not correctly finding calibration target edges Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Possible FRU Replacements Resolution e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Picker Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool e Internal Cables and Boards Kit If the problem can not be resolved using the information in this document perform DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 11 T019 Drive Calibration Failure Motion OK Description GUI Description The library is unable to calibrate the position of a drive Explanation System electrically detects a drive and is able to scan the bar code label but cannot successfully calibrate the position of the drive The calibration search pattern completes successfully Detection Scenarios Calibration motion completes but edge finding of one or more edges does not occur Root Causes Damaged drive sled calibration fiducial Dust on picker assembly calibration sensor Calibration sensor not functioning properly PAO ie Drive or Picker position is so far off nominal that search pattern cannot locate target Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Possible FRU Replacements e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool e Picker Assembly
371. ges that are imported into the library are not visible to any host and are not part of any logical library Rather they are in the system logical library Under all circumstances the user should use the insert and remove cleaning cartridge functions to move cleaning cartridges into and out of the cleaning slots in this system logical library If the library becomes aware during inventory that a system cleaning cartridge has been removed manually through an open door and or with the power OFF this ticket will be used to notify the user that this cleaning resource is now missing Because the cartridge has gone missing the library cleaning functionality is no longer intact It is either degraded fewer cartridges available or totally absent no cleaning cartridge in the library Detection Scenario 1 When library inventory occurs during robot initialization from a power ON 2 When library inventory occurs during robot initialization from a door close Root Causes 1 User removes cartridge manually instead of via remove cleaning media GUI functionality 2 Bar code label on a system cleaning cartridge is not read during inventory 3 Any scenario where a properly inserted system cleaning cartridge which has not yet been properly removed is detected to be missing based on library inventory operations Possible CRU Replacements Cleaning cartridge Resolution 1 Perform DR042 Resolve
372. get posted again 8 If the tickets do reappear check further for T021 tickets posted against drives in other modules if applicable If there are none contact Service for chassis replacement 9 If T021 tickets do exist for drives in other modules close them turn off the library remove and reseat the LCB and turn the library back on Check to see if any T021 tickets reappear 10 If so then check for other causes There are other problems such as T066 Drive Power Fuse Blown or a module terminator or module to module cable with bent or broken pins that can cause communication loss Resolve these problems if found 11 If not contact service for further assistance DRO30 Resolve Drive Load Failure Problem The robot was unable to load a tape drive The robot motion completed normally but the drive did not report that it successfully loaded the tape The problem may be caused by defective drive hardware or a defective picker mechanism There are two possible scenarios that can lead to this problem 1 The drive hardware is not functioning properly 2 The robot hardware is not functioning properly Troubleshooting 1 The problem is most likely isolated to the specific drive referenced under the Details button However check for the same problem being reported for other drives in the system 2 If this same problem is reported on multiple drives replace the Picker Refer to M2 Picker Assembly on page 7 82
373. gt Library Configuration b Download the latest levels of software by visiting http www ibm com 3 Check that each Fibre Channel cable does not exceed 500 m 1640 ft 4 Ensure that all Fibre Channel cables are installed correctly 5 Using this guide or the service guides of associated switch hub or fiber products determine that a problem exists between the drive drive cable and the device to which they attach Try to isolate which part of the Storage Area Network SAN is experiencing problems 6 Using this guide or the service guides of associated switch hub or fiber products verify that the SAN configurations are correct such as switch zoning for drive sharing 7 Obtain all errors reported by the drive to the server see Using Host Sense Pata on page D 50 ata on page D 50 then contact your OEM Product Application Engineer PAE for error analysis Fixing SAS Interface Problems If your drive is attached to the host through a SAS cable to a host bus adapter HBA the following procedures will assist you isolation and correction of any interface problems SAS attachment requires no topology changes as is found in fibre channel attachment and requires no external termination as is required in SCSI attachment In addition SAS drives are attached individually to the HBA either through a one to one connection or through an interposer You need not worry about another drive causing this drive to fail As
374. h Card Amber LED on Library Control Blade Under normal operating conditions the amber LED on a Library Control Blade LCB is not lit If you see that the amber LED on an LCB is either blinking Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 19 6 20 continuously or solidly lit for at least 20 minutes service the LCB as soon as possible The library may or may not generate an operator intervention depending on the source of the problem Attention Never remove an LCB when its amber LED is solidly lit unless it has been solidly lit for at least 20 minutes The following table indicates the actions you can take based on the condition of the LED Table 6 3 Amber LED on an LCB State of Amber LED Suggested Service Action Solid ON for Replace the LCB 20 minutes 1 blink per Check the firmware for the LCB and make sure that you have the most second current firmware available TTE Do not replace the LCB It is unlikely that the LCB hardware is the source of the problem Servicing a Library Control Blade Based on LED Status When servicing a blade based on the status of an LED 1 Observe the blinking patterns of the LEDs for at least 30 seconds and log your observations in both the operator intervention and the equipment failure report that you must return with the defective part Accurate reporting of all LED states for the entire green amber and blue set of LEDs is critical for diagnosing the cause of the problem 2
375. h amber Amber Flashing The drive is exiting from maintenance mode For more information see Diagnostic and m Maintenance Functions on page D 26 Li Amber Flashing The drive is executing the selected function while in maintenance mode selected function Flashing Displaying An error occurred and the drive or media may require service or it may require cleaning Amber once error code Note the code on the SCD then go to Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page per second to determine the action that is required Flashing Displaying The drive needs cleaning Amber once m per second Flashing Displaying The drive is updating firmware The SCD will display a Amber Function 3 twice per Code second 5 if using an FMR cartridge The SCD will be OFF if using the SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel E interface For more information see Methods of Updating Firmware on page 6 25 or OFF Flashing OFF The drive detected an error and is performing a firmware recovery It will reset Amber automatically twice per second Flashing Flashing The drive is requesting a cartridge to be loaded Amber aa twice per second Flashing OFF There is a drive dump in flash memory Amber twice per second 1 Power should not be removed from the drive until the microcode update is complete The drive indicates that the update is complete by resetting and performing POST Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 3 Unload Button
376. h some commercial software applications unless properly configured To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems refer to your device driver s procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode For applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM for example AIX Linux Sun Solaris HP UX Windows 2003 and Windows 2000 the Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide contains information about how to obtain sense data after an error has occurred If your application uses other device drivers see the appropriate documentation for those drivers to obtain the sense data Raw sense data as returned from the drive is documented in the IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference In addition to device drivers other methods exist for obtaining sense data and error information The sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such information from the IBM AS 400 eServer iSeries RS 6000 and eServer pSeries servers Library Sense Data The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes ASC and Additional Sense Code Qualifiers ASCQ associated with the reported Sense Keys A sense key of 00h no sense has no ASC ASCQ associated with it A few ASC ASCQs can be associated with more than one sense key The sense keys that can give a particular ASC ASCQ are indicated within the Sense Key column Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
377. h the LCD touch screen interface C 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e e Controls the import export station using the I2C interface with the LCB1 Then the LCB1 registers output to control the on board buzzer that provides audio feedback for the library operator e The DIEB as well as the LCB1 provide critical environmental monitoring e e Sends voltage information to the LCB1 using the I2C interface This interface also reads the card s version to identify existing hardware and firmware version Then if hardware changes the firmware can be updated too e e Power conversion hardware on DIEB converts the 48 VDC input voltage to the required voltage levels of components on this board e e The front panel power switch interfaces with the control module s Backplane Connect Board BCB1 providing power for enable disable commands Drive Sled Interconnect Board DSIB The Drive Sled Interconnect Board DSIB functions as an interconnect board between drive sleds and the library for power and drive communications A DSIB board is required in all modules regardless of whether the module contains drive sleds The Predator library only supports full height drive slots such as LTO drives Here are some considerations regarding the DSIB e e Connects with the LCB1 in receiving tape drive commands and routing status and error messages with signals being routed through the BCB1 control module or BCB2 BCB3 expansion module
378. han are actually present You are ape ena e ae 1 From the Operator Panel select Setup gt License requiring a License Sey code 2 Re enter the license key code If the license key code can not be located contact your IBM Sales Representative Power If the power supply power switch is ON and power indicator is OFF 1 Verify that the power switch is ON 2 Verify that the power cable is properly seated on the Power Supply 3 Analyze the problem by observing the Power Supply LEDs see Power Supply LEDs on page 6 22 If necessary replace the failing power supply refer to Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 If the blue LED on the power supply is ON the power ON OFF button on the front of the library is ON button pushed IN but the power indicator on the front of the library is OFF 1 Suspect a failing power ON OFF push button on the front of the library or a loose or broken cable 2 Check and reseat internal cable from the power ON OFF push button to the back of the Operator Panel to the backplane connect board BCB See Internal Cables on 3 See Replacing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly Chapter 1 Start Service 1 3 Problem Area If Then Picker The Picker is stuck in one position and is making a clicking sound 1 Visually verify that all gear racks front and rear are properly aligned If they are not aligned refer
379. has been opened in the rear of the library and a cover plate has not been installed For safety reasons the robot will run at a slower speed until a drive sled or a drive cover plate is installed Troubleshooting Steps 1 If the cover removal was intentional reinstall the cover plate to resolve this issue The robot will again move at full speed 2 Ifa drive sled or drive bay cover plate removal was not intentional check the back of the library for any unsecured drive sleds and loose missing or damaged drive bay cover plates 3 Secure all drive sleds and drive cover plates Contact Service if any drive cover plates are damaged or missing or drive sleds or cover plates cannot be secured DRO55 Resolve Installation amp Verification Test Error Problem A problem was detected while performing system validation testing lt Description added at runtime gt Check the IVT logs for further details Troubleshooting Steps lt Description added at runtime gt 1 Close the ticket now 2 Exit to leave it open for further troubleshooting 3 Return to the Diagnostic Resolution now DR056 Resolve Module Communication Problem The library has encountered an error when trying to initialize its modules 5 80 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps 1 Turn the library OFF 2 Remove both the top and bottom terminators and carefully inspect them for bent pins
380. hat does not complete successfully Resolution Perform DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 5 44 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T096 Module Communication Error Description GUI Description An error occurred while trying to communicate with a module Explanation The system is having a problem finding and or communicating with all the modules in the library Detection Scenario At boot up the library cannot determine the status of all modules Root Causes e Bent pin on a terminator or a module to module cable e I O station sensor error e 2C bus error Possible CRU Replacements e LCB e Module to module cable e CAN Bus terminator Possible FRU Replacement e CM or EM module e I O Station assembly e I O Lock assembly Resolution Perform DR056 Resolve Module Communication on page 5 80 T108 Incompatible Drive Brand Description GUI Description An incompatible drive sled installation has been detected Explanation Different library configurations support different drives The drive sleds will contain certain configuration information that the library will use to validate that the drive is indeed configured properly If a drive s configuration data does not match what the library expects the drive will not be usable and this ticket will be generated Detection Scenario When drive is installed the configuration data does not ma
381. he CF card from the old LCB to the new LCB Continue with Removing Replacing the Compact Flash Card e If you are replacing the CF card only it will be necessary to remove the failing CF card from the LCB replace it with the new CF card and upgrade the CF card firmware Continue with Step 3 of Removing Replacing the Compact Flash Card Removing Replacing the Compact Flash Card Important When handling the Compact Flash Card you must wear an ESD anti static wrist strap or touch the library frame to discharge any static electricity in your body Do not handle the Compact Flash Card without taking appropriate ESD precautions Selections made during library configuration reside on the Compact Flash Card Important Before removing the LCB CF Assembly from the library angina that yet have pedtomed Ponfisursden on pare and tat ths caved fle availbie dethe CF card is replaced you will need this file to reconfigure the library Following is a partial list of the configuration items that are saved e Current library firmware e Network settings IP Address Subnet Mask amp Gateway addresses e Feature Code licenses keys e Logical library configuration Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 47 e Cartridge slot assignments e Cleaning slot configuration e I O Station configuration e Drive IDs SCSI ID Fibre Loop ID SAS ID e Encryption method selections e Administrator and us
382. he Drive This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about the tape drive All error code and diagnostic information contained in this chapter can be accessed from the Operator Panel of the Library The drive portion of the Operator Panel Display will contain any drive error codes Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive as described in this chapter See the Setup and Operator Guide for a complete description of the Operator Panel functions and Displays TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by devices such as tape drives autoloaders and libraries The standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages called flags from a tape drive via the SCSI bus The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology which provides error and diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server Because library and drive firmware may change periodically the SNMP interface in the library does not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are not supported today However should this occur the MIB is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station At the time of this writing the TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will be sent The MIB file should not be taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB will
383. he New Style I O Station Door If the I O Station door fails to unlock you can unlock it manually To manually unlock the new style I O Station lock follow these steps 1 Insert any straight tool screwdriver Torx wrench etc into the hole H in Figure 6 20 on page 6 43 in the front cover of the I O station 2 Push the tool in to unlock the I O station door There is a large flat pushbutton type mechanism behind the hole in the cover that when pushed toward the rear of the library will release the I O station lock mechanism 3 To manually relock the I O Station door e From the Operator Panel select Operations gt Lock I O Station From the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Lock Unlock I O Station Doors Applying a RID Tag to a Library Module The RID Repair Identification Tag is important in transferring the serial number of the old library enclosure to the new library enclosure This will ensure that your warranty coverage if applicable is not interrupted IBM REPAIR IDENTIFICATION TAG p PART NUMBER 19P5941 ATTENTION 1 A Repair ID tag maintains the original serial number record of the machine and allows IBM to entitle the machine for future maintenance or warranty service Mail in exchange requires the completion and securing a Repair ID tag part number 19P5941 to the replacement unit Verify that the machine serial number on the failing unit matches the serial nu
384. he blown drive power overload fuse see Removing a Primary Power Supply on page 7 52 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 129 3 Remove the cover plate J in Figure 7 145 inside the power supply slot ALLAL AS SSS NWA AA a66mi077 Costes Figure 7 145 Drive power overload fuse cover plate 4 Using a fuse puller gently remove the blown fuse J in Figure 7 146 SE SW ROA AQ MAS a66mi078 Figure 7 146 Drive power overload fuse 7 130 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Installing a Drive Power Overload Fuse 1 To install a drive power overload fuse perform the steps in Power Fuse on page 7 129 in reverse order Module to Normal 2 For the last step perform Returning a Library or Libra Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 Removing Installing Library Foot Pads If your library is currently rack mounted foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library chassis before the library can be used as a desktop unit If your library is currently being used as a desktop unit foot pads will be installed on the bottom of the library Foot pads must be removed before the library can be installed in a rack Removing Library Foot Pads To remove the library foot pads 1 Place the sling that was shipped with your library underneath the library halfway between the front and back feet Ensure that both sling handles are an equal distance from
385. he host system hardware or software Refer to the service documentation for the host system Fixing Fibre Channel Errors If you are connected to a Fibre Channel Storage Area Network SAN by using a SAN Data Gateway use the IBM Storage Area Network Gateway Module Setup Operator and Service Guide to determine whether the problem is occurring between the drive and the SAN Data Gateway If you are using a SCSI drive and are having SCSI problems see Supported Topologies The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives can be attached in a two node configuration either directly to a switch as a public device switched fabric or directly to a host bus adapter HBA as a private device It can do so ina Point to Point topology through an N_port or F_port or Arbitrated Loop topology through an L_port or FL_port The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives automatically configure to an L_port or an N_port when it boots The type of port to which it configures depends on whether the drive recognizes the connection as a loop or a point to point connection e An L_port supports a Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop connection to an NL_port or FL_port e An N_port supports direct connection to another N_port or to an F_port for example a director class switch in a point to point topology Regardless of the port to which you connect the drive it automatically configures to a public device through an F_port or FL_port to a switch or to a private
386. he opened I O station 4 Inspect both I O Station Lock Assembly sensor switches located in the front and rear of the I O Station Lock Assembly 5 Look for obstructions or misalignment causing the rear sensor switch actuator lever to be held down 6 Open and close the I O Station Safety Door multiple times to view operation of the front sensor switch 7 If no issue is found or interference was identified and corrected close the I O station and main access door and wait for the library to complete initialization 8 Open and close the I O station door and verify that the I O station is being calibrated and scanned 9 If the I O station is not being calibrated and inventoried or the RAS ticket is displayed again refer to DRO021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 10 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR026 Resolve Unsupported Module Configuration Problem The library has detected a configuration of expansion module frames that is not supported by the current firmware There are two possible scenarios e The configuration is valid and your system requires newer firmware to support the configuration e The configuration of EM s is not a valid configuration Troubleshooting Steps Contact IBM Technical Support to determine why your module configurat
387. he web at http www ibm com storage 1to select LTO Support or contact your IBM Sales Representative When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge place the label only in the recessed label area see J in Figure D 3 on page D 6 A label that extends outside of the recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive Attention Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label mi a69i0349 Figure D 5 Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge The volume serial number LTO123 cartridge type L5 and bar code are printed on the label Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels e Use only IBM approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape library e Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label e Before you apply a new label remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge case e Use peel clean labels that do not leave a residue after be
388. hen inserting the new picker assembly first align the rear indexing features and then align the front indexing features and set the assembly into place The picker assembly must be level Tighten the thumbscrews located at the front and back of the picker assembly Reconnect the X axis flex cable Remember that the black tab of the X axis flex cable should be positioned above the bar of the picker assembly Align the semi circular part of the flex cable s tab with the post on the translator base of the picker assembly Squeeze the tab and push the cable connector down into its socket Then push the tab toward the picker until it snaps into place CAUTION The X axis flex cable connection is necessary to provide the power off braking feature to the robot assembly After you finish installing the picker and connecting the cable test the installation To do this support the robot assembly under the broad metal X axis base plate and lift the assembly Do NOT lift by the thin metal rod or the black plastic picker body You should feel resistance as you lift the robot assembly Next place one hand below the robot assembly and allow the assembly to fall to your hand It should descend slowly If you feel no resistance or if the robot assembly falls quickly re check the X axis cable connection Failure to perform these steps may result in damage to the robot assembly Close the module s doors 11 Power on the library Removing and Re
389. holes for manually unlocking I O Station doors RID tag placement Agency Label placement The Floor Plate 4 Picker locking mechanism Gear racks and gear rack sii mechanism Front and back gear Tacks Gear racks in the up and down positions Placing gear rack in Up ala Releasing the Y rail Control module rear thumb screws Alignment pin and front thumb screw Gear racks down and up i Alignment pin and front thumb screw receptacles Control module rear hurib screws Gear racks and gear rack locking mechanism Front and back gear racks Gear racks in the up and down positions Placing gear rack in the Down position Releasing the Y rail a Removing the rack ears Control Module shown Gear rack Front and back gear racks Gear racks in the up and down positions Placing gear rack in the Down position Releasing the Y rail Picker assembly locking mecharisr Control module Access Door screw locations 6 24 6 25 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 s 6 35 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 38 6 42 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 48 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 10 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 xxiii 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 44
390. i 2 oe 8 Expansion module left middle column pote module lot rear 9 Expansion module left rear column Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 107 di Control module right rear Expansion module right rear column column Control module right muddle column Expansion module right middle column Control module I O Station Expansion module I O Station Install the new fiducial on the storage column a Verify the correct position for the fiducial on the storage column b Figure 7 124 referring to the small black squares on the larger rectangles in on page 7 107 b Insert the new fiducial by sliding it into the slot until it locks into place in Figure 7 125 a66mi076 Figure 7 125 Fiducial on storage column 2 Insert the storage column straight into the side wall of the chassis Important Replace the columns in their original location Always begin by replacing the rear column first Then replace the middle and front columns 7 108 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi019 Figure 7 126 Replacing a Storage Column 2 Slot 1 in the library chassis wall in a storage column position 4 Slot 2 in the library chassis wall in a storage column position Tab 1 on a storage column Tab 2 on a storage column Ensure correct orientation by inserting a Tab in Figure 7 126 into slot in Figure 7 126 b Tab H in Figure 7 126 into slot E in Figure 7 1
391. ia that is in the picker Replacing the Picker Assembly on the Y axis Assembly in a Rack mounted Library 1 OSNON Y Motor Lift the Picker Assembly tilt it with the left side up and carefully insert it into the library through the Access Door opening Try to keep the assembly toward the top of the opening to prevent damaging the board underneath the Picker Assembly Position Picker Assembly on the Y axis Assembly with the larger extension of the Picker Assembly board to the right when facing the library from the front Reach through the I O Station door and tighten the screws J in Figure 7 61 lon page 7 55 n page 7 59 on the front and rear of the Picker Assembly Rotate the Picker Assembly with the grippers pointing toward 11 o clock J in Figure 7 60 on page 7 59 to expose the flat cable connector Plug in the connector J in Figure 7 60 on page 7 59 Move the Picker Assembly back to its normal position Close the Access Door s Return the I O Station flap to its normal position If necessary replace the I O Station s in the library The Y Motor controls movement of the Y axis Assembly Picker and Bar Code Scanner in the Y axis Removing the Y Motor from the Y Axis Picker Assembly in a Stand alone Library Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on Remove the Y axis Picker Assembly first Place the Y axis Picker Assembly on a flat work surface Disengage the cable retention cli
392. iagnostics From the Operator Panel Tools gt Service Tools gt Service Menu Drive Tests Drive Tests SCSI or Fibre Channel Wrap Tests This section provides information about SCSI and Fibre Channel Wrap Tests Tools Materials that are required SCSI Fibre Channel or SAS Wrap Tool These instructions pertain to the SCSI or Fibre Interface 1 Ensure that the library and drives are offline to ALL ATTACHED HOSTS See 2 Remove the SCSI or Fibre Channel cables from the drive oe tested 3 For a Fibre drive install the Fibre Channel wrap tool to the Fibre Channel connector of the drive being tested 4 For a SCSI drive install the LVD SCSI terminator to the upper connector and install the LVD SCSI wrap tool to the lower connector of the drive being tested Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 5 6 6 5 Start the SCSI or Fibre Channel Wrap Test by selecting Tools gt Service gt Drives gt Drive Tests gt Wrap Test gt Interface Type gt Module gt Drive to be tested If you have problems consider the following options to resolve the issue a If the wrap test fails replace the Drive Sled See Removing a Drive Sled b If the wrap test is successful and you are still having problems suspect the SCSI or Fibre Channel cables or host adapter c If the cables adapter do not fix the problem call your next level of support 6 When any problem is resolved reconnect all cables 7 As the customer to vary the li
393. ialize To change from parallel by byte to serial by bit serializer A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states representing data into a corresponding time sequence of states servo Servos An adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism servomechanism A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard used by computer manufacturers for attaching peripheral devices such as tape drives hard disks CD ROM players printers and scanners to computers servers Pronounced scuzzy Variations of the SCSI interface provide for faster data transmission rates than standard serial and parallel ports up to 320 megabytes per second The variations include e Fast Wide SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of up to 20 MBps e SCSI 1 Uses an 8 bit bus and supports data rates of 4 MBps e SCSI 2 Same as SCSI 1 but uses a 50 pin connector instead of a 25 pin connector and supports multiple devices e Ultra SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 20 or 40 MBps e Ultra2 SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80 MBps e Ultra3 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps e Ultra160 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps e Ultra320 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data r
394. iate a tape cartridge eject operation Press and hold the button continuously for 10 seconds If the tape is ejected leave the cartridge in the tape drive close the library access doors and continue operation Observe for future occurrences of such issue and contact Service if the issue repeats 6 If the drive fails to unload and eject the tape cartridge contact Service for assistance 7 You have three options a Close the Operator Intervention now b Exit to leave it open for future troubleshooting c Return to the Diagnostic Resolution now DR004 Resolve Full Destination Element Problem The library attempted to put a cartridge in a drive storage or the I O Station The destination location appears to be blocked or partially blocked The library has successfully returned the cartridge to the source location Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 61 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Identify the coordinate provided in the Details of the ticket 2 Open the library bulk load doors Access Doors and locate the problem location 3 Inspect it for the presence of unlabeled media or other contamination or damage that prevented the library robot from placing the cartridge DROO5 Resolve Motion Failure Problem The Picker has failed to perform a motion The detected failure is likely to be a genuine hardware failure Troubleshooting Step 1 Open the I
395. iate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual might cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device might not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that might cause undesired operation Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conform a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Notices G 3 European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of European Union EU Council Directive 2004 108 EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibi
396. ibrary Verify screen Touch Back to return to the System Diagnostics screen Touch Back to return to the Library Offline screen Touch No to return to the Service Menu screen Touch Exit to return to the Tools menu Touch the Operations tab then touch the Logical Library Mode button to bring the logical libraries back ONLINE 5 62 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR007 Resolve Barcode Scanner Issue Problem The library has failed to scan one of the following system bar code labels e system serial number e world wide name e drive identification label e module serial number This problem IS NOT associated with failure to read a tape cartridge bar code label Troubleshooting Steps 1 Select Tools gt Service gt Library gt Barcode Test to help isolate the problem and determine if it is intermittent 2 Run the test several times and note the results e If the test passes the failure is most likely with a particular bar code label e If the test fails the failure is most likely with the Picker Assembly that contains the bar code scanner DRO008 Resolve Stuck I O Station Interrupt Problem The library control firmware receives continuous I O station door state change events Actual door open and closure state changes can still be detected and cartridge inventory operations will still perform properly but library performance is affected Troubleshooting Steps 1 Cl
397. ic a67e0058 Figure D 10 Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 21 To rewind the tape refer to Figure D 11 and perform the steps below 1 Insert the cartridge manual rewind tool HJ into the cartridge s hub H and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut 2 Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge 3 If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery Discard the mishandled cartridge a67e0056 Figure D 11 Rewinding the tape into the cartridge Reattaching a Leader Pin The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape Once the leader tape has been removed there is a possibility of tape breakage After reattaching the leader pin transfer data from the defective tape cartridge Do not reuse the defective tape cartridge The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts N 3 pr lt Figure D 12 Leader Pin Reattachment Kit e Leader pin attach tool A plastic brace that holds the cartridge door open Cartridge manual rewind tool H A device that fits into the cartridge s hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the cartridge e Pin supplies J Leader pins and C clips D 22 153310 Tape Library Maintenanc
398. ical frame configuration is not valid The configuration is determined via address bits and module count bits that are routed through the module to module cabling and termination Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 27 Detection Scenarios 1 Code determines that there is greater then one control module based on geographic address bits 2 Code detects five frames or greater above the control module per the geographic address bits 3 Code detects five frames or greater below the control module per the geographic address bits 4 Code detects that one or more geographic address bit patterns do not match a valid configuration 5 The code detects communicates with a device I O Stations power supplies drives blades fan blades that should not exist per the detected frame count and frame configuration 6 Code determined frame configuration based on frame count and geographic address bit pattern does not match hard stops found by Y motion tests Root Causes 1 Greater than one control module exists in a stack of frames wired together Five frames or greater are actually above the control module Five frames or greater are actually below the control module Hardware failure results in one or more invalid geo bit patterns aprons Hardware failure results in one or more valid but incorrect geo bit patterns when compared to frame count more frames detected than actual or
399. ically discover any drive that is electrically connected in the system Root Causes 1 Damaged label or marginal label that cannot be read 2 Drive with invalid label is present earlier generation of plug compatible drive sled Note The inability to communicate between the Library Control Blade and the bar code scanner should result in a different ticket cause Possible CRU Replacements Drive sled Resolution Perform DR007 Resolve Barcode Scanner Issue on page 5 63 T016 Unexpected Drive Type Description GUI Description A configured drive sled has been replaced with a drive sled of different type Explanation When the library is attempting to determine the type of a drive and verify its physical presence in the library it detects a drive type that is not compatible with the logical library assignment of the drive slot for example an LTO 1 drive in an LTO 3 drive position Detection Scenarios 1 Installation of a tape drive into a library drive slot triggers the library to discover it 2 Bootup causes the library to physically discover any tape drive that is electrically connected in the system Root Causes 1 End user or CE mistakenly uses the actual wrong type of CRU for example LTO 1 drive sled in a slot defined as LTO 3 2 Manufacturing defect has wrong label type for actual physical drive type for example LTO 1 label on an LTO 3 drive Note Inability to communic
400. ication paths between each drive and the EKM have been correctly installed and setup 4 EKM Config Test This is a final test to establish a link to a key manager and request a default key This ensures that the drive has been correctly configured in the EKM to service key requests To execute Key Path Diagnostics from the web UI go to Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics and click Start Tests These tests are run sequentially on each IP address of each drive that is enabled for LME If a particular test fails the subsequent tests for that same IP address are not run and the results will show N A Note The diagnostics tests may take several minutes to complete To run any of the tests the tape drive used for the test must be unloaded ready and online If any of the tests fail try the following resolutions and run the test again to make sure it passes e Ping Test Failure Verify that the key server host is running and accessible from the network the library is on e Drive Test Failure Look for any tape drive RAS tickets and follow the resolution instructions in the ticket e Path Test Failure Verify that the key server is actually running and that the port SSL settings match the library configuration settings e Config Test Failure Verify that the key server is set up to accept the tape drive you are testing There are two ways to perform Key Path Diagnostics e Using Key Path Diagnostics on page 6 16
401. identifier Explanation The library logic learns the branding of the system by reading an internal label The branding identifier is located on the same label as the serial number This is done at first boot up from a cleared to ship condition in order to establish the library personality It is also done on subsequent boot ups to confirm that the Compact Flash memory card is in the proper library The library will report this ticket when it cannot read the library branding code but it has confirmed functionality of the bar code reading system by successfully reading some other bar code label in the library When T092 is posted the user can be confident that at least one other bar code label has been read For example bar codes that can be used to check functionality are WWN or SN in CM cases Different tickets will be posted if there are motion related problems scanner communication problems etc Detection Scenario Picker cannot accurately read the OEM identifier barcode on the control module label Root Cause Label may be damaged or missing Possible FRU Replacements e Module EM or CM only dispatch this FRU if the label is missing or damaged e Picker Assembly Resolution Perform DR080 Resolve Unreadable Branding on page 5 84 T093 Automatic Cleaning Failure Description GUI Description The library detected a problem during an automatic cleaning operation Explanation
402. idges for damage gf ON Close the doors and wait for the system to complete initialization Use the Tools gt Service gt Library gt Robot test to determine if the failure is permanent If the test fails replace the Y Axis Picker Assembly If the test passes continue to close this Ticket N 8 Make sure the logical libraries are online and continue normal library operations Monitor for recurrence of the problem DRO90 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error RCB Problem Robotics firmware has reported a specific hardware error identifying the Robot Controller Board as the failed component This problem may be caused by an electrical hardware failure Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket and reinitialize the Robot by opening and closing the Main Access Door s 2 If this ticket reoccurs after the Robot reinitializes replace the Y Axis Picker Assembly DRO91 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error Picker Problem The robotics firmware has reported a specific hardware error identifying the Picker assembly as the failed component This problem may be caused by an electrical hardware failure at the Picker assembly or at the Robot Controller Board 5 88 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps 1 Close this ticket and reinitialize the Robot by opening and closing the Main Access Door s 2 If this ticket reoccurs after the Robot reinitializes replace the Picker Assembly
403. ilure diagnostic 5 62 licenses 2 16 advanced reporting 2 16 capacity expansion 2 24 encryption 2 27 path failover 2 26 LME Key Path 6 14 Load Unload Test D 40 location coordinates 2 28 columns 2 30 drives 2 30 modules 2 29 power supplies 2 30 slots 2 30 lock assembly 7 36 logical libraries sharing 2 33 logs 6 11 capturing 6 11 e mailing 6 13 logs continued media usage 2 21 low voltage differential LVD SCSI interface 2 14 low power mode 2 16 LVD SCSI interface 2 14 M M2 Robot Assembly remove replace 7 77 Maintenance create FMR tape D 31 update firmware with FMR tape D 30 Maintenance Function selecting function D 26 unmaking an FMR tape D 34 Maintenance Mode entering D 28 exiting D 28 D 29 Maintenance plan 2 38 Maintenance start 2 38 McDATA switch D 54 media unlabeled D 12 Media D 5 inserting D 4 removing D 5 unassigned D 13 unsupported format diagnostic 5 66 Write Protect or WORM Diagnostic 5 66 media integrity 2 19 media integrity reporting 2 19 media security notifications 2 20 media usage logs 2 21 Menus Operator Panel 4 5 service 6 5 Message codes D 42 messages drive error Drive Error Log D 51 Error Messages Receiving D 49 Host Sense Data D 50 Messages Receiving D 49 mixed drive types protection against non support 2 33 Model 1 and Model 2 Robots 7 66 Model 1 Robot 7 66 7 70 module coordinates 2 29 monitored library access ix motion obstructed 5 71 Multi Path Architecture 2 33 mu
404. in Figure 7 130 and to the left of the screw stand offto avoid damage to the cable 2 Carefully insert the plastic tabs J in Figure 7 131 on page 7 116 on the Cable Spool Assembly into the slots J in Figure 7 131 on page 7 116 in the enclosure sidewall Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 115 a66mi011 Figure 7 131 Cable Spool Assembly tabs 3 Tighten the T10 Torxretaining screw J in Figure 7 129 on page 7 114 until the Cable Spool Assembly is secured to the enclosure 4 Connect the Cable Spool connector F in Figure 7 128 on page 7 113 to the J11 connector on thedistribution board 5 Replace the Storage Columns See Replacing a Storage Column on page 7 107 6 Replace the Y axis Picker Assembly See Replacing the M2 Robot Assembly 7 If they were removed replace the top cover and left side cover 8 If your library is installed in a rack perform one of the following procedures i i or larger on page 7 11 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Gear Rack The Y axis Assembly uses the Gear Racks one in front one in back to move the Picker and Bar Code scanner within the library Removing a Front Gear Rack 1 Lay the library module on the left side from front 2 Remove the bottom cover of the module if necessary 7 116 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 3 There is a small metal tab in
405. ing removed If there is glue residue on the cartridge remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger Do not use a sharp object water or a chemical to clean the label area e Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge Do not use the label if it has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code a library s inventory operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable e Remove the label from the label sheet carefully Do not stretch the label or cause the edges to curl Position the label within the recessed label area see J in With light finger pressure smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on its surface e Verify that the label is smooth and parallel and has no roll up or roll over The label must be flat to within 0 5 mm 0 02 in over the length of the label and have no folds missing pieces or smudges Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 11 e Do not place other machine readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge They may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge Unlabeled Media Detection At bootup and other times the library performs an inventory of all slots and media If a slot contains media with an unreadable barcode label for example the label is missing torn or marked up the scanner cannot identify it so the library normally reports the slot as empty With the Unlabeled Media Detection feature you can configure the library to
406. instructions in Installing the Model 1 Robot Assembly in the Library on page 7 70 M2 Robot Assembly The M2 Robot Assembly houses the Y Motor Robot Controller Board and the Picker Removing the M2 Robot Assembly from the Library 1 Perform Preparing 2 Remove the Control Module from the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information 3 Remove the top cover of the control module if necessary Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 77 4 Open the I O Station door then the Access Door to access the M2 Robot Assembly 5 Optionally remove the I O Station from the control module for easier access 6 Manually lift the M2 Robot Assembly raise it along the track and_carefully lift it out Be careful not to damage the Cable Spool flat cable H in Figure 7 84 Set the M2 Robot Assembly on top of the library and loosen the thumbscrew E in Figure 7 84 to disconnect the cable spool a66mi123 es Figure 7 84 Thumb screw securing Cable Spool 7 Remove any media that is in the picker 8 Carefully lower the Cable Spool connector J in Figure 7 85 on page 7 79 and hook it around the black plastic guide peg KA in Figure 7 85 on page 73 7 78 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information P z a66mi012 _ Figure 7 85 Cable Spool with storage columns removed pan the M2 Robot Ass
407. ion afon Use the Tools gt Service gt Library gt Robot Test to verify if the robot is operational e If the test fails refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 e If the test passes Close the Operator Intervention message and continue operations and monitor for reoccurrence 6 Choose one of the following options Select Close to close the ticket now e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DROO3 Resolve Drive Eject Failure Problem The library received a request to unload and eject a tape cartridge from a tape drive but the operation failed There are two cases to consider e The tape drive is or was still busy servicing host commands or e the tape drive failed to physically unload and eject the tape cartridge Troubleshooting Steps 1 View the ticket details to determine if the tape drive was busy reading or writing data 2 If the drive was busy servicing host commands wait for the host application to finish drive operations then repeat the command request to unload the tape drive 3 If the drive was not busy servicing host commands retry the failing command request 4 If the requested command succeeds observe for future occurrences and contact Service if the issue repeats 5 If the requested command fails open the library main access door s and use the drive pushbutton on the front of the drive to init
408. ion module directly below the CM is number 1 If there is an expansion module installed above the CM it will be numbered 1 The expansion module stacked directly below module 1 is number 2 and so on Columns A storage column is a group of slots arranged vertically in the library Columns are represented by the second digit of a library coordinate Columns are identified relative to the front left of the library The column in the front left of the library is Chapter 2 Product Description 2 29 number 1 The column numbering continues around the library in a clockwise direction The I O Station column is always number 6 Slots Fixed storage slots are represented by the third digit of the library location coordinate Slots are numbered from top to bottom within each column starting with 1 at the top of the column Drives Drives are addressed by module and drive bay within a module The drive bays within a module are numbered from top to bottom A one based numbering system is used The top drive bay is drive bay 1 A full address of a drive is of the form Module Drive Bay examples 0 1 1 2 0 1 0 2 1 a66ug045 Figure 2 13 Drive location coordinates Power Supplies Power supplies are addressed as Module PS where PS is 1 for the left supply and 2 for the right as viewed from the rear of the library 2 30 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66ug046 Figure 2 14 Power supply location
409. ion sensor If you are guiding a customer by phone you may want to copy the picture and e mail it to them 2 Open the doors on the all the modules in the library from the bottom to the control module Lift up the robot and bring it to rest on the parking tab Check inside the library for any debris on the floor of the library that would interfere with picker movement 3 Remove the robot from the library and carefully inspect the picker for any damage or obstruction on the face that would prevent a clear line of sight to the barcodes or fiducials Place the robot back into the library Ensure that the Y rails are locked in the down position and that the robot is level Close this ticket and resume normal operations If this ticket reoccurs to go the next step 4 Clear the RAS ticket and retry the original operation T021 Drive Sled Communication Failure Description GUI Description The library has lost communication with the drive sled Explanation The library had been communicating with a tape drive sled and had considered it to be assigned to a logical library Two way communications no longer occur This ticket is specifically NOT caused by two scenarios e Physical removal of a tape drive if the tape drive is not assigned to a logical library e Complete physical removal of a drive if it is turned offline via the library operator panel When the library detects loss of communication with a drive that is online th
410. ion is not supported DR027 Resolve Unknown Library SN Label Problem The library cannot read one of the module serial number labels but has already validated that the bar code scanning system is working properly There are four likely scenarios 1 Line of sight from the scanner to the module serial number bar code label is blocked by foreign material such as a media bar code label 2 The module serial number bar code label is damaged and the bar code scanner can not read it reliably 3 One or more module terminators or module to module cables has bent or broken pins 4 The module terminators or module to module cables are not installed in the correct locations and exclude a module 5 70 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Steps 1 Power off the library and inspect all module terminators and module to module cables for any bent or broken pins Contact Service to replace any damaged parts 2 Ensure that the module terminators are connected to the extreme top and bottom connectors of the library and that the module to module cables are connected correctly per the library documentation 3 Open the main library access doors and look for any damage to the module serial number Check for obstructions in front of the module serial number barcode labels 4 If no obvious foreign material is found the module serial number is damaged and the EM or CM will need to be replaced The library i
411. ionship T tachometer tach A device that emits pulses that are used to measure check speed or distance tape cartridge A container holding magnetic tape that can be processed without separating it from the container tape void An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCU Tape control unit TH Thermal thread load operation A procedure that places tape along the tape path TM Tapemark H 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information U UART Universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UL Underwriter s Laboratories unload Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive utilities Utility programs utility programs A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer for instance a diagnostic program uv Under voltage V VOLSER Volume serial number volume A certain portion of data together with its data carrier that can be handled conveniently as a unit VPD Vital product data The information contained within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage used by functional areas of the drive and information required for manufacturing RAS and engineering W word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity WORM Write Once Read Many Write Write command WT world trade WWCID World Wide Cartridge Identifier WWN World Wide Name WWNN World Wide
412. iption GUI Description A Y axis motion error occurred which does not seem to be the result of robotic obstruction Explanation A y axis motion error that cannot be considered a complete obstruction has been reported by robotics Because a tape is not in the picker tape recovery is not necessary as part of the resolution strategy This ticket only occurs during a robotics move not during a robotics get or put Detection Scenario Root Causes 1 A specified move in the y axis cannot complete 2 Robotics firmware reports a y axis error condition 1 A physical obstruction in the path of the robot s motion Examples include tape cartridges that are extending from the picker assembly or from a storage location as well as tape cartridges or debris that may have collected on the floor of the library 2 A large number of electrical hardware failures Firmware or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuits motor winding issues etc 3 A relatively small number of mechanical hardware failures that do not result in the detection of a complete obstruction but where motion control generates robotics firmware error codes contamination or damage to encoder wheel high friction etc Possible FRUs Robot Assembly Resolution Perform DR088 Resolve Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure on page 5 88 T122 Robotics X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure Tape i
413. ironment of the library must not conflict with the media storage requirements see the section about media storage requirements in the Setup and Operator Guide The library may be capable of operating at elevated temperatures for an extended period of time the temperature could shorten the useful life of media that is stored in the library If media is stored in the library for more than 10 hours the storage temperature requirements for media should be met It should be assumed that media stored in the library will be 2 degrees above ambient temperature when the library is powered ON Product Environment The library is designed to operate in a general business environment The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category 2D Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m 13 ft from a permanent work station To allow for service access install the library a minimum of 0 9 m 3 ft from all obstacles The library is a precision computer peripheral To ensure maximum longevity of your library locate the library away from dust dirt and airborne particulates Chapter 2 Product Description 2 37 e Keep the library away from high traffic areas especially if the floor is carpeted Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet fibers and the dust to become airborne e Keep the library out of printer copier rooms because of toner and paper
414. is expected whenever an exported cartridge has been physically removed by an operator from an I O area element Detection Scenarios After I O elements have been inventoried the library determined that a previously exported cartridge is no longer present Root Causes An exported cartridge has been removed from the library Resolution Perform DR106 Resolve Media Security Notification on T146 Media Removal Warning Description The library detected an unexpected cartridge removal from the library Explanation The library is configured for Media Security Notification and detected an unexpected removal of media Media removal is not expected if the cartridge is no longer found in previously configured storage and drive elements as well as the medium changer picker element itself Media removal is also not expected from configured I O area elements unless the tape cartridge had been moved to such element by robotic motion Detection Scenarios After an inventory operation the library determined that a previously configured but not exported tape cartridge is no longer present Root Causes A tape cartridge has been removed from the library without having been properly exported by the robot Resolution Perform DR106 Resolve Media Security Notification on page 5 92 T149 Key Path Diagnostic Delay Description The library is unable to initiate a background Key Path
415. is initiated 4 A scratch cartridge must be placed in the top slot of the I O station scanned and assigned to System use Drive test requires the media type to match the drive type e g LTO4 media for LTO4 drives This applies to all drive types in the library Media must not be write protected encrypted or WORM 5 The type of test must be selected to perform one of the following tests e Robot This procedure tests the following robot parameters Controller Area Network CAN bus Home Axis limit Friction 4 Corners Calibration sensor Alignment Scanner Fingers and Tape Handling e Frame This procedure tests the following frame parameters Fiducials Cell positions Transitions Configuration e I O This procedure tests the following I O station parameters Door lock mechanism e Drive This procedure tests the following parameters on each drive in the library CAN Bus test Drive self test Put Load Fast R W Loaded scan Unload Unloaded scan Dismount e Tour This procedure tests the ability of the picker mechanism to load and unload cartridges to and from the extreme top and bottom cells of all of the modules in the library At the end of the test s selected you can touch Details for all test results or Cancel to exit the Library Tests or Next to view Detail Logs or email Detail Logs Library Demo This test requires a scratch cartridge in the top slot of the I O station that has been scanned and assigned to
416. is unplugged at boot up 3 I O station is left in a not open and not closed state at boot up Possible FRU Replacements e I O Station Lock assembly e I O station safety flap Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR036 Resolve Partially Open I O Station on page 5 74 T079 Get Operation Failed Motion OK Description GUI Description The robot failed to pick a tape cartridge Explanation The library cannot successfully get a tape from a drive storage or I O location The tape is still resting in the source location The robot is not obstructed in any way and can continue operations unlike the case for T003 If the operation was initiated by a host move media the move media command has failed with an ASC ASCQ of 4h 15h 01h hardware mechanical positioning error Detection Scenario The picker cannot get a tape from the source location It can scan or touch the tape to verify that it is present Root Causes Picker has broken fingers Picker has bad calibration so it is not positioned correctly Picker has bad y gears so it is not at the height it thinks it is at An obstruction that prevents the picker fingers from getting into the tape grooves PORN gt a A bad tape that is jammed and stuck in the slot D A damaged slot or drive that will not release the tape Possible CRU Replacements e Cartridge Possible FRU Replacements Picker e Y axis asse
417. it doesn t fall Swing the panel to the right then lift it from the Access Door TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Replacing the Operator Panel To replace the Operator Panel complete the removal procedure in reverse For the last step perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 Removing Replacing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly The Power Switch LED Board Assembly f in Figure 7 30 contains the power ON OFF button power ON LED and Operator Attention LED a66mi084 Figure 7 30 Power Switch LED Board Assembly Removing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly 1 Perform Preparing Perform Removing the Access Door Bezel on page 7 26 Disconnect the small white connector H in Figure 7 30 Remove the two screws Kf in Figure 7 30 Remove the Power Switch LED Board Assembly from the Control Module Note that the FRU kit for this assembly contains the cable and cable ties If you suspect the cable may be failing replace it also of oN Replacing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly 1 Perform Removing the Power Switch LED Board Assembly in reverse order 2 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 31 O Station Each control and expansion module has an I O Station located on the right side of the front
418. itry to implement certain functions of a processor or other system component MIM Media information message mm Millimeter modifier That which changes the meaning mount a device To assign an I O device with a request to the operator MP Microprocessor ms Millisecond MSG Message multipath Pertaining to using more than one path N N A Not applicable NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association node In a network a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits NTP Network Time Protocol This allows the library to set its internal date and time based on the date and time of a sever NVS Nonvolatile storage A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off O oersted The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information centimeter gram second cgs electromagnetic system The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated uniformly wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of one abampere per 4r centimeters of axial length offline Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer Contrast with online online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer Contrast with offline OPER Operation ov Over voltage overrun Loss of data because a rec
419. ive fiber port does not detect light 1 Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly Verify all equipment and devices are powered ON 2 Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the topology of the network 3 Verify the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network 4 Verify the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network 5 Verify the drive fiber cable and connector are plugged into port 0 of the tape drive 6 Verify tape drive fiber port 0 is working properly by running Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page D 33 The error code clears when the drive detects light or when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode Write operation to a write protected cartridge has been attempted this includes any attempt to overwrite a WORM protected tape Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type Writes to Ultrium 2 tape cartridges are not supported in Ultrium 4 tape drives If the tape cartridge is the correct media type check the write protect switch on the cartridge The drive will not write to a write protected cartridge The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape drive in maintenance mode Resolving Tape Drive Pro
420. izer brackets on the rack cabinet If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position e If a long distance relocation is required restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material or equivalent Also lower the leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet R002 Power cords For your safety IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use with this IBM product To avoid electrical shock always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded outlet IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter s Laboratories UL and certified by the Canadian Standards Association CSA For units intended to be operated at 115 volts Use a UL listed and CSA certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG Type SVT or SJT three conductor cord a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade grounding type attachment plug rated 15 amperes 125 volts Safety and Environmental Notices xi For units intended to be operated at 230 volts U S use Use a UL listed and CSA certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG Type SVT or SJT three conductor cord a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade grounding type attachment plug rated 15 amperes 250 volts F
421. ker Assembly E in Figure 7 56 on page 75 Lower the Y axis Picker Assembly by tilting its gears at a 45 angle onto the top of the front and rear gear racks see Figure 7 58 on page 7 57p nd Figure 7 59 on page 7 56 BE VERY CAREFUL TO START BOTH Y AXIS PICKER ASSEMBLY GEARS TOGETHER TO ENSURE THE Y AXIS PICKER ASSEMBLY IS LEVEL After lowering the Y axis Picker Assembly a few teeth verify that the Y axis Picker Assembly is level with the library chassis If it is not level remove the Y axis Picker Assembly and reinsert Remove the Cable E ool connector E in Figure 7 57 from the black plastic 7 56 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi015 Figure 7 58 Guide rollers on Y axis Picker Assembly Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 57 a66mi016 Figure 7 59 Y axis Picker Assembly rollers inserted in gear rack track 7 58 Ti Replace the I O Station see Reinstalling an I O Station on page 7 35 Close the Access Door then the I O Station door Replace the top cover of the control module if necessary Replace the Control Module in the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Original Picker Assembly The Picker moves media to and from storage slots and tape drives and positions the Bar Code
422. l Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Remove and replace the Operator Panel see Operator Panel on page 7 27 5 30 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T068 Destination Element Full Description GUI Description The robot determined that a destination location for a tape cartridge move operation is already full Explanation The robot has attempted to put to a drive I O or storage element and has determined that the element is full This is distinctly NOT a SCSI illegal request situation At the beginning of the move media the library inventory has indicated that the destination element was in an empty state to allow it to be a valid destination During recovery operations the library has concluded that the cell is obstructed by a piece of media Any failure that is not thought to be a piece of media in the destination should not be mapped to this ticket Detection Scenarios The destination element for a move media is full with a LABELED cartridge Library inventory does not know that the cell is full The destination element for a move media is full with an unlabeled cartridge As part of recovery the library attempts to perform a get from the cell If the get succeeds and a tape cartridge is detected in the picker by the tape present sensor then the slot is designated as full with an unlabeled tape present Root Causes e Inventory has not occurred since cartridge was
423. l Empty 2 2 fz 150 x x L Library Drives Media Figure 4 3 Operator Panel common header elements and subsystem status buttons a66ug051 Common Header Elements All Operator Panel screens except for the Login screen contain the following common elements in the header e Home in Figure 4 3 displays the default Capacity View screen Help HA in Figure 4 3 context sensitive help for the associated page Logout E in Figure 4 3 ability to log out e Logical Library Name Displays the designation for the current logical library You can click the arrows on either side of the library designation to scroll through other available logical libraries Note When the library is busy performing certain tasks a Not Ready message will display alternately with the IBM TS3310 notation at the top of the screen System Summary and Subsystem Status The health of the library can be gauged by three subsystem status buttons located at the bottom of the home page These buttons provide easy access to the health of the library for faster recovery if problems occur You can select the buttons to view detailed information about the library and gain access to library subsystems The three subsystems are Library J in Figure 4 3 opens the operator interventions for the library Drives H in Figure 4 3 opens the operator intervention screen for drives e Media f in Figure 4 3 opens the operator intervention screen
424. l See electronic mail EPO Emergency power off EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory EQC Equipment check equipment check An asynchronous indication of a malfunction Error log A dataset or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access ESD Electrostatic discharge Glossary H 5 H 6 F fault symptom code FSC A hexadecimal code generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a detected subsystem error FC Feature code FCC Federal communications commission FE Field engineer customer engineer or service representative fiducial A target used for teaching a physical location to a robot field replaceable unit FRU An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails file A named set of records stored or processed as a unit Also referred to as a dataset file protection The processes and procedures established in an information system that are designed to inhibit unauthorized access to contamination of or deletion of a file file transfer protocol FTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk data files between machines or hosts firmware Proprietary code that is usually delivered as microcode as part of an operating system Firmware is more efficient than software loaded from an alterable medium and more adaptable to change than pure har
425. l appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select the function Then press the Unload Button once per second to cycle through the following functions C m e E no function Cc I e L copy dump to tape c a e O El copy dump to flash memory ae e E 2 erase flash memory If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 4 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to select one of the above functions Cc my 5 If you selected the drive will exit Maintenance Mode If you selected c ja c 3 c IE or I the SCD will change to a flashing while the procedure is being performed After the procedure is completed the drive will exit D 32 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information E Maintenance Mode If you selected L the SCD will change to a flashing indicating that a data cartridge is to be inserted 6 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge that is not write protected or the tape drive exits maintenance mode The SCD flashes the selection number while performing the function e If the copy operation completes
426. lanation The volume serial scanner is detected to be in a state where the library control logic cannot use it Library robot power is known to be applied door is closed and robot is detected to be functioning enough to confirm power is applied and yet scanner communication cannot be established at all or appears to be not healthy Detection Scenario 1 During any library power ON or door close operation Picker power is applied and bar code scanner communication is established 2 During run time operations such as inventory where the bar code scanner is used Root Causes 1 Scanner is physically disconnected 2 Various electrical hardware failures that prevent proper communication between the Library Control Blade and bar code scanner 3 Bar code reader is not scanning the labels correctly Possible CRU Replacements Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements Note Read and perform all resolution steps before dispatching any parts Dispatch the first part listed below for replacement If this does not solve the problem dispatch the second part and so on in order Dispatch only one part or set of parts at a time e Picker assembly e Cable Spool e Y carriage Assembly Resolution Remove and replace the Picker Refer to M2 Picker Assembly on page 7 82 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 37 T083 Unlevel Robot Assembly Not Level
427. le Configuration T076 Robot Initialization Failure T077 I O Station Partially Partially Open T079 Get Operation Failed Motion OK T080 Module SN Change T081 Incorrect Module Brand T082 Volume Serial Scanner Failure T083 Unlevel Robot Assembly Not Level T084 Missing Cleaning Tape P F T085 Unknown Cartridge in Cleaning Slot T086 Inaccessible Tape Cartridge T087 Invalid Library SN Label Warning T089 E mail Notification Error T090 Invalid Cleaning Tape T091 Tape Alert 56 Unload Failure T092 Unreadable Branding Identifier T093 Automatic Cleaning Failure T094 Drive Bay Open T095 Installation and Verification Test VT Failure T096 Module Communication T108 Incompatible Drive Brand T109 Drive Firmware Update Failure T110 Drive Firmware Mismatch Detected T112 Invalid Tape Drive Firmware Image T114 Unassigned Tape Cartridge T115 Installation amp Verification Test Warning T116 Robotics Firmware Image Error T117 Robotics Auto Level Failure T118 Degraded Robotics Flash T120 Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure Tape i in Picker T121 Robotics y Axis Motion Failure No Tape in Picker T122 Robotics X Z Theta Axis Motion Fail re Tape in Picker T123 Robotics X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure No Tape in Picker T124 Robotics Hardware riore RCB T125 Robotics Hardware Error Picker T126 Robotics Hardware Error Scanner T127 Robotics Communication Error T
428. le and redundant power supply control modules and any expansion module with a power supply Detection Scenarios Regular polling between Library Control Blade and power supply is not successful Root Causes Detected fan failure in the supply Detected over temp condition in the supply Detected DC failure in the supply PON Detected over current failure in the supply Possible CRU Replacements e Power Supply e Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables Possible FRU Replacements Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Before performing any remove replace procedures refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 for additional diagnostic procedures T026 Primary Key Server Failover Description GUI Description The library performed a successful communication failover to the secondary key server Explanation The Key Management feature of this library allows the user to connect 2 key servers for redundancy If communication to the primary server is interrupted the library will automatically switch or failover to the secondary server This RAS ticket will be generated to notify the user of this failover event Detection Scenarios e When the library detects that it can no longer communicate with the primary key server and automatically switches to the secondary key server Root Causes 1 Primary Key Server is not connected properly 2 Primary Key Server is n
429. leader pin attach tool ff D 24 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Place a new C clip into the retention groove H on the leader pin attachment tool and make sure that the clip s open side faces up Place the leader pin that was removed earlier into the cavity E of the leader pin attach tool Attention To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge in the following step use care when folding the tape over the pin Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers Note Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin Failure to properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge to fail When the tape is properly centered a 0 25 mm 0 01 in gap exists on both sides of the pin Close the pivot arm JJ of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the leader pin so that the C clip snaps onto the pin and the tape Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape J so that it is flush with the reattached leader pin J Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity Ef in the leader pin attach tool Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge wind the tape clockwise Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the pin retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin Remove the rewind tool Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the cartridge Appendix D Using Ul
430. leaning Cartridges e Insert a new cartridge To insert a data cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Insert Media To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Insert Cleaning Media To insert a data cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt T O Station To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Cleaning Cartridges T034 Drive TapeAlert 4 Media Error Description GUI Description A tape can no longer be written or read or performance is severely degraded Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 4 indicating an unrecoverable read write or positioning error that the drive specifically isolates to the media This ticket is generated only if accompanied by TA 39 to indicate a pulled leader pin Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 4 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR044 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 4 Media Error on page 5 77 T035 Drive TapeAlert Flag 5 Read Failure Description GUI Descriptiton The drive is having difficulty reading from a tape Explanation System determines that the drive has i
431. lear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code H Test Head Approximate Run Time 10 minutes per loop Total Number of Loops 10 i H Function Code performs tests to ensure that the tape drive s head and tape carriage mechanics work correctly Record the time it takes for the test to complete Compare the recorded time with the Approximate Run Time above If the test runs successfully but the execution time is significantly longer than the Approximate Run Time run Function Code F Write Performance Test on page D 37 If the Write Performance Test fails replace the media Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Attention For this test insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be overwritten During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or 1 I non FMR cartridge error code appears in the SCD and the amber Fault status light flashes If you inserted a write protected cartridge or the media Ci l ha
432. lect Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution DR021 Contact IBM Service This Operator Intervention requires technical assistance from IBM Please contact an IBM Service Representative by phone or web to open a Service Request In the USA 800 IBM SERV 1 800 426 7378 All other countries regions http www ibm com To open a Service Request online http www ibm com At the direction of IBM Technical Support you may be asked to perform the following functions e Capture Snapshot From the Web User Interface select Service Library gt Capture Library Log e Close Operator Intervention You may select the No button to leave this problem open for future review DR022 Resolve Missing Power Supply Problem A power supply is detected to be missing in the system This is most likely caused by an actual removal of a power supply 5 68 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Step If you have recently removed a power supply from the library replace it and Close this Operator Intervention If you want to permanently remove a power supply close this operator intervention and power cycle the library with the power supply removed If all power supplies appear to be present see Power Supply LEDs on page 6 22 DR023 Resolve Missing I O Station Magazine Problem An I O Station has bee
433. led 81h 86h Setting of elevator pic value failed 81h 87h Setting of rotation pic value failed 81h 88h Setting of sled pic value failed 81h 89h Gripper blocked 81h 8Ah Slider blocked 81h 8Bh Elevator blocked 81h 8Ch Rotation blocked 81h 8Dh Sled blocked 81h 8Eh Cannot find gripper block 81h 8Fh Cannot find slider block 81h 90h Cannot find elevator block 81h 91h Cannot find rotation block 81h 92h Cannot find sled block 81h 93h Gripper outside range 81h 94h Slider outside range 81h 95h Elevator outside range 81h 96h Rotation outside range 81h 97h Sled outside range 81h 98h No cartridge present sensor found 81h 99h No slider home sensor found 81h 9Ah No rotation home sensor found 81h 9Bh No sled position sensor found 81h 9Ch The range of gripper is wrong 81h 9Dh The range of slider is wrong 81h 9Eh The range of elevator is wrong 81h 9Fh The range of rotation is wrong 81h AOh The range of sled is wrong 81h Ath Open import export element failed 81h BOh Slave robotic controller response timeout 81h Blh NACK received from slave robotic controller 81h B2h Slave robotic controller communication failed 81h B3h Slave robotic controller urgent stop 81h B4h Cartridge did not transport completely 81h B5h Slave robotic controller does not respond on command Appendix B Sense Data B 3 Table B 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
434. lem in one or more drives Detection Scenarios e Monitoring of voltage divider indicates partial or complete voltage drop Root Causes 1 Board level hardware failure 2 Permanent or temporary short circuit conditions in drives drive sleds docking connectors etc Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Possible FRU Replacements e DSIB fuse 5U or 9U Resolution 1 Remove all drive sleds close the ticket reboot the library and see if the ticket reoccurs 2 If the ticket reoccurs with all drive sleds out check the fuse If the fuse is blown replace per Remove and Replace Drive Power Fuse on page 7 129 3 If the ticket does not reoccur with all sleds out install one drive sled at a time checking to see if a ticket occurs for each one to see which drive sled is causing the ticket Replace the defective drive sled T067 Display Assembly Hardware Failure Description GUI Description A local display assembly hardware failure has been detected Explanation The library encounters an error which appears to be isolated to Operator Panel hardware This includes the Operator Panel board Detection Scenarios No communication with Operator Panel board Root Causes 1 Blown DIEB fuse 2 Rare power supply problem where too much voltage is transferred to the display 3 DIEB temperature limit exceeding threshold 4 LCB failure Possible FRU Replacements e Operator Pane
435. library operation The log file contains the following information e Date and time of media removal e Tape cartridge barcode e Type of removal expected or unexpected e Slot location coordinates of the slot from which the tape cartridge is missing e Slot type IE storage or cleaning The log only lists media that have been completely removed from the library It does not list media that move from one location to another within the library When the log file reaches its maximum size the oldest information is deleted as new information is added This can affect how much historical data you can access To view save or email the report select Service Library gt Media Security Log from the remote user interface Click Select Action select Download or Email options then click Go TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Media Usage The Media usage report lists information regarding data written and read on the media and lists statistics pertaining to soft and hard read and write errors The media usage log collects information on all media that have ever been in the library including media that are no longer in the library Lifetime media usage metrics are associated with the cartridge and are kept on the embedded cartridge memory To view the media usage log go to Service Library gt Media Usage Log The log reflects what the drive reports from the embedded cartridge memory whenever the media is unloaded If the tape
436. lign rollers on the Picker Assembly vith slots on the M2 Robot Assembly Removing a storage column Correct fiducial placement Fiducial on storage column Replacing a Storage Column 7 69 7 70 7 70 7 71 7 72 7 72 3779 7 74 3 7 79 7 76 7 77 7 78 34579 7 80 7 81 7 81 7 82 7 83 7 83 7 84 7 85 7 86 7 87 7 88 7 88 7 89 7 90 7 90 7 91 7 92 7 93 7 93 7 94 7 95 7 96 7 96 7 97 7 98 7 98 7 99 7 100 7 100 7 101 7 102 7 102 7 103 7 104 7 104 7 105 7 106 7 107 7 107 7 108 7 109 7 127 7 128 7 129 7 130 7 131 7 132 7 133 7 134 7 135 7 136 7 137 7 138 7 139 7 140 7 141 7 142 7 143 7 144 7 145 7 146 7 147 7 148 7 149 7 150 7 151 7 152 7 153 Releasing the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab F Unplugging the Cable Spool Assembly library shown in upright position Securing Spooler flat cable Cable Spool cable routing ae enclosure wall Cable Spool Assembly tabs Front gear rack n Gear rack detail Removing a gear rack Gear rack detail Rear gear rack location on chases Cable assembly from the Operator Control Panel to the Backplane Connector Board Backplane Connector Board BCB F Front View Operator Panel Cable Contactors Four screws on front of door and aa cable guide Hex stand off b
437. list of parts that you need to add remove or replace and determine the order in which you plan to service them Order any necessary parts See Chapter 9 Parts List on page 9 1 Review the cabling connections for each module If you need to disconnect the cables to remove or replace a field replaceable unit FRU consider labeling the cables so you can reconnect them correctly Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 3 7 When you are ready to service the library determine whether you will need to take the entire library offline or whether you can take only certain logical libraries offline See Required Library State on page 7 2 8 Contact the library administrator to schedule a time to take the library or logical library offline if necessary Before taking the library offline ask the administrator to complete or cancel any jobs that are in the queue 9 Power OFF the library or take it or just the affected logical libraries offline 10 Add remove and replace each part as necessary 11 After servicing the library and preferably after servicing each part power ON the library and run the appropriate diagnostic From the Operator Panel select Tools gt Library Tests to access the Library Verify Tests 12 When you finish adding removing and replacing all necessary parts verify that all drives are online then take the library online see Drives Library Online Offline on page 6 39 13 Close all open Oper
438. lity IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non IBM option cards Attention This is an EN 55022 Class A product In a domestic environment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures Responsible Manufacturer International Business Machines Corp New Orchard Road Armonk New York 10504 914 499 1900 European community contact IBM Deutschland GmbH IBM Technical Regulations Department M456 IBM Allee 1 71139 Ehningen Germany Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Attention This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures Germany Electromagnetic compatibility directive Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis Hinweis fiir Ger te der Klasse A EU Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertr glichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU Richtlinie 2004 108 EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften tiber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit in den EU Mitgliedsstaaten und halt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein Um dieses sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Handbtichern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben Des Weiteren diirfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlos
439. lled in a rack remove the rack ears see Rack Ears on page 7 19 from the front of the control module e D S oOo oOo oO Figure 7 8 Alignment pin and front thumb screw 7 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 9 Open the I O Station door then open the Access Door of the control module to expose the control module alignment pin J in Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 and front thumb screws H in Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 behind the Access Door and behind the I O Station door 10 Loosen the front thumb screws 11 Lift and rotate the control module alignment pin to lock the pin in an up position 12 With a person standing on each side of the control module pull it out of the rack 13 Place the control module on a sturdy work surface Replacing a Control Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger 1 Ensure that the front and rear gear racks are in the upper position see H in Figure 7 5 a66mi095 Figure 7 9 Gear racks down and up 2 Ensure that the module to module alignment pin f in is in the raised position If necessary raise the pin and rotate it half a turn to lock it in the raised position 3 With a person on each side of the control module pick the control module up from the work surface and slide it partway onto the expansion module in the rack using the guide slots on the top of the expansion module and the bottom of the control module Chapter 7 Check A
440. load fuse 23R6185 Storage magazine 8 slot with fiducial 23R7286 Storage magazine 16 slot with fiducial 23R7287 I O Station magazine 23R3640 Gear Racks front and back for L5B control module 23R9476 Gear Racks for E9U expansion module 23R9477 Kits CAN Bus Tool Kit 46X1438 Kit 1 Door Interlock Switch 23R6179 Kit 2 Power Switch LED Board and Cable 23R6180 Kit 3 Internal Cables and Boards 5U Control Module 23R6181 Kit Misc parts Y home flag door Inlk cover screws 95P4564 Kit I O Safety Flap 5U Control Module 95P5424 Kit I O Safety Flap 9U Expansion Module 95P5425 Customer Replaceable Unit CRU parts list Important This library has Tier 1 CRUs customer replaceable units These CRUs are parts of the library that must be added removed and replaced by the customer If a customer chooses to have the CRU added or removed replaced by an IBM Service Representative there will be a charge for the service Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 9 1 Before ordering a replacement CRU ensure that the following criteria is met e The failure is repeatable e A dump is captured for emailing to IBM Service Use the Web User Interface Service Library gt Capture Library Log for library dumps Use the Web User Interface Service Library gt Capture Drive Log for drive dumps CRU Part CRU Type Description Feature Code Number
441. losure event the library performs an inventory of the entire library An inventory of respective magazines is also performed each time an I O station closes These inventory operations use scanner reported barcode label information to determine element full and empty status If the library is configured to perform an EMPTY SLOT detection actually using the teach sensor to determine if any empty element may hold a cartridge that may not have a scanner readable barcode label attached and such an unlabeled cartridge is found this RAS ticket is generated to alert of such condition and allow the user to correct the issue The system will be able to report full status and also allow the cartridge to be moved but any cartridge label reference with be listing NO_LABEL on the user interface screens and a SCSI READ ELEMENT STATUS response will not list label volser information at all A RAS ticket will be generated upon the first occurrence of such unlabeled cartridge detection a separate ticket will not be generated for each tape found Detection Scenarios During touch inventory the teach sensor indicates cartridge presence but the scanner was unable to read the cartridge barcode label Root Cause A tape cartridge does not have a barcode label attached or the barcode label is damaged and unreadable Possible FRU Replacement None Resolution Remove and replace the unlabeled tape cartridge T144 I O Station Door
442. lot next to LCB 23R2604 Cover plate for empty Power Supply slot 23R2606 Cover plate for empty drive slot 23R2605 Library and Drive Firmware Update by an IBM Service Representative 0500 Rack ears kit 23R3349 Rack Power Distribution Unit PDU power cord 9848 39M5378 Foot pads kit 23R2599 SCSI Cables 0 4 m 8037 23R6408 HD68 HD68 SCSI Cables 2 5 m 5602 23R3841 VED CI HDGS Vas i 5604 23R3594 10m 5610 23R3593 Fibre Cables 5 m 6005 39M5700 Ete 13 m 6013 39M5701 25m 6025 12R9915 SAS Cables 2m 5402 95P4587 eae 1x 55m Do not use with 4x interposer FC 5400 5406 95P4588 SAS Cables 2m 5502 95P4488 eae he 5 5 m Do not use with 4x interposer FC 5500 5506 95P4494 Power Cords and Receptacles Table 9 1 on page 9 4 index number in the table Figure 9 1 on page 9 4 shows the plugs that are used by the power cords in Match the index number that is beside each plug to the Chapter 9 Parts List 9 3 A 12 16 0 EH 2 6 o G a77ug005 Figure 9 1 Types of Power Cord Receptacles Table 9 1 Power Cords Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 9 1 FC and Part Number Reference PN US Canada NEMA 5 15P Aruba Bahamas Barbados ji e 2 8 m 125V Bermuda Bolivia Brazil
443. ltiple control paths for control path failover 2 34 O offline library 6 39 online library 6 39 operating systems supported 2 38 operator interventions 6 2 operator panel login 4 1 Operator Panel 2 4 4 1 7 27 Index X 3 Operator Panel continued capacity view 4 4 common elements 4 3 header elements 4 3 keyboards 4 4 menus 4 5 subsystem status 4 3 system summary 4 3 P partitioning capability of SAN ready Multi Path Architecture 2 33 parts list 9 1 path failover 2 26 path failover feature license 2 16 periodic key path diagnostics 6 16 Picker 7 58 blown fuse 5 74 LEDs 6 23 manually recover cartridge 5 59 motion failure 5 62 not initializing 5 72 remove replace 7 82 picker assembly 2 8 point to point connection D 54 Post error reporting disabling D 41 enabling D 41 power AC failure 5 63 on off 6 40 requirements C 1 specifications 2 36 power button 2 4 power cords 9 1 power management 2 16 power overload fuse 7 129 7 131 power plugs 9 1 power supply 2 7 coordinates 2 30 LEDs 6 22 missing 5 68 redundant 2 16 reinstall 7 53 remove replace 7 51 removing primary 7 52 removing redundant 7 53 replace 7 53 power switch safety ix Pre call checklist 6 46 problem reporting 6 2 problem solving 1 1 protective devices main power switch ix monitored access ix R rack remove a 5U library 7 4 remove a control module from a 14U library 7 5 replace 5U library 7 4 replace control module in 14U library 7
444. ly have to replace a portion of these parts 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 121 2 Perform the following CRU procedures using the control module a 7 45 b c 3 Perform one of the following procedures e Removing a 5U Library Control Module from a Rack on page 7 4 Removing a Control Module from a Standalone or Rack mounted Librar 14U or larger on page 7 5 4 Remove the top side and bottom covers as necessary from the control module 5 Perform the following FRU procedures using the control module a b c d Al library magazines Removing Replacing a Storage Column on pagd 7 106 e Removing a Front Gear Rack on page 7 116 6 Remove the cable assembly from the Operator Control Panel OCP to the Backplane Connector Board BCB a Remove the cable retainers see J in Figure 7 137 Note The cable retainers may be black rubber O rings as shown or white plastic beaded cable ties If they are the white cable ties it will be necessary to cut them off and replace them with new cable retainers included in the new FRU kit b Remove the 2 screws from under the cable guide see H in Figure 7 137 near the I O Station lock assembly a66mi105 Figure 7 137 Cable assembly from the Operator Control Panel to the Backplane Connector Board c Unplug cable connectors J9 see _ FA
445. m 5 native switched fabric Fibre Channel attachment It also supports LTO Ultrium 3 Tape Drives with either LVD Ultra160 SCSI or native switched fabric Fibre Channel attachment Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 2 1 The TS3310 library supports Application Managed Encryption AME System Managed Encryption SME and Library Managed Encryption LME on Ultrium 4 SAS Serial Attached SCSI and Fibre Channel FC drives using Ultrium 4 media The AME function is standard on all libraries while the SME and LME features require a license key Front Panel Components a66ug030 Figure 2 1 Front panel of a 14U library Access doors Power button Green power ON LED Amber Operator Intervention Alert LED Operator Panel 5U control module I O Stations 9U expansion module elei co Jo 1 2 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Control Module 3576 Model L5B All library configurations include the control module A in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 The control module contains the robotics library control blade LCB and touch screen display The control module also contains an I O station fixed storage slots tape drives and at least one power supply The control module can contain one or two tape drives and one or two power supplies At least one power supply is always required Expansion Module 3576 Model E9U Each 9U expansion module J in Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 is a supplementary module that is attach
446. m a Sled on page AEN Ground yourself to the drive by using an ESD Kit Remove the cover of the drive by performing the following steps a Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the three screws and washers see in Figure 7 148 on page 7 134 that secure the bezel see H to the internal drive then remove the bezel Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 133 b Remove the cover of the internal drive by performing the following steps 1 Remove the four cover mounting screws and washers see f 2 Remove the cover by lifting it up a82ru007 Figure 7 148 Removing the cover from the internal drive 6 Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely matches the symptom on the drive e Tape spooled off the supply reel All the tape appears to be on the take up reel and no tape is on the supply reel inside the cartridge Test the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape pulled from leader pin or broken at the front end All the tape appears to be on the supply reel inside the cartridge and very little or no tape appears to be on the take up reel The leader block is positioned in the take up reel Return the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape broken in mid tape Tape appears to be on both the supply reel inside the cartridge and take up reel Test the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape tangled along tape path Tape appears to b
447. m160 SCSI tape drives are attached directly to a host Fibre Channel tape drives can be directly attached to a host or a Storage Area Network SAN Each SAS link is point to point so a maximum of 2 hosts could share a dual port SAS tape drive Drives mounted in sleds are installed into tape drive slots in the rear of the library If a tape drive slot is empty a metal plate covers the empty drive slot This metal plate cover has a connector that plugs into the drive connector providing electrical termination for some of the drive circuits It also serves as a safety cover and prevents debris from entering the library All empty drive slots must have one of these covers installed for proper library operation TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Power Supply The library supports single and redundant power configurations Each control module must have at least one power supply A single power configuration will have a power supply installed in the left slot of each library module as viewed from the rear A redundant power configuration will have power supplies installed in both slots of each library module The single configuration has a single AC line input and a single DC power supply The optional redundant configuration has dual AC line input and dual DC power supplies A power supply J in Figure 2 2 on page 2 5 can be hot swapped if the library has a redundant power supply A redundant power supply can be hot added
448. mall flat blade screwdriver e Electrostatic Discharge ESD Kit P N 93F2649 e safety glasses 7 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Electrostatic Discharge Important A discharge of static electricity can damage static sensitive devices or microcircuitry Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage To prevent electrostatic damage observe the following precautions Transport products in static safe containers such as conductive tubes bags or boxes Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static free stations Cover the unit with approved static dissipating material If available provide a ground strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment If a ground strap is not available touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity in your body Keep the work area free of non conducting materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam packing Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly Avoid touching pins wires or circuitry Use conductive field service tools Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs 1 Ensure all drives are empty 2 Power OFF the library e If the library is idle a Press the power button on the front panel of the control module b Toggle each power supply switch to the OFF O position
449. mance Test on page D 37 If the Write Performance Test fails replace the media If the drive diagnostics run successfully perform the operation that produced the initial drive error 3 If the problem persists replace the drive If it is not possible to run the tape cartridge in a different drive perform the following procedures 1 Clean the failing drive and run the drive diagnostics refer to the drive cleaning information in this manual and Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics on page D 2 Record the time it takes for the test to complete Compare the recorded time with the Approximate Run Time above If the test runs successfully but the execution time is significantly longer than the Approximate Run Time run Function Code F Write Performance Test on page D 37 If the Write Performance Test fails replace the media If the drive diagnostics run successfully run the Test Cartridge amp media diagnostic see Function Code E Test Cartridge amp Media on page D 36 2 If the Test Cartridge amp Media diagnostic fails replace the media If it runs successfully perform the operation that produced the initial drive error 3 If the problem persists replace the drive The tape drive needs to be cleaned Clean the tape drive Refer to the drive cleaning information in this manual The error code clears when you clean the tape drive or place it in maintenance mode
450. mbH Technical Regulations Abteilung M456 IBM Allee 1 71139 Ehningen Germany Generelle Informationen Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A People s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission statement PEA RANE AK SAHA BA HEA ARR ih EEA Pn REST TEAL F TERRA PRR SCO TATE Taiwan Class A compliance statement ANG FA BEPRMUMAMA DH RERNE E Ak AL A Oe RAAT HE AS HERF RASCRE RAEBRLLMFUOHR o Taiwan contact information faiemi t This topic contains the product service contact information for Taiwan Notices G 5 IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Information IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F No 7 Song Ren Rd Taipei Taiwan Tel 0800 016 888 oe A SIBM m HRS BRS Fo xl SR R Fir ASL LS 2 Ba We gE ise as ie ARA BE dE TPA BR 7 SKE ai O800 016 888 Pal f2c00790 Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference VCCI Class A Statement CORES TIAA ARRE C COREE RERA CHEATS CBRMSESZRHCOTCEMHVET COMAICIMEMAM BIER emTSKIBKENSCEMHVET VCCI A Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association JEITA Statement less than or equal to 20 A per phase BMRA RIIV AEM Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association JEITA Statement greater than 20 A per phase jieta1 BMRA ROY EA Korean Communications Commission KCC Class A Statement jjieta2 OD gh Oe a
451. mber reported to IBM technical support Transcribe the machine type model and serial number of the failing unit to the Repair ID tag for the replacement unit USE BALLPOINT PENTO COMPLETE THE RID TAG Place the Repair ID tag as close as possible but not covering the machine serial number of the replacement unit The original serial number must be visible 2 The use of the Repair ID tag is important for customer inventory accuracy a66mi073 Figure 6 21 RID tag placement 1 Copy the serial number from the label in the lower left corner of the old enclosure onto the RID tag H in Figure 6 21 2 Place the RID tag to the right of but not covering the serial number label located in the lower left corner of the new library enclosure J in Figure 6 21 6 44 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Applying an Agency Label to a Control Module When a Control Module is replaced an agency label must be applied to the new enclosure after it has been populated with all necessary library components 1 On the new enclosure open the I O Station door then open the Access Door 2 Place the Agency Label K in Figure 6 22 on the enclosure frame underneath the Access Door opening a66mi074 Figure 6 22 Agency Label placement 3 Close the Access Door then close the I O Station door Contacting IBM Technical Support e Perform the steps in Pre Call Checklist on page 6 46 before placing a c
452. mbly e Column assembly Resolution Perform DR076 Resolve Get Failure on page 5 82 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 35 T080 Module SN Change Description GUI Description The library detected the removal of an expansion module or a replacement of the control module Explanation When the library powers ON and the robot initializes the bar code serial number SN labels in each module are scanned by the robot beginning at the bottom of the library closest to the y axis home and then working up The library uses the control module CM SN and any expansion module SN to establish key operational properties and characteristics of library storage slots and partitions A change in the CM SN or the removal of an EM even if it is replaced with another EM will break any already established partition in such a way that it must be deleted This ticket was designed to notify the user that a condition exists that requires the deletion of a partition s and allow the user to assess whether perhaps human error is involved such as mixing the Library Control Blade s compact flash memory between libraries Detection Scenario At library boot up time the robot attempts to scan all module SN s When SN s are discovered they are compared to persisted data on the system compact flash Root Causes 1 An LCB is improperly swapped into a different physical module and th
453. mbly needs to be replaced 1 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the library door to gain access to the robot Look for any obstructions in front of the bar code scanner inside the mouth of the picker 2 If no foreign material is found the bar code scanner is damaged and the Y Axis Picker Assembly will need to be replaced DR101 Resolve Tape Drive Type Change Problem The library firmware detected that a tape drive assigned to a partition has been replaced with a tape drive of a different type A tape drive s type is defined by its vendor generation and interface Perform one of the following options to activate the new tape drive Troubleshooting Steps e Replace the new tape drive with one that is of the exact type as the original tape drive OR e Remove the original tape drive from the partition s configuration then add the new tape drive to the partition s configuration To do this follow these steps 1 From the Main Menu select Manage Library gt Logical Libraries 2 From the Logical Libraries menu select the partition to be modified Select Modify from the drop down selection list then select the Go button 3 From the Modify Logical Library menu click on the Select Drives to Assign to Logical library link Deselect the original tape drive from the drives list and select Apply 4 From the Modify Logical Library menu click on the Select Drives to Assign to Logical library link Select the
454. mware Levels Erase FMR Tools gt Drive Mgmt X N A Tape gt Erase an FMR tape Media Cartridges Move Data Operations gt Move X X Manage Cartridges X X Cartridges Media gt Data Cartridges Insert Data Operations gt Insert X X Manage Cartridges X X Cartridges Media gt T O Station Remove Data Operations gt X X Manage Cartridges X X Cartridges Remove Media gt Data Cartridges Cleaning Operations gt Insert X X Manage Cartridges X X Cartridges Cleaning Media and gt Cleaning Operations gt Cartridges Remove Cleaning Media Manage N A Manage Cartridges X X Cartridges in gt T O Station I O Station Manual Tools gt System X N A Cartridge Settings gt Manual Assignment Cartridge Assignment System Network Settings Network Setup gt Network X Manage Library gt X Configuration Mgmt gt Network Settings gt Network Configuration Save Restore N A Manage Library gt X Configuration Settings gt Save Restore Configuration Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 13 Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access continued Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access A U A S U Enable Tools gt System X Manage Library gt X Internet Settings gt Enable Settings gt Network Protocol ver 6 IPv6 OR Setup IPv6 Wizard first time only Date and Time Setup gt Date amp Time
455. mware upgrade cartridge used did not have valid firmware e The firmware image was successfully transferred to the drive but was corrupt or incomplete e Error in drive communication or other drive specific error Possible FRU Replacement Drive sled Resolution Perform DR069 Resolve Drive Firmware Update Failure on page 5 81 T110 Drive Firmware Mismatch Detected Description GUI Description A mismatch in tape drive firmware versions has been detected Explanation Each drive installed in the library is programmed with firmware from the drive manufacturer All drives in the library should have the same firmware version The library checks the library firmware version upon initialization and again when a new drive is inserted If the drive do not all have the same firmware a ticket will be generated Rather than trying to list all the differences the ticket will simply instruct the user to look at the System Information screen to identify which drives need to be updated Detection Scenario On initialization the library detects that not all drives have the same firmware version Root Causes A drive was installed that had a different firmware version than other drives in the library Possible FRU Replacement Drive sled Resolution Perform DR070 Resolve Tape Drive Firmware Mismatch on page 5 81 T112 Invalid Tape Drive Firmware Image Description GUI Descri
456. n a Locate the release level on the underside of the Picker Assembly While holding the release lever in the forward position lower the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly See Figure 7 121 a66mi142 Figure 7 121 Lower the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly b Two rollers on the Picker Assembly align with two slots in the M2 Robot Assembly See Figure 7 122 on page 7 106 Once the rollers are resting on the M2 Robot Assembly release the lever Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 105 NW N ve i ssl AN NN peed 2 a66mi162 Figure 7 122 Align rollers on the Picker Assembly with slots on the M2 Robot Assembly c Verify that the Picker Assembly is fully resting on the M2 Robot Assembly by slowly moving the Picker Assembly toward the rear If it moves smoothly installation is complete 5 If necessary install the I O Station s into the library 6 Close the Access door then the I O Station door 7 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Removing Replacing a Storage Column Storage columns like the cartridge magazine s in the I O Station store tape cartridges that are placed within the library Removing a Storage Column 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on 2 Perform one of the following e For a 5U library perform Removing the M2 Robot Assembly from the Library o
457. n Picker Description GUI Description An X Z or Theta axis motion error occurred while the robot was moving a tape cartridge Explanation An x z or theta axis motion error that cannot be considered a complete obstruction has been reported by robotics Because a tape is in the picker tape recovery must be a part of the resolution strategy This ticket may occur during a robotics move or during a robotics get or put Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 49 Detection Scenario 1 A specified move in the x z or theta axis cannot complete 2 Robotics firmware reports an x z or theta axis error condition Root Causes 1 A physical obstruction in the path of the robot s motion Examples include tape cartridges that are extending from the picker assembly or from a storage location as well as tape cartridges or debris that may have collected on the floor of the library 2 A large number of electrical hardware failures Firmware or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuits motor winding issues etc 3 A relatively small number of mechanical hardware failures that do not result in the detection of a complete obstruction but where motion control generates robotics firmware error codes contamination or damage to encoder wheel high friction etc Possible FRUs Robot Assembly Resolu
458. n Safety Flap Power Switch LED board The front bezels are the design panels on the front of both the control module and the expansion module These instructions explain how to replace the front bezels of your library Bezels can be replaced on both the I O Station door and the Access Door Required Tool T10 TORX screwdriver Removing the I O Station Bezel 1 Perform Preparing 2 Open the I O Station door Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 25 3 Remove the cartridges from the I O Station to access the screw located on the backside of the I O Station door 4 Remove the screw located on the backside of the I O Station door 5 Hold the I O Station slide assembly in place with one hand and using your other hand pull the I O Station door directly up to disengage the bolts and then pull the door toward you 6 Set aside the old front bezel Replacing the I O Station Bezel To replace the I O Station bezel perform the remove procedures in reverse order For the last step perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 Removing the Access Door Bezel 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 2 Open the module s I O Station and Access Doors Note When you open the Access Door the library becomes disabled the Picker assembly does not function When you later close the Access Door the libr
459. n be designated as storage slots When one of these doors is open the system should not become operational because these storage slots would not be available to the robot The ticket is posted as a means of informing the user that the library cannot become operational and that they should close the door so the system can lock it and start using it Detection Scenario 1 When the main doors are closed and the robot attempts to initialize the state of I O Storage Doors will be checked 2 When the library powers up and the robot attempts to initialize the state of the I O Storage Doors will be checked Root Causes Possible FRU Replacements 1 I O Storage door is left open by user 2 Hardware failure in the I O door open closed sensing 3 Stuck lock assembly sensor switches e I O Lock Assembly e I O Magazine Slide Assembly Resolution Perform DR034 Resolve Open Storage I O Door on page 5 73 T074 Drive Sled Auto Leveling Failure Description GUI Description The drive sled assembly failed to automatically update its firmware to the correct version Explanation The normal auto level process for a sled did not work When a drive sled is inserted into a powered ON library or when a library powers ON the firmware level of the drive sled is checked to be consistent with the level required by the main library firmware If the level is not correct the sled will be up leveled or down levele
460. n closed with a cartridge magazine missing The library can still perform most operations however any attempt to export a cartridge to this I O Station location will fail Troubleshooting Step 1 If the magazine was intentionally removed the only action required is to close this operator intervention 2 If the magazine was removed by mistake open the I O Station and reinstall the magazine Close the operator intervention 3 If the magazine was installed when this problem was detected refer to DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 DR024 Close I O Door Problem An I O Station door is open but the library requires it to be closed to continue operation Troubleshooting Step Close the I O Station door and close the Operator Intervention DR025 Resolve Stuck I O Station Sensor Problem The library control firmware detected an invalid I O station door sensor state Actual I O station door closure events may be detected prematurely resulting in premature I O station calibration attempts and calibration failures or may not be detected at all skipping any calibration and inventory operations Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 69 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Identify the library module listed in the RAS ticket and open its I O station door 2 Close the RAS ticket 3 Open the main access door to view the I O Station Lock Assembly of t
461. n contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both e AIX e Enterprise Storage Server e ESCON e FICON e i5 OS e iSeries e IBM e pSeries e 5 390 e System Storage e TotalStorage z OS e zSeries IBM the IBM logo and ibm com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol R or TM these symbols indicate U S registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at Copyright and trademark information at http www ibm com legal copytrade shtml Adobe the Adobe logo PostScript and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
462. n earlier than 410G contact IBM Technical Support iv TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Summary of Changes for GA32 0478 09 Revision bars appear next to all of the information that has been added or l changed since the previous edition GA32 0478 08 New Information The following topics are new to this edition e Registering for My Notification e Contacting IBM Technical Support e Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features e Limits on Downgrading Library Firmware e Limits on Restoring a Saved Configuration e CAN Bus Tool Kit e These new topics have been added to the Internal Components section FRU Replacement Strategy for Model 1 and Model 2 Robots l Removing the Model 1 Robot Assembly from the Library l Installing the Model 1 Robot Assembly in the Library l Removing and Replacing the Model 1 Picker Assembly from the Y Carriage l Assembly Inside the Library l Removing and Replacing the Model 1 Y Carriage Assembly l Changed Information The following topics have been updated e Read This First e Saving Restoring System Configuration e DR006 Resolve Unload Timeout e CRUs and FRUs e Appendix A TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 v Vi 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Safety and Environmental Notices This section contains information about safety notices that are used in this guide and environmental notices for this product
463. n once per second until J appears in the Single character Display SCD If you cycle past Unload Button until it displays again continue to press the 4 To select the function press and hold the Unload Button for three seconds After you select the function flashes and the drive automatically starts the test rm Ll e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code 8 Unmake FMR Tape Cl Function Code erases the field microcode replacement FMR data and rewrites the cartridge memory on the tape This converts the cartridge into a valid scratch blank data cartridge 1 Place the drive in maintenance mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the co
464. n page 7 77 e For a 14U library position the Y axis Picker Assembly into the control module if you are removing storage columns from the expansion module or position the Y axis Picker Assembly into the expansion module if you are removing storage columns from the control module 3 Firmly grasp the storage column Always begin by removing the front column first Then remove the remaining column s Important Remember the order in which the columns were removed Replace the columns in their original location 7 106 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 4 Pull the storage column toward the front of the library J in Figure 7 123 to disengage the locking tabs on the back of the column p a66mi020 Figure 7 123 Removing a storage column 5 Pull the column straight out of the side wall of thechassis 6 Repeat this procedure for each column Replacing a Storage Column eecoococooooocooop a66mi071 Figure 7 124 Correct fiducial placement eae m dule lett tront Expansion module left front column 2 re
465. n the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure 7 154 on page 7 140 Notice the a Loader mechanism gear J in Figure 7 155 nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism Position of the rotate stub in Figure 7 155 c Front loader motor worm gear H in Figure 7 155 Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear E in Figure 7 155 to turn Rotate the loader motor worm gear in Figure 7 155 to turn the threader mechanism gear J in Fig counterclockwise Continue turning until the rotator stub J in Figure 7 155 loses contact with the lever J in Figure 7 155 This releases the LBA leader pin a Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 141 counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is net the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive shown as iJ F a82ru010 Figure 7 156 Leader Block Assembly LBA 11 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 until the rotator stub E in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub J in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing A in Figure 7 155 on page 7 141 12 Remove the cartridge fr
466. n the key server 5 Run the Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics to assist in isolating the problem This diagnostic consists of four tests a Drive Test This is a drive communication test to ensure that the Library Drive Interface LDI is functioning properly b Ethernet Test This is a key server ping test of all IP addresses associated with LME configured drives c EKM Path Test This is a communication test used to establish a link to a key manager and ensure that the communication paths between each drive and the EKM have been correctly installed and set up d EKM Config Test This is a final test to establish a link to a key manager and request a default key This ensures that the drive has been correctly configured in the EKM to service key requests 6 If there is no problem with any of these items there is a configuration problem with your network Contact your network administrator for assistance with troubleshooting this issue Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 83 DR080 Resolve Unreadable Branding Problem The library cannot read the module branding identifier but has already validated that the bar code scanning system is working properly There are two likely scenarios 1 Line of sight from the scanner to the module branding label is blocked by foreign material such as a media bar code label 2 The module branding label is damaged and the bar co
467. n with the DIEB board po Root Cause Board level hardware failures Display not plugged in Cable failure or not plugged in LCB failure Rare power supply problem where too much voltage is transferred to the display aofFoON gt Possible CRUs e LCB e Display Door and I E PCB Possible FRU Replacement e Module EM or CM e Display Operator Panel Resolution Perform DR103 Resolve Display Assembly Communication Failure on T139 Robotics Communication Loss Description This ticket occurs with Model 1 robots only GUI Description The library controller firmware lost communication with the robotics subsystem Explanation The library has lost communication with the Model 1 robotics subsystem This ticket is generated if the library had previously established a communication link with the robotics subsystem but that link has now been lost and cannot be reestablished Detection Scenarios The library firmware did establish communication with the robotics subsystem but encountered a communication failure during operation and communication could not be reestablished Root Cause 1 An intermittent door open condition disconnecting power from the robot N Damaged module terminator or module to module cable with bent or broken pins A cable spool or connection problem A picker assembly hardware failure A Y carriage assembly connection problem oar w
468. ncludes the I O management unit and other components has changed This may indicate a change to good status so refer to the return value to determine what action you should take If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 110 Indicates that the status of the control subsystem which Control includes system firmware the operator panel and the Library Control Blade has changed If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 111 Indicates that the status of the cooling subsystem has changed Cooling If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 112 Indicates that the status of the drives and or media has Drives changed If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 113 Indicates that the status of the media has changed If the Media return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel or Web UI to determine how to resolve the issue RAS Status Change 114 Indicates that the status of the power subsystem has changed Power If the return value indicates that a problem exists use the Operator Panel
469. nd rewrite the cartridge memory on the tape This turns the cartridge into a valid customer supplied scratch data cartridge Oo Display Error Code Log Displays the last 10 error Function Code 9 Display Error Code a codes one at a time the codes are ordered the most Log on page D 35 recent is presented first and the oldest tenth is presented last A Clear Error Code Log Erases the contents of the error Function Code A Clear Error Code Log code log m Insert Cartridge into Tape Drive This function cannot Function Code C Insert Cartridge into L be selected by itself but is a part of other maintenance Tape Drive on page D 36 functions such as Run Tape Drive Diagnostics and Create FMR Tape that require a tape cartridge to be loaded Ta Test Cartridge amp Media Performs tests to ensure that a Function Code E Test Cartridge amp suspect cartridge and its magnetic tape are acceptable Media on page D 36 c Write Performance Test Performs tests to ensure that Function Code F Write Performance j the drive can read from and write to tape Test on page D 37 E Test Head Performs tests to ensure that the tape drive s Function Code H Test Head on page LI head and tape carriage mechanics are working correctly 7 Fast Read Write Test Performs tests to ensure that the Function Code J Fast Read Write Test drive can read from and write to tape 7 Load Unload Test Tests the drive s ability to load and
470. ne control path will cause the entire library to be unavailable Use of the control path failover feature further reduces that possibility TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Data Path Failover Data Path Failover is designed to provide a failover mechanism in the IBM device driver which enables you to configure multiple redundant paths in a SAN environment In the event of a path or component failure the failover mechanism is designed to automatically provide error recovery to retry the current operation using an alternate pre configured path without aborting the current job in progress This allows you flexibility in SAN configuration availability and management Encryption Feature Code 5900 The TS3310 library supports host encryption on LTO Ultrium 5 Fibre Channel drives when used with LTO Ultrium 4 or LTO Ultrium 5 data cartridges The TS3310 library supports host encryption on LTO Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel and SAS drives when used with LTO Ultrium 4 data cartridges The TS3310 library supports three configurations for establishing encryption policy and providing encryption keys to the drive e Application Managed Encryption AME Encryption policies and keys are established and provided by the host application This is a standard feature for all Ultrium 4 and Ultrium 5 drives in the TS3310 library Since the application manages the encryption keys volumes written and encrypted using the AME method can only be read by the s
471. ng EOD data set 14 10 Not Ready Auxiliary memory not accessible The drive is not able to become ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 1A 00 Parameter list length error The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect 20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code The Operation Code in the command was not a valid Operation Code 24 00 Invalid field in CDB An invalid field has been detected in a Command Descriptor Block 25 00 LUN not supported The command was addressed to a non existent logical unit number 26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List An invalid field has been detected in the data sent during the data phase 27 00 Write Protect A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which has been write protected 28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition A cartridge has been loaded successfully into the drive and is now ready to be accessed 29 00 Reset The drive has powered on received a reset signal or a bus device reset signal since the initiator last accessed it 2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed The Mode parameters for the drive have been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command Appendix B Sense Data B 7 Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC AS
472. ng cartridge and the coordinate where it used to be stored by selecting the Details button 2 A valid cleaning cartridge should be inserted into the library to allow cleaning operations to function properly 3 If inspection of the cartridge slot shows the cartridge to be present the bar code label is not being read reliably by the library Replace the bar code label or the cartridge 5 76 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR043 Resolve Invalid Cleaning Cartridge Problem While performing inventory the library determined that an invalid cartridge is occupying a cleaning slot In order for a cartridge to be a valid cleaning cartridge it must be imported as a cleaning cartridge via the library operator interface It is likely that this invalid cartridge was manually inserted while the library was powered OFF or when the main access door was opened Troubleshooting Steps 1 You can determine the bar code label of the invalid cleaning cartridge and the coordinate where it is located by selecting the Details button 2 Open the library main access door s and remove this cartridge 3 A valid cleaning cartridge should be imported into the library to allow cleaning operations to function properly DR044 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 4 Media Error Problem The tape cartridge is suspected due to failing tape operations Data may be at risk based on the condition of the tape This problem may be ca
473. ng the Rack Ears on page 7 20 2 Reinstall the following expansion module components a All drive sleds see Replacing a Drive Sled on page 7 43 b All power supplies see Reinstalling Replacing a Power Supply on page 53 3 Perform Replacing a Control Module in a Standalone or Rack mounted Library 14U or larger on page 7 11 Installing a Replacement Expansion Module Enclosure Important e Prior to removing and replacing an expansion module enclosure visually check and reseat if necessary all of the internal connectors e On the initial power ON you will get a T080 Service Action Ticket Perform the suggested resolution action described in T080 Module SN Change on page 5 36 Note 1 Complete the following procedures on the old expansion module e Removing an Expansion Module from a Library on page 7 18 Note Ensure that the drive sleds and power supplies are removed from the old expansion module They will be reinstalled into the new expansion module later in this procedure 2 Unpack the new expansion module enclosure and place it on the work surface near the old expansion module 3 i i Module on page 6 44 4 Transfer the following FRUs CRUs from the old expansion module to the new expansion module a Module communication terminator F in Figure 7 49 on page 7 46 b Module to module communication cable 4 irFigure 7 49 on page 7 46 Note Ensure drive
474. nology is implemented in two formats the Accelis format focuses on fast access the Ultrium format focuses on high capacity The Ultrium format is the preferred format when capacity rather than fast access is the key storage consideration An Ultrium cartridge has a compressed data capacity of up to 800 GB 2 1 compression and a native data capacity of up to 400 GB liquid crystal display LCD A low power display technology used in computers and other I O devices loadable Having the ability to be loaded LME Library Managed Encryption LTO cartridge memory LTO CM Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and retrieve a cartridge s historical usage and other information LUN Logical Unit Number LVD SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential magnetic tape A tape with a magnetical surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording MAP Maintenance analysis procedure mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters master file A file used as an authority in a given job and that is relatively permanent even though its contents may change Synonymous with main file MB Mega Byte usually expressed as data rate in MB s or MB second media capacity The amount of data that can be
475. not be performed because necessary files are missing or corrupted Explanation The library is unable to attempt the Robotics Firmware auto level process In this case the Robotics Firmware auto level is not attempted and the Robotics subsystem is left in the not ready state 1 A necessary auto level file is missing in the library firmware 2 A necessary auto level file failed validation Root Causes Firmware corruption Possible FRUs Library firmware Resolution Perform DR084 Resolve Robotics Firmware Image Error on page 5 87 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 47 T117 Robotics Auto Level Failure Description This ticket occurs with Model 2 robots only GUI Description The robotics firmware auto level process failed to update either the robot flash image or the scanner flash image Explanation The normal firmware auto level process for robotics was not successful Each time the robot is initialized the firmware level of the robot is checked to be consistent with the level required by the main library firmware If the level is not correct the robotics firmware will be up leveled or down leveled accordingly Failure in this process to update to the correct robotics firmware level results in the generation of this ticket Detection Scenario The Robot Controller Board could not perform one of the following operations 1 Validate
476. nplugged You can always view closed tickets on the Web client by selecting Service Library gt Operator Interventions and clicking on Closed State Tickets that were auto closed are designated as Canceled Automatic ticket closure is enabled by default You can enable or disable this feature from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings and then select or clear the Auto Ticket Closure check box Closing All Operator Intervention Messages You can close all operator intervention messages without resolving them by clicking the Close All Tickets button Be extremely careful when doing this It is recommended that each operator intervention be viewed analyzed and closed individually General Service Guidelines Servicing a library typically includes the following steps 1 Connect your laptop to the service port located on the back of the Librar Control Blade in order to use the Web User Interface UI see Service Port on page 6 9 Generate a log of the current status of the library see Methods of Capturing ogs on page 6 11 es on page 6 11 Assess the status of the library using the following tools Thoroughly examine all available reports and indicators e Operator Interventions e LEDs e System diagnostics which are available via the Service menu see Service Menus on page 6 5 on the library s Operator Panel Create a
477. ntenance Mode on page D 28 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears 1 A Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 35 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to a m select the function H flashes in the SCD followed by The tape drive erases all errors from the error code log and exits Maintenance Mode Function Code C Insert Cartridge into Tape Drive This function cannot be selected by itself but is part of other maintenance functions such as Run Tape Drive Diagnostics and Create FMR Tape that require a tape cartridge to be inserted Function Code E Test Cartridge amp Media Approximate Run Time 15 minutes per loop Total Number of Loops 10 C Function Code performs tests that determine whether a suspect cartridge and its magnetic tape are acceptable Press the Unload Button to stop the diagnostic and exit maintenance mode Pressing the Unload Button once will abort the test at the end of the current test loop Pressing the Unload Button twice will abort the test immediately Wait for the drive to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge Attention When you perform this test data on the suspect tape will be overwritten Note If you inserted an invalid tape cartridge e g Gen 1 WORM media or
478. ntroller Board 2 A flash programming error occurred on the Y Axis Picker Assembly Controller Board 3 An error occurred when updating the picker Imager flash Troubleshooting Steps 1 View the ticket details and note which firmware image failed Close this ticket Retry the auto level process by re initializing the robot i e open and close the main access door If this ticket reoccurs during the retry continue to Step 5 Otherwise no further action is required afkon If Robot firmware is identified in Step 1 replaceY Axis Picker Assembly Controller Board If Imager firmware is identified in Step 1 replace the Picker assembly D Close this ticket then perform a library firmware upgrade to the current firmware revision DR086 Resolve Robotics Degraded Flash Warning Problem One of the Y Axis Picker Assembly s flash partitions could not be updated Because one of the two flash partitions is properly functioning auto level can still occur and the robotics subsystem can go ready This is a Warning ticket Flash is in a degraded mode and the backup image is unavailable Troubleshooting Steps 1 Replace the Y Axis Picker Assembly Controller Board 2 Close this ticket and monitor for recurrence Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 87 DRO88 Resolve Robotics Y Axis Motion Failure Problem The library robot has failed to perform a motion in
479. o Brazzaville Curacao Czech Republic Democractic Republic of Congo Denmark Egypt Finland France French Guiana Germany Greece Guinea Hungary Iceland Indonesia Iran Ivory Coast Jordan Kenya Korea Lebanon Luxembourg Macau Malagasy Mali Martinique Mauritania Mauritius Monaco Morocco Mozambique Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia Niger Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russia Saudi Arabia Senegal Spain Sweden Sudan Syria Togo Tunisia Turkey Yugoslavia Zaire Zimbabwe Vietnam Chapter 9 Parts List 9 5 Table 9 1 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in on page 9 4 FC and Part Number Reference PN Denmark DK2 5A Denmark 5 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9821 e PN 39M5130 South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh Burma Pakistan 6 e 2 8 m 250V South Africa Sri Lanka e FC 9829 e PN 39M5144 United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua Bahrain Bermuda 7 2 8m 250V Brunei Channel Islands lt FC 9825 gt Hong Kong S A R yprus Fiji Ghana Guyana e PN 39M5151 India Iraq Ireland Jordan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia Malawi Malta Nepal Nigeria Oman Polynesia Qatar Sierra Leone Singapore Tanzania Uganda UK United Arab Emirate Dubai Yemen Zambia Switzerland SEV SN 416534 Liechtenstein Switzerland 8 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9828 e PN 39M5158 Italy CEI 23 16 Chile Ethiopia
480. o REER Ee TREAN TF OVERSSILE ASA wWIichie OW ICH SH TWEE In accordance with the European WEEE Directive electrical and electronic equipment EEE is to be collected separately and to be reused recycled or recovered at end of life Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive as shown above must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste but use the collection framework available to customers for the return recycling and recovery of WEEE Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE For proper collection and treatment contact your local IBM representative Battery return program This product may contain sealed lead acid nickel cadmium nickel metal hydride lithium or lithium ion battery Consult your user manual or service manual for specific battery information The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling facilities may not be available in your area For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States go shits a bea environment products index shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility In the United States IBM has established a return process for reuse recycling or proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid nickel cadmium nickel metal hydride and other battery packs from IBM Equipment For information on prope
481. o rewind tape into cartridge 7 Turn the supply reel clockwise carefully guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel located inside the cartridge Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 8 Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 5 in Procedure on page 7 133 9 Allow the drive to perform mid tape recovery This takes several minutes When this activity completes the cartridge ejects automatically 10 Test the drive to determine if it should be replaced Tape Tangled along Tape Path 1 Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle Note If you find the tape to be broken go to one of the following appropriate procedures e Tape Spooled off Supply Reel on page 7 135 Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin on page 7 136 OR Tape Broken in Mid tape on page 7 138 2 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 139 a82ru008 Figure 7 154 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 3 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole in Figure 7 154 4 Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover ac
482. oblem Details identify the drive sled Possible Causes 1 The I O Station safety door may be broken 2 The I O Station door may be partially open If so please close it 3 The control cable to the I O Station is unplugged 4 There is a hardware failure that makes it appear that an I O Station door is partially open Troubleshooting Steps 1 Eject the tape from the drive and remove it out of the library 2 Inspect the tape and retire the tape if problems are found 3 e damaged cartridge shell e misplaced barcode labels or foreign material e snapped tape disconnected leader 4 If the tape appears good retry operations with the tape DR039 Resolve Logical Library Deletion Problem The system has detected a change in module configuration such as a new control module serial number or a removed expansion module that will invalidate any existing logical library s Although a logical library may be visible on the user interface the assignment of storage slots and drives is broken due to the new module configuration Troubleshooting Steps 1 Using the Operator Panel navigate to Setup gt Logical Library and delete any existing logical libraries 2 Consult the Setup and Operator Guide for information on how to create new logical libraries DR040 Resolve Incompatible Module Branding Problem The library has detected a branding mismatch This is most likely caused by a manufacturing labeling e
483. ode Li The drive must be in Function Code in order to exit Maintenance Mode To exit Maintenance Mode ry Ll 1 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second util the code appears 2 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it To exit Maintenance Mode when an error is displayed 1 Press the Unload Button three times within two seconds to clear the error code m and return to Function Code 2 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it Note The drive will exit Maintenance Mode automatically when e it completes a maintenance function e if there is an error code for anything other than a hardware problem e if no action has occurred for 10 minutes The drive will not exit Maintenance Mode automatically if there is an error code displayed that indicates there is a hardware problem D 28 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Function Code 0 Maintenance Mode my ui Function Code makes the drive available for running drive diagnostics or maintenance functions or exiting from Maintenance Mode 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions seq Entering Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 To exit Maintenance Mode see Exiting Maintenance Mode on page D 28 The drive exits Maint
484. ode reader is not scanning the labels correctly Possible CRU Replacements Firmware Possible FRU Replacements Resolution Note Read and perform all resolution steps before dispatching any parts Dispatch the first part listed below for replacement If this does not solve the problem dispatch the second part and so on in order Dispatch only one part or set of parts at a time e Picker Assembly e Module EM or CM only dispatch this FRU if the label is missing or damaged Perform DR026 Resolve Unsupported Module Configuration on page 5 70 T076 Robot Initialization Failure Description GUI Description The robot did not initialize properly Explanation This ticket is designed to notify the user if the robot cannot initialize at all The problem most likely lies with the cable spool so it should be replaced first unless examination of the module terminator and module to module cables reveal a defect The robot assembly should be replaced second as that has the next greatest probability of resolving the problem Unless per the resolution strategy the customer has found another damaged part no other parts should be dispatched until after these two have been replaced Detection Scenario 1 Any time the main door s closes and the robot goes through an initialization sequence 2 At power up of the library if the main door s is closed Root Causes 1 Complete lo
485. of the Y carriage assembly visible from outside the library e Physical appearance The Model 2 robot has a large PCB called the robot controller board on the Y carriage assembly It also looks different For pictures see M2 Robot Assembly on page 2 12 Software Indicators e Operator panel Tools gt About Library screen Libraries containing a Model 2 robot have a line item called Robot FW Libraries containing Model 1 robots do not have this line item e Web client Service Library gt View Update Library Firmware Level screen Libraries containing a Model 2 robot show a listing for Robot Firmware Version in the Physical Library section of the page Libraries containing Model 1 robots do not have this listing e Snapshot log files The Robot Firmware entry noted above is contained in snapshots logs etc for libraries containing Model 2 robots Libraries with Model 1 robots do not have the robot firmware entry TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information piziwgge Figure 2 5 Model 1 Robot Assembly with Original Cable Spool 3 Y carriage assembly 1 Picker 2 Cable Spool 2 11 Chapter 2 Product Description Robot controller board Y carriage assembly Picker Assembly M2 label a66mi215 Figure 2 6 Model 2 Robot Assembly Picker Assembly and Y carriage Assembly The Robot Assembly has two designs referred to as Robot Assembly and M2 Robot Assembly The differences a
486. olerance is from 48 2 to 53 0 volts The power supply has an over voltage shut down set at 59 volts providing a 1 volt margin below the maximum allowable UL low voltage limit of 60 volts Library power is controlled in two places A switch on the rear of each power supply shuts down power at the input of the individual power supplies A front panel power enable switch controls the power supply output for all CM and EM power supplies A library connected to AC line voltage will be in standby mode with power supply ON but outputs turned OFF when the front panel power enable switch is turned OFF When the power enable switch is turned ON the power supply output and the library electronics power are ON The Library Control Blade LCB may turn the power system OFF using the PC interface Power Requirements The tables below summarizes the library power requirements Each library modules uses a 350 watt power supply Two 350 watt supplies are used when redundant power is selected Table C 1 Control module CM power requirements Item Volts Amps DC Watts AC Watts Servo PCB 9 41 11 07 Accessor Motors 48 4 0 75 144 169 41 Door Display 11 76 13 84 Drive Sleds 100 117 65 2x50 Drive Sled 1x1 20 23 5 10w LCB 47 06 55 36 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 C 1 Table C 1 Control module CM power requirements continued Item Volts Amps DC Watts AC Watts Total 332 23 390 83 Power Supply 3
487. olid yellow SCSI log sense data such as See TapeAlert flags or request sense data at the host console Drive Sense Data on page B 6 Using Host Sense Data Drive sense data sent to a library if Se the tape drive is enclosed in a library Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 e Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host on page E 1 e Drive Sense Data on page B 6 Then see Drive Error Codes on page D 42 The tape drive s error log Se e Drive Error Codes on page D 42 Viewing the Drive Error Log Using Host Sense Data The table below lists the hosts to which the Ultrium Tape Drive attaches It gives the operating system for each host and describes how the host records errors from the drive To determine the meaning of host sense data see ft the Host on page E lJand Data on page B L Also refer to the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide or visit the web at http www ibm com storage Ito Table D 14 Host Method of Recording Tape Drive Errors Host Operating System Method of Recording Tape Drive Errors IBM AS 400 or iSeries OS 400 Records tape drive errors and associated sense data in the AS 400 problem and error logs View the logs by using the System Service Tools application and the userid QSRV IBM RS 6000 RS 6000 SP AIX Uses the IBM Atape device driver provided with the or pSeries
488. olve Library Inventory Mismatch on page 5 68 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 31 T070 Library Control Path Failure Description GUI Description The library control command path through a tape drive has failed Explanation The library media changer control path through a drive has failed The host that owns and runs the logical library can no longer be expected to be able to control the library The control path must be fixed or a user could choose to switch the control path to a different drive within the same logical library Detection Scenarios 1 The loss of communications between the library and the drive sled 2 The loss of communications between the drive sled controller board and the drive brick Root Causes Various hardware problems inside the drive sled Tape Drive brick firmware problem Drive sled firmware problem Library communication firmware problem Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB hardware problem Loss of power to sled DSIB 48 V fuse D Ol Pp 0O NS Possible CRU Replacement Drive Sled Resolution e Update drive firmware see Updating Drive Firmware on page 6 27 e Update library firmware see Updating Library Firmware on page 6 26 e If the problem still exists replace the drive sled see Drive Sled on page T071 Missing Power Supply Description GUI Description A previously installed
489. om the cartridge loader tray 13 Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 5 in Procedure on page 7 133 14 Refer to the appropriate procedure to install the new drive and return the failed drive No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape 1 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 7 142 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a82ru008 Figure 7 157 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 2 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole J in Figure 7 157 3 Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise 4 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 5 Locate the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 on the rear of the drive You can either a Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear in Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 clockwise OR Use a 1 flathead screwdriver to turn the threader worm gear E in b Figure 7 158 on page 7 144 clockwise This rotates the threader motor worm gear JJ in Figure 7 158 on page 7 1
490. ommended Actions PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES CHECK CABLE AND ITS CONNECTIONS Detail Data SENSE DATA 0001 0017 0000 0000 0000 0091 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4304 0000 0000 0000 0000 2000 0003 0203 6760 9808 0000 F7FB E1B8 0000 0015 000B 0210 0678 C800 0000 8200 8277 1B20 00A2 EDQO 0000 0002 FFFF FFFF eae 0000 111F F000 F3DF F110 Figure E 3 Example of Error Suggesting SCSI Bus Problem Which Takes Down Entire Bus E 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information SCSI Bus Error Example 2 LABEL TAPE_ERR4 IDENTIFIER 5537AC5F Date Time Wed Oct 17 09 00 41 Sequence Number 16101 Machine Id 00003ABF4C00 Node Id ofgtsm Class H Type PERM Resource Name smc Resource Class tape Resource Type 3576 Location 40 58 00 0 1 VPD Manuf aICtUrEN a ire reon EES IBM Machine Type and Model ULT3576 TL Serial GNUMB Oye seo ee eea IBM7810698 Device Specific FW X XX Description TAPE DRIVE FAILURE Probable Causes ADAPTER TAPE DRIVE Failure Causes ADAPTER TAPE DRIVE Recommended Actions PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES Detail Data SENSE DATA 0600 0000 1200 0000 FFOO 0000 0000 0000 0200 0800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
491. omments Your feedback is important in helping IBM provide accurate and useful information If you have comments or suggestions for improving this publication send your comments by e E mailing IBM Internet or IBMLink from US starpubs us ibm com IBMLink from Canada STARPUBS at TORIBM Include the following information in your e mail Exact publication title Form number for example GA32 1234 02 or part number located on the back cover of the publication Page number to which you are referring e Using the Readers Comments form at the back of this publication e Mailing your comments to International Business Machines Corporation Information Development Department GZW 9000 South Rita Road Tucson AZ 85744 0001 USA Registering for My Notification l My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels have l been updated and are available for download and installation To register for My l Notification 1 Visit the web at http www 01 ibm com software support einfo html 2 Click My Notifications l Note Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together l When updating verify that all installed components such as tape drive and library firmware are at the latest levels noted on the Support website Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 iii l Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware is not supported l and might ca
492. ommon Header Elements All Operator Panel screens except for the Login screen contain the following common elements in the header e Help context sensitive help for the associated page e Logout ability to log out Menus Available from the Web User Interface The following table lists those menus that are available from the Web UI Table 4 2 Menus available from the Web User Interface Welcome Page B Monitor System System Summary Library Map Logged in Users Network Settings Key Path Diagnostic Status H Advanced Reporting Drive Utilization Media Integrity Media Security H Manage Cartridges Data Cartridges Cleaning Cartridges I O Station Lock Unlock I O Station Doors H Manage Drives Drive Summary TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 4 2 Menus available from the Web User Interface continued Control Paths Drive IDs Fibre Channel Ports Modify Port Properties H Manage Library Perform Inventory Setup Wizard Logical Libraries Cleaning Slots I O Station Slots H Settings Feature Licenses Date amp Time Email Notifications SMTP Mail Configuration Contact Information Network SNMP Configuration SNMP Destinations Add Remove Ethernet Speed Duplex Media Detection Save Restore Configuration H Manage Access Users Authentication Settings Set Session Timeout H Service Library Operator Interventions Capture Library Log Capture Drive Log Media Security Log Media Usage Log
493. on IBM tape device driver such as a driver from Sun Hewlett Packard or Microsoft For instructions about updating firmware from a server that uses an IBM tape device driver refer to the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide To update firmware from a server that uses a non IBM tape device driver refer to the documentation for that device Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 29 Checking Reseating Cables External Cables To check or reseat external library cables and terminators perform the following steps 1 Locate the cables and terminators by referring to the example figures below a66ug024 Figure 6 7 Cabling of a 5U Library with SCSI Drives Module Module communication BH Power cord communication terminator terminator 2 Ethernet cable 4 SCSI terminator 6 SCSI drive cable customer supplied 6 30 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Frc 80 om MEEA Q a A 5 6 Figure 6 8 Cabling of a 14U Library with Fibre Drives Module B Module communication Fibre
494. on the left WORM Cartridge on the right Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge Checking for gaps in the seams 3 of a cartridge Tape cartridges in a 3 Turtlecase Double boxing tape cartridges for shipping g Leader pin in the incorrect ahd coment positions Placing the dislodged Jead t pin into the correct position Rewinding the tape into the cartridge Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge Winding the tape d t of the cartridge Removing the C clip from the leader pin Attaching the leader pin to the tape AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example AIX ERRPT Drive Error Log Example Example of Error Suggesting SCSI Bus Problem Which Takes Down Entire Bus SCSI Problem Points to Library Control Path as Possible Cause 7 140 7 141 7 142 7 143 7 144 7 145 9 4 D 1 D 5 D 8 D 11 D 15 D 16 D 17 D 21 D 21 D 22 D 22 D 23 D 24 D 24 D 26 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 AIX ERRPT Commands Error Log Example E 6 Figures XXV XXVi TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Tables 2 1 2 2 273 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 4 2 6 2 7 2 A 1 Library I O Station configurations 2 3 Optional features 2 14 LTO 5 Tape Drive Ports 2 15 Licensable cartridge slots storage and I O per model 2 24 Environmen
495. ons It communicates with the host server s backup application and issues commands in communicating with various library components e Issues motion commands for the servo and motor driver board to execute over the LCB1 to SMD1 SMD2 communication interface e Library CAN network connects the LCB1 to the motion processor on SMD1 C 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e Receives power and monitors the power supply status using the C inter integrated interface to report any error conditions e Controls the user interface LCD display and touch screen and input output I O station via the DIEB e Controls media movement and monitors tape drive status Backplane Connect Boards BCBs The Backplane Connect Board BCB is an interconnect device for various library components BCBs are found in both the control module and any expansion module There are two versions of BCB e BCB1 control module e BCB3 9U expansion module The Control Module and Expansion Module Electrical System on page C 7 illustrates the key communication and power paths between BCB boards and other library components e LCB1 attaches to the BCB1 board e BCB1 carries signals from the LCB1 to the servo control and motor driver board SMD1 e The door and display board DIEB signals from the I O Station pass through the BCB1 to the LCB1 BCB2 and BCB3 function similarly in supporting the expansion module s I O Station Power Supplies The
496. ons simplifying user account management tasks Administrative users can configure and enable LDAP Once LDAP is enabled users can access the library with either LDAP or local authentication To use LDAP authentication a user must enter a directory service user name and password and specify an LDAP domain To use local authentication a user must enter only a local user name and password Administrative users can add delete and modify only local user account information The library web client and operator panel do not allow you to create modify or delete user account information about an LDAP server This procedure must be done by the directory service provider Refer to your server documentation for more information regarding LDAP user accounts LDAP server guidelines The library supports user account information in the schema defined by RFC 2307 For LDAP users with user privileges access to library logical libraries is determined by group assignment on the LDAP server Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that correspond to the library logical library names Users with user privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP server to have access to the corresponding logical libraries on the library LDAP users with administrative privileges have access to all logical libraries and administrative functions and do not need to be assigned to logical library related groups on the LDAP server The following groups must be
497. operly 2 Secondary Key Server is not configured properly 3 Library Ethernet settings are not configured properly Resolution 1 Perform DR079 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue on page 2 Perform EKM Path Diagnostics Tools gt Diagnostics gt EKM gt EKM Path Diagnosticsin the Web User Interface T029 Key Server Communication Warning Description The library is unable to successfully monitor the communication path and operation status of the configured key server The key management feature of the library allows the user to connect two key servers for redundancy If communication fails during background key server path testing this operator intervention will be generated A separate operator intervention will be created for each key server that fails Detection Scenarios Library detects that communication with a key server is not successful Root Causes 1 Primary secondary key server is not connected properly 2 Primary secondary key server is not configured properly 3 Library Ethernet settings are not configured properly Resolution 1 Perform DR079 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue on page 2 Perform Key Path Diagnostics Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics in the Web User Interface T030 Excessive I O Station Events Description GUI Description An I O station is reporting continuous door open or closure events although no close or open door state change is detected
498. or more tape drives COD Capacity On Demand CP Circuit protector CPF Control Path Failover Glossary H 3 CRU Customer Replaceable Unit CSA Canadian Standards Association ctrl Control CU Control unit D danger notice A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people Contrast with attention and caution data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned data buffer The storage buffer in the control unit This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between the control unit and the channel data cartridge A tape cartridge dedicated to storing data Contrast with cleaning cartridge data check A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data dc Direct current degauss To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by means of electrical coils carrying currents that neutralize the magnetism of the tape degausser A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic degradation A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate degraded Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error rate deserialize To change from serial by bit to parallel by byte detented A part being held in position with a catch or lever device Any hardware component or peripheral such as a tape drive or tape library that can receive and send data
499. or units intended to be operated at 230 volts outside the U S Use a cord set with a grounding type attachment plug The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that country or region Product recycling and disposal xii This unit contains recyclable materials This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations IBM encourages owners of information technology IT equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed IBM offers a variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products Information on IBM product recycling offerings can be found on IBM s Internet sites at ibm rect cle us index shtml and http www ibm com ibm environment products index shtml Note This paragraph is also translated into Spanish as follows Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la normativa nacional o local aplicable IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos de tecnologia de la informaci n TI que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos cuando stos ya no les sean utiles IBM dispone de una serie de programas y servicios de devoluci n de productos en varios paises a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de equipos a
500. ory in cassette MIC has failed This will reduce performance The cartridge memory may be repairable Troubleshooting Steps 1 Attempt to repair the cartridge memory by using host backup application utilities to read the entire tape When th tape is unloaded the cartridge may be able to repair the tape memory 2 To verify that the cartridge memory is repaired attempt to use the cartridge again for normal read write operations If this cartridge fails again retire the cartridge DR048 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 16 Forced Eject Problem A cartridge was manually ejected from a drive while it was actively reading or writing This typically occurs when a user is servicing the drive and has not stopped all host operations to the drive Troubleshooting Steps 1 Reload the tape cartridge back into the drive 2 Restart the failed host application 5 78 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR049 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 30 31 Drive Hardware Error Problem The tape drive has detected an internal hardware error that requires a power cycle of the drive to recover Troubleshooting Steps 1 Stop all additional host operations to this drive 2 Ifa cartridge is still mounted in the drive unload it using the host application or library operator interface 3 Using the local library operator interface take the drive offline with the Operations gt Change Drive Mode command on the web client the
501. ose the RAS ticket and power off the library 2 Inspect the top and bottom library module terminators for bent or shorted connector pins Re attach if no problem is found 3 If the library consists of multiple modules inspect all module to module cables for bent or shorted connector pins Re attach if no problem is found 4 If a defective connector is found call Service for part replacement 5 If no issue is found power on the library and wait for the library to initialize Open and close each I O station door If the RAS ticket is displayed again contact Service DROO9 Resolve AC Failure Problem The facility AC power appears to be failed on a power supply This can be the result of the facility power actually being OFF the power switch on the power supply being turned OFF or an actual failure in the power supply Troubleshooting Steps 1 Check the facility AC power and make sure the power supply is properly seated and the power switch is on 2 Inspect all module terminators for any broken or bent pins 3 If the library consists of multiple modules inspect all module to module cables for any broken or bent pins 4 If the facility AC power and the power supply power switch are OK see Power Supply Primary and Redundant on page 7 51 Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 63 DR010 Termination and Connectivity Diagnostic Problem The library
502. ot configured properly 3 Library Ethernet settings are not configured properly Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 15 Resolution 1 Perform DRO079 Resolve Key Server Communication Issue on page 5 83 2 Perform EKM Path Diagnostics Tools gt Diagnostics gt EKM gt EKM Path Diagnostics in the Web User Interface 3 If the Ping test is unsuccessful look for physical connection problems and down server s 4 If Ping is successful then do the following a Verify that EKM is running b Verify that the media is not from a different EKM environment c Verify that the key server is present T027 Key Server Communication Failure Description GUI Description The library is unable to communicate with the configured key server s Explanation The key management feature of the library allows the user to connect to two key servers for redundancy If communication to one of these servers fails and a communication failover is not possible or not successful then this ticket will be generated A separate ticket will be created for each key server that fails Detection Scenarios Library detects that communication with a key server is not successful Root Causes Primary Secondary Key Server is not connected properly Primary Secondary Key Server is not configured properly on Library Ethernet settings are not configured properly
503. ot of required data grade Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 8 indicating that the tape cartridge in the drive is not a data grade tape Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 8 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR046 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 8 Suspect Data Grade Tape on T038 Drive TapeAlert Flag 9 Write Protected Description GUI Description The drive was requested to write to a write protected tape Explanation System determines that a write was attempted on a write protected tape Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 9 Root Causes Write protect feature on tape is protecting the tape but the user is trying to write to it Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DRO014 Resolve Write Protected Tape Cartridge on 5 20 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T039 Drive TapeAlert 12 Unsupported Format Description GUI Description The tape cartridge format is incompatible with the drive Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 12 indicating that the media loaded is an unsupported format In the case of the IBM LTO family of drives full ba
504. ot successful at the destination element Recovery logic has allowed the cartridge to be returned to the initial source location If the operation was initiated by a host MOVE MEDIA the MOVE MEDIA command has failed with a Sense Key ASC ASCQ of 4h 15h 01h Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 3 Root Causes 1 Magazine is damaged wrong type cell is blocked by foreign material or not clipped in and seated correctly Calibration problem Picker offset problem Destination cell full with labeled cartridge invalid inventory aprons Destination cell is full with cartridge that has damaged label or is unlabeled or has an intermittently readable label 6 A variety of Picker problems such as slipping gears encoder issues Y axis assembly not level etc Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge e Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Picker Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool Internal Cables and Boards Kit Resolution Perform DR004 Resolve Full Destination Element on page 5 61 T005 X Y Theta Motion Profile Failure Tape in Picker Motion NOT OK Description GUI Description The robot failed to move a tape cartridge due to an axis motion problem Explanation Any X Y Theta 8 motion failure occurred that cannot be considered a complete obstruction This problem only occurs during a move and NOT a get or put Because th
505. otion velocity and acceleration and calculates the trajectory for moving media e e A barcode scanner connected to SMD1 via the SMD2 interconnect card allows reading cartridge barcodes and specifies the EM type barcode 5U or 9U The SMD1 controls the barcode scanner and receives barcode label data e It triggers the Y motor to move the robot in order to locate a desired barcode on a cartridge The robot will move to the bottom of a column and cartridges will be scanned as the Y axis motor moves the robot up the column e It finds a home signal input for each motor registering a motor s home location in the library During teach operations the teach sensor on the robot is used for position detection The LCB1 will monitor the teach sensor state using CAN to read the detected position The SMD2 board interconnects with the SMD1 board and the robotics assembly in selecting and moving media The SMD2 performs these functions e e Interfaces between the picker and the barcode scanner carrying transmit and receive signals e e Provides connectivity for Teach Reach Home and Cartridge Present signals from sensors e e Distributes power from the SMD1 board to the picker s sensors and the barcode scanner Door amp Import Export Board DIEB The Door amp Import Export Board DIEB is only found in the control module The DIEB performs these functions e e Controls the local operator panel interface e e Interfaces the LCB1 wit
506. ots Configure I O Slots I O Station Operations gt Lock X Manage Cartridges X X Lock Unlock T O Station gt gt Lock Unlock I O Lock Unlock Station Doors Update N A Service Library gt xX O Library View Update Firmware Library Firmware Level Display N A Monitor System gt xX X X Advanced Advanced Reporting Reporting Reports Shutdown Operations gt X Service Library gt xX X p Restart Library Shutdown Shutdown Restart Library Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 11 Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access continued Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access Superusers can access the Logical Libraries web page via the Manage Library menu but they can only execute the Bring Online and Bring Offline functions Users System Access Create New Setup gt User Mgmt gt X Manage Access gt Users Create User Users Modify Users Setup gt User Mgmt gt X Manage Access gt Modify User Users Enter License Setup gt Licenses X Manage Library gt Key Settings gt Feature Licenses Display N A Monitor System gt Logged in Logged in Users Users LDAP N A Manage Access gt Configuration Authentication Settings User Session Tools gt System X Manage Access gt Timeout Settings gt User Set Session Session Timeout Timeout Minutes Disable Tools gt System X N A Remote Settings gt
507. ou burn the cartridge and tape ensure that the incineration complies with all applicable regulations Ordering Media Supplies To find the closest IBM authorized distributor visit the web at http www ibm com storage medialor call 1 888 IBM MEDIA Table D 8 Media supplies Order by Machine Item T Description Quantit Type Model from IBM Sales Order by Part Number P N from an em ype a ie y Representative or authorized IBM Authorized Distributor IBM Business Partner Data Cartridges Ultrium 5 20 PACK MachineType 3589 46X1951 color label with labels Model 014 46X1953 black and white label Specify the Ultrium 4 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 95P4443 color ee rr VOLSER Model 010 95P4445 black and white label characters that Ultrium 3 1 Machine Type 3589 96P1470 color label you want Model 008 96P1471 black and white label Ultrium 2 1 Machine Type 3589 Model 006 Data Cartridges Ultrium 5 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 46X1960 without labels Model 015 Order VOLSER Ultrium 4 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 95P4447 Model 011 Ultrium 3 1 Machine Type 3589 24R1922 Model 009 Ultrium 2 1 Machine Type 3589 Model 007 Ultrium 1 20 PACK Machine Type 3589 08L9120 Model 003 D 18 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 8 Media supplies continued Order by Machine Type Model from IBM Sales Order by Part Number P N from an
508. p Remove the large black connector See Figure 7 62 on page 7 61 a Pinch the latch J in Figure 7 62 on page 7 61 on the cable connector TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information b Carefully lift up on the connector a66mi004 Figure 7 62 Y motor connector 5 Use a small flat blade screw driver to pry up on the small white connector H in Figure 7 63 gently working the screw driver blade along the entire outside edge of the connector Important Be very careful not to damage the connector 6 Loosen the thumb screw in Figure 7 63 slide the motor to the left then lift the motor out of the Robot Assembly A in Figure 7 63 a66mi005 Figure 7 63 Y motor thumb screw Replacing the Y Motor in the Y axis Picker Assembly in a Stand alone Library 1 Ensure that the black plastic piece on the wiring end of the motor in Figure 7 64 on page 7 62 fits into the slot in the base plate H in Figure 7 64 lon page 7 62 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 61 jon page 7 62 a66mi006 Figure 7 64 Correct Y motor position Note The top of the motor J in Figure 7 64 must be parallel with the Picker guide rod H in Figure 7 64 Install the Y Motor in the Y axis Picker Assembly and tighten the thumb screw The small gear on the Y Motor must connect with the larger gear on the Y axis Picker Assembly Connect the small white connector H in Figure 7 65 on
509. p blockers will prevent the Browse dialog box from opening Administrative users can use the View Update Drive Firmware Levels command to download firmware to the drive To update drive firmware 1 Download the latest level of drive firmware to your host computer by visiting http www 1 ibm com servers storage tape Ito 2 From the Web User Interface select Service Library gt View Update Drive Firmware Levels 3 Select a drive media and interface type 4 Select the drive s to be updated 5 Click the Select Action pull down menu and select Update Firmware Then select Go 6 Browse to the file on your computer select the ro file that was downloaded from the IBM web site then click Yes to begin Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 27 6 28 7 Save the current system Configuration See Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 Using the ITDT SCSI Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool A newly designed tool ITDT is a tool with multiple functional capability and is a very quick convenient and efficient method for drive firmware updates As a note drive dump retrievals can be performed by the tool as well Below are some of the capabilities of this tool e Firmware update capability via SCSI to all IBM LTO Tape Drive products e The tool does not require any special device drivers e The tool is available for most major platforms Windows AIX SUN Linux NetWare e The tool is
510. page 7 63 Important Be very careful not to damage the connector 4 Connect the large black connector See Figure 7 65 on page 7 63 7 62 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information N a66mi004 NS Figure 7 65 Y motor connector a Pinch the latch on the cable connector in Figure 7 65 b Carefully plug in the connector 5 Engage the cable retention clip 6 Replace the Y axis Picker Assembly 7 Perform Returning a Library or Library Module to Normal Operations after Repairs on page 7 3 Removing the Y Motor from the Y axis Picker Assembly in a Rack mounted Library Tools Required e Flashlight Small flat blade screwdriver 1 Perform Preparing a Library or Library Module for Repairs on page 7 3 2 Remove the Control Module from the library See the IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information for IBM Service Personnel for more information 3 Remove the Y axis Picker Assembly 4 Disengage the cable retention clip 5 See Figure 7 66 on page 7 64 Remove the large black connector a Pinch the latch J in Figure 7 66 on page 7 64 on the cable connector b Carefully lift up on the connector Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 63 a66mi004 Figure 7 66 Y motor connector 6 Use a small flat blade screw driver to pry up the small white connector H in Figure 7 66 gently working the screw driver blade along the entire outside e
511. pe 2 If this ticket reoccurs following the manual cleaning take the drive offline DR098 Resolve Hardware Clock Failure Problem The library firmware detected that the hardware clock RTC has failed The library system time may appear to be set correctly but accurate time will be lost following a power cycle or reboot Troubleshooting Steps 1 The hardware clock RTC is part of the LCB hardware Replace the LCB DR099 Resolve Barcode Label Mapping Problem There was a barcode scanning error detected during an attempt to inventory the library There are two possible scenarios 1 Improper application of barcode label s 2 Magazine s improperly seated Troubleshooting Steps 1 Verify that all library and tape barcode labels are properly attached and that no overlapping barcode labels are visible 2 Ensure that all magazines are properly installed and that all barcode labels are visible 3 Open and then close the access door in order to cause the library to perform another inventory 5 90 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information DR100 Resolve Barcode Scanner Malfunction Problem The bar code scanner is communicating properly but cannot read any bar codes There are two likely scenarios 1 Line of sight from the scanner to the module branding label is blocked by foreign material such as a media bar code label 2 The bar code scanner is damaged and the Y Axis Picker Asse
512. pe is used up Possible CRU Replacements No library CRU or FRU is involved Rather this is an indication that the cleaning tape media is expired and needs to be replaced 5 22 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Resolution If the cartridge is managed by a host application export the cartridge via the host application If the cartridge is managed by the library perform the following e Remove the suspect cartridge To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Remove Cleaning Media To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Cleaning Cartridges e Insert a new cartridge To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Insert Cleaning Media To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Cleaning Cartridges T048 Drive TapeAlert 23 Invalid Cleaning Tape Description GUI Description The tape drive requires cleaning but a non cleaning tape was loaded Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 23 indicating that the drive was expecting a cleaning tape but the loaded cartridge is not a cleaning tape Detection Scenario Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 23 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes e User or library attemp
513. perator control panel e Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not WORM capable causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium The drive will report a media Error Code 7 Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will resolve the problem Requirements for WORM Capability To add WORM capability to your LTO Ultrium generation 3 or generation 4 drive s drive firmware must be at the correct code level and you must use either Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM tape cartridges or Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM tape cartridges see Ordering Media Supplies on page D 18 Cleaning Cartridge With each library a specially labeled IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is supplied to clean the drive head The drive itself determines when a head needs to be cleaned To clean the head insert the cleaning cartridge into the tape load compartment of the drive or the Input Output I O Station of the library The cleaning is performed automatically When the cleaning is finished the cartridge is ejected Note The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge IBM Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses The cartridge s LTO CM chip tracks the number of times that the cartridge is used Cartridge Compatibility The following table demonstrates the Ultrium cartridge compatibility with the Ultrium tape drives Table D 3 Ultrium cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drives IBM Ultrium IBM LTO
514. place I O Station lock assembly Self Test Passed Lock test passed Attempt to open all I O Station doors to confirm that doors are locked Did any of the doors open Yes I O Station door X opened when the lock should have prevented it Replace I O Station lock assembly No Doors locked shut test passed The system will now attempt to locate the I O Station magazines with the robotics Self Test Failed I O Station magazine X in I O Station Y cannot be properly calibrated Replace I O Station lock assembly and magazine Self Test Passed All self tests have passed The original problem has been resolved Ticket has been closed Monitor for reoccurrence DR012 Resolve Drive Tape Alert 32 Host Interface Problem A tape drive has detected and reported a problem with its host interface connection This can be caused by a loose or disconnected cable bad termination or other FC SAS or SCSI communication issues Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 65 Troubleshooting Step 1 If the drive is SCSI e check for proper termination e check cable length meets SCSI limits e check host and drive connectors for bent or broken pins e secure host and drive connectors 2 If the drive is Fibre Channel e check cable connections are secure e check for broken or pinched cables e check for cable bend radius too sharp e check cable connections are clean 3
515. place the tape drive sled see Drivel Sled on page 7 42 Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages Use the table below as a guide for identifying error and message codes reported to the Ultrium Tape Drive library or host Note The codes on the single character display have different meanings depending on whether they display during normal operations or while the drive is in maintenance mode Codes that occur during normal operations are defined in maintenance mode are defined in Drive Error Codes on page D 42 Codes that occur while in Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions Table D 13 Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages for the Ultrium Tape Drive If the error or message was presented by Do this The library s display if the tape drive is enclosed in a library or autoloader See Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 The tape drive s single character display and the status light flashes yellow See Drive Error Codes on page D 42 To determine the meaning of status light activity see Status Light on page D 2 Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 49 Table D 13 Methods of Receiving Errors and Messages for the Ultrium Tape Drive continued If the error or message was presented by Do this The tape drive s single character See Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 display and the status light is s
516. placing the Model 1 Y Carriage Assembly The Y carriage enables the picker to move up and down the length of the library from one module to another The Y carriage assembly along with the picker assembly make up the entire robot assembly TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information These instructions explain how to remove the Y carriage assembly and replace it with a new one To replace the Y carriage assembly remove the entire robot assembly the Y carriage assembly and the picker assembly from the library Required tools e Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate e T10 TORX screwdriver for loosening and tightening the thumbscrew that attaches the cable spool clip to the robot assembly 1 Remove the robot assembly from the library following the complete instructions in Removing the Model 1 Robot Assembly from the Library on page 7 66 2 Separate the robot into the Y carriage assembly and picker assembly For details see Removing and Replacing the Model 1 Picker Assembly from the Y Carriage Assembly Inside the Library on page 7 74 The instructions for removal are the same whether inside or outside the library Model 1 robot Y carriage assembly ee a66mi216 Figure 7 83 Model 1 Robot Y carriage Assembly 3 Reassemble the new Y carriage assembly and the picker assembly outside of the module 4 Replace the robot in the library following the complete
517. ply ie Grasp the power supply handle in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 while supporting it from underneath Then line up the power supply with the guides in the slot and carefully push the power supply into the library Tighten the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 on the power supply by turning them clockwise Connect the power supply by plugging in each end of the power cord in the proper sequence Attention First connect the power cord to the power supply component J in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 Then connect the power cord to the power source Toggle the power switch JJ in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 on the power supply to the ON position If there is no redundant power supply power ON the library using the power button on the front of the machine Removing a Redundant Power Supply 1 Locate the slot for the redundant power supply to be removed on the back of the library Toggle the redundant power supply power switch JJ in Figure 7 54 on page pe to the O OFF position Unplug the power cord from the redundant power supply receptacle J in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 Loosen the two thumb screws H in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 by turning them counterclockwise Grasp the handle F in Figure 7 54 on page 7 52 and pull the power supply toward you Support the component from underneath with your other hand Install a metal cover plate over the vacant redundant power supply slot i
518. protecting all user data written to the medium from unauthorized use provided it is integrated into a secure system design Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address valid When set to 1 the info 0 byte field Error Code contains a valid logical block address 1 Segment Number 0 2 Filemark EOM end ILI Reserved Sense Key Description of medium Incorrect 0 No sense length 1 Recovered error indicator 2 Not ready 3 Media error 4 Hardware error 5 Illegal request 6 Unit attention 7 Data protect 8 Blank Check 9 Reserved A Reserved B Aborted command C Reserved D Volume overflow E Reserved F Reserved Information byte most significant byte Information byte Information byte least significant byte 3 4 5 Information byte 6 7 Additional Sense Length Command specific information B 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table B 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ 00 00 No additional sense The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for the command failure 00 01 Filemark detected A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM The FM flag is se
519. ption A stored tape drive firmware image is not usable for auto leveling of a tape drive Explanation During initialization or when a drive is inserted while the library is operating the library checks the product firmware level of the installed tape drive brick and compares that version to the version that it stores internally in its file system If they are not the same the library automatically updates the tape drive brick with this internally stored code image Detection Scenario The automatic updates of the tape drive firmware fails Root Causes The tape drive firmware image stored on the library s file system is corrupt Resolution Perform DR072 Resolve Tape Drive Auto level Failure on page 5 82 5 46 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T114 Unassigned Tape Cartridge Description GUI Description A tape cartridge has been detected in a storage location that is not assigned to any partition Explanation At bootup or after a door open event the picker performs an inventory of the entire library If a cartridge is located in a slot that is not part of a logical library the cartridge will be inaccessible to the user and must be manually removed This ticket will be generated upon the first occurance of such a cartridge a separate ticket will not be generated for each cartridge found Detection Scenario During inventory a cartridge is found in a slot that does not belon
520. puter programs interposer The part used to convert a 68 pin connector to a 50 pin D shell connector intervention required Manual action is needed INTRO Introduction I O Input output IOP Input output processor IPL Initial program load ISV Independent Software Vendor ITST Idle time self test K Kerberos Kerberos Authentication is a standard RFC 1510 third party authentication protocol that provides end to end security for distributed computing environments kilogram kg One thousand grams approximately 2 2 pounds km kilometer 1000 Meters Approximately 5 8 mile L LAN Local area network A computer network within a limited area LCB Library Control Blade LCD See liquid crystal display LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol This allows the library to use login and password information stored on a server to grant access to the library functionality LDAPS Secure LDAP over SSL LDI Library Drive Interface LED Light emitting diode Linear Tape Open LTO A type of tape storage technology developed by the IBM Corporation TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Hewlett Packard and Certance LTO technology is an open format technology which means that its users will have multiple sources of product and media The open nature of LTO technology enables compatibility between different vendors offerings by ensuring that vendors comply with verification standards The LTO tech
521. r Interface ZN and Theta motor control D VE Sensor Theta motor origin ZN Q Reach motor os SS Sensor Reach motor origin Voltage gt 2 Teach sensor o Sensor Cartridge present o gt ll a66mi069 Bar code Appendix C Library Diagrams C 11 Door and Import Export Board DIEB Disp_Tx0 Disp_Tx1 Disp_Tx2 Disp_Clk Disp_Rtn 5 TS_TX TS_RX TS_DTR CM_IE_Int DIEB_Pwr_SnS DIEB_RAS_Loop 1E_I2C_Cik ich Screen ntroller Cable_RAS_Loop In Cable_RAS_Loop Out VisioDocumentVisioDocu t 10 0704 a66mi035 Door and Display Block LCD Display and Touch Screen Screen Controller Front Panel Pwr Ena Swt and LEDs a66mi034 C 12 T53310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Power System Block Diagram Load Sharing 48 V Power Supply Input 100 260V AC 12C PS Monitor Logic and Servo Circuit Protection Rear Panel Switch Drive Circuit Protection Load Sharing 48 V Power Supply Input 100 260V AC Front Panel Power Enable Switch a66mi070 Drive Sled Interconnect Board DSIB Appendix C Library Diagrams C 13 To BCB1 Drive Bay ooo Connector D D D OD D C c C
522. r disposal of these batteries contact IBM at 1 800 426 4333 Please have the IBM part number listed on the battery available prior to your call The following applies for countries within the European Union For Taiwan Safety and Environmental Notices Xiii oo Please recycle batteries HES He ah IK Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006 66 EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont tiquet s conform ment aux directives europ ennes 2006 66 EC norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs us s Les directives d terminent la marche suivre en vigueur dans l Union Europ enne pour le retour et le recyclage des batteries et accumulateurs us s Cette tiquette est appliqu e sur diverses batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas tre mise au rebut mais plut t r cup r e en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme Nyt Y HSUMENY FAO yar EU ABT SRERET RS FH 2006 66 EC DINIAGESNTWET COMBS NYT I EBER BE URRY TF U EBEMICMT SLOTS COHBIZ
523. r either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code 9 Display Error Code Log Function Code g displays the last ten error codes one at a time the codes are ordered the most recent is presented first and the oldest is presented last If there are no errors in the log function code A z displays in the Single character Display SCD and exits Maintenance Mode 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 D Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to view the most recent error code Press the Unload Button again to view successive error codes Let two to three m seconds pass between each depression The SCD will display when all the error codes have been displayed After viewing all error codes exit this function by pressing the Unload Button A G again The SCD will display and exit Maintenance Mode Function Code A Clear Error Code Log Function Code 1 I erases the contents of the error code log Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Entering Mai
524. rack from moving down too far 5 Replace the bottom cover of the module if necessary 6 Return the module to its correct upright position Removing a Rear Gear Rack 1 Lay the library module on the left side from front 2 Remove the top and bottom covers of the module if necessary 3 There is a small metal tab in the chassis frame F in Figure 7 132 on page 7 117 that prevents the gear rack from falling down too far when the locking mechanism is released Bend the tab out slightly so the gear rack can be removed TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 4 Slightly push up and pinch the gear rack locking mechanism E in Figure 7 134 to unlock the gear rack The gear rack is spring loaded against the tab and will be removed through the bottom of the module a lt a66mi007 Figure 7 134 Removing a gear rack 5 While pinching the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 134 push the gear rack down then release your hold on the locking mechanism 6 Remove the gear rack by pulling the black tab J in 7 120 and the gear rack locking mechanism K in Fi through the keyhole slots Note Don t lose the spring H in Figure 7 135 on page 7 120 that is recessed in the gear rack slot Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 119 a66mi059 Figure 7 135 Gear rack detail 7 120 T Return the module to its correct upright position Replacing a Rear Gear Rack
525. rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures will exceed the manufacturer s recommended ambient temperature for all your rack mounted devices e Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side front or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit e Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection To provide the correct power connection to a rack refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit e For sliding drawers Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack Do not pull out more than one drawer at a time The rack may become unstable if you pull out more than one drawer at a time e For fixed drawers This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for servicing unless specified by the manufacturer Attempting to move the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack R001 X TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information CAUTION Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability during relocation Follow these general guidelines whenever
526. rary product requires them see Bar Code Labels on page D 9 You can order bar code labels with your data and cleaning cartridges or you can order them directly from the authorized label suppliers listed in the table below Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 19 Table D 9 Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels In America In Europe and Asia Tri Optic EDP Europe Ltd Broomfield CO U K U S A Telephone 44 0 1245 322380 Telephone 888 438 8362 Dataware Dataware Labels Europe Houston TX Germany U S A Telephone 49 8062 9455 Telephone 800 426 4844 NetC Fairfield CT U S A Telephone 203 372 6382 http www netcllc com NetC Europe Ltd U e K Telephone 44 0 1823 49 1439 http www netclabels co uk NetC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd Australia Telephone 61 0 2 4573 6556 http www netclabels com uk D 20 Repairing a Cartridge Attention Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another cartridge Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin retaining spring clips or detaches from the tape you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 08L9129 to reposition or reattach it Do not reattach the pin if you must remove more than seven meters 23 feet of leader tape The sections that follow describe each p
527. rator Intervention Alert LED KJ When lit this LED indicates that there is a Library Drives or Media Operator Intervention available To view the Operator Intervention select Tools gt Operator Intervention from the Operator Panel Library Control Blade LEDs The library contains a Library Control Blade LCB LEDs are used to indicate the status of the LCB 6 18 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 6 2 Library Control Blade LEDs a66ug042 LCB LEDs ff indicate status by the rate at which they blink The color of the LED identifies the area of the component being reported Use the following table to interpret the current status of LCB LEDs Table 6 2 LCB LEDs LED Color Represents Blade Status Green Processor Solid ON Processor not operating ae e Solid ON for 3 seconds then blinks twice LCB firmware is downloading e 1 blink per second Normal Processor operating e 10 blinks per second Identify mode e Solid OFF Processor not operating Amber Health status 1 blink per second Main processor not operating e Solid OFF Normal Blade operational Blue Power control Solid ON Swap mode LCB is powered down and can be status removed e 1 blink per 10 seconds Normal LCB on e Solid OFF LCB not receiving power Note If all three LEDs are solid ON for at least twenty minutes suspect a bad or corrupt compact flash See Library Control Blade or Compact Flas
528. re allowed to operate one or more assigned logical libraries but are not allowed to perform actions that affect the physical library See Table 4 3 for access details to the available library functions User privileges include e A screen saver is invoked after 10 minutes of inactivity on the Operator Panel The Web User Interface UI does not use a screen saver e Up to 18 Users and or Administrative users can be logged in at one time on the Web UI Only one user can be logged in at one time on the Operator Panel e When a Service user logs in all other Users and Administrative users are logged out and notified that they cannot perform actions on the library A message is posted that Service is logged in and no other users can access the library until after Service has logged out The following table describes how to access the library functions from both the control panel and the Web UI For each interface column A indicates Administrative privileges S indicates Superuser privileges column U indicates User privileges In each column an X indicates that access is allowed and the settings can be modified an O indicates that access is allowed but the settings can only be observed and a indicates that access is not allowed Table 4 3 System Functions Commands and Access Control Panel Menu Command and Function Access Web UI Command and Access A S U AJS U Libraries
529. re explained in this section Robot Assembly a66mi027 Figure 2 7 Robot Assembly The Robot Assembly design displays the Y Axis Assembly housing the Y Motor EJ and the Picker Assembly J which is attached to the Carrier E The Climber moves the Y Axis Picker Assembly within the library M2 Robot Assembly While serving the same function as that of the Robot Assembly the M2 Robot Assembly has a different design style which is depicted in the following images 2 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi146 Figure 2 8 M2 Robot Assembly In the M2 Robot Assembly the Robot Assembly houses the Y Axis controller board HJ and the M2 Picker Assembly H is attached to the Carrier The M2 label is clearly visible on the side of the Robot Assembly which faces the door of the library See APN 3 06300 04 CPOE N BZCOL4ESt7 Ee a66mi144 Figure 2 9 M2 Label on the M2 Robot Assembly Chapter 2 Product Description 2 13 Optional Features The table below lists additional features that can be added to the library to enhance performance Table 2 2 Optional features Type of Feature Description Feature Code Ultrium 5 Tape Drive 8 Gb Fibre Channel interface 8242 Ultrium 4 Tape Drive 3 Gb SAS interface 8139 4 Gb Fibre Channel interface 8142 Ultrium 3 Tape Drive Ultra160 SCSI interface 8037 4 Gb Fibre Channel interface 8042 Power Supply Redundant 1900 Feature
530. re is always at least one power supply in the control module which provides _48 volts DC power to the library If there is one or more drives in the expansion module then this module also must have a power supply Each module s power supply consists of an AC cable supplying electrical current from a wall outlet and a 48 V DC power supply The power supply in the control module powers all library components within the control module including its drives The expansion module s power supply provides power for the drives and BCB boards within the expansion module In the control module the power supply s rear panel switch provides power to the library This power supply connects with the BCB1 board in the library which interconnects with the LCB1 in communicating the library s power status The BCB1 board in the control module channels power to the Servo amp Motor Driver Boards SMD1 amp SMD2 which operate the robotics assembly The power supplies in both the control and expansion modules connect with that module s Drive Sled Interconnect Board DSIB in providing power to the drive sleds The control module s front power enable switch is located near the operator panel on the front of the library It is connected to the Door amp Import Export Board DIEB which is only found in the control module This front power switch enables power to the operator panel interface and the library firmware and robotics assembly The control module s power s
531. re you are appending datasets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over existing datasets If the tape cartridge is the correct media type perform the following action Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 43 Table D 11 Error codes on the Single character Display continued Error Code Cause and Action For Problems with Writing Data If the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to the tape retry the operation with a different cartridge e If the operation succeeds the original cartridge was defective Copy data from the defective cartridge and discard it e If the operation fails and another tape drive is available insert the cartridge into the other unit and retry the operation If the operation fails discard the defective cartridge If the operation succeeds insert a scratch data cartridge into the first unit and run Function If the T fail replace the tape drive If the diagnostics succeed the error was temporary If the diagnostics fail replace the tape drive If the diagnostics succeed discard the cartridge If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges run Function Code 1 Run Drivel e If the diagnostics fail replace the tape drive e If the diagnostics succeed rur Function Code Hi Test Head on page D236 If the diagnostic fails replace the tape drive If the diagnostic succeeds replace the cartridges that caused the p
532. rear the power supply on the left is considered to be 1 while the power supply on the right is 2 Modules are numbered according to their position in relation to the control module CM Picker LED Both the Original and the M2 Picker Assembly have one green LED seen in the following images f in Figure 6 5 on page 6 24 that must be ON for the Picker to function properly If the LED is not lit the Picker assembly should be investigated for problems module to module communication cable is not in place module communication terminator is not in place an Access Door is open To observe the status of the Picker LED 1 Look through the viewing window on the front of an expansion module and determine whether or not the Picker LED is ON 2 If you cannot see the Picker LED power OFF the library The Picker will move to the bottom of the library 3 Power ON the library 4 Open the lowest I O Station door in your library and looking through the opening to the left of the flap inside the I O Station observe the Picker LED Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 23 Note Do not open the Access Door to observe the Picker LED If the Access Door is opened the Picker LED is turned OFF APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 m o gt 6 O amp a a w 3 P a lt 4 P ray a66mi147 Figure 6 5 Location of Original Picker Assembly LED 6 24 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information
533. reset the library to factory defaults Clear to Ship The library will be re booted Select Apply to perform the operation Tools Menu Library Tests These diagnostic tests and procedures are only available when logged in to the operator panel as Service From the Operator Panel Tools gt Library Tests Installation Verification Test IVT The Installation Verification Test IVT is only available to libraries manufactured on or after July 01 2008 It is available only under Service login under the Tools menu This test exercises full library capability and functionality after a successful library installation to confirm that an installation or FRU replacement was successful Manual steps to verify proper installation and physical configuration are still required Test results are presented on the Op Panel as well as in the logs which are presented on both the OP Panel and the Web User Interface The IVT tests for marginal or failing components functions and it is highly recommended that these tests be used only by a product or customer engineer for new installs and new FRU replacement The following prerequisites are required for this test 1 The library should be ready and all hardware installed before the IVT is initiated 2 The complete library system must be taken offline to avoid interference between IVT and host commands TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 3 Drives must be empty before any drive test
534. ridge was inserted incorrectly e The tape cartridge was defective Insert another tape cartridge If the problem persists replace the tape drive sled see Drive Sled on page Fa e The Ultrium Tape Drive has no power Ensure the drive sled is plugged into the Library correctly See Drive Sled on page 7 42 If there are multiple drives in the library and the other drives are powered up correctly suspect the power cable or power distribution card e If the problem exists for multiple cartridges the Ultrium Tape Drive is defective Replace the tape drive see Drive Sled on page 7 42 The Ultrium Tape Drive won t unload the tape cartridge The tape cartridge is stuck or is broken Press the unload button If the cartridge does not eject turn OFF the power to Ultrium Tape Drive then turn it back ON If the cartridge still does not eject manually remove it see Manual Cartridge Removal from a Drive on page 7 132 The host received TapeAlert messages The host reported SCSI problems such as selection or command time outs or parity errors A library reported an interface problem Run drive diagnostics The drive sled or RS 422 circuitry may be defective Refer to the section about running drive diagnostics in the Setup and Operator Guide Codes display on the single character display but the status light doesn t turn ON The Ultrium Tape Drive is defective Re
535. rify that the tape drive s serial number is the same as the drive serial number that the server program is using Ensure that the drive is connected to the host or switch The drive must be able to detect light and communicate with the server Run the Fibre Channel wrap test at the drive s Fibre Channel connector see Function Code 6 in Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page p33 e If the test fails replace the tape drive e If the test is successful go to step 5 Run the Fibre Channel wrap test at the end of the fiber cable see Function Code 6 in Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page D33 If the test fails replace the fiber cable e If the test is successful go to step 6 Check the Fibre Channel cable connection at the server TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 7 Using a device driver utility such as ntutil or tapeutil verify that the drive is properly configured and available at the server 8 If the problem persists the fault may be with the server s hardware or software Refer to your server s service manual 9 When the problem is corrected or determined to be a server problem restore all of the fiber cables to their correct position Fixing Intermittent Fibre Channel Errors 1 Determine the type of Fibre Channel topology that you are using 2 Ensure that the configuration and software levels are supported a Determine the current software levels by selecting Reports
536. rium 4 cartridge stores data on 896 tracks sixteen tracks at a time e The Ultrium 3 cartridge stores data on 704 tracks sixteen tracks at a time e The Ultrium 2 cartridge stores data on 512 tracks eight tracks at a time e The Ultrium 1 cartridge stores data on 384 tracks eight tracks at a time The first set of tracks sixteen for Ultrium 5 4 and 3 eight for Ultrium 2 and 1 is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full or until all data is written Figure 2 15 shows the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge and its components All LTO family data cartridges are similar a67b0022 Figure 2 15 Ultrium Cartridge Linear Tape Open 4 Cartridge Memory Write protect switch LTO CM chip A Cartridge door H Label area Leader pin 6 Insertion guide All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge contain a Linear Tape Open Cartridge Memory LTO CM chip in the cartridge H in Figure 2 15 The cartridge memory chip contains information about the cartridge and the tape such as the name of the manufacturer that created the tape and statistical performance and usage information such as number of loads unloads The CM reader uses a radio frequency interface to read this information when the cartridge is loaded into the drive The car
537. rive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 23 Resolution Before performing the following e Removing a Drive Sled on page 7 42 8 placing a Drive Sled on refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 for additional diagnostic procedures e Perform DR049 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 30 31 Drive Hardware Error e From the Operator Panel select Tools gt Service gt Drives to run the drive diagnostic A blank scratch cartridge is required for this test T050 Drive TapeAlert 31 Hardware B Description GUI Description The tape drive detected an internal hardware problem Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 31 indicating a hardware error that requires a drive power cycle before the drive might recover to a usable state Detection Scenario Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 31 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Resolution e Perform DR049 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 30 31 Drive Hardware Error e From the Operator Panel select Tools gt Service gt Drives to run the
538. rmine potential rough handling e When inspecting a cartridge open only the cartridge door Do not open any other part of the cartridge case The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge e Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it e Inspect the rear of the cartridge the part that loads first into the tape load compartment and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge case see in and_ J in Figure D 10 on page D 21 If there are gaps in the seam see Figure D 6 the leader pin may be dislodged a69i0078 Figure D 6 Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge e Check that the leader pin is properly seated see H in Figure D 10 on page D 21 e If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery Discard the mishandled cartridge e Review handling and shipping procedures Handle the Cartridge Carefully e Do not drop the cartridge If the cartridge drops slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin retaining spring clips see FA in Figure D 9 on page D 21 If the leader pin has become dislodged go to Repositioning a Leader Pin on Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 15 e Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge Handling the tape can damag
539. roblem The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape drive in maintenance mode For Problems with Reading Data If the problem occurred while the tape drive was reading data from the tape perform one of the following procedures e If another tape drive is available insert the cartridge into the other unit and retry the operation If the operation fails discard the defective cartridge If the operation succeeds insert a scratch data cartridge into the first unit and run Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics on If the diagnostic fails replace the tape drive If the diagnostic succeeds the error was temporary e If another tape drive is not available insert a scratch data cartridge into the unit and run Function Code 1 Run Drive Diagnostics on page D 29 If the diagnostic fails replace the tape drive If the diagnostic succeeds discard the cartridge If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges run Function Code 1 Run Drive e If the diagnostic fails replace the tape drive e If the diagnostic succeeds run Function Code Hi Test Head on page D236 If the diagnostic fails replace the tape drive If the diagnostic succeeds replace the cartridges that caused the problem The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape drive in maintenance mode D 44 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information
540. rocedure e Repositioning a Leader Pin e Reattaching a Leader Pin on page D 22 Repositioning a Leader Pin To place the leader pin in its proper position you will need the following tools e Plastic or blunt end tweezers e Cartridge manual rewind tool from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 08L9129 A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge can interfere with the operation of the drive Figure D 9 on page D 21 shows a leader pin in the incorrect and correct H positions TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a67e0057 Figure D 9 Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible inside the cartridge To reposition the leader pin refer to Figure D 10 and perform the steps below 1 Slide open the cartridge door F and locate the leader pin H Note If necessary shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door With plastic or blunt end tweezers grasp the leader pin and position it in the pin retaining spring clips E Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly seated Close the cartridge door gm E oN Ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge lis I l I Fal EES S I l
541. roper media handling in places where people gather e Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and shipping procedures This includes operators users programmers archival services and shipping personnel e Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are properly trained in media handling procedures e Include media handling procedures as part of any services contract e Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions e Before using a cartridge let it acclimate to the normal operating environment for 1 hour If condensation is visible on the cartridge wait an additional hour e Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it e Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight e Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater than 100 oersteds for example terminals motors video equipment X ray equipment or fields that exist near high current cables or power supplies Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable D 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e Maintain the conditions that are described in Table D 7 on page D 17 Perform a Thorough Inspection After purchasing a cartridge and before using it perform the following steps e Inspect the cartridge s packaging to dete
542. roubleshooting information in this manual The two following service aid programs are provided with the IBM SCSI Tape Device Driver for SunOS e Tape service program A tape service program called tapesrvc c is provided and contains the following service aids Query device serial number Format tape cartridge Force device error dump E 8 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Save device error dump Download device code The tape service program is invoked by using the opt stddutil tapesrvc command Note You must have root authority to run the tape service program The program is menu driven Use discretion when running this program because it opens the device in diagnostic mode Sample program A sample program called tapetest c is provided which gives a demonstration of the device driver interface usage The sample program is invoked by using the opt stddutil tapetest command The program is useful for verifying that the device driver and the device are functional The program is menu driven Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 9 E 10 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps Table F 1 Status MIB variables The two tables in this appendix provide a quick reference for the status MIB variables and status traps Online Offline Status Event Object ID Description Drive Online Offline 11 3 1 10 Indicat
543. rror or a user mixing incompatible parts from multiple library systems Troubleshooting Steps 1 If this problem was reported following a field upgrade or the replacement of a defective part it is likely that the new part is not correct or mislabeled Refer to DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 2 If this problem occurred following the swapping of chassis control boards or compact flash cards between libraries the two libraries have incompatible parts and the parts should be returned to their original libraries 3 If neither of these scenarios apply or the problem remains unresolved refer to DR021 Contact IBM Service on page 5 68 4 Close the ticket or Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 75 DR041 Resolve Robot Installation Problem The library has detected a condition that indicates the robot assembly has been installed incorrectly The Robot travels on rack gears Y rails located at the front and rear of the library If the Robot is installed into the rack gears with one end higher or lower than the other the robot assembly may not function properly Troubleshooting Steps 1 The installation of the robot assembly should be performed again to correct the problem Close the ticket and power off the library 2 Reference the user documentation for removing and installing the robot s Y
544. ry Maintenance Information Native Data Nominal Cartridge Life a Data Cartridge Case Color Capacity Recording Format load unload cycles Ultrium 5 Burgundy 1500 GB 3000 GB Reads and writes data on 1280 20 000 at 2 1 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 4 Green 800 GB 1600 GB at Reads and writes data on 896 20 000 2 1 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 3 Slate Blue 400 GB 800 GB at Reads and writes data on 704 20 000 2 1 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 2 Purple 200 GB 400 GB at Reads and writes data on 512 10 000 2 1 compression tracks eight tracks at a time Ultrium 1 Black 100 GB 200 GB at Reads and writes data on 384 5 000 2 1 compression tracks eight tracks at a time The first set of tracks sixteen for Ultrium 5 4 and 3 eight for Ultrium 2 and 1 is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full or until all data is written Cartridge Memory Chip LTO CM All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartrid Tape Open Cartridge Memory LTO CM chip H in ges include a Linear Figure D 3 on page D 6 that contains information about the cartridge and the tape such as the name of the manufacturer that created the tape as well
545. ry and drive firmware Location Coordinates 2 28 A numbering system is used to identify components of the library The library location coordinates contain the following digits Module Column Slot The figure below illustrates how a library with a control module and an expansion module are numbered TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Control Module 0 Expansion Module 1 Slot 1 pm Column 3 Drives Column 2 E Column 1 7 Slot 2 Column 4 Slot 3 Column 5 Column 6 I O Station a66mi024 Figure 2 12 Library Location Coordinates The module digit uses a zero based numbering system The control module is labeled as 0 zero The front left most column in the module is labeled 1 The top slot in each column is labeled 1 For more information refer to the sections that follow Modules Library modules are represented by the first digit of a library coordinate Modules are identified relative to the control module CM The CM is number 0 Modules stacked above the CM are addressed with positive integer digits depending on their position above the CM For example the expansion module stacked directly above the CM is number 1 The expansion module stacked directly above module 1 is number 2 and so on The module s stacked below the CM is numbered with a negative integer depending on its relative position to the CM The expans
546. s Door in your library must be tested individually During the test setup the diagnostic will lock all of the I O doors except the I O door on the module being tested This provides the diagnostic routine a method of testing all of the module access doors in sequence even though the door access switches are all connected in series After closing the Access Door just tested wait until the library inventory is complete before running the next test or resuming normal library operations e Sensors tests and displays the sensor status of the main access doors safety loop module to module connectors I O stations and the I O station Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 7 6 8 safety flaps The test also displays the status of the I O station locks Press the Update button to re test the sensors after each change of sensor status Touch Back or Exit to return to the Library Verify screen Touch Back to return to the Service screen Touch Exit to return to the Library Offline screen oak wo Touch Exit to exit the Library Offline screen and return to the Tools menu screen 7 Touch the Operations tab then touch Logical Library Mode to bring your logical libraries back ONLINE Tools Menu Factory Defaults This operation is only available when logged in to the operator panel as Service From the Operator Panel Tools gt Factory Defaults Attention This operation will clear all configuration data including passwords and
547. s Exchanged Description of Service Activity 8 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 8 1 Service activity continued Date Service Representative Parts Exchanged Description of Service Activity Chapter 8 History of Service Activity 8 3 8 4 1S3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 9 Parts List Field Replaceable Unit FRU parts list FRU Part FRU Type Description Number Assemblies Display Operator Panel 23R6174 I O Station for control module 23R2587 I O Station for 9U expansion module 23R2588 Expansion module enclosure 23R6168 I O Station Lock Assembly 23R2589 Y axis Assembly Below Control Module S N 15000 23R6186 Y Motor Below Control Module S N 15000 23R7285 Picker with Bar Code Scanner Below Control Module S N 15000 23R6171 Cable Spool 23R2583 M2 Robot Assembly Above Control Module S N 15000 45E6348 M2 Picker Assembly Above Control Module S N 15000 45E6351 Power Button 23R3348 Front Bezels for control module 23R2597 Front Bezels for 9U expansion module 23R2598 Miscellaneous 5U drive power overload fuse 23R6178 9U drive power over
548. s issued a TapeAlert 16 indicating that an unload of a drive was triggered while the drive was actively reading or writing The source of the unload can be either an operator initiated manual push button on the drive itself or a GUI initiated command Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 16 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR048 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 16 Forced Eject on Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 21 T045 Drive TapeAlert 20 Clean Now Description GUI Description The drive is requesting cleaning before it can be used again Explanation System determines that the tape drive has issued a TapeAlert 20 indicating that the tape drive requires cleaning before it can be used again This should be coincident with a C on the drive seven segment display Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 20 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements No library CRU or FRU is involved Rather this is an indication that the tape drive requires a cl
549. s long as that ticket remains open no more T143 tickets will be issued even if more unreadable barcode labels are found e An unreadable barcode label is re scanned every time the cartridge moves to a new location to check if it is readable in the new location To enable the library to report unreadable barcodes 1 Access the System Settings page as follows e On the Operator Panel press Tools gt System Settings gt Unlabeled Detection e From the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Settings gt Media Detection 2 Select one of the following from the Unlabeled Media Detection list D 12 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Selection Action None default Performs the standard inventory only e On the Operator Panel uncheck the Unlabeled Media Detection checkbox Includes a te scan of th top and bottom rows only On the Web User Interface uncheck the Enable Unlabeled Media Detection checkbox I O Re scans all slots in the I E station that were On the Operator Panel select the identified as empty in the standard Unlabeled Media Detection checkbox inventory tien selset UO If media is detected it is assumed to have e On the Web User Interface select the an unreadable barcode Enable Unlabeled Media Detection checkox then select I O All Re scans all slots in the library that were On the Operator Panel select the identified as empty in the standard Unlabeled Media Detec
550. s not operating Amber Health of Solid ON Drive has failed Wedge e Solid OFF Normal drive operational Blue Power Solid ON Drive is powered down and ready to be replaced or control varied online e 1 blink per 10 seconds Normal Drive operational e Solid OFF Drive is not receiving power Fibre Port Link LED The fibre port link LED H in Figure 6 3 shows the current state of the fibre channel link and indicates whether or not the link is ready to transmit commands Use the following table to interpret fibre channel link activity Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 21 Table 6 5 Fibre Port Link LED on Tape Drive LED Color Represents Fibre Port Link Status Green LIP and activity Solid ON Loop Initialization Protocol LIP has occurred e Blinks at regular intervals Host command data activity is occurring Amber Online and light Solid ON The library has enabled the drive data bus detected and it can detect light through a fiber optic cable No No activity or no Solid OFF Either the drive is off or the drive cannot color _ light detected detect light through a fiber optic cable which is equivalent to a missing fibre cable If the drive is varied OFF the blue status LED will be solidly lit Power Supply LEDs Operator interventions typically report all problems related to power supplies You can also observe the blinking pattern of LEDs on power supplies to see if they
551. s not operational until it can successfully read the barcode label Close the ticket and close all main access doors to allow the library ti initialize again 5 If the issue reoccurs contact service for possible CM or EM replacement DR028 Resolve Motion Obstruction Problem The library robot has failed to perform a motion It appears that the motion has been obstructed by a foreign object or a misplaced cartridge Troubleshooting Steps 1 Open the main access door s and look for interference by the parking tab any obvious foreign objects or tape cartridges obstructing motion 2 If this is a new installation check for packing material and robot shipping posts which are large plastic screws that protrude from the top of the robot Make sure the Y rails are secured properly and the robot is moving horizontally level along the Y rails Look under the robot to make sure that there is no tape or other hidden obstruction on the floor of the library Verify the robot parking tab is in the unparked position and not interfering with the robot Y axis travel Close the doors and wait for the System to complete initialization on amp Use the Tools gt Service gt System gt Library gt Robotics to exercise the robot and verify that the obstruction is cleared If the test fails refer to Chapter 1 Start Service on page 1 1 for further troubleshooting instructions e If the test passes the obstruction is clear
552. s read only compatibility e g Gen2 media error code appears in the SCD Press the Unload Button The tape drive unloads the cartridge and exits Maintenance Mode after the cartridge is removed 1 Place the drive in Maintenance Mode For instructions see Maintenance Mode on page D 28 2 Press the Unload Button once per second until appears in the SCD If you cycle past the desired code press the Unload Button once per second until the code reappears Li rl 3 Press and hold the Unload Button for three or more seconds then release it to m select the function The SCD changes to a flashing 4 Insert a scratch blank data cartridge The SCD changes to a flashing The tape drive runs the tests TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information rm ui e If no error is detected the diagnostic will exit Maintenance Mode temporarily appears in the SCD and the drive returns to Operational Mode SCD blank Green Ready Activity status light ON and the Amber Fault status light is OFF e If an error is detected the Fault status light flashes amber and the drive posts an error code to the SCD To determine the error locate the code in Dare Error Codes on page D 42 To clear the error either turn the power off and then on again or reboot the drive by pressing and holding the Unload Button for 10 seconds Function Code J Fast Read Write Test Approximate Run Time
553. s the data on the cartridge This test takes approximately 18 minutes Self Test This test performs the drive s Power On Self Test POST to make sure that drive hardware is working properly For this test insert a scratch data cartridges in the top I O station slot This test takes approximately two minutes Service Menu Drives Reset This test resets power cycles the drive without removing it from the library From the Operator Panel Tools gt Service gt Drives gt Drive Tests gt Reset gt Select Module s gt Select Drive s gt Reset Some hardware or firmware failures may require that a drive be reset for recovery from the failure Drives can be reset individually by enclosure module by logical library Web User Interface only or by entire library Tools gt Service Menu System From the Operator Panel Tools gt Service gt System Follow the menu path shown above Touch Yes to take all logical libraries OFFLINE Choose one of the following diagnostic tests and follow the on screen instructions e Robotics tests the library robotics see DRO05 Resolve Motion Failure on e I O tests the open close and lock unlock sensors of the I O Station doors see DRO11 Resolve I O Station Lock Unlock Failure on page 5 64 e Bar code tests the ability of the bar code scanner to read an internal library bar code e Door tests the open close sensors of the Access Doors Each Acces
554. s the drive functions From the Operator Panel Tools gt Service gt Drives gt Drive Tests gt Media Tests Important The following tests will overwrite data on the cartridge used Insert only a scratch blank data cartridge or a cartridge that may be over written Media must be same as drive type Ensure media is not write protected encrypted or WORM The Scratch cartridge must be placed in the top I O Station slot and assigned to System use e Fast R W Test This test reads and writes two wraps worth of data in each of the tape s four data sections For this test insert a scratch data cartridge in the top I O station slot During the test the drive overwrites the data on the cartridge This test takes approximately four minutes if no error occurs to 9 minutes if calibration is required TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Media Test This test reads and writes two wraps worth of data on each of the two outside data bands on both edges of the tape for the entire length of the tape since media damage usually comes from the tape edges For this test insert the suspect cartridge in the top I O station slot The data will be overwritten on the suspect cartridge This test takes approximately 9 minutes Read Write Test This test reads and writes 96 wraps worth of data in each of the tape s four data sections For this test insert a scratch data cartridge in the top I O station slot During the test the drive overwrite
555. s which can be configured as either I O or storage slots If the 9U expansion module I O slots are configured as I O the control module slots can be configured as storage slots The number of available I O and storage slots listed in the table above are adjusted for the unusable slots in each configuration that are not accessible due to space restrictions which limit the movement of the Picker The M2 Picker will provide an additional 5 or 7 slots depending upon the library configuration and the number of Capacity Expansion license keys purchased of a 41U library Path Failover Feature Code 1682 The Path Failover feature includes license keys for activating control path failover and data path failover Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface A single activation key entered at the library user interface now activates both features with one exception For LTO Ultrium 3 drives with firmware level 73P5 or lower the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will still be required The Path Failover feature is available on select drives Control Path Failover A control path is a logical path into the library through which a server sends standard SCSI Medium Changer commands to control the logical library Additional control paths reduce the possibility that failure in o
556. screw that attaches the cable spool to the robot assembly and pull the cable spool flex circuit off the assembly Thumbscrew a66mi0204 Figure 7 74 Cable Spool Flex Circuit 10 Lay the cable spool circuit across the library so that it rests on the edge This keeps it from falling inside te N oO Figure 7 75 Robot Assembly Parking tab 7 70 11 Perform any needed replacement or repairs following the instructions in the appropriate sections of this manual Then proceed to Installing the Model 1 Robot Assembly in the Library Installing the Model 1 Robot Assembly in the Library Required tools e Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e T10 TORX screwdriver for loosening and tightening the thumbscrew that attaches the cable spool clip to the robot assembly 1 Place the robot assembly on top of the control module at an angle as shown below This position keeps the cable from kinking when you attach the cable spool in the next step a66mi206 Figure 7 76 Robot Assembly on top of Control Module 2 Reattach the cable spool to the robot assembly using the thumbscrew on the cable spool clip Use the T10 TORX screwdriver to tighten the thumbscrew until the attached lock washers compress Do not over tighten as this could break the thumbscrew 3 Lift the robot from the center of the tray and hold it at a 3
557. scription of the problem and suggestions for resolving it The sections below offer more information than will be displayed in an Operator Intervention on the Operator Panel Refer to this information for additional help in resolving problems Check your host for Sense Data and refer to Drive Sense Data on page B 6 Important It is recommended that Service Action Tickets not be allowed to accumulate in the Operator Intervention reports After an incident has been resolved or repaired the Service Action Ticket should be closed T001 Tape Cartridge Stuck in Picker Motion OK Description GUI Description A tape is stranded in the Picker Assembly and must be removed to continue operations Explanation The robot is not logically expecting to see a tape in the picker but the tape presence sensor indicates otherwise The tape cannot legitimately be returned to a home slot nor can it be placed in a destination slot The volser may be unknown or the library may be full or changing the host s inventory is disruptive Detection Scenarios 1 The Picker becomes enabled after a door is opened or the library system boots up and discovers that the cartridge present sensor detects a cartridge 2 The system has tried to recover from a PUT failure and wants to return the cartridge to a home slot however the home slot recovery logic completes without recovery home slot is a drive or the I O Station is open or the I O Station is full
558. seat if necessary all of the connectors on the back of the operator panel See H Hl H and in Figure 6 10 a66mi088 Figure 6 10 Operator panel connectors 2 Visually check and reseat if necessar the connector on the back of the I O Station lock assembly See iJ in Figure 6 11 on page 6 34 Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 33 N Q E oO Figure 6 11 I O Station lock assembly connector top cover removed 3 Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the connectors_on the front of the Backplane Connect Board BCB See H H and in Figure 6 12 on page 6 35 6 34 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi083 Figure 6 12 Backplane Connect Board connectors front top cover removed 4 Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the connectors on the back of the Backplane Connect Board See W H Ef and H in Figure 6 13 a66mi100 5 Figure 6 13 Backplane Connect Board connectors back drive sleds removed Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 35 5 Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the connectors on the Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB See J and EJ in Figure 6 14 a e E ico Figure 6 14 Drive Sled Interface Board connectors side cover removed 6 Visually check and reseat if necessary all of the connectors on the Robot Assembly e For the Robot Assembly see l the Picker Assembly see J in in Figure 6 15 on page 6
559. sen werden IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung fiir die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der IBM ver ndert bzw wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt eingebaut werden EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te m ssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden Warnung Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funk St rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafiir aufzukommen Deutschland Einhaltung des Gesetzes tiber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten G 4 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten EMVG Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU Richtlinie 2004 108 EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz iiber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten EMVG bzw der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004 108 EG fiir Ger te der Klasse A Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in tibereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG Konformitatszeichen CE zu f hren Verantwortlich fiir die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller International Business Machines Corp New Orchard Road Armonk New York 10504 Tel 914 499 1900 Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist IBM Deutschland G
560. sers Enabling this feature in an existing installation will change the presentation of the drive serial numbers to the host computer and host applications Some host operating systems and some applications software will no longer see a drive if the serial number changes by use of this feature from a previously set host configuration It will be necessary to reconfigure the host addressing application to recognize the new tape drive serial numbers Interpreting LEDs Light emitting diodes LEDs provide a visual indication about the status of certain library components LEDs can sometimes communicate that a problem exists when operator interventions cannot For example an LED can indicate a firmware problem that prohibits the library from generating operator interventions The following components of the library have LEDs e Power Button LEDs on page 6 18 e Library Control Blade LEDs on page 6 18 e Tape Drive LEDs on page 6 20 Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 17 Power Supply LEDs on page 6 22 e Picker LED on page 6 23 Some of these components may also include a fibre port link LED Power Button LEDs Two LEDs are located to the right of the library s power button Ef on the front panel of the control module L5B Type 3576 SN 1300208 a66mi079 Figure 6 1 Power button LEDs Green power ON LED H When lit this LED indicates that the library power is ON e Amber Ope
561. sled and power supplies are installed in the correct locations Removing Replacing Rack Ears Rack ears are installed on each module in a rack mounted library for weight distribution Removing the Rack Ears Complete these steps to remove the rack ears on all units of the library Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 19 1 Grasp the I O Station handle and pull it toward you until it locks in the open position 2 Remove the right rack ear F in Figure 7 17 a66ug007 Figure 7 17 Removing the rack ears Control Module shown a Remove the right rack ear thumb screws If the screws are tight use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen them b Remove the right rack ear 3 Remove the left rack ear J in Figure 7 17 a Open the left door of the library unit slightly b Grasp the hinged side of the door and while pulling on the door push right to expose the left rack ear c Remove the left rack ear thumb screws d Remove the left rack ear 4 Repeat this process for all units in the library if necessary Replacing the Rack Ears Complete these steps to replace the rack ears on all units of the library 1 Grasp the I O Station handle and pull it toward you until it locks in the open position 2 Replace the right rack ear E in Figure 7 17 a At the bottom right of the I O Station position on each library unit there is a slot H in Figure 7 17 Insert the right rack ear into the slot
562. sled to determine if the fan is still spinning Check for any obstructions T024 AC Power Loss Description GUI Description AC power to a library power supply has been turned off Explanation A power supply has detected loss of AC power AC power loss to a single power supply control module is unlikely to be able to post this ticket due to the speed at which system shut down occurs after an AC loss This Ticket is most likely to occur when there is AC loss to a redundant power supply in a control module or any supply in any expansion module 5 14 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Detection Scenarios AC power status from the supply creates an interrupt that is managed by software Root Causes 1 AC supply is gone cord removed customer side AC failure etc 2 Individual on off switch for the supply has been set to off 3 Hardware failure inside supply Possible CRU Replacements e Power Supply e Expansion Module Internal cables and boards kit Possible FRU Replacements Resolution Perform the following e DROO9 Resolve AC Failure on page 5 63 T025 Power Supply Hardware Failure Description GUI Description A defective power supply has been detected Explanation Power supplies report four failure conditions that are considered to be a hardware failure within the supply Fan Fail Over Temp DC Fail and Over Current These failures can occur in both sing
563. sn t move e Display is stuck on IBM or initialization for more than 20 minutes e Lights are not correct on back of library One of the library security settings may be disabled e From the Operator Panel Tools gt Security For more information refer to Configuring Library Security Settings in the Operating Procedures chapter of the TS3310 Setup and Operator s Guide Suspect the LCB compact flash or the power supply Chapter 1 Start Service 1 5 1 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 2 Product Description Front Panel Components on page 2 2 Rear Panel Components on page 2 5 Interior Components on page 2 Optional Features on page 2 14 Location Coordinates on page 2 28 ges on page 2 3 Multi Path Architecture on page 2 3 J o e v oO g je Q ion pa Q Specifications on page 2 3 Product Environment on page 2 37 Supported Servers Operating Systems and Software on Supported Device Drivers on page 2 38 TM The IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library offers high performance capacity and technology designed for reliability and the heavy demands of tape storage The Ultrium 5 cartridge has a native data capacity of 1500 GB 3000 GB at 2 1 compression This library is highly modular with scalability varying from the base library 5U control module with
564. so OL Battery return program xiii Removing a Battery from a SnapHat Battery Holds xv Monitor recycling or disposal Sk a XV Figures Xxiii Tables Xxvii Preface XX X Related Publications XxXix Getting Assistance Xxix Chapter 1 Start Service 1 1 Chapter 2 Product Description 2 1 Front Panel Components Soe 6 22 Control Module 3576 Model L5B soso u a DB Expansion Module 3576 Model E9U 2 3 I O Station s s s r s aon eck a 28 Access Door aaa DA Operator Panel 2 2 2 7 24 Power Button 224 Front Panel LEDs 2 4 Rear Panel Components 25 Library Control Blade LCB 25 Tape Drives s a 2 2 s og o s a20 Power Supply c c op s p P w 4 27 Interior Components 27 Storage Columns a a re Robot Assembly Designs Ag oa wo 4 28 Optional Features ak of 2 14 Ultrium Tape Drives 2 14 Redundant Power Supply Feature Code 1900 2 16 Feature Licenses 2 16 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 Location Coordinates Modules Columns Slots Drives Power Supplies Data Cartridges Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges Multi Path Architecture Using Multiple Control Paths Using Multiple Data Paths for Data Path Failover Lightweight Directory Acc s Protocol DAP Specifications i amp a Produc
565. solve Library SN Label Detection on page 5 79 Inspect the label inside the unit for damage Clear the RAS ticket Upgrade the library firmware to 400G or later and run the IVT Picker test using the Library Tests option accessed through the Operator Panel If the test passes the issue is most likely not the picker Note IVT is optimized for firmware to firmware versions 520G and above and libraries built after July 1 2008 serial numbers with last four digits 8609 and above e If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 520G or above you will not be able to run IVT test even though the selection is available PO Ns e If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 500G or below you can run the test but it is not recommended because it may produce erroneous results Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 41 T089 E mail Notification Error Description GUI Description A library initiated e mail notification did not reach its destination Explanation The user can configure the library to send an e mail to a specified address whenever a operator intervention message is generated or a configured Advanced Reporting log notification is sent This e mail will include a description of the operator intervention message and will optionally include the library current log The library will repor
566. ss A Hlechonic Emission statement ee 2 GS Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Taiwan Class A compliance statement eh SIGS Host _ E 141 Taiwan contact information G 5 Obtaining Error intention oe an RS 6000 El Japan Voluntary Control Council for Library Error Los Example ccs lt a BS Interference VCCI Class A Statement G 6 y 8 p Japan Electronics and Information Technology ae E BR a Industries Association JEITA Statement less SCSI Bus Error PUR A 2 I E5 than or equal to 20 A per phase G6 Suminar enon P ea ee E6 Japan Electronics and Information Technology y Sep oe a Industries Association JEITA Statement Retrieving from an AS 400 System with RISC ereater than 20 A per phase G6 O 2s nuo a E Korean Communications Commission KCC Retrieving from an HP UX System 2 ew E Glace A Suteen G6 PE A ENa i a a e Russia Electromagnetic nit rferenc EMI Class A Statement a a a aaa a G7 Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps F 1 Glossary 4H4 Notices GA Index ee ee ee ee ee XA Trademarks G2 xxii 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figures I 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5
567. ss of connection to robot i e unplugged cable spool or equivalent 2 Broken connection to Y motor 3 Numerous hardware failures on the picker assembly Possible CRU Replacements Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Module Terminators and Module to Module Cables e Cable Spool e Robot Assembly 5 34 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Resolution Perform DR031 Resolve Robot Initialization Failure on T077 I O Station Partially Partially Open Description GUI Description The I O station is in a partially open state or a cable connection has failed Explanation This ticket is specifically designed to report the problem that would occur if the cable connecting any of the I O stations is unplugged Hardware limitations make it such that and unplugged I O and a partially open I O cannot be distinguished from one another The default state of the open and closed door sensors is such that only the partially open state looks like the unplugged state door not open door not closed The detection logic will check for this condition only at boot up to avoid triggering the ticket during any operational door open close sequence Detection Scenario Any time the library boots up it checks for the state of the I O open and close sensors to see if there is a not open and not closed condition Root Causes 1 I O station safety flap broken or loose 2 I O station
568. ssued a TapeAlert 5 indicating an unrecoverable read error where isolation is uncertain between drive and media Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 5 which is recognized by the library during the continuous 4 second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 19 Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR045 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 5 6 Read Write Failure on 5 77 T036 Drive TapeAlert Flag 6 Write Failure Description GUI Description The drive can no longer write data to a tape Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 6 indicating an unrecoverable write error where isolation is uncertain between drive and media Detection Scenarios Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 6 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes Drive has determined that there is a problem per its internal algorithms Possible CRU Replacements Tape Cartridge Resolution Perform DR045 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 5 6 Read Write Failure on page B77 T037 Drive TapeAlert Flag 8 Not Data Grade Description Detection Scenarios GUI Description The drive cannot use a tape because it is n
569. status of the library and include configuration settings and information provided in Operator Interventions To email current logs 1 To capture a library log from the Web User Interface select Service Library gt Capture Library Log 2 Click the Email the file to button and enter the email address in the entry field 3 Click the Capture Log button Resetting the Admin Password The default customer Admin password is secure but the customer can change it If they forget what they changed it to they need to call Service for a reset You will change the password the same way a customer would only via the Service menu 1 Log in as a Service user using the default Service login and password 2 Go to the user management screen as follows e From the Operator Panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User e From the Web client select Manage Access gt Users 3 Follow the screens to modify a user choosing Admin as the user to modify 4 Enter the new password twice in the Enter Password and Confirm Password text boxes 5 If using the Operator Panel in the Current Password text box enter the service password you used to log in then click Apply 6 If using the Web client click the OK button Saving Restoring System Configuration The Save Restore Configuration operation is available only on the web client The path to open the appropriate screen is from the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Settings
570. such SAS attachment is by far the easiest interface to understand and to correct problems Currently the SAS interface provides 3 Gb s maximum speed over the interface In the future the ability to perform a diagnostic wrap of the signal will be provided In the meantime isolation will depend upon whether the problem is solid or intermittent If the problem you are having is solid refer to Fixing a Solid Error with One Drive on a SAS Connection If the problem you are having is intermittent refer to Fixing an Intermittent Error with One Drive on a SAS Connection The LTO 4 SAS drives use an SFF 8088 type connector Each SAS tape drive should be connected directly to a SAS host bus adapter HBA using one SAS cable The library does not support the use of SAS expander devices or cables at this time Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 57 D 58 Fixing a Solid Error with One Drive on a SAS Connection 1 10 11 Verify that the power is ON to the drive a Verify that the library is powered ON b Verify that the power supplies in the module containing the failing drive are ON c Verify that the drive is fully seated in the library chassis Determine if the drive is experiencing a hang condition a If a cartridge is in the drive press the unload button e If the cartridge ejects the drive does not have a hang condition go to step 5 e If the cartridge does not eject go to step 3 b If there is no c
571. t 00 02 EOM A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical end of tape was encountered or a Read or Space command encountered EOM The EOM flag is set 00 04 BOM A space command ended at Beginning of Tape The EOM bit is also set 00 05 EOD Read or Space command terminated early because End of Data was encountered 04 00 Cause not reportable A cartridge is present in the drive but it is in the process of being unloaded 04 01 Becoming Ready A media access command was received during a front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command 04 02 Initializing Command Required A cartridge is present in the drive but is not logically loaded A Load command is required 04 03 Manual Intervention Required A cartridge is present in the drive but could not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention 0C 00 Write Error A Write operation has failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 00 Unrecovered Read Error A Read operation failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 12 Auxiliary memory read error The drive reported that it is unable to read the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found A space or Locate command failed because a format violation prevented the target from being found 14 03 End Of Data not found A Read type operation failed because a format violation related to a missi
572. t Picker Assembly Resolution Perform M2 Picker Assembly on page 7 82 for M2 picker or Original Picker Assembly on page 7 58 T142 Robotics Y Axis Hardware Failure Description GUI Description The robotic Y axis gear failed to perform proper motion Explanation Movement of the robot assembly along the Y axis is accomplished using the Y carriage assembly which contains the Y motor The Y motor has a gear that is attached directly to the motor shaft Failure or degradation of this Y motor gear is the failure mode for this ticket Detection Scenarios Robotics firmware reports a specific hardware error identifying the Y carriage assembly or Y Motor hardware as the source Root Cause Failure or degradation of the Y motor gear that drives the robot assembly along the y axis Possible FRU Replacement Y carriage Assembly if Model 1 robot is installed or Robot Assembly if Model 2 robot is installed Resolution Perform M2 Robot Assembly on page 7 77 for M2 robot assembly or Removing the Y axis Picker Assembly on page 7 54 and Y axis Picker Assembly on page 7 56 for the Model 1 5 56 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T143 Unlabeled Cartridge Detected Description GUI Description An unlabeled tape cartridge or unreadable tape cartridge barcode label has been detected Explanation During library initialization or after a main door c
573. t Description 2 39 2 40 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 3 Library Components Become familiar with each of these components and how they can be accessed for service Ss A o o R Front view I O Station Door Open on page 3 2 n o o R w oO D R S oO z 5 ge D Fa oO P N n E as O Ce A 5 tc e O gt v n 3 ion lt Q oO D R ya D la X g A Ol 5 gej D oO Se Q I O Station with Slide Assembly on page 3 Access Door Inside With Operator Panel on page 3 on page 3 6 Y Axis Picker Assembly and M2 Robot Assembly on page 3 6 Cable Spool Assembly on page 3 9 Library Control Blade LCB on page 3 10 Compact Flash Card on LCB on page 3 1 Power Supply on page 3 12 Drive Sleds Rear Panel on page 3 13 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 3 1 14U Library Front view I O Station Door Open y ise i Figure 3 1 Front view of a 14U library with the I O Station door open Library Rear View a66ug043 Figure 3 2 Rear view of a 5U library 3 2 1TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information o fe 6 Figure 3 3 Rear view of a 14U library I O Station Lock Assembly CAILL Vip a66mi047 Figure 3 4 I O Station Lock Assembly installed in the library
574. t Environment Maintenance Plan Maintenance Start s Supported Servers operaie Systems and Software Supported Device Drivers Chapter 3 Library Components 14U Library Front view I O Station Door Open Library Rear View ewe Go at ee 2 I O Station Lock Assembly I O Station with Slide Assembly Pa Access Door Inside With Operator Panel Gear Rack Y Axis Picker Assembly wid M2 Robot Assembly Cable Spool Assembly 2 4 oe 44 Library Control Blade LCB Compact Flash Card on LCB Power Supply Drive Sleds Rear Panel Chapter 4 User Interfaces Operator Panel Operator Panel Login Screen Common Operator Panel Elements Keyboards Home Page Menus Available Fom ihe Operator Panel Web User Interface UI oug Logging in to the Web User Interface Common Header Elements Menus Available from the Web User Triterfa e User Privileges Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx Service Action Tickets 2 28 2 29 2 29 lt 2 30 2 30 2 30 2 31 2 33 2 33 2 34 2 34 2 35 2 36 2 37 2 38 2 38 2 38 2 38 3 4 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 8 4 10 5 1 5 1 T001 Tape Cartridge Stuck in Picker Motion OK 5 1 xvii xviii T002 PUT Operation Failed Final Cartridge Position Unknown Motion OK ng T003 GET Operation Failed
575. t any value from 1 to 24 The default threshold is 3 e If you do not check Enable Test Delay Reporting the library will never generate a RAS ticket no matter how many tests are missed Enabling Drive Logical Serial Number Addressing From the Operator Panel Tools gt System Settings gt Logical SN Addressing Administrative users can enable or disable tape driver logical serial number addressing from the Operator Panel only The default setting is Disabled Logical serial number addressing allows the library to assign logical serial numbers to all tape drives in the library Specifically the library assigns a logical serial number to a tape drive in a specific location not the serial number of the particular tape drive If a tape drive is replaced by another tape drive in the same library location the logical serial number remains the same From the host application s perspective the replacement tape drive is the same as the original By default logical serial number addressing is disabled This feature can be enabled and disabled from the operator panel by navigating to the System Settings screen from the Tools tab If you change the logical serial number addressing setting you must shut down the library and press the library power button power cycle the library or remove power from each tape drive for the change to take effect Important Use caution with this feature as it can be accessed by both Admin and Service login u
576. t for operating storing anal shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge 2 33 Physical specifications for the library 2 36 Library component weight 2 36 Power specifications for a 5U Control Module and 9U Expansion Module 2 37 Other specifications for the library 2 37 Environmental specifications for the library 2 37 Cable Spool Assembly components 3 9 Tape Library Operator Panel Menu Tree 4 7 Menus available from the Web User Interface 48 System Functions Commands and hiccbss 4 10 Methods of Capturing Drive 6 11 LCB LEDs 6 19 Amber LED on an LCB s a BM woe 2620 Tape Drive Activity 621 Fibre Port Link LED on Tape Dive 6 22 Power Supply LEDs s 623 Robot Assembly connectors 6 37 M2 Robot Assembly connectors 6 39 Library FRUs and CRUs 7 1 Servicing library components Library slate required ss 4 aos onp m oeoa a 2 72 Service activity a a o e a c 81 Power Cords 9 4 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive Al Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ B 1 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 B 2 C 1 C 2 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 D 12 D 13 D 14 D 15 D 16 E 1 E 2 F 1 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data Control module CM power requirements Typical expansion module EU power requirements Meaning of Status Light and Single character Display
577. t this operator intervention message if it receives any error codes when trying to send out this e mail This operator intervention message indicates that there is something wrong with the customer s internal network or its settings but there is no error on the library side Note that the library cannot detect all errors that could occur on a network but can determine if the e mail was successfully sent to the mail server on the network Detection Scenario e Any time a RAS ticket is generated and the library has been configured to generate a RAS email e Any time a Advanced Reporting Notification has been configured and the scheduled sending of such log s experiences an error Root Causes e Email settings on the library are not correct e The library is not connected to the network e Library is plugged into the wrong network port e Network cable is damaged e E mail server is down e Some other configuration error on the customer s network Resolution Perform DR053 Resolve Network Configuration Issue on page 5 80 T090 Invalid Cleaning Tape Description GUI Description A non cleaning tape cartridge was used to attempt to clean the drive System determines that the tape used to attempt to clean a drive is not a cleaning tape This ticket differs from the Tape Alert 23 ticket T048 in that this ticket will be generated anytime a non cleaning tape is used to clean a drive not just in the case where
578. t until the operation completes 2 Take the entire library including all drives and logical libraries offline e To take each logical library offline using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Logical Library Mode e To take each drive offline using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode 3 Shut down the library from the Operator Panel by selecting Operations gt Shutdown The System Shutdown window appears In the System Shutdown window select Shutdown and click Apply In the System Shutdown Confirmation window click Yes Press the power button located on the front of the control module Toggle each power supply switch to the OFF O position ONO e Disconnect the library s power cords from their electrical source TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Powering the Library ON 1 2 3 Connect all power cords to their electrical source Toggle the power switch on each power supply to the ON 1 position Press the power switch located on the front door of the library s control module CM The Operator Panel will display Working while the library performs the Power On Self Test POST The POST takes several minutes When the library is ready for operations the login screen displays on the Operator Panel See Operator Panel Login Screen on page 4 1 Restarting the Library 1 o Using the library s Operator Panel ensure that no applications are accessing the
579. take up reel go to Tape Broken in Mid tape on page 7 138 If there is less than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the take up reel cut off the excess tape as close to the leader pin as possible Locate the threader motor worm gear E in Figure 7 150 the rear of the drive You can either a Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear J in Figure 7 150 clockwise or b Use a 1 flathead screwdriver to turn the threader worm gear E in Figure 7 150 clockwise TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information This rotates the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 clockwise drawing the tape leader block assembly LBA into the cartridge 4 As the LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear J in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench H in Figure 7 151 a82ru008 Figure 7 151 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 5 Notice the following a Loader mechanism gear EJ in Figure 7 150 on page 7 136 nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader me
580. tape cartridge cartridges see Error Code 6 in 16 Forced eject No Set when you manually unload No action required the tape cartridge while the drive was reading or writing 17 Media loaded is No Set when a cartridge marked as No action required Read only format read only is loaded into the drive The flag is cleared when the cartridge is ejected A 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table A 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number Flag SNMP Trap _ Description Action Required 18 Tape directory No Set when the drive detects that Re read all data from the tape to corrupted in the the tape directory in the rebuild the tape directory cartridge memory cartridge memory has been corrupted 19 Nearing media life No Set when the tape cartridge is 1 Copy the data to another nearing its specified end of life tape cartridge The flag is cleared when the 2 Repl Der trid cartridge is removed from the MSpace ETAPE CATIES drive 20 Clean now No Set when the tape drive detects Clean the tape drive that it needs cleaning 21 Clean periodic No Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as needs routine cleaning possible The drive can continue to operate but you should clean the drive soon 22 Expired clean No Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge cleaning cartridge that
581. tate and is thereby canceled Synonymous with differential HVD SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential Hz Hertz cycles per second IBM LTO Ultrium 4 Half High Tape Drive Located within the library a data storage device that controls the movement of the magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge The drive houses the mechanism drive head that reads and writes data to the tape ID Identifier identifier ID 1 In programming languages a lexical unit that names a language object for example the names of variables arrays records labels or procedures An identifier usually consists of a letter optionally followed by letters digits or other characters 2 One or more characters used to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element 3 A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program device or system to another program device or system IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IML Initial microprogram load Glossary H 7 H 8 initial microprogram load IML The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable control storage initiator The component that executes a command The initiator can be the host system or the tape control unit INST Installation interface A shared boundary An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more com
582. tc Possible FRUs 1 Picker Assembly if Model 1 or Model 2 robot is installed 2 Robot Assembly if Model 2 robot is installed 3 Cable Spool Resolution Perform DR089 Resolve X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure on page 5 88 T124 Robotics Hardware Error RCB Description This ticket occurs with Model 2 robots only GUI Description A servo hardware error has been isolated to the robot controller board 5 50 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Detection Scenario Robotics firmware reports a specific hardware error identifying the Robot Controller Board as the source Root Causes Electrical hardware failure Possible FRUs 1 Robot Assembly 2 Cable Spool Resolution Perform DR090 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error RCB on page 5 88 T125 Robotics Hardware Error Picker Description GUI Description A servo hardware error has been detected in the picker mechanism Explanation A servo hardware error has been isolated to the robotics picker mechanism Detection Scenario Robotics firmware reports a specific hardware error identifying the Picker assembly electronics as the source Root Causes Electrical hardware failure Possible FRUs e Picker Assembly if Model 1 or Model 2 robot is installed e Robot Assembly if Model 2 robot is installed Resolution Perform DRO091 Resolve Robotics Hardware Error
583. tch what is expected Root Causes e User installed a drive from a different brand library e User did not purchase the drive from an official TS3310 sales channel e Drive sled does not have the correct configuration information programmed Possible FRU Replacement Drive sled Resolution Perform DR068 Resolve Incompatible Tape Drive on page 5 81 T109 Drive Firmware Update Failure Description GUI Description A tape drive firmware update failed Explanation Tape drive firmware can be upgraded by using a FMR tape or by downloading the firmware to a drive through the web user interface the I O blade or by means of a host utility After the upgrade process is complete the library checks to verify that the drive reports the new firmware version If not this ticket is generated This ticket is generated only when the user upgrades the drive firmware manually and does not apply when the drive firmware is upgraded by autoleveling Detection Scenario After a drive firmware updated the new version from the drive does not differ from the old version Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 45 Root Causes e The firmware image that was used to update the drive was the same as what was already installed on the drive e A firmware upgrade cartridge with an incompatible firmware version wrong generation drive type etc was used e The fir
584. te protect switch faces you see in Figure D 2 4 Slide the cartridge into the tape load compartment Note a If the cartridge is already in an ejected position and you want to reinsert it remove the cartridge then insert it again b If the cartridge is already loaded and you cycle the power turn it OFF then ON the tape will reload a82ru005 Figure D 2 Inserting a cartridge into the drive Removing a Tape Cartridge To remove a tape cartridge 1 Ensure that the drive is powered ON 2 Press the Unload Button The drive rewinds the tape and partially ejects the cartridge The Status Light flashes green while the tape rewinds then goes out before the cartridge partially ejects 3 After the cartridge partially ejects grasp the cartridge and remove it Whenever you unload a tape cartridge the drive writes any pertinent information to the cartridge memory Using Ultrium Media To ensure that your IBM Ultrium Tape Drive conforms to IBM s specifications for reliability use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges You may use other LTO certified data cartridges but they may not meet the standards of reliability that are established by IBM The IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge can not be used in other IBM non LTO Ultrium tape products Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 5 a67b0022 Figure D 3 The IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge LTO cartridge memory a chip that contains information about th
585. tected in a slot that is not assigned to any logical library and is therefore not accessible by the library or by any host application Troubleshooting Steps 1 Go to the Monitor System gt Library Map screen in the Web User Interface to view the logical library map 2 Open the main library door and look for cartridges in slots that are not included in any logical library per the Library Map 3 Manually remove any of these cartridges and if desired insert them back into the library DR075 Resolve Installation amp Verification Test Warning Problem The Installation amp Verification Test returned a result indicating that one of the tests was not successful The library is still functional and can be used normally however this may be an indication of a developing problem Troubleshooting Steps 1 Review the ticket details and the Installation amp Verification Test logs to determine which library component failed 2 Check if any new RAS tickets have been generated against the failed component If so contact Service for further assistance in resolving this issue 3 Monitor the library for any further problems with this component If no further RAS tickets are generated the library can continue to be used normally DR076 Resolve Get Failure Problem The library robot has failed during a move media while trying to get a tape Operations can continue but the tape should be manually removed
586. ted under the Service Library menu tree on the IBM UI When the log files reach their maximum size the oldest information is deleted as new information is added This can affect how much historical data you can access e The on screen report contains a chart and a data table When the log files are large it can take a long time to load all the historical data into the data table Therefore the table only contains data for the previous seven days even if you select a range longer than seven days The graph however displays information for the entire range To view all of the data you must save or email the data file For more information on saving and emailing the data file see Saving and Emailing Advanced Reporting e The reports are built according to data in the log files not data in the current library configuration Therefore your library may contain tape drives or cartridges that do not show up in the report Similarly the report may contain tape drives and cartridges that no longer reside in the library e Information about a tape drive cartridge or operation is not recorded in the Drive Utilization log file until after a tape cartridge has been mounted loaded and unmounted unloaded from the tape drive Drive Utilization Reporting The Drive Utilization function records drive read and write history which can be used to identify drives or groups of drives that are nearing 100 utilization It also identifies drive
587. ter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 85 o ite aly E oO Figure 7 94 Slide cable to the rear Replacing the Picker Assembly onto the M2 Robot Assembly Outside of a Library 1 Place the Picker Assembly adjacent to the M2 Robot Assembly on a bench 2 Connect the flex cables to the Robot Controller Board a Slide the cables under the plastic guide see Figure 7 95 on page 7 87 7 86 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information oO ite E Figure 7 95 Slide the cables under the plastic guide b Connect the cables Note the guideline on the blue backer of the flex cable See Figure 7 96 on page 7 88 When fully inserted the guideline on the flex cable will be flush with the edge of the connector Press down on the back latch on the connector to lock the cable into place See Figure 7 97 on page Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 87 a66mi137 a66mi159 Figure 7 97 Connect and lock the flex cable 3 Close the Cable protector 7 88 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information 4 Connect the Picker Assembly to the M2 Robot Assembly a Position the Picker Assembly at the front of the M2 Robot Assembly b Locate the slot feature on the Picker Assembly and slide it over the sheet metal edge on the M2 Robot Assembly 1 The slot is indicated by in Figure 7 98 o 3 oO Figure 7 98 Slot on the Picker Assembly 2
588. ters such as punctuation marks alter To change ambient temperature The temperature of air or other media in a designated area particularly the area surrounding equipment ampere A A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb per second or to the current produced by one volt applied across a resistance of one ohm ANSI American National Standards Institute archive To collect and store files in a designated place ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit coded character set 8 bits including parity check that consists of control characters and graphic characters Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2011 H 1 assigning a device The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task process job or program assignment The naming of a specific device to perform a function asynchronous Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals attention notice A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program device or system or to data Contrast with caution and danger ATTN Attention backup To make additional copies of documents or software for safekeeping bar code A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which are read optically by transverse scanning bar code label Paper bearing a bar
589. the drive requires cleaning and posts a Tape Alert 23 Detection Scenario After loading a tape to clean a drive the system notices that cleaning has not begun within 30 seconds Root Causes e User or library attempts to mount a cleaning tape but the tape is not actually a cleaning tape e User mistakenly loads a data tape as a cleaning tape e Inventory or application issue results in data tape being loaded when drive expects cleaning tape Resolution Perform DR077 Resolve Invalid Cleaning Tape on page 5 83 5 42 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T091 Tape Alert 56 Unload Failure Description GUI Description The tape drive encountered a problem while unloading a tape cartridge Explanation When attempting to unload a tape a drive brick hardware malfunction can prevent the tape from being ejected The tape may actually be stuck in the drive Detection Scenario After unsuccessfully attempting to unload a tape the drive generates a Tape Alert 56 which is noticed by the library Root Causes e A drive hardware error that prevents the tape from being unloaded e A damaged tape that cannot be unloaded from the drive Possible FRU Replacements e Drive sled Resolution Perform DRO78 Resolve Tape Load Unload Failure on page 5 83 T092 Unreadable Branding Identifier Description GUI Description The library could not read the branding
590. the picker assembly towards the tape drives Remove the tape cartridge and close the library main access doors Wait for the library to initialize Insert the tape into the appropriate logical library If a tape cartridge was removed continue operations ON on If there was no tape cartridge in the picker assembly it is most likely that the tape presence sensor in the picker assembly is malfunctioning Contact Service for assistance 9 Choose one of the following options e Select Close to close the ticket e Select Exit to leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution If there is no cartridge in the Picker when you investigate it is likely that the cartridge present sensor in the Picker is malfunctioning Remove and replace the Picker Refer to M2 Picker Assembly on page 7 82 a66ug081 Figure 5 1 Gear thumbwheel DR002 Resolve Tape Cartridge Recovery Problem The library robot has failed during a move media operation The tape cartridge must be manually recovered before operations can continue 5 60 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Troubleshooting Step 1 Open the main Access Door s and find the cartridge It may be stranded between the Picker and the source or destination of the move Recover the cartridge Inspect slots for any obstruction Close the main access doors and wait for the system to complete initializat
591. the tape drive throat which re arms the load mechanism of the tape drive Two subsequent problems can occur The over ejected tape can become an obstruction hazard for robot moves In addition the robot get operations can then re trigger the tape drive load mechanism by bumping the tape during a get There can be a tug of war between robot and tape drive or the tape drive can win the tug of war resulting in the loading of a phantom tape When the tape drive loads a phantom tape there are resulting tape drive errors The goal of reporting this problem is to identify tape drives that over eject tapes to avoid the two types of problems Detection Scenarios Library checks drive status prior to moving to perform a GET If is trying to determine if the drive is in an unloaded state and if a cartridge is present If a cartridge is not reported as present the library can assume it was over ejected Root Causes The drive eject process did not result in the proper positioning of the ejected cartridge Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Resolution Perform the following 1 Removing a Drive Sled on page 7 42 2 Replacing a Drive Sled on page 7 43 T012 Drive Unload Control Prevented Description GUI Description A host issued a SCSI Prevent Allow Media Removal command which is preventing the drive from unloading a tape cartridge Explanation The library needs to issue a command to the drive such as
592. the upper right hand corner of the flap to the left to remove the pivot pin HJ in Figure 7 38 from the pivot hole H in Figure 7 38 lt o Figure 7 38 I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin 4 Move the flap to the right to remove the pivot pin f in Figure 7 39 on page 7 38 from the pivot hole E in Figure 7 39 on page 7 38 Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures The flap can now be 7 37 removed from the library a66mi111 Figure 7 39 I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin Removed Replacing the I O Station Safety Flap in a Control Module 5U Perform Removing the I O Station Safety Flap from a Control Module 5U on page 7 36 in the reverse order When installing the bottom flap position the spring in Figure 7 40 as shown a66mi112 Figure 7 40 I O Station Safety Flap Bottom Spring position 7 38 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Removing the I O Station Safety Flap from an Expansion Module 9U 1 Perform Removing an 1 0 Station on page 734 2 Unhook the front spring wire J in Figure 7 41 from the tab on the I O flap a66mi117 Figure 7 41 I O Safety Flap Front Spring Wire 3 Unhook the rear spring wire H in Figure 7 41 from the notch in the frame 4 Disconnect the plastic link iJ in Figure 7 42 on page 7 40 from the bottom Ey in Figure 7 42 on page 7 40 Use a small screwdriver H in Figure 7 42 on page 7 40 to pr
593. tic cable guide h Carefully remove the cable assembly from the enclosure 7 Remove the cable assemblies between the Power Supplies the Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB and the Backplane Connector Board BCB by following these procedures a Remove the Cable Spool Assembly on page 7 110 b Remove the hex stand off see in Figure 7 141 on page 7 126 from behind the Cable Spool Assembly This requires a 5 mm 3 16 inch wrench Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 125 a66mi104 Figure 7 141 Hex stand off behind the Cable Spool Assembly c Remove the cable retainers H in Figure 7 142 on page 7 127 and j in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 Note The cable retainers may be black rubber O rings as shown or white plastic beaded cable ties If they are the white cable ties it will be necessary to cut them off and replace them with new cable retainers included in the new FRU kit 7 126 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi100 N 3 R S Figure 7 143 Drive Sled Interface Board DSIB Side Cover Removed Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 127 7 128 Remove cable connectors J77 in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 and J79 H in Figure 7 143 on page 7 127 Pinch the lower part of the connector press towards the front and slide down to remove the connector from the frame Unplug the 2 connectors P17 and P19 from the BCB see H and
594. tion Key Translate EF 1A Encryption Key Optional EF CO Encryption No Operation 26 10 Encryption Data Decryption Key Fail Limit 2A 13 Encryption Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed 74 00 Security Error 74 01 Encryption Unable to Decrypt Data 74 02 Encryption Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting 74 03 Encryption Incorrect Data Encryption Key 74 04 Encryption Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed 74 05 Encryption Error Decrypting Data 14 FRU code 15 SKSV C D Reserved BPV Bit pointer When set to 1 the bit pointer is valid 16 17 SKSV 0 First Error Fault Symptom Code FSC SKSV 1 Field Pointer 18 19 First Error Flag Data 20 Reserved 0 21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid 22 28 Volume Label 29 Current Wrap 30 33 Relative LPOS 34 SCSI Address 35 Frame number Drive number The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape drive This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI standards Appendix B Sense Data B 11 Note i 10 11 12 13 14 The Error Code field Byte 0 is set to 70h to indicate a current error that is one associated with the most recently received command It is set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the current command The segment number Byte 1 is zero since the Copy Compare and Copy and Verify commands are not supported
595. tion Perform DR089 Resolve X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure on T123 Robotics X Z Theta Axis Motion Failure No Tape in Picker Description GUI Description An X Z or Theta axis motion error occurred which does not seem to be the result of a robotic obstruction Explanation An x z or theta axis motion error that cannot be considered a complete obstruction has been reported by robotics Because a tape is not in the picker tape recovery is not necessary as part of the resolution strategy This ticket may occur during a robotics move or during a robotics get or put Detection Scenario k A specified move in the x z or theta axis cannot complete 2 Robotics firmware reports an x z or theta axis error condition Root Causes 1 A physical obstruction in the path of the robot s motion Examples include tape cartridges that are extending from the picker assembly or from a storage location as well as tape cartridges or debris that may have collected on the floor of the library 2 A large number of electrical hardware failures Firmware or hardware detects that motion control is not occurring properly encoder issues motor driving circuits motor winding issues etc 3 A relatively small number of mechanical hardware failures that do not result in the detection of a complete obstruction but where motion control generates robotics firmware error codes contamination or damage to encoder wheel high friction e
596. tion carefully Experience has demonstrated that most questions are answered in your documentation Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware has worked properly at anytime in the past Have you changed anything recently Pinpoint the exact location of your problem if possible Note the steps that led to the problem Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one time occurrence Note any error messages displayed Write down the exact error message If at all possible call while at your computer with the library installed and turned ON If running on a network have all relevant information available that is type version number network hardware and so on Be prepared to provide Machine type and Model name s Serial number of the library front of the control module on the label underneath the power button Software version numbers Device driver information Host application name and version Hardware configuration including firmware versions date and number Type of host operating system version clock speed RAM network type network version and any special boards installed A brief description of the problem including Service Action Ticket number Txxx Having this information available when you call for customer assistance will enable support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient manner possible e To contact IBM Technical Support In the USA 1
597. tion checkbox inventory then select Al If media is detected it is assumed to have e On the Web User Interface select the an unreadable barcode Enable Unlabeled Media Detection checkox then select All 3 On the Operator Panel click Apply or for the web user interface click Submit Changes Importing Unassigned Media Media is considered unassigned when it is placed into the O station and not assigned to a partition When you place cartridges into the O station and close the door the local Operator Panel displays a window asking you to assign the cartridge s to a partition If you cancel out of the screen and do not assign the media to any partition the cartridges remain unassigned Alternatively if you disable manual cartridge assignment Operator Panel Tools gt System Settings the screen asking you to assign cartridges to a partition does not appear and the cartridges in the O station remain unassigned From the web client you can import unassigned media into the library only if manual cartridge assignment is disabled This applies to both regular media and cleaning media Note Whether manual cartridge assignment is enabled or disabled if there are multiple unassigned tape cartridges in the O station and you only select some of them to import into the library they will ALL be assigned to the first partition that you select However only the ones you select for import will actually be moved into the li
598. tion to post the operator intervention message The library does not have the capability of displaying the location of the open drive bay Detection Scenario e Missing drive cover plate e Drive cover is loose or ajar and not electrically connected Root Causes e User removed the panel and forgot to put it back e Cover plate was not put on securely and the electrical connection is not solid e The cover plate is damaged in such a way that the electrical connection cannot be made e Drive pulled back Possible CRU Drive cover plate Resolution Perform DR054 Resolve Open Drive Bay on page 5 80 T095 Installation and Verification Test IVT Failure Description GUI Description A sub test failed during the Installation amp Verification Test Explanation The library contains a verification test that can be run to validate that the system has been installed properly and is up and running Errors can occur during this test The library will post this ticket whenever an error occurs during this Installation amp Verification Test that does not affect the overall functionality of the library It is more of a warning that a problem may be developing Detection Scenario During the Installation amp Verification Test run any library error occurs that is not already handled by an existing RAS ticket Root Causes Any function that is executed by the Installation amp Verification Test t
599. to ship condition in order to establish the serial number It is also done on subsequent bootups to confirm that the compact flash memory card is in the proper library The library will report this operator intervention message when it cannot read the library serial number but it has confirmed functionality of the barcode reading system by successfully reading some other barcode label in the library and it has the library serial number stored in memory from a previous successful read When this operator intervention message is posted the user can be confident that at least one other barcode label has been read For example barcodes that can be used the check functionality are e WWN or SN in control modules e OID in expansion modules Different tickets will be posted if there are motion related problems scanner communication problems and so on Detection Scenario Any power up System memory already has a valid SN established for the LCB Root Causes e Label is damaged e Label is missing e Label is physically obstructed e Label is readable but does not meet minimum criteria to be considered a library SN label e Scanner cannot read the serial number label Possible CRU Replacements e LCB Flash Memory e LCB Possible FRU Replacement e Module EM or CM only dispatch this FRU if the label is missing or damaged e Picker Assembly e Y carriage Assembly Resolution Perform DR051 Re
600. to ship condition When T013 is posted the library cannot operate normally Different tickets will be posted if there are motion related problems scanner communication problems etc 1 At first power ON during installation the library must establish the serial number for the first time There may be no serial number in system memory at this point 2 At any power up system memory already has a serial number established for the Library Control Blade 3 A Library Control Blade is improperly swapped into a different physical library and the system reads the physical library label Root Causes Library Control Blades swapped between libraries Label is damaged misaligned or placed on the cartridge incorrectly Bar code scanner not working properly ONS Entire communication path to bar code scanner is not working properly Possible CRU Replacements Library Control Blade Possible FRU Replacements e Picker Assembly e Y Motor e Y axis Assembly e Y axis Cable Spool e Internal Cables and Boards Kit Note The system serial number label is part of the enclosure FRU Resolution T014 I O Station Magazine Missing Description GUI Description A library I O station has been closed with a magazine missing Explanation There is a fixed bar code label location on the I O Station structure behind the removable magazines It decodes as XXX The purpose of the label is to allow the library to
601. topka Madia Media Library Mode Load Unload rozoga Drive Drive Mode a66mi062 Figure 4 6 Operations menu screen e The Tools menu consists of commands that you can use to maintain your library such as viewing operator interventions capturing the library snapshot available to Service logon only identifying ports and updating firmware using an FMR Firmware cartridge The Admin login has access to the Setup Operations and Tools menus The Tools menu includes the service functions that can be executed by the Admin or Service login Only the Service login has access to the Service menu The Service menu includes the same service functions that are available on the Tools gt Service menu 4 6 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 4 7 Tools menu screen Operator Intervention About Library J Service j System Settings Factory jj Library Defaults j Tests j x Library Drives a Internal Network j Display Settings j a66mi066 The following menu tree shows all functions available from the Operator panel interface Table 4 1 Tape Library Operator Panel Menu Tree B Setup Logical Library Mgmt User Mgmt Drive Settings Licenses Date amp Time Network Mgmt Control Path B Operations Move Media Insert Media Remove Media Insert Cleaning Media Remove Cleaning Media Logical Library Mode Load Drive Unload Drive Change Drive Mode Lock I O
602. tor Panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode Using the library s Web User Interface select Service Library gt Service Drives Bring Online Bring Offline For each drive that you want to take online click Bring Online Click Apply Drive Offline Using the library s Operator Panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode Using the library s Web User Interface select Service Library gt Service Drives Bring Online Bring Offline For each drive that you want to take offline click Bring Offline Click Apply Taking the Library Online 1 2 3 Using the library s Operator Panel select Operations gt Logical Library Mode Using the Web User Interface select Manage Library gt Logical Libraries Bring Online Bring Offline For each logical library that you want to take online click Bring Online Click Apply Taking the Library Offline 1 Using the library s Operator Panel select Operations gt Logical Library Mode Using the Web User Interface select Manage Library gt Logical Libraries Bring Online Bring Offline For each logical library that you want to take offline click Bring Offline Click Apply Chapter 6 Service Procedures 6 39 Resetting a Drive From the Web User Interface Service Library gt Reset Drives gt Reset From the Operator Panel Tools gt Service gt Drives gt Drive Tests gt Reset gt Select Module s gt Select Drive s Some hardware or firmware
603. tor intervention If applicable configure the testing interval time and or warning threshold to a less frequent testing period to avoid drive access contention and operator intervention generation 4 Ifa tape drive is available to initiate a test consult your user documentation to initiate a Key Path Diagnostic a If the test succeeds close this operator intervention and observe for further occurrences b If the test fails analyze the issue and correct the problem or contact Service for further assistance 5 You have three options e Select Close to close the operator intervention e Select Exit to leave the operator intervention open for future troubleshooting e Select Back to return to the Diagnostic Resolution 5 94 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Chapter 6 Service Procedures This chapter contains library diagnostic information How the Library Reports Problems on page 6 Working with Operator Intervention Messages on page 6 General Service Guidelines on page 6 Possible Safety Hazards on page 6 Electrostatic Discharge on page 6 H Q N N Ol Service Menus on page 6 Using the Service Port on page 6 9 Methods of Updating Firmware on page 6 25 Checking Reseating Cables on page 6 30 Taking the Drives Library Online Offline on page 6 3 Ko Resettin
604. tridge statistics are updated just before the cartridge is unloaded The cartridge door H in Figure 2 15 protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive Behind the door the tape is attached to a leader pin E in Figure 2 15 When the cartridge is inserted into the drive a threading mechanism pulls the pin and tape out of the cartridge across the drive head and onto a non removable take up reel The head can then read or write data from or to the tape 2 32 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information The write protect switch JJ in Figure 2 15 on page 2 32 prevents data from being written to the tape cartridge The label area E in Figure 2 15 on page 2 32 provides a location to place a label The insertion guide fJ in Figure 2 15 on page 2 32 is a large notched area that prevents the cartridge from being inserted incorrectly Generation 3 and 4 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge have a nominal cartridge life of 20 000 20k load and unload cycles Generation 2 has a nominal cartridge life of 10 000 10k load and unload cycles Generation 1 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge has a nominal cartridge life of 5000 5k load and unload cycles Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on the environm
605. trium Drives D 25 A A67E0037 Figure D 16 Attaching the leader pin to the tape Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions The drive can e Run diagnostics e Test write and read functions e Test a suspect tape cartridge e Update its own firmware e Perform other diagnostic and maintenance functions The drive must be in maintenance mode to perform these functions Attention Maintenance functions cannot be performed concurrently with read or write operations While in maintenance mode the tape drive does not accept SCSI commands from the server The tape drive does accept LDI or RS 422 commands describes each diagnostic and maintenance function that the drive can perform gives the function code which appears on the Single character Display SCD and directs you to the instructions for performing the function It is recommended that you use a customer supplied scratch blank data cartridge for diagnostic testing D 26 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table D 10 Diagnostic and maintenance functions eoi Diagnostic or Maintenance Function Instructions Location m Exit Maintenance Mode Causes the drive to become Function Code 0 Maintenance
606. try line on the AS 400 Main Menu and press Enter 2 On the System Service Tool SST screen select Start a service tool and press Enter 3 On the Start a Service Tool screen select Product activity log and press Enter 4 On the Product activity log screen select Analyze log and press Enter 5 On the Select Subsystem Data screen select Magnetic media enter the From and To time period for searching the error log and press Enter 6 On the Select Analysis Report Options screen select the following and press Enter a Report type srersssssssssicis 1 b Optional entries to include 1 Informational YES 2 StatistiGs swage ceeaceeaaaa NO c Reference code selection T OP COD ie oe 6 Hine aed 1 2 Reference codes ALL d Device selection 1 OPHON 4454 a veseeae eng ea 1 2 Device type or resource names ALL 7 On the Log Analysis Report screen enter a 5 on an error line that has a resource type of 3583 library or 3580 drive and press Enter 8 On the Display Detail Report for Resource screen press e F4 Additional Information Pressing F4 will display the machine type and serial number of the device It also will display SCSI sense data if available e F6 Hexadecimal report Pressing F6 will display the device hexadecimal data for support use e F9 Address Information Pressing F9 will display the SCSI address information
607. ts to mount a cleaning tape but the tape is not actually a cleaning tape e User mistakenly loads a data tape as a cleaning tape e Inventory or application issue results in data tape being loaded when drive expects cleaning tape Possible CRU Replacements e Tape Cartridge Resolution If the cartridge is managed by a host application export the cartridge via the host application If the cartridge is managed by the library perform the following e Remove the suspect cartridge To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Remove Cleaning Media To remove a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Cleaning Cartridges e Insert a new cartridge To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Operator Panel select Operations gt Insert Cleaning Media To insert a cleaning cartridge using the Web User Interface select Manage Cartridges gt Cleaning Cartridges T049 Drive TapeAlert 30 Hardware A Description GUI Description The tape drive detected an internal hardware problem Explanation System determines that the drive has issued a TapeAlert 30 indicating a hardware error that requires a drive power cycle before the drive might recover to a usable state Detection Scenario Tape drive issues a TapeAlert 30 which is recognized by the library during the continuous four second polling cycle of drive status Root Causes D
608. tually open 2 A number of electrical hardware failures in the door switch circuit this includes intermittent issues 3 Mechanical issues where door switch is not being made even though door is closed this includes intermittent issues 4 Disconnected module terminator or module to module cable 5 Damaged module terminator or module to module cable with bent or broken pins Possible CRU Replacements e Module to Module communication cable e Module communication terminator e Display Door and I E PCB Possible FRU Replacements e Door Interlock Switch Internal cables and boards kit Resolution Perform DR019 Resolve Open Access Door on page 5 67 5 26 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T061 Tape Alert 55 Loading Fail Description GUI Description The tape drive encountered a problem while loading a tape cartridge Explanation When loading a tape into drive a hardware malfunction can prevent the tape from being loaded in the drive or the tape may actually get stuck in the drive Detection Scenarios After loading a drive the drive generates a Tape Alert 55 which is noticed by the library Root Causes 1 A drive hardware error that prevents the tape from being loaded 2 A damaged tape that cannot be loaded into the drive Possible FRU Replacements Drive sled Resolution 1 Perform DRO78 Resolve Tape Load Unload Failure on page 5
609. ual When the problem is corrected or determined to be a server problem restore all of the fiber cables to their correct position Fixing a Consistent Error with Multiple Drives on a Fibre Channel Loop Use the following procedure to determine if all of the drives on the Fibre Channel have the problem i Use a device driver utility such as ntutil or tapeutil to verify that the drive is available and properly configured at the server 2 Determine the type of Fibre Channel topology that you are using 3 Using this guide or the service guides of associated switch hub or fiber products try to isolate which part of the Fibre Channel Storage Area Network SAN is experiencing problems Perform one of the following e If the problem exists with a large number of drives perform the following steps a Disconnect all except one failing drive on the Fibre Channel b Run the Fibre Channel wrap test to determine if a failure occurs on that drive see Function Code 6 in Function Code 6 Run Host Interface Wrap Test on page D 33 Consistent Error with a Single Drive on a Fibre Channel Loop on page D 55 c Continue to connect one drive at a time to the Fibre Channel loop When the problem is corrected restore all of the Fibre Channel cables to their correct position Fixing a Consistent Error in a Point to Point Topology i 2 Ensure that the tape drive is powered ON Ve
610. ublications visit the web at http www ibm com storage Ito IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library SCSI Reference GA32 0476 provides supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI interface IBM System Storage TS3310 Tape Library Setup and Operator Guide GA32 0477 provides information for installation and operation IBM Ultrium Device Driver Installation and User s Guide GA32 0430 provides instructions for attaching IBM supported hardware to open systems operating systems It indicates what devices and levels of operating systems are supported It also gives requirements for adapter cards and tells how to configure hosts to use the device driver All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices IBM Ultrium Device Driver Programming Reference GC35 0483 supplies information to application owners who want to integrate their open systems applications with IBM supported Ultrium hardware The reference contains information about the application programming interfaces APIs for each of the various supported operating system environments IBM Encryption Key Manager Component for the Java Platform Quick Start Guide GA76 0420 provides a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4 and LTO 5 tape drives IBM Encryption Key Manager Component for the Java Platform Introduction Planning and User s Guide GA76 0418 contains information to help you install configure and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager compon
611. uide for information A cartridge is not ejecting from a drive 1 Take the logical library to which the drive is assigned offline refer to Taking the Drives Librar Online Offline on page 6 39 2 Reset the drive see Resetting a Drive on page 6 40 If the cartridge doesn t eject continue to the next step 3 Open the I O Station door s then open the Access Door s 4 Locate the drive that will not eject the cartridge then locate the blue Unload Button on the drive 5 Press the blue Unload Button once The Status Light located to the left of the Unload Button will flash green while the drive is rewinding and unload the cartridge Tape is broken stretched folded over or wrinkled inside the cartridge 1 Replace the tape cartridge 2 Ensure that the latest available drive code is installed refer Updating Drive Firmware on page 6 27 If the problem continues replace the drive refer to Drivel Sled on page 7 42 1 2 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Problem Area If Then Firmware A firmware problem is Verify that you are running the latest levels of library and suspected drive firmware then upgrade if necessary see Methods of Updating Firmware on page 6 25 If new firmware does not resolve the problem contact your next level of support The Library firmware does 1 Power OFF the libr
612. unload reset etc are not responded to Root Causes 1 Cable broken unplugged damaged etc 2 Drive brick failure Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Resolution Clear the operator intervention If the library firmware is below 400G upgrade the library firmware to 400G or later revision of code A timing issue was addressed in the 400G library firmware which was occasionally falsely reporting T022 operator interventions If the library firmware is at 400G or later or the problem persists after upgrading to 400G or later revision code perform the following steps Perform the following 1 Removing a Drive Sled on page 7 42 2 Replacing a Drive Sled on page 7 43 T023 Drive Sled Fan Failure Description GUI Description The fan within the drive sled assembly is spinning too slowly or does not rotate at all Detection Scenarios Regular polling monitoring of the fan indicates a problem Root Causes Hardware failure of fan Wiring or PCBA failure Blocked air paths ek i DoS Physical obstruction Possible CRU Replacements Drive Sled Resolution Perform the following 1 Removing a Drive Sled on page 7 42 2 Replacing a Drive Sled on page 7 43 3 Use the Details option in the RAS ticket to identify which tape drive is generating the RAS ticket If possible check the front of the tape drive for error indications Check the suspect drive
613. up to four additional expansion units for a total of 41U height This automated tape library incorporates high performance IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives for the midrange to enterprise open systems environment The Ultrium 4 cartridge has a native data capacity of 800 GB 1600 GB at 2 1 compression IBM LTO Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write original LTO Ultrium 3 data cartridges and read LTO Ultrium 2 data cartridges The Ultrium 3 cartridge has a native data capacity of 400 GB 800 GB at 2 1 compression IBM LTO Ultrium 3 tape drives can read and write original LTO Ultrium 2 data cartridges and read LTO Ultrium 1 data cartridges The base TS3310 library contains the library control module fixed tape cartridge storage of 30 slots I O station of 6 slots a touch screen display cartridge handling robotics and up to two LTO Ultrium tape drives You can add up to 4 optional expansion modules to a control module Note Rack doors are required for any library that has more than 14 drives installed Each 9U expansion module can accommodate up to 4 LTO Ultrium Tape Drives and up to 92 tape cartridge slots including 12 configurable I O station slots This library supports LTO Ultrium 5 native switched fabric Fibre Channel attachment and LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drives with either Serial Attached SCSI SAS or native switched fabric Fibre Channel attachment for connection to a wide spectrum of open system servers This library also supports LTO Ultriu
614. upply provides power to the DIEB via the BCB interconnect Servo amp Motor Driver Boards SMDs There are two Servo amp Motor Driver Boards SMDs in the control module that perform key functions in operating the robotics assembly for selecting and moving Appendix C Library Diagrams C 3 barcode labeled cartridges The SMD1 board is a logical device that communicates with the LCB1 in moving media within the library The SMD2 board is an interconnect device between the SMD1 board and the barcode scanner and sensors This topic further describes these SMD boards The SMD1 board controls and drives the 4 motors of the library robotics e e X motor controls horizontal motion e e Y motor controls vertical motion e e Theta motor pivots the picker assembly for media selection e e Reach motor extends and contracts the picker arm assembly in moving media into and out of a slot or drive Note Although the X Y and Theta pivot motors can move concurrently the reach motor cannot operate while other motors operate The picker assembly contains the X Theta and Reach motors Also the picker assembly contains the SMD1 and SMD2 boards as well as the barcode scanner and target sensors The motion processor chip is the heart of the SMD1 board performing these functions e e This chip supports the 4 servo motion axes using AC brushless motors which extend the library s life over motors with brushes e It controls the m
615. ure Licenses When the license key is entered the total number of available slots in the library increases To verify that the number of slots did increase e From the Operator Panel view the Capacity View home screen From the Web User Interface Monitor System gt System Summary Table 2 4 Licensable cartridge slots storage and I O per model Libr Number of Number of Capacity c ad taton Available I O Accessible Total Slots Expansion i es Station Slots Storage Slots License Keys 5U library no license key control 6 30 36 required module 14U library 6 12 18 76 70 64 82 no license key control MAAE A Meoma ok expansion 6 12 18 122 116 110 128 dul the full capacity module of a 14U library 2 24 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Table 2 4 Licensable cartridge slots storage and I O per model continued Library Number of Number of Capacity Configuration Available I O Accessible Total Slots Expansion Station Slots Storage Slots License Keys 23U library 6 12 18 24 122 116 110 128 no license key control 30 104 98 module 2 9U each license key ne cones enables full modules 6 12 18 24 168 162 156 174 ity of 30 150 144 SEAR a aE 9U expansion module 2 license keys 6 12 18 24 212 206 200 218 required to enable 30 194 188 the full capacity of a 23U library 32U library 6 12 18 24 168 162 156 150 174 no license key control 30 36 42 144
616. ure 7 91 on page 7 83 on the underside of the Picker Assembly Rotate the release lever forward and lift up on the Picker Assembly It will pivot against the sheet metal edge near the drive shaft Pull to the right and remove the Picker Assembly 7 82 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information CAUTION The flex cables are still attached to the M2 Robot Assembly a66mi153 Figure 7 90 Press the release lever D xt ive Figure 7 91 Close up of the release lever Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 83 4 Once detached from the M2 Robot Assembly position the Picker Assembly next to the M2 Robot Assembly so that the flex cable is not stressed being careful not to kink or crease the cable 5 Disconnect the flex cables from the M2 Robot Controller Board a Lift the cable protector Figure 7 92 st wo oO Figure 7 92 Lift the cable protector b Lift up the small lever clamp on the back of the connector to release the flex cable Figure 7 93 on page 7 85 7 84 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi155 sovenneeestttttttttiit tee seaseaeaae Figure 7 93 Lift the lever clamp on the back of the connectors CAUTION This lever clamp is very fragile Lift it with a fingernail or similar small object c Repeat the above steps for the second cable connector d Slide the flex cables to the rear as in Figure 7 94 on page 7 86 Chap
617. use the library robot can read this bar code label it can check the branding of the physical modules against the branding of the firmware and GUI s This ticket is a defensive tool used to notify the user that there is a mismatch in the branding mechanisms The root cause of a mismatch can be manufacturing defects logistical errors shipping the wrong spare part or user errors such as moving parts between systems 5 36 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Detection Scenario At library power ON the robot attempts to scan all module bar code labels When the OID number on each label is read the embedded branding information is compared to persistent data on the system compact flash Root Causes 1 Various manufacturing defect errors mislabeling or part mix ups 2 Spare part logistics error where wrong module FRU or compact flash FRU is sent to a customer site 3 End users or Service personnel mixing and matching hardware from multiple systems of different branding in the field 4 Malicious intent where customers attempt to buy and combine hardware from different sources 5 Bar code reader is not scanning the labels correctly Possible FRU Replacement e Picker Assembly Resolution Perform DR040 Resolve Incompatible Module Branding on page 5 75 T082 Volume Serial Scanner Failure Description GUI Description The library volume serial scanner is not operating properly Exp
618. use unpredictable results Contacting IBM Technical Support In the USA Call 1 800 IBM_SERV 1 800 426 7378 Note Before calling complete all the steps in Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 6 45 l All other Countries Regions Visit http www ibm com l To open a Service Request online Under Support amp downloads click Open a l service request Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features Feature Minimum Firmware Levels Required LTO 5 Tape Drive Feature Code 8242 Library firmware must be at 587G GS003 or greater to support the Ultrium 5 drives If using the IBM Tape Device Driver or ITDT IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool ensure the minimum version required to support Ultrium 5 tape drives are installed on the host Ensure any host applications and software that use their own device drivers are at the minimum level required to support Ultrium 5 tape drives Limits on Downgrading Library Firmware If your library is running firmware version 600G or later you can only downgrade l library firmware to 410G or later If you need to downgrade to a version earlier than 410G contact IBM Technical Support Limits on Restoring a Saved Configuration If your library is running firmware version 600G or later you can restore a saved configuration that was created with only firmware version 410G or later If you need to restore a configuration created with a firmware versio
619. used by host system From the Operator Panel select Reports gt Library Configuration View the SCSI ID for the affected drive If the SCSI ID is different then expected you must either change the drive SCSI ID or reconfigure the host 4 If only one drive is failing on this SCSI bus go to step 5 If more than one drive is failing on this SCSI bus go to 6 5 Replace the following CRU e Drive sled If the problem is corrected return to the procedure that sent you here or go to End of Call on page 6 47 If the failure still exists go on to step 6 6 Verify that the SCSI cable from the host system to the first drive is connected 7 Disconnect the drive to drive SCSI cable from the first drive and replace with the terminator 8 Runa utility such as ITDT to determine whether you can communicate with the first drive If you cannot communicate with the drive perform Function e If the SCSI Wrap Test runs successfully replace the following SCSI terminator SCSI host to host cable Interposer if installed Drive to drive SCSI cable except for the first drive If the failure still exists it probably is caused by the host system hardware or software refer to the service documentation for the host system e If the SCSI Wrap Test fails or does not correct the problem replace the following Drive sled SCSI terminator If the problem still exists contact your next level of support e If the error
620. used by e the specific tape e the specific drive e the interaction of the tape and drive Troubleshooting Steps 1 Determine the specific cartridge and drive involved in the problem selecting the Details button Retry the operation with the same cartridge in the same drive If the retry attempt fails copy data to a new cartridge Restart the current operation using a different cartridge afFon If the problem remains unresolved contact Service DR045 Resolve Drive TapeAlert 5 6 Read Write Failure Problem A drive has detected a problem reading from or writing to a tape This problem may be caused by e the specific tape e the specific drive e the interaction of the tape and drive Chapter 5 Service Action Tickets Txxx and Diagnostic Resolutions DRxxx 5 77 Troubleshooting Steps 1 Determine the specific cartridge and drive involved in the problem selecting the Details button Retry the operation with the same cartridge in the same drive If the retry attempt fails try the operation to the same cartridge in a different drive If the cartridge fails in more than one drive retire the cartridge oe oy It the cartridge tests OK use a known good cartridge to test the drive by performing read write operations from a host or by using a drive specific utility Contact Service for information on a drive utility for your specific drive type 6 If the problem persists gather a drive log a
621. ush the gear rack down Ensure that the lock is not engaged in the hole in the frame In all the modules above the bottom module Verify that the gear racks are in the down position Pinch the gear rack locking mechanism H in Figure 7 18 on page 7 21 and push the gear rack down Ensure that the lock is not engaged in the hole in the frame Verify that there are no gaps in the gear racks between library units a77qs004 l Figure 7 19 Front and back gear racks 7 22 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Figure 7 20 Gear racks in the up and down positions a77qs005 To release the gear rack and move it down follow these steps 1 Engage the Y rails of each module in your library configuration Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened Figure 7 21 Placing gear rack in the Down position The front Y rail a77qs036 The Y rail this end up Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 23 A The rear Y rail g Squeeze here to release 2 From the front of the library open the I O station and access door of the 9U expansion module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go a77qs037 Figure 7 22 Releasing the Y rail Y rail in unlocked functional position 3 From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located
622. utions DRxxx 5 51 Root Causes 1 Damaged module terminator or module to module cable with bent or broken pins An intermittent door open condition disconnecting power from the robot A cable spool or connection problem A picker assembly hardware failure A Y carriage assembly connection problem A robot controller board hardware or software failure NO oP An LCB serial communication link failure Possible FRUs e Cable Spool e Robot Assembly replace entire unit Resolution Perform DR093 Resolve Robotics Communication Error on page 5 89 T128 Incompatible Robot Installation Description GUI Description The library control firmware detected that an incompatible robot is installed Explanation The library has an incompatible robot installed This may happen when a GA style Model 1 robot is replaced with the Model 2 robot or vice versa Detection Scenario Library firmware detects a change in robot model which is incompatible with the current library configuration Root Causes The robot was replaced with an incompatible robot type Possible FRUs e Robot Assembly Resolution Perform DR094 Resolve Incompatible Robot Installed on page 5 89 T129 Drive Sled Firmware Image Error Description GUI Description Drive sled firmware cannot be auto leveled due to a missing or corrupt drive sled firmware image Explanation During an attempt to autolevel th
623. ve Firmware Levels 6 Update the drive firmware if necessary 7 Vary all drives online from the host 8 If a new drive is installed in place of the drive that was removed it will be necessary that the host application be reconfigured to recognize the Vital Product Data VPD of the new drive This will prevent possible communication and backup application disruptions Note This does not need to be performed if Logical serial number addressing had been implemented at a prior date Library Control Blade or Compact Flash Card The Library Control Blade LCB manages the entire library including the Operator Panel and picker assembly It also runs system tests to ensure that the library is functioning properly The Compact Flash CF Card is housed on the LCB and contains the library firmware and vital product data VPD such as configuration settings Replacement of either the LCB or the CF requires the removal of the LCB CF Assembly from the library 7 44 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Important Before removing the LCB CF Assembly from the library ensure that you have performed Saving Restoring System Configuration on page 6 13 and that the saved file is available If the CF card is replaced you will need this file to reconfigure the library Following is a partial list of the configuration items that are saved e Current library firmware e Network settings IP Address Subnet Mask amp Gateway
624. vironment is for storage durations of up to six months 2 The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years 3 Local tape temperature in excess of 52 degC may cause permanent tape damage Disposing of Tape Cartridges Under the current rules of the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA regulation 40CFR261 the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as Appendix D Using Ultrium Drives D 17 non hazardous waste As such it may be disposed of in the same way as normal office trash These regulations are amended from time to time and you should review them at the time of disposal If your local state country non U S A or regional regulations are more restrictive than EPA 40CFR261 you must review them before you dispose of a cartridge Contact your account representative for information about the materials that are in the cartridge If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner you can erase the data on the cartridge by using a high energy ac degausser use a minimum of 4000 oersted peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies The tape should make two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each pass to achieve complete erasure Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic field regions offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in one pass for higher throughput Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable If y
625. w ibm com storage Ito e Ultrium Tape Drive to copy and read a drive dump use Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump on page D 32 2 Power the tape drive OFF and ON then retry the operation that produced the error The error code clears when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode 3 If the problem persists download new firmware and retry the operation if new firmware is not available replace the drive Cc Tape drive hardware problem The drive determined that a tape path or read write error occurred To prevent damage to the drive or tape the tape drive will not allow you to insert a cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected The error code may clear when you cycle power to the tape drive or place it in maintenance mode If the problem persists replace the drive Note Copy the drive dump to flash memory before returning the drive For instructions refer to Function Code 5 Copy Drive Dump on page D 32 c Tape drive or media error The tape drive determined that an error occurred but it cannot isolate oO the error to faulty hardware or to the tape cartridge Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type e Ultrium 1 tape cartridges are not supported in Ultrium 4 tape drives Drive will not accept an expired Cleaning Cartridge e Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in Maintenance Mode e Drive will not write over existing datasets on a WORM cartridge Ensu
626. w the library system time to be changed but the time will not be set correctly following a power cycle or reboot Detection Scenario Main library firmware determined that setting the hardware clock failed though the system time may appear to have been set correctly Root Cause The hardware clock on the LCB has failed Possible CRUs LCB Resolution Perform DR098 Resolve Hardware Clock Failure on page 5 90 T133 Barcode Label Mapping Failure Description GUI Description The library control firmware cannot map barcode labels to respective slots during an inventory operation Explanation The library is attempting to map barcode labels during inventory and is being prevented from doing so because one or more barcode labels are improperly attached or a magazine is improperly seated installed Detection Scenario The library cannot complete an inventory and there are no indications of hardware failure Root Causes Obstructions in the view path of the robot Imager Improper installation of magazine s Improper barcode label on tape cartridges moO Ns User interface operations were being performed while the robot was scanning barcode labels Resolution Perform DR099 Resolve Barcode Label Mapping on page 5 90 T134 Barcode Scanner Malfunction Description GUI Description The library barcode scanner cannot read any barcode labels Explanation The b
627. wap the drives b If the problem stays with the suspect drive replace the drive sled c If the problem moves to the new drive replace the SAS cable or interposer d If the problem still exists after performing the above procedures suspect a host system hardware or software problem Refer to the service documentation for the host system e Go to End of Call on page 6 47 If another SAS drive is not available to swap replace the SAS cable or interposer If the problem still exists replace the drive sled If this does not fix the problem suspect that the problem is caused by host system hardware or software Refer to the service documentation for the host system Go to End of Call on page 6 47 TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information Fixing an Intermittent Error with One Drive on a SAS Connection 1 Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on the drive Update the firmware if necessary Required library firmware and drive firmware can be downloaded by visiting http www ibm com storage LTO 2 Check host error logs to determine if a specific cartridge is causing the problem Replace the cartridge that is listed as being faulty 3 Check that the SAS cable length does not exceed the 5 5 meters plus the short length of an interposer if used allowed Try a shorter cable if possible to see if it makes any difference 4 If the intermittent failure still occurs replace the drive sled Se
628. will lose the dump contents Using the ITDT SCSI Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool on page 6 28 Contact your next level of support to determine if they can use this dump go to End of Call on page kar 5 Ensure that the SCSI cables are plugged in and tightened 6 Ensure that the drive SCSI address is the same as the SCSI address being used by host system From the Operator Panel select Reports gt Library Configuration View the SCSI ID for the affected drive If the SCSI ID is different then expected you must either change the drive SCSI ID or reconfigure the host 7 Perform Diagnostic and Maintenance Functions on page D 26 a Ifthe test fails replace the Obtain a drive dump see e Drive sled e SCSI terminator b If the test runs successfully replace the e SCSI terminator e SCSI host to drive cable e Interposer if installed If the failure still exists it probably is caused by the host system hardware or software Refer to the service documentation for the host system Fixing a Solid Error with Multiple Drives on a SCSI Bus 1 Verify that the power is ON to the drives a Verify that the library is powered ON D 52 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information b Verify that all the circuit protectors on all Power Supplies are ON 2 Verify that the SCSI cables are plugged in and tightened 3 Ensure that the drive SCSI address is the same as the SCSI address being
629. will not load a cartridge into one of these slots via host or Operator Panel commands The slots themselves will not be presented as usable in logical libraries Although the library cannot reliably get and put tapes from these storage locations the library can still discover volume serial labeled tapes in these slots during normal inventory operations Because these slots are inaccessible they are not part of the library s inventory and the ticket WILL NOT list their locations in the details It will simply list None Detection Scenario Root Causes In libraries of 23U or greater the library discovers a bar code labeled cartridge in the top slot of either column 4 or 5 during inventory A user manually places a cartridge in the top slot of either column 4 or 5 during inventory in a library that is at least 23U or greater Possible CRU Replacements Cartridge Resolution Perform DR050 Resolve Invalid Tape Location on page 5 79 5 40 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information T087 Invalid Library SN Label Warning Description GUI Description The library s serial number barcode label cannot be read by the robot but the library is able to initialize and continue operation Explanation The library logic learns the serial number of the system by reading an internal serial number label The service tag is located on the same label as the serial number This is done at first bootup from a clear
630. y tests every configured key server The default test interval is four hours The library generates a RAS ticket if there are problems Periodic Key Path Diagnostics is disabled by default It is recommended that you leave Periodic Key Path Diagnostics disabled unless network interruptions are a common cause of encryption failures at your site Attention Running Periodic Key Path Diagnostics may cause an increase in RAS tickets if tests are skipped due to tape drives being unavailable for a configurable number of consecutive test intervals To reduce the occurrences of RAS tickets you can specify the number of consecutive test intervals required to generate a RAS ticket to a higher number or you can set the library to never generate a RAS ticket for missed test intervals To enable Periodic Key Path Diagnostics 1 From the web user interface select Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics 2 Select Enable Periodic Key Path Diagnostics 3 Select a test interval from the Test Interval list 4 Check Enable Test Delay Reporting if you want the library to generate a RAS ticket to inform you that the test could not be performed within the specified number of test intervals TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e If you check Enable Test Delay Reporting from the Test Delay Reporting Threshold list select the number of consecutive missed test intervals that are required before the library generates a RAS ticket You can selec
631. y the link out of the hole in the bottom flap Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 39 a66mi116 Figure 7 42 I O Safety Flap Link 5 Push the upper right hand corner of the bottom flap to the left to remove the pivot pin H in Figure 7 43 from the pivot hole H in Figure 7 43 a66mi115 Figure 7 43 I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin 6 Move the bottom flap to the right to remove the pivot pin E in Figure 7 44 lon page 7 41 from the pivot hole J in Figure 7 44 on page 7 41 The bottom flap can now be removed from the library 7 40 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information a66mi113 Figure 7 44 I O Safety Flap Pivot Pin Removed 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 above to remove the top flap from the library Replacing the I O Station Safety Flap in an Expansion Module 9U Perform Removing the I O Station Safety Flap from an Expansion Module 9U in the reverse order When installing the bottom flap position the spring Ef in Figure 7 45 as shown a66mi112 Figure 7 45 I O Station Safety Flap Bottom Spring position Chapter 7 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Procedures 7 41 Rear Panel Components The library has the following rear panel customer replaceable units CRUs e Drive Sled e Library Control Blade LCB e Library Power Supply Drive Sled Tape drives mounted in sleds are installed into tape drive slots in the rear of the library R
632. y user specifically for this purpose Kerberos Kerberos Authentication is a standard RFC 1510 third party authentication protocol that provides end to end security for distributed computing environments Note The web client login screen gives the user a choice between using local authentication or LDAP authentication If LDAP authentication is selected the user is prompted for the LDAP domain The Operator Panel login screen gives the user the choice between using Local authentication and Remote authentication when LDAP access is enabled If LDAP access is disabled the Remote authentication option does not appear on the login screen With Local authentication the user name and password are stored on the library With LDAP authentication the user name and password are stored on a server Kerberos requires LDAP information but LDAP users are not required to use Kerberos Specifications Table 2 6 Physical specifications for the library Physical Measurement Specification 5U control module 9U expansion module 44 45 cm 17 5 in 44 45 cm 17 5 in 76 83 cm 30 25 in 76 83 cm 30 25 in Height 21 87 cm 8 61 in 40 0 cm 15 75 in Table 2 7 Library component weight Component Weight 4 082 kg 9 0 Ibs Power supply 1 814 kg 4 0 Ibs Robotics 2 041 kg 4 5 Ibs 5U control module chassis empty 21 55 kg 47 5 lbs 9U expansion module chassis empty 29 48 kg
633. you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building e Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet When possible restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it If this configuration is not known you must do the following Remove all devices in the 32U position and above Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet Ensure that there are no empty U levels between devices installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U level e If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets detach the rack cabinet from the suite e Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards e Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet e Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2032 mm 30 x 80 in Ensure that all devices shelves drawers doors and cables are secure e Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position e Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during movement e Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees e Once the rack cabinet is in the new location do the following Lower the four leveling pads Install stabil
634. your body 6 4 153310 Tape Library Maintenance Information e Keep the work area free of non conducting materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam packing e Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly e Avoid touching pins wires or circuitry e Use conductive field service tools Service Menus The Service login gives service personnel access to troubleshooting tools To access the service functions log into the Operator Panel using your service name and password When logged into the Operator Panel as Service there are 2 additional items available under the Tools menu They are Factory Defaults and Library Tests Logging in with Service Privileges To log in with service privileges 1 Access the Logon window of the Operator Panel 2 Type your service name service and password ser001 in the appropriate fields 3 Click OK The service functions available on the Service menu are also available on the Tools gt Service menu Admin and Service users have access to the same service functions on the Tools gt Service menu Additional Tools menus available to the Service login are Factory Defaults and Library Tests These Tools menus are not available to the Admin login The Service Library menu on the Web User Interface includes additional functions for capturing logs viewing updating library and drive firmware and executing Key Path D

TS3310 Tape Library Maintenance Information

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents